MERLIN LEGEND Communications System

MERLIN LEGEND®
Communications System
Release 5.0
Feature Reference
555-650-110
Comcode 108005794
Issue 1
June 1997
Copyright © 1997, Lucent Technologies
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Document 555-650-110
Comcode 108005794
Issue 1
June 1997
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is
subject to change. See Appendix A, “Customer Support Information,” for important information.
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security
Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party, for example, persons other than your company’s
employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s behalf. Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your
telecommunications system, and if toll fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services.
You and your System Manager are responsible for the security of your system, such as programming and configuring your equipment to prevent
unauthorized use. The System Manager is also responsible for reading all installation, instruction, and system programming documents provided
with this product in order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk.
Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication
services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use. For important information regarding your system and toll fraud, see Appendix A, “Customer Support Information.”
Federal Communications Commission Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. For further FCC information, see Appendix A, “Customer
Support Information.”
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
Le Présent Appareil Numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A
préscrites dans le règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.
Trademarks
5ESS, AUDIX, DEFINITY, HackerTracker, CONVERSANT, Lucent Technologies Attendant, Fax Attendant System, MERLIN, MERLIN
LEGEND, MERLIN MAIL, MERLIN PFC, MLX-10, MLX-10D, MLX-10DP, MLX-16DP, MLX-20L, MLX-28D, PassageWay, PARTNER,
and Voice Power are registered trademarks and 4ESS, ACCULINK, Intuity, Lucent Technologies, MLX-5, MLX-5D, and ExpressRoute 1000 are
trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the U.S. and other countries. NetPROTECT is a service mark of Lucent Technologies in the U.S. and other
countries.
AT&T, MEGACOM, ACCUNET, Magic on Hold, and MultiQuest are registered trademarks of AT&T.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
NORTEL is a registered trademark and DMS a trademark of Northern Telecom.
MCI, Prism, and Vnet are registered trademarks of MCI Communications, Inc.
Pipeline is a trademark of Ascend Communications, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Macintosh and Apple are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Ordering Information
Call:
Lucent Technologies Fulfillment Center
Voice 1 800 457-1235 International Voice 765 361-5353
Fax 1 800 457-1764 International Fax 765 361-5355
Write:
Lucent Technologies Fulfillment Center
P.O. Box 4100
Crawfordsville, IN 47933
Order:
Document No. Lucent Technologies 555-650-110, Issue 1, June 1997, Comcode: 108005794
For more information about Lucent Technologies documents, refer to the section entitled ‘‘Related Documents’’ on page -xxxi.
Support Telephone Number
In the continental U.S., Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at
1 800 628-2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
Consultation charges may apply. Outside the continental U.S., contact your local Lucent Technologies authorized representative.
Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention
If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance, call BCS National Service Assistance Center at
1 800 628-2888.
Warranty
Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to “Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability” in Appendix A,
“Customer Support Information.”
Heritage Statement
Lucent Technologies—formed as a result of AT&T’s planned restructuring—designs, builds and delivers a wide range of public and private
networks, communications systems and software, consumer and business telephone systems, and microelectronic components. The
world-renowned Bell Laboratories is the research and development arm for the company.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Contents
Page iii
Contents
Contents
iii
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ix
New Features and Enhancements
xi
■
Release 4.1 Enhancements
xi
■
Release 4.2 Enhancements
xiii
■
Release 5.0 Enhancements
xv
Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements
xxi
■
Release 3.1 Enhancements
xxi
■
Release 4.0 Enhancements
xxiii
About This Book
xxvii
■
Intended Audience
xxvii
■
How to Use This Book
xxvii
■
Terms and Conventions Used
xxix
■
Security
xxx
■
Related Documents
xxxi
■
How to Comment on This Book
xxxii
Features
1
■
Index of Feature Names
2
■
Index to Features by Activity
14
■
Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry
25
■
Alarm
30
■
Alarm Clock
32
■
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
34
■
Authorization Code
40
■
Auto Answer All
45
■
Auto Answer Intercom
48
■
Auto Dial
50
■
Automatic Line Selection and
Ringing/Idle Line Preference
56
■
Automatic Maintenance Busy
62
■
Automatic Route Selection
63
■
Barge-In
78
■
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
82
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Contents
Page iv
■
Call Waiting
92
■
Callback
97
■
Caller ID
105
■
Calling Restrictions
110
■
Camp-On
117
■
Centrex Operation
120
■
Conference
129
■
Coverage
139
■
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
173
■
Digital Data Calls
183
■
Direct-Line Console
191
■
Direct Station Selector: MLX
199
■
Direct Voice Mail
215
■
Directories
218
■
Display
225
■
Do Not Disturb
251
■
Extension Status
256
■
Fax Extension
262
■
Forward and Follow Me
265
■
Group Calling
281
■
Headset Options
305
■
Hold
312
■
HotLine
320
■
Inside Dial Tone
324
■
Inspect
325
■
Integrated Administration
328
■
Labeling
360
■
Language Choice
364
■
Last Number Dial
368
■
Line Request
372
■
Messaging
374
■
Microphone Disable
386
■
Multi-Function Module
387
■
Music On Hold
395
■
Night Service
398
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Contents
Page v
A
■
Paging
408
■
Park
416
■
Personal Lines
421
■
Pickup
429
■
Pools
435
■
Power-Failure Transfer
440
■
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
441
■
Privacy
477
■
Programming
480
■
Queued Call Console (QCC)
488
■
Recall/Timed Flash
511
■
Reminder Service
518
■
Remote Access
522
■
Ringing Options
533
■
Saved Number Dial
541
■
Second Dial Tone Timer
545
■
Signal/Notify
547
■
Speed Dial
550
■
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
557
■
System Access/Intercom Buttons
573
■
System Renumbering
583
■
Timer
595
■
Toll Type
596
■
Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling
598
■
Transfer
601
■
Voice Announce to Busy
615
■
Volume
618
Customer Support Information
A–1
■
Support Telephone Number
A–1
■
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Electromagnetic
Interference Information
A–1
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)
Interference Information
A–2
■
FCC Notification and Repair Information
A–2
■
Installation and Operational Procedures
A–3
■
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Contents
Page vi
■
DOC Notification and Repair Information
A–5
■
Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des
Communications du Canada et la réparation
A–6
■
Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud
A–8
■
Toll Fraud Prevention
A–9
■
Other Security Hints
A–14
■
Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability
A–19
■
Remote Administration and Maintenance
A–20
B
Features and Planning Forms
B–1
C
System Features
C–1
D
General Feature Use and Telephone Programming
D–1
■
General Feature Use Information
D–1
■
Telephone and Operator Features
D–3
■
Telephone Programming
D–13
E
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
E–1
F
Sample Reports
F–1
■
System Information Report
F–6
■
Dial Plan Report
F–8
■
Label Information Report
F–11
■
Tie Trunk Information Report
F–12
■
DID Trunk Information Report
F–13
■
GS/LS Trunk Information Report
F–14
■
General Trunk Information Report
F–15
■
DS1 Information Report
F–16
■
PRI Information Report
F–17
■
Remote Access (DISA) Information Report
F–19
■
Operator Information Report
F–20
■
Allowed Lists Report
F–22
■
Access to Allowed Lists Report
F–23
■
Disallowed Lists Report
F–24
■
Access to Disallowed Lists Report
F–25
■
Automatic Route Selection Report
F–26
■
Extension Directory Report
F–27
■
System Directory Report
F–28
■
Group Paging Report
F–29
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Contents
Page vii
■
Extension Information Report
F–30
■
Group Coverage Information Report
F–32
■
Direct Group Calling Information Report
F–33
■
Night Service Information Report
F–34
■
Group Call Pickup Report
F–35
■
Error Log Report
F–36
■
Authorization Code Information Report
F–37
■
BRI Information Report
F–38
■
Switch 56 Data Information Report
F–39
G
Button Diagrams
G–1
H
Programming Special Characters
H–1
I
■
Single-Line Telephones
H–1
■
Analog Multiline Telephones
H–2
■
MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones
H–3
■
MLX Display Telephones
H–4
Applications
I–1
■
Organization of Descriptions
I–3
■
System Support for Applications
I–3
■
Supported Printers
I–5
■
PassageWay Direct Connection Solution
I–5
■
Voice Messaging Systems
I–7
■
MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND MAIL
I–11
■
Lucent Technologies Attendant
I–18
■
Call Accounting System
I–21
■
Call Accounting Terminal
I–25
■
Call Management System
I–28
■
MERLIN LEGEND Reporter
I–31
■
System Programming and Maintenance
I–37
■
Integrated Solution II
I–39
■
Integrated Solution III
I–45
■
Intuity
I–53
■
Group IV Fax
I–54
■
MERLIN PFC Telephone
I–55
■
Intuity CONVERSANT
I–58
■
Picasso Still-Image Phone
I–59
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Contents
Page viii
■
Videoconferencing
I–60
■
ExpressRoute 1000
I–69
■
Ascend Pipeline 25-Px
I–72
Index
IN–1
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Page ix
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.
When installing telephone equipment, always follow basic safety precautions to
reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons, including:
■
Read and understand all instructions.
■
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product.
■
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
■
Never install a telephone jack in a wet location unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
■
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone
wiring has been disconnected at the network interface.
■
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
■
Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power
units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit.
■
Use only Lucent Technologies-recommended/approved MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System accessories.
■
If equipment connected to the analog extension modules (008, 408, 408
GS/LS) or to the MLX telephone modules (008 MLX, 408 GS/LS-MLX) is
to be used for in-range out-of-building (IROB) applications, IROB
protectors are required.
■
Do not install this product near water, for example, in a wet basement
location.
■
Do not overload wall outlets, as this can result in the risk of fire or electrical
shock.
■
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is equipped with a 3-wire
grounding-type plug with a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only into a
grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the obsolete
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug.
0
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Page x
■
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a
supplementary ground.
■
Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow
anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the
cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
■
Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation. To
protect this equipment from overheating, do not block these openings.
■
Never push objects of any kind into this product through module openings
or expansion slots, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short
out parts, which could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock. Never spill
liquid of any kind on this product.
■
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Use a damp cloth
for cleaning. Do not use cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
■
Auxiliary equipment includes answering machines, alerts, modems, and
fax machines. To connect one of these devices, you must first have a
Multi-Function Module (MFM).
■
Do not operate telephones if chemical gas leakage is suspected in the
area. Use telephones located in some other safe area to report the trouble.
!
WARNING:
■
For your personal safety, DO NOT install an MFM yourself.
■
ONLY an authorized technician or dealer representative shall install, set
options, or repair an MFM.
■
To eliminate the risk of personal injury due to electrical shock, DO NOT
attempt to install or remove an MFM from your MLX telephone. Opening
or removing the module cover of your telephone may expose you to
dangerous voltages.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 4.1 Enhancements
Page xi
New Features and Enhancements 0
Release 4.1 Enhancements
0
Release 4.1 includes all Release 4.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below. There are no hardware changes in Release 4.1.
Coverage Timers Programmed for
Individual Extensions
0
Beginning with Release 4.1, coverage timers, which control the duration of the
delay before calls are sent to each level of coverage, are changed as follows:
■
The Group Coverage Ring Delay (1–9 rings) is programmed on individual
extensions and replaces the Coverage Delay Interval programmed
systemwide in previous releases.
■
The Primary Cover Ring Delay (1–6 rings) and Secondary Cover Ring
Delay (1–6 rings), programmed on individual extensions, replace the Delay
Ring Interval programmed systemwide in previous releases.
These enhancements allow the system manager to customize coverage call
delivery to match individual extensions’ call-handling requirements.
Night Service with Coverage Control
0
Beginning with Release 4.1, a system manager can enable the Night Service
Coverage Control option to automatically control the status of telephones
programmed with Coverage VMS (voice messaging system) Off buttons,
according to Night Service status.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 4.1 Enhancements
Page xii
When Coverage Control is enabled and the MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System is put into Night Service, all programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons are
automatically turned off (LED is unlit) and all eligible outside calls are sent to the
assigned voice messaging system calling group with normal ringing delay. When
Night Service is deactivated during the day, all programmed Coverage VMS Off
buttons are automatically turned on (LED is lit) and voice mail coverage is
disabled for outside calls.
Users can override the Coverage VMS Off button status at any time by pressing
the programmed Coverage VMS Off button to turn the LED on or off.
Night Service Group Line Assignment
0
Beginning with Release 4.1, a system manager can assign lines to Night Service
groups to control handling of after-hours calls received on individual lines. This
capability replaces the automatic assignment to Night Service groups of only
those lines that ring on the Night Service operator console. To receive Night
Service treatment, an outside line must be assigned to a Night Service group.
With this enhancement, Night Service can be activated and deactivated on lines
that do not appear on operator consoles (for example, personal lines), and lines
appearing at operator positions can be excluded from Night Service.
Forward on Busy
0
Beginning with Release 4.1, the Forward, Follow Me, and Remote Call Forward
features are enhanced to remove the requirement that a call be ringing at an
extension before it can be forwarded. With the Forward on Busy enhancement, a
call to an extension with no available SA (System Access) or ICOM (Intercom)
buttons is forwarded immediately to the programmed destination, preventing the
caller from hearing a busy signal from the intended call recipient’s extension.
Maintenance Testing for BRI Facilities that Are
Part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs)
0
Beginning with Release 4.1, the NI-1 BRI (National Integrated Services Digital
Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include
testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs).
The NI-1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance
personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include a 800
NI-BRI module. Technicians use the tool during system installation and
maintenance to test the functionality of the BRI lines and to report analyzed
results.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 4.2 Enhancements
Release 4.2 Enhancements
Page xiii
0
Release 4.2 includes all Release 4.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below. There are no hardware changes for Release 4.2.
Additional Network Switch and Services Options
for ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
0
Release 4.2 of the system supports connectivity to MCI® or local exchange
carrier (LEC) PRI services and to the following central office switch types (in
addition to the 4ESS™ and 5ESS® switch types that carry for AT&T® Switched
Network services):
■
NORTEL® DMS™-100 BCS 36 for local exchange carrier services
■
NORTEL DMS-250 generic MCI07 serving the MCI network
■
Digital Switch Corporation DEX600E generic 500-39.30 serving the MCI
network
Beginning with Release 4.2, the following MCI PRI and PRI local exchange carrier
(LEC) services (along with AT&T Switched Network Services) can be provided to
users of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System:
■
MCI Toll Services for DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type:
— MCI Prism® service for domestic outgoing long-distance and
international voice calls; for domestic outgoing 56-kbps restricted,
64-kbps unrestricted, and 64-kbps restricted circuit-switched data calls
— MCI VNet® service for incoming and outgoing domestic and voice calls;
for 56-kbps restricted, 64-kbps restricted, and 64-kbps unrestricted
circuit-switched data calls
— MCI 800 for domestic, toll-free, incoming voice calls
— MCI 900 service numbers
■
LEC services for DMS-100 switch types:
— DMS Virtual Private Network service for calls between the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System and another communications
system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System)
— DMS INWATS (Inward Wide Area Telephone Service) for domestic
toll-free incoming voice calls
— DMS OUTWATS (Outward Wide Area Telephone Service) for domestic
outgoing long-distance voice calls
— DMS FX (foreign exchange) to provide local call rating for calls from the
local exchange to the area serviced by the foreign exchange
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 4.2 Enhancements
Page xiv
— DMS tie trunk service to provide private exchange call rating for calls
placed on a dedicated central office facility between the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System and another communications
system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System)
Improvements to Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) and Support for MERLIN
LEGEND Reporter Application
0
The SMDR feature is enhanced to provide more details about calling group agent
activities and to help system managers assess the effectiveness of call centers in
terms of both agent performance and the adequacy of facilities to handle inbound
calls. These improvements apply to calling groups that are programmed as Auto
Login or Auto Logout type. The SMDR and MERLIN LEGEND Reporter features
listed are programmable:
■
TALK Field. For Auto Login and Auto Logout calling groups, the TALK field
records the amount of time a calling group agent spends on a call.
■
DUR. (DURATION) Field. For Auto Login and Auto Logout calling groups,
call timing begins when a call arrives at the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System and not after a preset number of seconds. Call
timing ends when the call is disconnected because either the caller or the
agent hangs up. This allows the system manager to determine how long a
caller waited for an agent’s attention.
■
Coding of Calls on Reports. An asterisk (*) appears in the call record
when:
— A call is not answered by an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group
agent and is abandoned while waiting for an agent.
— The call is answered by someone who is not a member of an Auto Login
or Auto Logout calling group.
An exclamation point (!) signals that an Auto Login or Auto Logout agent
handled a call that was answered by someone who was not a member of
that Auto Login or Auto Logout group. An ampersand (&) in the call record
indicates that the group’s overflow receiver answered the call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 5.0 Enhancements
MERLIN LEGEND Reporter
Page xv
0
MERLIN LEGEND Reporter provides basic call accounting system reports for all
incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout type calling groups. MERLIN
LEGEND Reporter assists in determining the effectiveness of calling group
agents, assessing the level of service provided to callers, and ascertaining
whether adequate incoming phone lines and agents are available to handle
peak-call load.
MERLIN LEGEND Reporter support is provided via a programmable option. The
default is Off, in which case the Release 4.0 SMDR reports are available. If the
option is set to On, the following new reports are provided:
■
Organization Detail Report
■
Organization Summary and Trends Report
■
Selection Detail Report
■
Account Code Report
■
Traffic Report
■
Extension Summary Report
■
Data Report
■
Talk and Queue Time Distribution Report
■
Time of Day Report
■
ICLID Call Distribution Report
■
Facility Grade of Service Report
Maintenance Enhancements
0
Change to Permanent Error Alarm
0
Beginning with Release 4.2, the most recent permanent error alarm is not shown
on the System Error Log menu screen but is available as an option from that
screen. For details, refer to the Maintenance section of the technician guide,
Installation, Programming, and Maintenance.
Enhanced Extension Information Report
0
Beginning with Release 4.2, the Extension Information Report includes the
Extension Status (ESS) and supervisory mode of each extension.
Release 5.0 Enhancements
0
Release 5.0 includes all Release 4.2 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 5.0 Enhancements
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Page xvi
0
Beginning with Release 5.0, a PassageWay® Telephony Services CTI link from
the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell®
NetWare® software allows Lucent Technologies-certified telephony applications
to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone (BIS only) operations.
The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX
module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and ISDN
link interface card plugged into the customer’s server. The feature is available for
Hybrid/PBX mode systems only.
NOTES:
1. The NetWare server software version must be 3.12, 4.1, or 4.11.
2. The 008 MLX and 408 MLX modules must have firmware vintage other
than 29. If the module has firmware 29, programming a CTI link on the
module is prevented. An earlier or later vintage firmware is supported.
0
Basic Call Control
A CTI link application on a user’s computer can assume basic call control of the
user’s analog multiline or MLX telephone’s SA buttons. Basic call control includes:
■
Answering calls arriving on an SA button
■
Making calls from an SA button
■
Hanging up calls
■
Hold and retrieving a call on hold at the user’s extension
NOTE:
Transfer and 3-way conference, when handled through a CTI link
application, provide the original caller’s calling number information or
other information to the transfer receiver or new conference
participant, if the user has screen-pop capability.
Screen Pop
0
Screen pop occurs when the calling number, called number, or other user-defined
identifier (such as account code that a voice-response unit prompts the caller to
dial) is used to display a screen associated with the far-end party. For example,
Caller ID services can be used to support screen pop on a system that includes a
CTI link; using the calling party number as a database key code, information
about a caller automatically appears on the user’s computer screen when the call
arrives at the extension. Depending on the application, screen pop may be
available for calls that arrive on line buttons other than SA buttons and/or calls
that are answered manually at the telephone rather than by the application.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 5.0 Enhancements
Page xvii
Screen pop can occur on incoming calls from the following sources:
■
Calling group distribution
■
ISDN PRI Routing by Dial Plan
■
An extension on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
■
Remote access
NOTE:
In the case of remote access calls, the only information that the
application can collect about the caller is the remote telephone
number.
■
A transfer of a call that was answered by a voice response unit
■
A transfer, redirection, or conference of a call that was answered at a DLC
or at a QCC
NOTES:
1. DLCs (Direct-Line Consoles) may use CTI applications. If they do, they
perform the same way as other extensions. A DLC assigned to use a
CTI link application is a monitored DLC. When a DLC is a regular
operator console and is not using a CTI link extension, it is
unmonitored.
2. Calls to a QCC or unmonitored DLC do not initiate screen pop at the
operator position, but when an operator directs a call to an extension
using a CTI application, caller information does initiate screen pop. If
the DLC is unmonitored, screen pops can occur after the DLC releases
the call.
3. Calls transferred from Cover buttons on unmonitored DLCs do not
initiate screen pop at the destination extension.
HotLine Feature
0
The Release 5.0 HotLine feature is designed for retail sales, catalogue sales, and
other types of businesses and organizations and is available in all three modes of
system operation. It allows a system manager to program a single-line telephone
extension connected to an 008 OPT, 012, or 016 module as a HotLine. When a
user lifts the handset at the HotLine extension, the telephone automatically dials
the inside extension or outside telephone number programmed as the first
Personal Speed Dial number (code #01) for the extension. The system does not
permit calls to be transferred, put on hold, or conferenced. (A user can press the
telephone’s Hold button, if it has one, to put a call on local hold, but the call
cannot be redirected in any way. Switchhook flashes are ignored.)
Personal Speed Dial codes can be programmed from the extension prior to
HotLine assignment (a system programming function). Alternatively, a Personal
Speed Dial code can be programmed from the single-line telephone after HotLine
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 5.0 Enhancements
Page xviii
operation is assigned. However, because of security considerations, this is a
one-time opportunity. Once the Personal Speed Dial number is programmed, any
changes to it or any other extension programming must be performed using
centralized telephone programming.
Any type of inside or outside line that is normally available to a single-line
telephone can be assigned to a HotLine extension. Generally, the HotLine
telephone does not receive calls, and its lines should be set to No Ring.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
If a HotLine extension accesses a loop-start line, that line should provide
reliable disconnect and be programmed for reliable disconnect. Otherwise,
a user at the extension may be able to stay on the line after a call is
completed and then make a toll call.
Group Calling Enhancements
0
Release 5.0 and later systems include Group Calling features that enhance group
calling operations.
Most Idle Hunt Type
0
In addition to the Circular (factory setting) and Linear hunt types supported in
earlier releases, a third hunt type distributes calling group calls in an order based
on which agent has waited the longest since transferring or hanging up on an
incoming calling group call. For some applications, this hunt type is more efficient
than the circular type because it takes into account the varying duration of calls.
The system distributes calls based on when an agent last completed a call, not on
when he or she last received one. This hunting method ignores non-calling group
calls. For example, if an agent transfers a call that arrived on a line not assigned
to the calling group, the calling group member’s most-idle status is unaffected.
Delay Announcement Devices
0
The system manager can designate as many as ten primary delay announcement
devices per group rather than the single device for each group that is available in
Release 4.2 and earlier systems. Furthermore, an additional secondary delay
announcement device can be specified, for a total of ten primary device
extensions and one secondary device extension per group.
A primary delay announcement device operates in the same fashion as a single
delay announcement device, playing once, as soon as it is available, for the caller
who has waited the longest for a calling group agent and has not heard a primary
delay announcement. If a secondary announcement device is used, it can use the
factory setting, which plays the announcement once, or it can be set to repeat the
announcement after a certain amount of time. The system manager programs the
time (0–900 seconds) between announcements. This setting controls both the
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 5.0 Enhancements
Page xix
interval between primary and secondary announcements and the interval
between repetitions of the secondary announcement if it is set to repeat.
The primary and secondary announcement options, when used together, allow an
initial message to play for callers, followed by a repeating announcement that, for
example, urges callers to stay on the line and wait for a calling group member.
Two or more groups may share an announcement device.
A primary delay announcement device can be administered as a secondary delay
announcement device.
Enhanced Calls-in-Queue Alarm Thresholds
0
Three Calls-in-Queue Alarm thresholds can be set to more clearly indicate the
real-time status of the calls waiting in the queue according to the behavior of
programmed Calls-in-Queue Alarm buttons. In earlier releases, only one
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold setting is available to activate the LEDs at
programmed Calls-in-Queue Alarm buttons for a calling group.
Using all three levels, the system manager sets Threshold 3 to the highest value,
Threshold 2 to a middle value, and Threshold 1 to the lowest value. A
Calls-in-Queue Alarm button indicates the severity of the alarm condition in the
following ways:
■
If the number of waiting calls is less than the value programmed for
Threshold 1 or drops below that level, the LED is unlit.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 1
value but less than the Threshold 2 value, the LED flashes.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 2
value but less than the value for Threshold 3, the LED winks.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value,
Threshold 3, the LED lights steadily.
NOTE:
A DSS (Direct Station Selector) button that is used as a
Calls-in-Queue Alarm button can only indicate two threshold levels,
either by flashing or by lighting steadily. If a calling group must use
this type of Calls-in-Queue Alarm button, only two threshold levels
should be programmed.
If all three thresholds are set to the same value, the result is one threshold only
with LED state either off or on (steady). If two values are the same, then the result
is two alarm levels (flash, steady). The factory setting is one call for all three
thresholds with LED states of off and steady.
An external alert only signals when the number of calls in the queue meets or
exceeds the programmed Threshold 3 value.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
New Features and Enhancements
Release 5.0 Enhancements
MLX-5 and MLX-5D Telephones
Page xx
0
MLX-5™ nondisplay and MLX-5D™ display telephones are compatible with all
system releases. The display telephone includes a 2-line by 24-character display,
and both telephones come with 5 line buttons. In systems prior to Release 5.0, the
MLX-5 and MLX-5D telephones are treated as MLX-10 and MLX-10D telephones
respectively. As of Release 5.0, the system recognizes the MLX-5 and MLX-5D
telephones as 5-button telephones.
If these telephones are connected to communications system releases prior to 5.0
they are recognized by the communications system as 10-button telephones.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements
Release 3.1 Enhancements
Page xxi
Prior Releases: Features and
Enhancements
0
Release 3.1 Enhancements
0
Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below.
Call Restriction Checking for Star Codes
0
Beginning with Release 3.1, a system manager can add star (*) codes to Allowed
and Disallowed Lists to help prevent toll fraud. Star codes, typically dialed before
an outgoing call, enable telephone users to obtain special services provided by
the central office (CO). For example, in many areas, a telephone user can dial *67
before a telephone number to disable central office-supplied caller identification at
the receiving party’s telephone. You must contract with your telephone service
provider to have these codes activated.
When users dial star codes, the system’s calling restrictions determine whether
the codes are allowed. If they are allowed, the system’s calling restrictions are
reset and the remaining digits that the users dial are checked against the calling
restrictions.
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Set for Each Extension 0
This enhancement to the Transfer feature enables the system manager to allow or
disallow trunk-to-trunk transfer on a per-extension basis. In Release 3.1 and later
systems, the default setting for all extensions is restricted.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements
Release 3.1 Enhancements
Programmable Second Dial Tone Timer
Page xxii
0
The system manager can assign a second dial tone timer to lines/trunks, in order
to help prevent toll fraud (for example, when star codes are used). After receiving
certain digits dialed by a user, the CO may provide a second dial tone, prompting
the user to enter more digits. If this second dial tone is delayed, and the user dials
digits before the CO provides the second dial tone, there is a risk of toll fraud or
misrouting the call. The second dial tone timer enables the system manager to
make sure that the CO is ready to receive more digits from the caller.
Security Enhancements
0
The sections below outside security measures that are implemented in Release
3.1 and later systems.
Disallowed List Including Numbers Often
Associated with Toll Fraud
0
A factory-set Disallowed List 7 contains default entries, which are numbers
frequently associated with toll fraud. By default, Disallowed List 7 is automatically
assigned to both generic and integrated VMI (voice messaging interface) ports
used by voice messaging systems. The system manager can manually assign this
list to other extensions.
Default Pool Dial-Out Code
Restriction for All Extensions
0
The default setting for the pool dial-out code restriction (Hybrid/PBX mode only) is
restricted. No extension or remote access user with a barrier code has access to
pools until the restriction is removed by the system manager.
Default Outward Restrictions for VMI Ports
0
Ports assigned for use by voice messaging systems (generic or integrated VMI
ports) are now assigned outward restrictions by default. If a voice messaging
system must be allowed to call out (for example, to send calls to a user’s home
office), the system manager must remove these restrictions.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
Before removing restrictions, it is strongly recommended that you read
Appendix A, “Customer Support Information.”
Default Facility Restriction
Level (FRL) for VMI Ports
0
The default Automatic Route Selection (ARS) FRL for VMI ports is 0, restricting all
outcalling.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements
Release 4.0 Enhancements
Default for the Default Local Table
Page xxiii
0
The default Automatic Route Selection (ARS, Hybrid/PBX mode only) FRL has
changed to 2 for the Default Local table. System managers can easily change an
extension default of 3 to 2 or lower in order to restrict calling. No adjustment to the
route FRL is required.
New Maintenance Procedure for
Testing Outgoing Trunks
0
Technicians must enter a password in order to perform trunk tests.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
The enhancements in Release 3.1 help increase the security of the MERLIN
LEGEND System. To fully utilize these security enhancements, be sure to
read and understand the information in these upgrade notes and in the
relevant system guides.
Release 4.0 Enhancements
0
Release 4.0 includes all Release 3.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below.
Support for Up to 200 Extensions
0
An expanded dial plan supports up to 200 tip/ring devices.
Support for National ISDN BRI Service
0
This service (Hybrid/PBX and Key modes) provides a low-cost alternative to
loop-start and ground-start lines/trunks for voice and digital data connectivity to
the central office. Each of the two B-channels ( bearer channels) on a BRI line can
carry one voice and one data call at any given time. The data speeds on a
B-channel are up to 28.8 kbps for analog data and up to 64 kbps for digital data,
which is necessary for videoconferencing and other high-speed applications.
Release 4.0 supports the IOC Package “S” (basic call handling) service
configuration and Multiline Hunt service configuration on designated CO switches.
New Control Unit Modules
0
Release 4.0 supports a new NI-BRI line/trunk module and a higher-capacity
tip/ring module.
800 NI-BRI Module
0
This new module connects NI-BRI trunks to the MERLIN LEGEND system for
high-speed data and video transmission.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements
Release 4.0 Enhancements
016 Tip/Ring Module
Page xxiv
0
This new module supports a 200-extension dial plan by providing 16 ports for
tip/ring devices. Applications that use a tip/ring interface can connect to this
board. All 16 ports can ring simultaneously. Four touch-tone receivers (TTRs) are
included on the module as well. The module’s ringing frequency (default 20 Hz)
can be changed through programming to 25 Hz for those locations that require it.
Downloadable Firmware for the
016 and NI-BRI Modules
0
The Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA)
technology introduced in Release 3.0 continues to support these two new boards
for installation and upgrade in Release 4.0. A Release 3.0 or later processor is
required for PCMCIA technology.
Support for 2B Data Applications
0
A Lucent Technologies-certified group and desktop video application can use two
B-channels to make video/data calls when connected to a single MLX extension
jack programmed for 2B data. The 2B data devices must be equipped with
ISDN-BRI interfaces. NI-1 BRI, PRI, or T1 Switched 56 facilities support 2B data
communications at 112 kbps (using two 56-kpbs channels) or 128 kbps (using two
64-kbps B-channels). This feature is available for Hybrid/PBX and Key modes
only.
Support for T1 Switched 56
Digital Data Transmission
0
For Hybrid/PBX and Key mode systems, Release 4.0 expands support of T1
functionality by providing access to digital data over the public switched 56-kbps
network, as well as to digital data tie-trunk services. Users who have T1 facilities
for voice services can now use them for video or data calls at rates of 56 kbps per
channel (112 kbps for video calls using 2B data). The Release 4.0 offering also
includes point-to-point connectivity over T1 tie trunks, allowing customers to
connect two MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems or a MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System with a Lucent Technologies DEFINITY® G1.1
Communications System or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server. The
two communications systems can be co-located or at different sites.
Forwarding Delay Option
0
Each user can program a Forwarding Delay setting for the Forward, Remote Call
Forwarding, or Follow Me features. The forwarding delay is the number of times
that a call rings at the forwarding extension before the call is sent to the receiver.
The delay period gives the original call recipient time to answer or to screen calls
by checking the displayed calling number (if available). The delay can be set at 0
up to 9 rings. The factory setting for the forwarding delay is 0 rings (no delay).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements
Release 4.0 Enhancements
Page xxv
Voice Announce on Queued Call Console (QCC) 0
The system manager can enable the fifth Call button on a QCC console
(Hybrid/PBX mode only) to announce a call on another user’s speakerphone
(providing the destination telephone has a voice announce-capable SA button
available). A QCC cannot receive voice-announced calls; they are received as
ringing calls. The factory-set status for the fifth Call button is Voice Announce
disabled.
Time-Based Option for
Overflow on Calling Group
0
Release 4.0 has added a time limit for calls in queue in addition to the previous
number of calls limit. If the Overflow Threshold Time option is set to a valid
number between 1 and 900 seconds, calls that remain in the calling group queue
for the set time are sent to the overflow receiver. If the overflow threshold time is
set to 0, overflow by time is turned off. The factory-set time limit is 0 seconds (off).
Single-Line Telephone Enhancements
0
The following changes enhance the performance of single-line telephones:
■
Disable Transfer. Through centralized telephone programming, the
system manager can disable transfer by removing all but one SA or ICOM
button from the extension.
■
No Transfer Return. When a handset bounces in its cradle, the system
interprets this as a switchhook flash and attempts to transfer a call. When
the transfer attempt period expires, the user’s telephone rings. Release 4.0
eliminates this unintended ringing by disconnecting the call in situations
where a switchhook flash is followed by an on-hook state and a dial tone is
present.
■
Forward Disconnect. All ports on 012 and 016 modules now send forward
disconnect to all devices connected to them when forward disconnect is
received from the CO. This enhancement prevents the trunk/line from
being kept active when one end disconnects from the call. If an answering
machine is connected to the port, it does not record silence, busy tones, or
other useless messages. This operation is not programmable.
Seven-Digit Password for SPM
0
Release 4.0 has increased system security by requiring a 7-digit password for
system managers or technicians who use SPM to perform programming or the
Trunk Test procedure. This password is for use in addition to a remote access
barrier code.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements
Release 4.0 Enhancements
Issue 1
June 1997
Page xxvi
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
About This Book
Intended Audience
Page xxvii
About This Book
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an advanced digital switching
system that integrates voice and data communications features. Voice features
include traditional telephone features, such as Transfer and Hold, and advanced
features, such as Group Coverage, Direct Voice Mail, and Park. Data features
allow both voice and data to be transmitted over the same system wiring.
Intended Audience
0
This book provides detailed information about system features, extension
features, and system applications in Release 5.0 of the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System. It is intended as a reference for anyone needing such
information, including support personnel, sales representatives, system
managers, and account executives. It is also intended for technicians who are
responsible for system installation, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
How to Use This Book
0
The section entitled ‘‘Index of Feature Names’’ on page -2 is provided to help you
to find the appropriate feature name for the function that you want described. You
can then quickly find the description of the feature or features using the page
numbers provided. If you do not know the name of a feature that interests you, the
‘‘Index to Features by Activity’’ on page -14 provides a list of functions and the
features that provide them, along with the page numbers where you can find
descriptions.
Each entry in the guide explains a feature or set of features in great detail.
“At a Glance,” a boxed table at the beginning of each feature description,
summarizes, as applicable, the following aspects of the feature or feature group:
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
About This Book
How to Use This Book
Page xxviii
■
Users Affected. Shows what category of users is affected by a feature.
For example, “Auto Dial” lists telephone users and Direct-Line Console
(DLC) operators as those affected by the feature. (From this you can
conclude that Queued Call Console (QCC) operators cannot use Auto
Dial.)
■
Reports Affected. Cites the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
reports in which you can find information relating to the feature.
■
Modes. Lists the system operating mode or modes in which the feature is
used.
■
Telephones. Tells you which telephones can use the feature.
■
Programming Code(s). As appropriate, lists the programming code(s)
used to program the feature on a button or to turn it on or off.
■
Feature Code(s). Lists the feature code(s) you can use to activate the
feature or turn it off.
■
MLX Display Label(s). Lists the name as it appears on the MLX-20L
and/or other MLX telephones.
■
System Programming. If applicable, summarizes the system
programming procedure(s) that control the feature.
■
Maximum(s). If applicable, tells you what maximum numbers apply to the
feature.
■
Factory Setting(s). Shows you the default programming, that is, how the
system sets the feature when no one programs it.
Following each “At a Glance” table is a full description of the feature or feature
group, telling you how it works for those who have different types of equipment or
programmed positions. Following the description, feature entries include (as
applicable) each of these sections:
■
Considerations and Constraints. An explanation of exceptions and
unusual conditions pertaining to the feature. This section can help you
troubleshoot a problem with the feature.
■
Mode Differences. An explanation of variations in the use of the feature in
the different modes supported by the system.
■
Telephone Differences. An explanation of variations in the use of the
feature with different telephones.
■
Feature Interactions. A list of issues and considerations to be aware of
when using another feature in conjunction with the main feature described.
The list is arranged alphabetically by feature.
‘‘Related Documents’’ on page -xxxi provides a complete list of system
documentation together with ordering information.
In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline 24
hours a day. Call the Helpline at 1 800 628-2888 (consultation charges may
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
About This Book
Terms and Conventions Used
Page xxix
apply), or call your Lucent Technologies representative, if you need assistance
when installing, programming, or using your system.
0
Terms and Conventions Used
The terms described here are used in preference to other, equally acceptable
terms for describing communications systems.
Lines, Trunks, and Facilities
Facility is a general term that designates a communications path between a
telephone system and the telephone company central office. Technically, a trunk
connects a switch to a switch, for example, the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System to the central office. Technically, a line is a loop-start
facility or a communications path that does not connect switches, for example, an
intercom line or a Centrex line. However, in actual usage, the terms line and trunk
are often applied interchangeably. In this guide, we use lines/trunks and line/trunk
to refer to facilities in general. Specifically, we refer to digital facilities. We also use
specific terms such as personal line, ground-start trunk, DID trunk, and so on.
When you talk to your local telephone company central office, ask about the terms
they use for the specific facilities they connect to your system.
Some older terms have been replaced with newer terms. The following list shows
the old term on the left and the new term on the right.
Old
New
trunk module
trunk jack
station
station jack
analog data station
7500B data station
analog voice and analog data station
line/trunk module
line/trunk jack
extension
extension jack
modem data workstation
ISDN terminal adapter data workstation
analog voice and modem data
workstation
MLX voice and modem data workstation
modem data-only workstation
ISDN terminal adapter data-only
workstation
MLX voice and ISDN terminal adapter
data workstation
digital voice and analog data station
analog data-only station
7500B data-only station
MLX voice and 7500B data station
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
About This Book
Security
Page xxx
Typographical Conventions
0
Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the
information presented:
Example
Purpose
It is very important that you follow these Italics indicate emphasis.
steps. You must attach the wristband
before touching the connection.
Italics also set off special terms.
The part of the headset that fits over
one or both ears is called a headpiece.
If you press the Feature button on an
MLX display telephone, the display lists
telephone features you can select. A
programmed Auto Dial button gives
you instant access to an inside or
outside number.
The names of fixed-feature, factory-imprinted buttons appear in bold.
The names of programmed buttons are
printed as regular text.
Choose Ext Prog from the display
screen.
Plain constant-width type indicates text
that appears on the telephone display
or PC screen.
To activate Call Waiting, dial *11.
Constant-width type in italics indicates
characters you dial at the telephone or
type at the PC.
Product Safety Labels
0
Throughout these documents, hazardous situations are indicated by an
exclamation point inside a triangle and the word CAUTION or WARNING.
!
WARNING:
Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or
severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.
!
CAUTION:
Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor personal
injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.
Security
0
Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent
unauthorized users from abusing the system. You should assign passwords
wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer
people.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
About This Book
Related Documents
Page xxxi
Nondisplaying authorization codes and telephone numbers provide another layer
of security. For more information, see Appendix A, “Customer Support
Information.”
Throughout this document, toll fraud security hazards are indicated by an
exclamation point inside a triangle and the words SECURITY ALERT.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
Security Alert indicates the presence of toll fraud security hazard. Toll fraud
is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an
unauthorized party (for example, persons other than your company’s
employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s
behalf). Be sure to read “Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security” on
the inside front cover of this book and “Security of Your System: Preventing
Toll Fraud” in Appendix A, “Customer Support Information.”
Related Documents
0
In addition to this book, the documents listed below are part of the documentation
set. Within the continental United States, these can be ordered from the Lucent
Technologies GBCS Publications Fulfillment Center by calling 1 800 457-1235.
Document No.
555-650-118
555-650-111
555-650-112
555-650-113
555-650-116
555-650-122
555-630-150
555-630-155
555-630-152
555-650-124
555-630-151
555-650-120
555-650-126
555-650-138
555-650-134
555-650-132
Document No.
555-650-136
Title
System Documents
System Manager’s Guide
System Programming
System Planning
System Planning Forms
Pocket Reference
Telephone User Support
MLX-5D™, MLX-10D®, MLX-10DP®, MLX-16DP®,
MLX-28D®, and MLX-20L® Display Telephones User’s Guide
MLX-10D Display Telephone Tray Cards (5 cards)
MLX-16DP Display Telephone Tray Cards (5 cards)
MLX-28D and MLX-20L Telephone Tray Cards (5 cards)
MLX-10® and MLX-5™ Nondisplay Telephone User’s Guide
MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephone Tray Cards
(6 cards)
Analog Multiline Telephones User’s Guide
Single-Line Telephones User’s Guide
MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Telephones User’s Guide
System Operator Support
MLX Direct-Line Consoles Operator’s Guide
Analog Direct-Line Consoles Operator’s Guide
Title
MLX Queued Call Console Operator’s Guide
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
About This Book
How to Comment on This Book
Page xxxii
555-650-130
555-640-105
555-025-600
555-650-140
555-650-111
555-650-112
555-650-113
Miscellaneous User Support
Calling Group Supervisor’s Guide
Data/Video Reference
BCS Products Security Handbook
Documentation for Qualified Technicians
Installation, Programming, & Maintenance (IP&M) Binder
Includes: Installation, System Programming & Maintenance
(SPM), and Maintenance & Troubleshooting
System Programming
System Planning
System Planning Forms
How to Comment on This Book
0
We welcome your comments, both positive and negative. Please use the
feedback form on the next page to let us know how we can continue to serve you.
If the feedback form is missing, write directly to:
Documentation Manager
Lucent Technologies
211 Mount Airy Road, Room 2W226
Basking Ridge, NJ 07920
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Page 1
Features
0
This book provides both summary and detailed information about the features of
the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System. For each feature, the following
types of information are provided, as applicable:
■
At a Glance. Summary information about the feature, including, for
example, users affected, telephones supported, programming code(s), and
factory settings.
■
Description. A detailed description of the functions and typical uses of the
feature.
■
Considerations and Constraints. An explanation of exceptions and
unusual conditions pertaining to the feature.
■
Mode Differences. An explanation of variations in the use of the feature in
the different modes supported by the communications system.
■
Telephone Differences. An explanation of variations in the use of the
feature with different telephones.
■
Feature Interactions. A list of issues and considerations that you should
know about when using one feature in conjunction with another.
For easy reference, features are covered in alphabetical order. The ‘‘Index of
Feature Names’’ on page 2 shows where information can be found about features
and other system components that may have been renamed or reorganized in this
release of the communications system and related products. The ‘‘Index to
Features by Activity’’ on page 14 lists features according to tasks typically
performed with the system. Use these, or the index at the back of the book, when
you are not sure which entry you should consult.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index of Feature Names
Page 2
0
Index of Feature Names
Feature Name
See
#
2B Data
Digital Data Calls (p. 183). See also
Data/Video Reference.
A
Feature Name
Programming (p. 480). See also System
Programming.
Alarm (p. 30)
Alarm Clock (p. 32)
Allowed/Disallowed Lists (p. 34), Night
Service (p. 398)
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Appendix I (p. I–72)
Barge-In (p. 78)
Direct Station Selector: MLX (p. 199)
Messaging (p. 374)
Display (p. 225)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Integrated Administration (p. 328)
Authorization Code (p. 40)
Auto Answer All (p. 45)
Auto Answer Intercom (p. 48)
Auto Dial (p. 50)
Auto Answer Intercom (p. 48)
Group Calling (p. 281), Extension Status
(p. 256)
Integrated Administration (p. 328)
Auto Answer All (p. 45)
Callback (p. 97), Remote Access (p. 522)
Transfer (p. 601)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Queued Call Console (p. 488), Hold (p. 312)
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle
Line Preference (p. 56)
See
Automatic Maintenance Busy
Automatic Maintenance Busy (p. 62)
Administration
Alarm
Alarm Clock
Allowed Lists
Area Code Tables
Ascend Pipeline 25-Px access device
Attendant Barge-In
Attendant DSS
Attendant Message Waiting
Attendant console—display
Attendant console—Switched Loop
AUDIX® Voice Power®
Authorization Code
Auto Answer—All
Auto Answer—Intercom
Auto Dial
Auto intercom
Auto Login/Logout (calling group)
Automated Attendant Service
Automatic Answer (data management)
Automatic Callback
Automatic Completion
Automatic Extended Call Completion
Automatic Hold or Release
Automatic Line Selection
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Index of Feature Names
Page 3
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Autoqueuing
Callback (p. 97), Remote Access (p. 522)
B
Barge-In
Barge-In (p. 78)
Barrier codes
Remote Access (p. 522)
Basic Rate Interface
Basic Rate Interface (p. 82). See also
Data/Video Reference.
Behind Switch Operation
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511), Centrex
Operation (p. 120)
Bridging of station lines on multiline
telephones
Personal Lines (p. 421), System
Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
C
Call Accounting System (CAS)
Appendix I (p. I–21)
Call Accounting Terminal (CAT)
Appendix I (p. I–25)
Call-by-Call Services Table
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441).
See also Data/Video Reference.
Call completion
Transfer, One-Touch (p. 601)
Call Coverage
Coverage (p. 139)
Call Forward(ing)/Following
Forward and Follow Me (p. 265)
Call Management System (CMS)
Appendix I (p. I–28)
Call Park
Park (p. 416)
Call Pickup
Pickup (p. 429)
Call Pickup—directed
Pickup (p. 429)
Call Pickup—group
Pickup (p. 429)
Call Records
Station Messaging Detail Recording (SMDR,
p. 557)
Call Restrictions
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
Call Waiting
Call Waiting (p. 92)
Callback
Callback (p. 97)
Callback Queuing
Callback (p. 97)
Calling Group
Group Calling (p. 281), Integrated
Administration (p. 328)
Calls-in-Queue Alarm
Group Calling (p. 281), Queued Call Console
(p. 488)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Index of Feature Names
Page 4
Feature Name
See
Call Management System (CMS)
Extension Status (p. 256), Appendix I
(p. I–28)
Camp-On
Camp-On (p. 117)
Cancel Delivered Message
Messaging (p. 374)
CAT (Call Accounting Terminal)
Appendix I (p. I–25)
Centralized Telephone Programming
Programming (p. 480). See also System
Programming.
Centrex
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
Class of Restriction
Remote Access (p. 522)
Common Administration
Integrated Administration (p. 328)
Computer Telephony Integration
CTI Link (p. 173)
Conference
Conference (p. 129)
Consultation Transfer
Transfer (p. 601)
CONVERSANT®
Appendix I (p. I–58)
Coverage Delay Interval
Coverage (p. 139)
Coverage Group
Coverage (p. 139), Integrated Administration
(p. 328)
Coverage Inhibit
Coverage (p. 139)
Coverage On/Off
Coverage (p. 139)
Coverage
Coverage (p. 139)
D
Data Hunt Groups
See Data/Video Reference
Data Privacy
Privacy (p. 477). See also Data/Video
Reference
See Data/Video Reference
See Data/Video Reference
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Group Calling (p. 281)
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Messaging (p. 374)
Messaging (p. 374)
Directories (p. 218)
System Renumbering (p. 583)
Display (p. 225)
Digital Data Calls (p. 183). See also
Data/Video Reference.
Data Status
Data transmission speed
Default Local and Toll tables
Delay Announcement
Delay Ring
Delete Message
Deliver Message
Dial by name (display feature)
Dial Plan
Dialed number
Digital Data Ports
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Index of Feature Names
Page 5
Feature Name
See
Dial-Plan Routing Table
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441).
See also Data/Video Reference.
Dial Tone
Inside Dial Tone (p. 324)
Digits in Extension
System Renumbering (p. 583)
Direct Dept. Calling (Hunting, Hunt Groups)
Group Calling (p. 281)
Direct Facility Termination (DFT)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Direct Group Calling (DGC)
Group Calling (p. 281)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Remote Access (p. 522)
Direct-line console
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Direct Pool Termination (DPT)
Pools (p. 435)
Direct station selector
Direct Station Selector: MLX (p. 199)
Directory built into PBX
Directories (p. 218)
Directory of System Speed Dial numbers
Speed Dial (p. 550)
Directory of extension numbers
Directories (p. 218)
Disallowed Lists
Allowed/Disallowed Lists (p. 34)
Display
Display (p. 225)
Display of name associated with station
Labeling (p. 360)
Display prompting
Display (p. 225)
Distinctive Ringing
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb (p. 251)
Drop
Conference (p. 129)
E
Executive Barge-In
Barge-In (p. 78)
Extended call completion
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Extended Station Status
Extension Status (p. 256)
Extension Auto Dial
Auto Dial (p. 50)
Extension Directory
Directories (p. 218), Integrated
Administration (p. 328)
Extension Pickup
Pickup (p. 429)
Programming (p. 480). See also System
Programming.
Extension Status
Extension Status (p. 256), Group Calling
(p. 281)
ExpressRoute 1000™ ISDN Terminal Adapter Digital Data Calls (p. 183), Appendix I
(p. I–69). See also Data/Video Reference.
Feature Name
See
Extension programming
F
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Index of Feature Names
Page 6
Facility alpha/number for incoming calls
Labeling (p. 360)
Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs)
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Fax Attendant
Integrated Administration (p. 328),
Appendix I (p. I–45)
Fax Extension
Fax Extension (p. 262)
Fax message waiting
Messaging (p. 374)
Feature feedback
Display (p. 225)
Flexible Numbering
System Renumbering (p. 583)
Follow me
Forward and Follow Me (p. 265)
Forced Account Code Entry
Account Code Entry/Forced Account
Code Entry (p. 25)
Forward
Forward and Follow Me (p. 265)
G
General Pickup
Pickup (p. 429)
Group Assignment
Night Service (p. 398)
Group Call Pickup
Pickup (p. 429)
Group Calling
Group Calling (p. 281), Extension Status
(p. 256)
Group Coverage
Coverage (p. 139)
Group IV (G4) fax
Basic Rate Interface (p. 82), Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441), Appendix I
(p. I–53)
Group Paging (Speakerphone)
Paging (p. 408)
Group Pickup
Pickup (p. 429)
H
Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI)
Auto Answer Intercom (p. 48)
Hands-Free Unit
Auto Answer Intercom (p. 48)
Handset Mute
Headset Options (p. 305)
Headset Auto Answer
Headset Options (p. 305)
Headset Disconnect
Headset Options (p. 305)
Headset/Handset Mute
Headset Options (p. 305)
Headset Hang Up
Headset Options (p. 305)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index of Feature Names
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 7
Feature Name
See
Headset Operation
Headset Options (p. 305)
Headset Options
Headset Options (p. 305)
Headset Status
Headset Options (p. 305), Queued Call
Console (p. 488)
Hold
Hold (p. 312)
Hold Reminder station
Display (p. 225)
Hold Return
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Hotel mode
Extension Status (p. 256)
HotLine
HotLine (p. 320)
Hunt Groups
Group Calling (p. 281)
Hunt type
Group Calling (p. 281)
I
ICOM buttons
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Identification of stations being covered on
covering party’s display
Display (p. 225)
Idle Line Preference
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle
Line Preference (p. 56)
Immediate ring
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Incoming Call Line Identification (ICLID)
Caller ID (p. 105)
Individual Coverage
Coverage (p. 139)
Individual Paging
Paging (p. 408)
Individual Pickup
Pickup (p. 429)
Information Service
Integrated Administration (p. 328)
Integrated Administration
Integrated Administration (p. 328)
Integrated Solution II (IS II)
Appendix I (p. I–39)
Integrated Solution III (IS III)
Integrated Administration (p. 328),
Appendix I (p. I–45)
Inside Auto Dial
Auto Dial (p. 50)
Inside Dial Tone
Inside Dial Tone (p. 324)
Inspect
Inspect (p. 325)
Inspect screen
Display (p. 225)
Intercom (ICOM) Buttons
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Intercom dialing
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant Appendix I (p. I–39)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Index of Feature Names
Page 8
Feature Name
See
Intuity™
Appendix I
Intuity CONVERSANT
Appendix I (p. I–58)
ISDN/BRI Interface
Basic Rate Interface (p. 82). See also
Data/Video Reference.
ISDN/PRI Interface
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441).
See also Data/Video Reference.
IS II (Integrated Solution II)
Appendix I (p. I–39)
IS III (Integrated Solution III)
Integrated Administration (p. 328),
Appendix I (p. I–45)
L
Labeling
Labeling (p. 360)
Last Number Dial
Last Number Dial (p. 368)
Last Number Redial
Last Number Dial (p. 368)
Leave Message
Messaging (p. 374)
Leave Word Calling
Messaging (p. 374)
Line Pickup
Pickup (p. 429)
Line Request
Line Request (p. 372)
Line/trunk pool button access
Pools (p. 435)
Line/trunk queuing
Callback (p. 97)
Loudspeaker Paging
Paging (p. 408)
LS-ID Delay option
Caller ID (p. 105)
Lucent Technologies Attendant®
Integrated Administration (p. 328),
Appendix I (p. I–18)
Lucent Technologies Fax Attendant®
Integrated Administration (p. 328),
Appendix I (p. I–45)
M
Maintenance Alarm
Alarm (p. 30)
Maintenance Busy
Automatic Maintenance Busy (p. 62)
Manual signaling
Signal/Notify (p. 547)
Menu-based feature activation
Display (p. 225)
Menu-based station programming
Programming (p. 480)
MERLIN II System Display Console
Direct-Line Console (p. 191), Direct Station
Selector: MLX (p. 199)
MERLIN MAIL®
Appendix I (p. I–11)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index of Feature Names
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 9
Feature Name
See
MERLIN LEGEND MAIL
Appendix I (p. I–11)
MERLIN LEGEND Reporter
Appendix I (p. I–28)
MERLIN PFC® (Phone-Fax-Copier)
Appendix I (p. I–55)
Message (fax)
Messaging (p. 374)
Message Center operation
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Message Drop Service
Integrated Administration (p. 328)
Message indicator
Messaging (p. 374)
Message Status (operator)
Messaging (p. 374)
Message Waiting Receiver
Group Calling (p. 281), Messaging (p. 374)
Messaging
Messaging (p. 374)
Microphone Disable
Microphone Disable (p. 386)
Missed Reminder
Reminder Service (p. 518)
Modem pooling
See MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System Modem Pooling application note
Multi-Function Module
Multi-Function Module (p. 386)
Music On Hold
Music On Hold (p. 395)
Mute
Microphone Disable (p. 386)
Mute, Headset/Handset
Headset Options (p. 305)
N
N11 table
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Name/number of internal caller
Display (p. 225)
Next Message
Messaging (p. 374)
Night Service
Night Service (p. 398)
No Ring option
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Notify
Signal/Notify (p. 547)
Numbering Plan
System Renumbering (p. 583)
O
On- or off-hook queuing
Callback (p. 97)
One-Touch Hold
Transfer (p. 601)
One-Touch Transfer
Transfer (p. 601)
Operator Automatic Hold
Hold (p. 312)
Operator Hold Timer
Hold (p. 312)
Originate Only
Feature Name
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
See
Outside Auto Dial
Auto Dial (p. 50)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index of Feature Names
Outward Restriction
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 10
Calling Restrictions (p. 110), Night Service
(p. 398)
P
Page All
Paging (p. 408)
Paging
Paging (p. 408)
Park
Park (p. 416)
PassageWay® Direct Connection Solution
Appendix I (p. I–5)
PassageWay Telephony Services
CTI Link (p. 173). See also PassageWay
Telephony Services Network Manager’s
Guide.
Passive-bus
Priority call ringing
Feature Name
Digital Data Calls (p. 183). See also
Data/Video Reference.
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Directories (p. 218)
Speed Dial (p. 550)
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Appendix I (p. I–59)
Appendix I (p. I–72)
Call Waiting (p. 92)
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Pools (p. 435)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Messaging (p. 374)
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441).
See also Data/Video Reference.
Coverage (p. 139)
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441).
See also Data/Video Reference.
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
Personal Lines (p. 421), System
Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR,
p. 557)
Ringing Options (p. 533)
See
Privacy
Privacy (p. 477)
Programming
Programming (p. 480), Integrated
Administration (p. 328)
Patterns
Personal Directory
Personal Speed Dial
Personalized Ring
Picasso Still-Image Phone
Pipeline™ 25-Px Access Device
Pickup, Call Waiting
Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
Pool routing
Pools
Position Busy Backup
Posted Messages
PRI
Primary Coverage
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
Prime line
Principal user
Printer
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index of Feature Names
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 11
Q
Queue Priority
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Queued Call Console (QCC)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
R
Recall
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511)
Reminder Service
Reminder Service (p. 518)
Remote Access
Remote Access (p. 522)
Remote Administration
See System Programming.
Remote Call Forwarding
Forward and Follow Me (p. 265)
Remote programming
See System Programming.
Restrictions
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
Retrieve Message
Messaging (p. 374)
Return Call
Messaging (p. 374)
Return Ring Interval
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Ring Buttons
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Ring Timing options
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Ringback (Transfer Audible)
Transfer (p. 601)
Ringing/Idle Line Preference
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle
Line Preference (p. 56)
Ringing options
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Rotary signaling
Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling (p. 598)
Routes per pattern
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Routing by dial plan
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441)
S
SA buttons
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Saved Number Dial
Saved Number Dial (p. 541)
Scroll
Messaging (p. 374)
Second Dial Tone Timer
Second Dial Tone Timer (p. 545)
Selective Callback
Feature Name
Callback (p. 97)
See
Secondary Coverage
Coverage (p. 139)
Send All Calls
Do Not Disturb (p. 251)
Send/Remove Message
Messaging (p. 374)
Send Ring
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Set Up Space
System Renumbering (p. 583)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index of Feature Names
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 12
Shared System Access
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Signaling
Signal/Notify (p. 547)
Six-digit screening
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR,
p. 557)
Speakerphone Paging
Paging (p. 408)
Special Numbers Pattern
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Special Services Selection Table
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441)
Speed Dial
Auto Dial (p. 50), Directories (p. 218), Speed
Dial (p. 550)
SPM
Programming (p. 480). See also System
Programming.
Conference (p. 129)
Conference (p. 129)
Direct Station Selector: MLX (p. 199)
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR,
p. 557)
Programming (p. 480)
Messaging (p. 374), Signal/Notify (p. 547)
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441)
See also Data/Video Reference.
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511)
Multi-Function Module (p. 387)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Directories (p. 218)
System Renumbering (p. 583)
Programming (p. 480). See also System
Programming.
Speed Dial (p. 550)
Programming (p. 480). See also System
Programming.
See
Station Conference—External Parties
Station Conference—Total Parties
Station DSS auto dial
Station lines
Station Message Detail Recording
Station programming
Station-to-Station Messaging
Switched 56
Switchhook (Flash)
Supplemental Alert Adapter
Switched Loop Console
System Access buttons
System Directory
System Renumbering
System Programming
System Speed Dial
System Programming and Maintenance
Feature Name
T
T1 Interface (DS1)
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 441).
See also Data/Video Reference.
Three-Digit Numbering
System Renumbering (p. 583)
Time-day-date (display)
Display (p. 225)
Timed flash
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index of Feature Names
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 13
Time of day routing
Automatic Route Selection (p. 63)
Timer
Timer (p. 595)
Toll Restriction
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
Toll Type
Toll Type (p. 596)
Touch-tone receivers (TTRs)
Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling (p. 598)
Touch-tone signaling
Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling (p. 598)
Transfer
Transfer (p. 601)
Transfer Audible
Transfer (p. 601)
Transfer Return Identification
Display (p. 225)
Transfer Return Interval
Transfer (p. 601)
Trunk Pools
Pools (p. 435)
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Transfer (p. 601)
TTRs
Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling (p. 598)
Two-Digit numbering
System Renumbering (p. 583)
U
UDC/DDC
Group Calling (p. 281)
Unrestricted Restriction
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
V
Videoconferencing
Digital Data Calls (p. 183), Appendix I
(p. I–60). See also Data/Video Reference.
VMI (voice messaging interface) ports
Group Calling (p. 281)
Voice announce
Paging (p. 408)
Voice announce disable
Voice Announce to Busy (p. 615)
Voice announce inside calls
Paging (p. 408), System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Voice announce on busy stations
Voice Announce to Busy (p. 615)
Voice Announce Transfer
Transfer (p. 601)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Page 14
Feature Name
See
Voice buttons
System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 573)
Voice mail message waiting
Messaging (p. 374)
Voice mail systems
Integrated Administration (p. 328),
Appendix I (p. I–7)
Voice messaging systems
Integrated Administration (p. 328),
Appendix I (p. I–7)
Index to Features by Activity
0
The index in this section lists system features according to the activities that
people typically perform. Operator features are not covered exhaustively here
because they are described in detail in the entries: ‘‘Direct-Line Console’’ on page
191, ‘‘Direct Station Selector: MLX’’ on page 199, and ‘‘Queued Call Console
(QCC)’’ on page 488. This index lists features according to the following
categories:
■
Basic Calling and Answering
— Answering calls
— Conferencing and joining calls
— Dialing
— Paging
— Putting a call on hold
— Using the system from an outside phone
■
Covering Calls or Having Calls Covered
— When you are covering calls
■
Timekeeping
■
Calling Privileges and Restrictions
— To prevent people from making calls
— To allow calls
— Other calling privileges
■
Messaging
■
System Manager Features
■
Special Operator and Calling Supervisor Features
Look for an activity in the first column. In the second column, find out who
performs the activity. The third column tells you where to find more information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Basic Calling and Answering
Page 15
For
Feature Name
Answering calls
And seeing who is calling you from another extension Display phones Display (p. 225)
And seeing who is calling you from outside
MLX display
phones
Display (p. 225)
Caller ID (p. 105)
Primary Rate Interface (p. 441)
And identifying the type of call according to the ring
All
Ringing Options (p. 533)
At another extension
All
Pickup (p. 429)
At a line not on your phone
All
Pickup (p. 429)
At a line you share with others
All
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
For another person or group of people
All
Coverage (p. 139)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Forward/Follow Me (p. 265)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Group Calling (p. 281)
If you are a calling supervisor for people answering
calls
DLC and QCC
operators only
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Direct Station Selector (p. 199)
Group Calling (p. 281)
Extension Status (p. 256)
If you are an operator
DLC and QCC
operators only
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Direct Station Selector (p. 199)
If you are part of a group
All
Group Calling (p. 281)
Extension Status (p. 256)
Waiting for you, after you hear call-waiting tone
All
Call Waiting (p. 92)
That come to your extension while you are at another All
extension
Forward/Follow Me (p. 265)
And then disconnect, without using the handset or
Speaker button
All
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511)
Using a Hands-Free Unit, without lifting the handset
Analog
multiline with
no speaker
Auto Answer Intercom (p. 48)
Using a headset
MLX
Headset Options (p. 305)
Using a modem, fax machine, or headset
Analog
multiline
Auto Answer All (p. 45)
Conferencing inside and outside parties where the
inside parties do not share a line
All
Conference (p. 129)
Basic Calling and Answering
For
Feature Name
Conferencing and joining calls
Conferencing and joining calls (continued)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Page 16
Joining calls of inside parties who share a line
All
Preventing others from joining your calls
All except QCC Privacy (p. 477)
Joining a caller and the extension he or she wants to All except
reach
operators
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
Transfer (p. 601)
Dialing
An inside call
All
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
An outside call
All
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Pools (p. 435)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
An inside or outside number with one touch
All except
single-line and
QCC
Auto Dial (p. 50)
An inside or outside number with one touch
Operators with
MLX phones or
System
Display
Consoles only
Direct Station Selector (p. 199)
An inside or outside number by lifting the handset of a Single-line
single-line telephone
only (Release
5.0 and later
systems)
HotLine (p. 320)
A call from anther extension, using your own calling
privileges
Authorization Code (p. 40)
All
An inside call to anyone in a group of people
All
Group Calling (p. 281)
An Account Code, for billing to a project or client,
during or before a call
All
Account Code Entry/Forced
Account Code Entry (p. 25)
By entering a 3-digit code for a party that people in
your company call often
All
Speed Dial (p. 550)
By entering a 2-digit code for a party you call often
(phones with 10 or fewer buttons)
All
Speed Dial (p. 550)
By selecting a name from the display
All
Directories (p. 218)
A person who has left a message on your display,
with one touch
Display phones
only
Messaging (p. 374)
Outside of normal office hours
All
Night Service (p. 398)
A number you dialed before
All except QCC Last Number Dial
Saved Number Dial
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Basic Calling and Answering
Page 17
For
Feature Name
Dialing (continued)
A busy extension to reach it when it is available
All except QCC Callback (p. 97)
Camp-On (p. 117)
A busy line to have your call placed when the line is
available
All except QCC
(and
single-line and
cordless or
wireless, for
Line Request)
When you want to interrupt a call at a busy extension Operators only
or one with Do Not Disturb on
Callback (p. 97)
Line Request (p. 372)
Barge-In (p. 78)
Using a special long-distance service to which your
company subscribes, such as MEGACOM® WATS
System
managers (to
set up)
Primary Rate Interface (p. 441)
Pools (p. 435)
Automatic Route Selection
(p. 63)
A voice mail box
All
Direct Voice Mail
Change the Extension Directory to accommodate new System
or changed extensions.
managers only
Labeling (p. 360)
Change the System Directory to accommodate
business needs.
System
managers only
Labeling (p. 360)
One person at your company who has a
speakerphone and is not a QCC operator or at a
single-line phone
All
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Several people at your company who have
speakerphones and are not QCC operators or at
single-line phones
All
Paging (p. 408)
Pickup (p. 429)
All the people at your company who have
speakerphones and are not QCC operators or at
single-line phones
All
Paging (p. 408)
Pickup (p. 429)
Over your company’s loudspeaker system
All
Paging (p. 408)
Pickup (p. 429)
Prevent voice-announced calls from coming in over
your speakerphone, or allow them
Analog
multiline and
MLX
Voice Announce to Busy
(p. 615)
At your own extension, so that you can pick it up
All except
single-line
Hold (p. 312)
At your own extension, so that you can pick it up
Single-line
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511)
At your own extension, so that you or someone who
shares a line can pick it up
All
Hold (p. 312)
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
Paging
Putting a call on hold
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Basic Calling and Answering
Page 18
For
Feature Name
All
Hold (p. 312)
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
Putting a call on hold (continued)
At your own extension, so that you or someone who
shares a line can pick it up
At your own extension, to put an outside call on hold All
automatically in order to transfer to another extension
with a shared line or button
Transfer (p. 601)
At your own extension, so that anyone can pick it up All except QCC Park (p. 416)
after you page them
At one of several reserved extensions, so that anyone Operators only
can pick it up after you page them
Park (p. 416)
Automatically
DLC operators
only
Hold (p. 312)
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
To gain access to the system as if you were on an
inside extension
N/A
Remote Access (p. 522)
To receive calls that come to your system extension
N/A
Forward/Follow Me (p. 265)
As an operator
DLC and QCC
operators only
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Direct Station Selector (p. 199)
As a calling supervisor for people covering calls
DLC and QCC
operators only
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Direct Station Selector (p. 199)
Group Calling (p. 281)
Extension Status (p. 256)
As a member of a group
All
Group Calling (p. 281)
Coverage (p. 139)
Using the system from an outside phone
Covering Calls or Having Your Calls Covered
When you are covering calls
And you want to adjust the ringing at the button where All except
calls come in
single-line
Coverage (p. 139)
Ringing Options (p. 533)
When your calls are being covered
By someone who shares a line
All
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Occasionally
All
Forward/Follow Me (p. 265)
By voice mail
All
Coverage (p. 139)
Regularly
All
Coverage (p. 139)
And you want to adjust or remove the ringing at the
button(s) where covered calls arrive
All except
single-line
Coverage (p. 139)
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Timekeeping
For
Feature Name
To set others’ phones to ring at a certain time as a
reminder
DLC operators
only
Reminder Service (p. 518)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Page 19
To set your own phone to ring at a certain time as a
reminder
All
Reminder Service (p. 518)
To set the alarm clock on your telephone
Display
telephones
only
Alarm Clock (p. 32)
To set the time at your telephone
Display
telephones
only
Alarm Clock (p. 32)
To set the timer for calls or other activities
Display
telephones
only
Alarm Clock (p. 32)
To set the systemwide time
System
manager only
See System Programming.
All except
operator
Privacy (p. 477)
Do Not Disturb (p. 251)
Calling Privileges and Restrictions
To prevent people from making calls
To your extension
To your extension when your phone is too busy to take QCC only
any more calls or you must be away from your phone
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
To outside numbers
System
manager only
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
Toll Type (p. 596)
To toll numbers
System
manager only
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
Automatic Route Selection
(p. 63)
Pools (p. 435)
Toll Type (p. 596)
To certain numbers or area codes
System
manager only
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
(p. 34)
Outside of normal business hours
System
manager only
Night Service (p. 398)
On certain outside lines in a Hybrid/PBX system
System
manager only
Automatic Route Selection
(p. 63)
Pools (p. 435)
Toll Type (p. 596)
To certain numbers or area codes
System
manager only
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
(p. 34)
Speed Dial (System Speed
Dial) (p. 550)
Outside of normal business hours
System
manager only
Night Service (p. 398)
To allow calls
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Calling Privileges and Restrictions
Page 20
For
Feature Name
To use your own calling privileges at others’
extensions
All
Authorization Code (p. 40)
To enter your password for off-hours calls
All
Night Service (p. 398)
Other calling privileges
Messaging
Leaving messages
Turn an extension’s Message light on or off to indicate Operators only
that you have a message for the party.
Messaging (p. 374)
(Send/Remove Message)
Call and let a co-worker with a display phone know
that you have called.
All
Messaging (p. 374) (Leave
Message)
Let a co-worker with a display phone know that you
wish to speak with him or her, without calling.
All except QCC Messaging (p. 374) (Leave
Message)
Signal/Notify (p. 547)
Let a co-worker with a multiline phone know that you All except QCC Signal/Notify (p. 547)
wish to speak with him or her, without calling.
Post a specific message (such as, OUT TO LUNCH) for All except
co-workers who have display phones.
single-line
Messaging (p. 374) (Posted
Messages)
Cancel a message left for a co-worker who has a
display phone.
All
Messaging (p. 374) (Leave
Message)
Read messages.
Display phones
only
Messaging (p. 374)
Turn off Message light.
All
Messaging (p. 374)
Delete messages.
Display phones
only
Messaging (p. 374)
Return a call from a co-worker who has left a
message.
Display phones
only
Messaging (p. 374)
Receiving messages
Controlling messaging
Change the posted messages that users can choose System
from.
manager only
Labeling (p. 360)
Change the extension information that appears on
display telephones that have messages.
System
manager only
Labeling (p. 360)
Set up voice messaging system to take calls.
System
manager only
Group Calling (p. 281)
Set up extensions to receive messages from a fax
machine that has a delivery for them.
System
manager only
Messaging (p. 374)
Set up calling groups to receive messages from
co-workers.
System
manager only
Messaging (p. 374)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
System Manager Features
Page 21
For
Feature Name
Set up account codes so that calls can be billed or
tracked to a specific client or project.
N/A
Account Code Entry/Forced
Account Code Entry (p. 25)
Set up which line is selected when a user lifts the
handset or presses the Speaker button.
All telephones
Automatic Line Selection and
Ringing/Idle Line Preference
(p. 56)
Customizing the system
Change extension numbers for extensions, adjuncts, All
lines, telephones, ranges of extensions on a DSS,
Automatic Route Selection, calling groups, Idle Line
Access, Listed Directory Number, paging groups,
park zones, Pools, or Remote Access.
System Renumbering (p. 583)
Change the overall system numbering plan; for
example, change to 2-, 3-, or a variable number of
digits for extension numbers.
All
System Renumbering (p. 583)
Modify the line buttons (SA or ICOM) available on a
user’s telephone: change, add, or delete.
All except
single-line
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Set up a single-line telephone so that it dials a specific For single-line
inside extension or outside number as soon as
only (Release
someone lifts the handset.
5.0 and later)
HotLine (p. 320)
Speed Dial (p. 550)
Adjust the ringing at an extension, including one with For single-line/
a single-line phone or MFM.
MFM
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Coverage (p. 139)
Set up special phones to be used for incoming and
outgoing calls during a commercial power failure.
Power-Failure Transfer
(p. 440)
N/A
Adjust the system dial tone to accommodate a voice N/A
messaging system or modem.
Inside Dial Tone (p. 324)
Control what a caller hears while waiting for the
N/A
system (during transfer, while on hold, or during other
operations where the caller must wait).
Music On Hold (p. 395)
Set up an adapter connected to an MLX extension to N/A
support a fax machine, modem, or other device.
Multi-Function Module (p. 386)
Change the language (English, French, or Spanish)
used in System Programming and Maintenance
(SPM) software.
System
manager or
programmer
Labeling (p. 360)
Change the language (English, French, or Spanish)
used in Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
and programming reports.
N/A
Labeling (p. 360)
Set up the Transfer feature for one-touch Transfer or All
automatic Hold.
Transfer (p. 601)
Control extensions with software running on an
associated worktop PC, on a local area network
(LAN) running Novell NetWare® 3.12, 4.1, or 4.11.
CTI Link (p. 173)
MLX and
analog
multiline
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
System Manager Features
Page 22
For
Feature Name
MLX display
phones only
Labeling (p. 360)
Directories
Change a user’s Personal Directory listings.
Change the Extension Directory to accommodate new N/A
or changed extensions.
Labeling (p. 360)
Change the names listed with System Directory
entries to accommodate business needs.
Labeling (p. 360)
N/A
Getting reports
Get a report on incoming and outgoing calls, including N/A
account codes, if programmed.
Station Message Detail
Recording (p. 557)
Get a report on the way the system is programmed.
N/A
Station Message Detail
Recording (p. 557)
Take an outside line out of service when there is a
problem with it.
N/A
Automatic Maintenance Busy
(p. 62)
In Hybrid/PBX mode, assign lines that can be
answered without operator involvement.
All telephones
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Lines and trunks
In Behind Switch mode, allow Conference, Transfer, N/A
and Drop buttons to access host features.
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511)
Messages
Change the language used (English, French, or
Spanish) systemwide or at an extension; this also
changes the clock, which is 12-hour for English and
24-hour for French or Spanish.
MLX display
phones only
Language (p. 364)
Change the posted messages that users can choose N/A
from.
Labeling (p. 360)
Change the extension information that appears on
display telephones with inside calls and messages.
N/A
Labeling (p. 360)
N/A
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Operators
Allow a QCC operator to join callers and extensions
more rapidly.
Find out about the Alarm button on operator consoles Operator
or set up a special light or bell to signal a system
consoles
problem.
Alarm (p. 30)
Set up a group of fax machines to take calls.
Group Calling (p. 281)
N/A
Set up voice messaging system to take calls.
N/A
Group Calling (p. 281)
Prevent DLC operators from accidentally
disconnecting callers.
N/A
Hold (p. 312)
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Find out what to do when callers on hold are being
disconnected.
N/A
Hold (p. 312)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
System Manager Features
Page 23
For
Feature Name
Make your system more secure from toll fraud.
N/A
Calling Restrictions (p. 110)
Remote Access (p. 522)
Forward/Follow Me (p. 265)
Automatic Route Selection
(p. 63)
Group Calling (p. 281)
Correct problems that users are having with the
switchhook, Recall, or Flash button.
N/A
Recall/Timed Flash (p. 511)
Operator
consoles
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Troubleshooting
Special Operator and Supervisor Features
Join a caller and the extension he or she wants to
reach.
Find out about the Alarm button that signals a system Operator
problem.
consoles
Alarm (p. 30)
Find out about the Alarm button that signals too many Operator
calls waiting in line for your attention or your group’s consoles
attention.
Group Calling (p. 281)
Auto Dial (p. 50)
Activate Night Service for system use outside of
normal business hours.
Operator
consoles
Night Service (p. 398)
Set up the way calls are distributed to calling group
members.
System
manager only
Group Calling (p. 281)
Monitor others’ calls.
N/A
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Queued Call Console (p. 488)
Direct Station Selector (p. 199)
Extension Status (p. 256)
Group Calling (p. 281)
Set up a device to answer calls when a group is
unavailable to take them.
System
manager only
Group Calling (p. 281)
Log a calling group member in or out.
Operator
consoles
Group Calling (p. 281)
Extension Status (p. 256)
Log a delay announcement device for a group in or
out.
Operator
consoles
Group Calling (p. 281)
Allow DLC operators to place calls on hold
automatically.
System
manager only
Hold (p. 312)
Direct-Line Console (p. 191)
Turn an extension’s Message light on or off to indicate Operators only
that you have a message for the party.
Messaging (p. 374)
(Send/Remove Message)
Understanding and Customizing Your Telephone
Give your phone its own distinctive ring.
All
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Change the way your phone rings when you're
already on a call.
All
Ringing Options
Delay or remove the ring from an outside, SA, or
ICOM line button.
All except
single-line
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Index to Features by Activity
Understanding and
Customizing Your Telephone
Page 24
For
Feature Name
Change the volume levels for ringing, conversations
on the handset, and conversations on the
speakerphone.
MLX only
Volume (p. 618)
Change the language used (English, French, or
Spanish) at your extension; this also changes the
clock, which is 12-hour for English and 24-hour for
French or Spanish.
MLX display
phones only
Language (p. 364)
Learn about the display on your telephone.
Display
telephones
Display (p. 225)
Set contrast on your telephone.
Display
telephones
except
BIS-22D
Display (p. 225)
Use the line buttons on your telephone.
All
System Access/Intercom
Buttons (p. 573)
Personal Lines (p. 421)
Pools (p. 435)
Centrex Operation (p. 120)
Program buttons.
Multiline
telephones
Programming (p. 480)
Change the ringing sound on your telephone.
All
Personalized Ringing (p. 533)
Change the number of times calls ring.
All
Ringing Options (p. 533)
Use the display to screen incoming calls.
MLX display
phones only
Inspect (p. 325)
See what features are programmed on telephone
buttons.
MLX display
phones only
Inspect (p. 325)
For noisy environments: turn off the microphone at an System
MLX telephone (except a QCC) so that a user can
manager only
hear voice announcements but must lift the handset
to respond.
Microphone Disable (p. 386)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry
Page 25
0
Abbreviated Ring
See ‘‘Ringing Options’’ on page 533.
Account Code Entry/Forced Account
Code Entry
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
Feature Code
MLX Display Label
System Programming
Telephone users, operators, data users
Extension Directory, Extension Information, SMDR
All
All touch-tone telephones
*82
82
Account Code [Acct]
Enter extensions required to use account codes before
making an outside call:
●
Hardware
Maximum
Factory Setting
Description
Extensions→Account
Printer for SMDR Reports or PC and printer equipped with
Lucent Technologies CAS software needed for Account Code
Reports
16 characters (0–9, *)
Forced Account Code not assigned to any extensions
0
Use Account Code Entry to enter account codes (developed by accounting or
administrative personnel) for outside calls, both incoming and outgoing. These
codes appear on Station Message Detailed Recording (SMDR) reports, along with
other call information, and are used for billing or cost accounting to identify
outgoing calls with a project, client, or department. You can enter an account code
before or during a call or not at all. You can also change, correct, or cancel an
account code while the call is in progress.
Forced Account Code Entry is similar, but affects only outgoing calls and requires
a caller to enter an account code before placing an outside call. You can change
or correct an account code while a call is in progress, but you cannot cancel it.
To enter, change, or correct an account code during a call, activate the feature
and enter the account code. Only the person who enters the account code hears
the tones generated by dialing the account code number. To cancel an account
code (when permitted), activate the feature and exit without entering a code.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry
Page 26
Forced Account Code Entry, when activated for an extension, has the following
effects:
■
If you select an outside line on an SA button (by dialing a dial-out code) or
on an ICOM button (by dialing the Idle Line Access code) without entering
an account code, the call is blocked. Depending on the type of telephone
used, this may be indicated by the programmed Account Code Entry button
flashing, the SA button going to the off/idle state, or an intercept tone.
■
If you try to make an outside call on a personal line or Pool button without
entering an account code, there is no dial tone.
Considerations and Constraints
0
If SMDR is set to record outgoing calls only, you cannot enter an account code for
incoming calls.
The system does not validate account codes; it checks only the number of
characters entered (maximum of 16) and for completion (dialing # or pressing a
programmed Account Code Entry button).
Account codes can be no more than 16 characters in length, and only the digits
0–9 and the character * can be used.
Forced Account Code Entry allows you to enter account codes for incoming calls
and for incoming calls added to a conference call by using the Account Code
Entry feature. Account codes are not mandatory in these situations. (Outgoing,
outside calls added to a conference must have an account code.)
You cannot change an account code entered from another extension.
An incoming caller cannot hear tones as account codes are entered during a call.
An Account Code Entry button only activates and completes the account code
entry. It does not automatically enter an account code. A separate outside Auto
Dial button can be programmed with an account code number.
In Release 2.0 and prior systems, a user at an extension programmed with
Forced Account Code Entry must enter an account code to use Loudspeaker
Paging. In Release 2.1 and later systems, users at extensions programmed with
Forced Account Code Entry do not need to enter an account code to use
Loudspeaker Paging.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry
Page 27
Mode Differences
0
Behind Switch Mode
0
In Behind Switch mode, single-line telephones must be programmed through Idle
Line Preference to select an SA or ICOM button when the user lifts the handset to
make an outgoing call.
Telephone Differences
0
Queued Call Consoles
0
To make an outgoing call from a QCC, activate Account Code Entry by selecting
the feature from the Home screen or by pressing the Feature button and selecting
the Account Code Entry feature from the display. After the account code is dialed,
complete the entry by dialing #. Then select a personal line, SA, or Pool button on
which to make the call.
Normally, you cannot enter account codes when you answer a Group Coverage
call at a Group Cover button programmed on a multiline telephone. However,
when the QCC queue is programmed as the receiver for a coverage group, Cover
buttons are not required and the QCC system operator can enter account codes.
Those account codes appear on the SMDR printout. In this case, the Account
Code Entry feature must be activated from the display and cannot be activated by
dialing the feature code.
Other Multiline Telephones
0
An MLX telephone user can program account codes either individually, on outside
Auto Dial buttons, or as an entry in the Personal Directory (MLX-20L®
telephones). Enter an account code by pressing the Feature button and selecting
Account Code from the display.
On all other multiline telephones, activate Account Code Entry by pressing a
programmed Account Code Entry button or by pressing the Feature button and
dialing 82. After dialing the account code, complete the entry by pressing a
programmed Account Code Entry button or dialing #. On MLX display telephone
user can also activate and complete the feature by pressing the Feature button
and selecting the feature from the display. Once the entry is complete, select a
personal line, SA, or Pool button, lift the handset, and make the call.
NOTE:
Account codes cannot be entered with System Speed Dial or Personal
Speed Dial because pressing # to activate speed dial completes account
code entry.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry
Page 28
If Account Code Entry is assigned to a button, the LED flashes when you lift the
handset and attempt an outside call. On MLX display telephones, the feature
name appears on the display. Enter the account code and press the programmed
Account Code Entry button; the green LED goes from flashing to on. Then select
the outside line and proceed with the call.
Single-Line Telephones
0
Single-line telephones in Behind Switch mode by default cannot use Account
Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry. If this feature is to be used, the
single-line telephone must be programmed through Idle Line Preference to select
an SA or ICOM button so that the user hears inside dial tone when the handset is
lifted for an outgoing call.
Single-line telephones must have touch-tone dialing to use the Account Code
Entry feature.
When a single-line telephone user hears inside dial tone, the user can activate the
feature by dialing #82.
Single-line telephone users cannot enter account codes by using System Speed
Dial or Personal Speed Dial because these features are activated by dialing #.
Pressing # completes the entry of an account code and cannot also be used to
activate the Speed Dial features.
Feature Interactions
0
Authorization Code
If an account code is not entered, the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR
printout contains the authorization code used to obtain restriction
privileges. If an account code is entered at any time during a call, the
account code is stored in the SMDR record.
Auto Dial
Frequently used account code numbers can be programmed onto outside
Auto Dial buttons.
Automatic Line
Selection
A single-line telephone user can enter account codes only if Automatic
Line Selection is programmed to select an SA or ICOM button when the
user lifts the handset.
Automatic Route
Selection
When ARS is used on the system, enter an account code before or after
dialing the telephone number. If Forced Account Code Entry is assigned,
enter the code before dialing the ARS dial-out code.
Callback
Enter an account code before activating Callback. Otherwise, the account
code cannot be entered until after the call connects. Account codes
cannot be entered while the call is queued.
Conference
Enter a separate account code for each outside call added to a
conference. An account code does not carry over to other calls made at
the same time.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 29
Coverage
When answering calls on a programmed Primary Cover, Secondary
Cover, or Group Cover button, a receiver cannot enter an account code.
An account code must be entered from the sender’s telephone (if the
receiver tries to enter an account code, no error tone sounds, but the
account code does not appear on the SMDR printout). Because Cover
buttons are not required when the Queued Call Console (QCC) queue is
programmed as a receiver for a coverage group, a QCC system operator
can enter account codes, when then appear on the SMDR printout.
Digital Data Calls
Account codes can be entered for calls made by digital data workstations
and by video systems that support the use of # for feature codes. The
account code must be entered before the telephone number.
Directories
An MLX-20L telephone user can program an account code as a listing in
a Personal Directory. Enter the account code from the display by
activating Account Code Entry and selecting the directory entry
containing the actual account code.
Display
When the Account Code Entry feature is activated, the ACCT: message
on the display prompts the user to enter the account code. The account
code digits are shown next to the prompt as they are dialed.
Forward and
Follow Me
Extensions assigned Forced Account Code Entry can forward calls only
to extensions and not to outside numbers. The user hears a fast busy
signal if he or she tries to forward a call to an outside number.
HotLine
HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later systems) cannot use Account
Code Entry.
Personal Lines
When Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to an extension and the
user tries to dial an outside call on a personal line button without entering
the account code, the call does not go through.
Pools
When Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to an extension and the
user tries to dial an outside call on a Pool button without entering the
account code, the call does not go through.
Primary Rate Interface At an extension assigned to a PRI line, either enter an account code
(PRI) and T1
before the call is made or during the call. Forced account codes must be
entered before the call is made. An account code entered before a call is
treated as a restriction code for all the outgoing calls placed over the PRI
line.
Remote Access
Account codes cannot be entered on calls made using Remote Access.
SMDR
The account code is printed in the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR record. If
SMDR is programmed for outgoing calls only, an account code cannot be
entered for an incoming call.
Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dial or System Speed Dial cannot be used to dial
account codes because the # used to access the speed dialing signals an
exit from the Account Code Entry feature.
Transfer
When a call is transferred, the destination extension cannot change an
account code entered at the originating extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Alarm
Page 30
0
Administration
See ‘‘Integrated Administration’’ on page 328 and ‘‘Programming’’ on page 480.
Alarm
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Mode
Telephones
Programming Code
MLX Display Label
System Programming
Hardware
Operators
Extension Information
All
System operator consoles only (QCC or DLC)
*759
Alarm [Alarm]
AuxEquip→MaintAlarms
Alert device (bell or strobe) for Maintenance Alert
0
Description
Alarms provide either a visible or audible indication when the system detects a
problem that needs immediate attention.
■
Alarm Button. A programmed button on Direct-Line Consoles (DLCs) and
a factory-set button on Queued Call Consoles (QCCs) that alerts an
operator to system problems. The red LED next to the Alarm button on the
operator console turns on when the system detects a problem (such as a
problem with one of the lines/trunks or some other system error) that
requires immediate attention. It remains on until the problem is corrected.
■
Maintenance Alert. An alert device such as a bell or strobe light
connected to the line or trunk designated as a maintenance alarm jack. The
device rings or lights when the system detects a problem.
The red LED on the processor module turns on when the system detects a
problem that requires immediate attention. It remains lit until the problem is
corrected.
The red LED on some modules turns on when the system detects a
module-related problem, for example, a loss of service on a 100D module.
Considerations and Constraints
0
As soon as the system detects a problem, the red LED next to the Alarm button
turns on and/or the maintenance alert sounds or flashes.
All system operator consoles with an Alarm button receive the indication.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Alarm
Page 31
Telephone Differences
0
Alarm buttons can be programmed only on system operator consoles.
0
Direct-Line Consoles
An Alarm button is factory-assigned on an analog DLC but not on an MLX DLC.
An operator at an MLX DLC can use the Inspect feature to display the number of
alarms; an analog DLC operator cannot use Inspect.
On a system with fewer than 29 lines, an Alarm button is factory-assigned to
analog DLCs with 34 or more buttons. On a system with more than 29 lines,
Alarm is replaced with line 30.
The Alarm button is not a fixed feature and can be assigned to any available
button on an analog or MLX DLC.
Queued Call Consoles
0
Alarm buttons can be programmed only on system operator consoles.
An Alarm button is a fixed feature on a QCC.
A QCC operator can use the Inspect feature to display the number of alarms.
Feature Interactions
0
Automatic
Maintenance Busy
The red LED turns on next to the Alarm button on system operator
consoles, and the designated maintenance alert device sounds or flashes
when more than 50 percent of the lines/trunks in the pool are in a
maintenance-busy state.
CTI Link
When a CTI link is reset (called a broadcast reset), any programmed
Alarm buttons on operator consoles or connected alarm devices go on.
Inspect
Inspect can be used on an MLX DLC or a QCC to display the number of
alarms. Inspect cannot be used on an analog DLC.
Night Service
A line/trunk jack programmed as a maintenance alarm port cannot be
assigned to a Night Service group.
Personal Lines
A line/trunk jack used for a maintenance alarm cannot be assigned as a
personal line.
Pools
A line/trunk jack used for a maintenance alarm cannot be assigned to a
pool (Hybrid/PBX mode only).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Alarm Clock
Page 32
Alarm Clock
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
MLX Display Label
Telephone users, operators
None
All
MLX display and analog multiline telephones
AlarmClk [Alarm]
0
Description
If you have a display phone, you can use it as an alarm clock and set it to beep at
a particular time to remind you of an appointment, meeting, or other important
event. Until canceled, the alarm sounds every day at the set time.
Each MLX telephone and analog multiline display telephone has a timer to time
calls, meetings, breaks, or other events. When activated, the timer appears at the
top of the display, next to the date, and starts counting. It counts to 59 minutes
and 59 seconds, then resets to zero and continues counting.
To Set the Alarm
0
To set the alarm on an MLX display telephone, follow the procedure below:
1.
Press the Menu button.
2.
Select Alarm Clock [AlClk]. If this feature is not displayed, press the More
button. The display shows the alarm status (On/Off) and the time set.
3.
For English-language operation, dial a 4-digit time from 0100 to 1259 and
select am/pm to switch the displayed time from A.M. to P.M. or back again.
For French- or Spanish-language operation, dial a 4-digit time from 0000 to
2359. If you make an error, select Reset and redial.
4.
Select On.
5.
Press the Home button. A bell appears on the Home screen.
To set the alarm on an analog multiline telephone, follow the procedure below:
1.
Press the Set button. ALARM Off begins to flash.
2.
Press the Fwd button. ALARM On begins to flash.
3.
Press Set. Hour and am/pm begin to flash.
4.
Press Fwd or Rev until the setting you want appears on the display.
5.
Press Set. Minutes begins to flash.
6.
Press Fwd or Rev until the setting you want appears on the display.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Alarm Clock
Page 33
7.
Press the Exit button. A bell appears on the display next to the date.
0
To Cancel the Alarm
To cancel the alarm on an MLX display telephone, follow the procedure below:
1.
Press the Menu button.
2.
Select Alarm Clock [AlClk]. If this feature is not displayed, press the
More button.
3.
Select Off.
4.
Press the Home button. The bell disappears from the Home screen.
To cancel the alarm on an analog multiline telephone, follow the procedure below:
1.
Press the Set button. ALARM On begins to flash.
2.
Press the Fwd button. ALARM Off begins to flash.
3.
Press the Exit button. The bell disappears from the display.
Feature Interactions
Language Choice
0
Enter the time settings for Alarm Clock in accordance with the language
selection governing the extension. If the language selection is English,
the time setting for Alarm Clock must be entered in 12-hour format
(0100–1259), followed by either a 2 (A) for a.m. or a 7 (P) for p.m. If the
governing language selection is French or Spanish, the time setting must
be entered in 24-hour format (0000–2359).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
Page 34
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Telephone users, operators, data users
Access to Allowed Lists, Access to Disallowed Lists,
Allowed Lists, Disallowed Lists, Remote Access (DISA)
Information
All
All
Establish, change, or remove Allowed/Disallowed Lists:
●
Tables→AllowList/Disallow
Assign or remove Allowed/Disallowed Lists for individual
extensions:
●
Tables→AllowTo/DisallowTo
Assign or remove Allowed/Disallowed Lists for non-tie
lines/trunks used for Remote Access:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-TIE Lines→
Allow List/DisallowLst
Assign or remove Allowed/Disallowed Lists for tie trunks used
for Remote Access:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→TIE Lines→
Allow List/DisallowLst
Assign or remove Allowed/Disallowed Lists for each remote
access barrier code:
●
Maximums
Allowed Lists
Disallowed Lists
Factory Settings
Second Dial Tone Timer
Default Disallowed List
Entries
Assigned to
Description
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Barrier Code→
Allow List/DisallowLst
6 digits for each number (plus leading 1, if required)
10 numbers for each list. Release 3.1 and later systems may
also have an asterisk (*, star) preceding a leading star code.
8 lists for each system
8 lists for each extension
11 digits for each number (plus wildcard)
10 numbers for each list
8 lists for each system
8 lists for each extension
0 ms (range: 0–5,000 ms, increments of 200, entries rounded
down if not increments of 200)
Disallowed List 7
0, 10, 11, 1809, 1700, 1900, 976, 1 ppp976, * (p=any digit)
All VMI ports
0
Used in conjunction with calling restrictions (outward and toll), an Allowed List is a
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
Page 35
list of numbers that the caller is allowed to dial, despite restrictions. For example,
an Allowed List assigned to an outward-restricted extension can allow calls to
specific local numbers, such as (911) or toll numbers. For toll-restricted
extensions, an assigned Allowed List can allow calls to specific area codes and/or
exchanges needed for daily tasks.
A Disallowed List is a list of local or toll numbers that the extension user is not
allowed to dial, even if the extension is otherwise unrestricted. Disallowed Lists
can be used as an alternative to or in conjunction with calling restrictions.
Both Allowed Lists and Disallowed Lists are assigned to individual extensions.
Allowed and Disallowed Lists can also be used in conjunction with Remote
Access to restrict calls made through the system from remote locations. In this
case, Allowed and Disallowed Lists can be assigned to either specific remote
access barrier codes or (if barrier codes are not used) to specific types of
lines/trunks (all tie/DID and all non-tie/non-DID trunks).
When an Allowed List is assigned to a barrier code or remote access lines/trunks,
the remote access user using that code can dial specific numbers included in the
list. When a Disallowed List is assigned to a barrier code, the remote access user
using that code cannot reach the specific numbers included in the list.
If barrier codes are not used for remote access, then Allowed and Disallowed
Lists for remote access users can be assigned to all tie/DID trunks and all
non-tie/non-DID trunks.
A Night Service Allowed List can be programmed with up to 10 numbers that
anyone can dial without having to enter a Night Service password. For additional
information, see ‘‘Night Service’’ on page 398.
Star Codes and Allowed/Disallowed Lists
0
In some instances, after a person dials a star code (a star digit followed by a 2- or
3-digit number), the central office provides a second dial tone as a prompt for the
dialer to enter more digits. Generally, this second dial tone is immediate.
However, in cases when the second dial tone is delayed, calls can be misrouted
or dishonest users may be able to circumvent communications system dialing
restrictions.
In Release 3.1 and later systems, the system manager can enter the star digit (*)
in Allowed List and Disallowed List entries. The communications system can also
be programmed with a delay period (see ‘‘Second Dial Tone Timer’’ on page 545)
during which no dialing is allowed while the central office dial tone returns. If
dialing is attempted, the call is treated as though it had violated calling restrictions
and is not completed.
The star codes that the system recognizes are as follows:
■
2-digit codes: *(00–19, 40–99)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
■
Page 36
3-digit codes: *(200–399)
Restrictions are reset after leading star codes. This means that any star codes
that are not included in an Allowed or Disallowed List are not considered. The
digits that follow the star code are then compared again to the lists. If a caller dials
*67280, the Allowed/Disallowed List feature acts as though 280 were dialed. In
this case, star codes do not need to be placed into an Allowed or Disallowed List
to restrict calls to specific exchanges or area codes.
The programmed delay is also activated when the rotary telephone equivalent of a
star code is dialed (for example, 1170). Multiple leading star codes (such as
*67*70) are also handled by the system because the dialed number is checked
against Allowed and Disallowed Lists after each star code is detected.
Following are examples of how to set table entries to achieve specific results:
■
Disallow calls preceded by *67, but allow all other calls: Enter *67 as a
Disallowed List entry.
■
Disallow calls preceded by all star codes, but allow all other calls: Enter *
as a Disallowed List entry.
■
Disallow calls preceded by *67 or *69, but allow all other calls: Enter *67
as a Disallowed List entry, and enter *69 as a separate entry.
■
Disallow calls preceded by *67, calls to 900 numbers and 411, but allow all
other calls: Enter *67, 900, and 411 as separate Disallowed List entries.
Following are examples of specific results that cannot be achieved through
programming the system:
■
Disallow *67 when dialing a specific exchange.
■
Disallow *67 only when it is followed by *69.
Default Disallowed Lists
0
In Release 3.1 and later systems, the system is factory-set with a default
Disallowed List (List 7), which includes the following entries: 0, 10, 11, 1809,
1700, 1900, 976, 1ppp976, *, (p=any digit). This list is automatically assigned to
any port programmed as a VMI port.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
The system manager should assign this list to any extension that does not
need access to the numbers in the list.
Disallowed Lists and VMI Ports
0
In Release 3.1 and later systems, ports assigned as Generic VMI or Integrated
VMI are assigned the default Disallowed List.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
!
Page 37
SECURITYlALERT:
If the system manager wants to allow access to the voice messaging
system Outcalling feature, any entries in the default Disallowed List apply to
Outcalling calls. Any changes to the default Disallowed List entries and
other restrictions must be considered carefully in order to minimize the
potential for toll fraud.
If the system manager changes a port to a non-VMI port, the default Disallowed
List is not removed from the port. If the default Disallowed List should be removed,
the system manager must remove it from the port through system programming.
Considerations and Constraints
0
A Disallowed List takes precedence over an Allowed List. If a telephone number is
on both an Allowed List and a Disallowed List assigned to an individual extension,
the caller cannot complete a call to that number.
If a zero (0) is programmed as the first digit of an Allowed List entry, any toll
restriction assigned to an extension is removed for calls placed through a toll
operator.
Individual Allowed and Disallowed Lists are numbered 0 through 7. Within each
list, there are 10 entries numbered 0 through 9.
The Pause character (entered by pressing the Hold button) can be used as a wild
card character in Disallowed Lists, for example, to indicate that calls to a given
exchange are restricted in every area code. The Pause character is shown on the
planning form as p. Wild card characters are not permitted in Allowed List entries.
The Pause character does not act as a wild card for the * character.
When used in conjunction with Remote Access, Allowed and Disallowed Lists are
assigned to specific barrier codes or to types of lines/trunks: all tie/DID trunks, or
all non-tie/DID trunks. Allowed and Disallowed Lists cannot be assigned to trunks
on an individual basis.
When used with Automatic Route Selection (ARS), Allowed and Disallowed Lists
are not applied until the caller dials the ARS code and a pool is selected.
Because restrictions imposed by a Disallowed List apply to the extension used to
initiate a call to an outside number, a user with a restricted extension can
circumvent restrictions by asking an operator with an unrestricted console to
connect an outside call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
Feature Interactions
Page 38
0
Auto Dial
A user with a restricted extension cannot dial a restricted number (outside
or toll) by using an Auto Dial button unless the number is on the Allowed
List for that extension. A user cannot dial an outside number by using an
Auto Dial button if the number is on a Disallowed List.
Automatic Route
Selection
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) checks Allowed and Disallowed Lists
before choosing the route for a call. This prevents users with restricted
extensions from dialing numbers that are not on an Allowed List. ARS
also prevents a user from dialing numbers on a Disallowed List.
Calling Restrictions
When used with calling restrictions, Allowed Lists can permit the dialing of
specific numbers, such as emergency numbers, from an outward- or
toll-restricted extension.
Conference
A user with a restricted extension cannot add a participant (outside or toll)
to a conference call unless the participant’s number is on the Allowed List
for that extension.
A user cannot add an outside number to a conference call if the number is
on a Disallowed List.
Directories
A user with a restricted extension cannot use the System Directory to dial
a restricted number unless the System Speed Dial number is marked or
the number is on the Allowed List for that extension.
Forward and
Follow Me
A user with a restricted extension cannot forward calls to a restricted
(outside or toll) number unless the number is on the Allowed List for that
extension. If the number is on the Disallowed List for that extension, the
call cannot be forwarded. When activating Forward, a user with a
restricted extension does not hear an error tone, but when a call is
received, the Forward is denied if the number is not on the Allowed List.
HotLine
Allowed and Disallowed Lists can be assigned to HotLine extensions
(Release 5.0 and later systems).
Night Service
A Night Service Emergency Allowed List can be programmed with up to
10 numbers that any user can dial without having to enter the Night
Service password. For additional information, see ‘‘Night Service’’ on
page 398.
Personal Lines
A user with a restricted extension cannot dial a restricted number (outside
or toll) on a personal line button unless the number is on the Allowed List
for that extension. If the number is on a Disallowed List, the user cannot
dial it.
Recall/Timed Flash
If Recall is used on a personal line or Pool button—or, in Release 2.0 and
later systems, on an SA or ICOM button—to access an outside loop-start
line, the accessed line is kept, the user hears outside dial tone, and
calling restrictions are reapplied.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Allowed/Disallowed Lists
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 39
Remote Access
Both Allowed and Disallowed Lists are assigned as items of the class of
restriction (COR) for the Remote Access feature. When barrier codes are
not used, Allowed and Disallowed Lists are assigned to lines/trunks
systemwide. When barrier codes are used, Allowed and Disallowed Lists
are assigned to individual barrier codes.
Speed Dial
When a marked System Speed Dial number (the dialed number is
suppressed from the display) is used to dial a number, calling restrictions
(such as toll or outward restrictions, or Allowed and Disallowed Lists)
assigned to that extension are overridden. When an unmarked System
Speed Dial or a Personal Speed Dial number is used to dial a restricted
number, the call cannot be completed unless the number is on the
Allowed List for that extension.
Toll Type
When lines/trunks with different toll types are connected to the system
(for example, basic lines/trunks and PRI facilities), a toll prefix (0 or 1)
may be required for toll calls on some lines/trunks but not on others. In
this case, two Disallowed List entries are required to restrict users from
dialing specific area codes and/or telephone numbers. For example, to
restrict users from dialing calls in the 505 area code on both toll types,
one entry must be 1505 and the other entry must be 505. When the
Disallowed List is assigned to an extension, the 505 entry restricts users
from making calls to the 505 area code on lines/trunks that do not require
a toll prefix, and the 1505 entry restricts users from making calls
(including local calls) to the 505 area code on lines/trunks that do require
a toll prefix. The same rules apply to Allowed Lists.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Authorization Code
Page 40
Authorization Code
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
Feature Code
MLX Display Label
System Programming
Telephone users, data users
Extension Information, Authorization Code Information,
SMDR
All
All (touch-tone telephones except QCC)
*80
80
Auth Code [Auth]
Assign or remove Authorization Code for an extension:
Extension→More→Auth Code→Enter
Assign home extension in SMDR Report:
●
●
Options→SMDR→Auth Code→Home Extension Number
Assign actual authorization code in SMDR Report:
●
Options→SMDR→Auth Code→Authorization Code
To print a report on all authorization codes on a system:
● More→Print→Auth Code
Maximums
Number of Digits in
Authorization Code
Factory Settings
SMDR Report
Authorization codes
Description
11 (range 2–11) (digits 0–9, *)
Home Extension Number
Not assigned to any extensions
0
The Authorization Code feature allows you to pick up someone else’s telephone,
enter your authorization code, and complete a call with the restrictions that apply
to your own telephone (home extension). This includes toll restrictions, outward
restriction, Facility Restriction Level (FRL), Allowed Lists, Disallowed Lists,
Forced Account Code Entry, Night Service Exclusion List, and dial access to
pools. All other functions on the telephone are those of the extension you are
using, not your home extension.
Each entry of an authorization code provides restriction privileges for a single
phone call. If you put the first call on hold and start to make an outside call, the
Authorization Code button’s green LED goes off. If you wish to make another call,
you must reactivate the Authorization Code feature in order to obtain the
restriction privileges of the home extension. Authorization codes can also be used
for call control and call accounting through the SMDR printout. SMDR may be
programmed so that when no account code is entered, either the home extension
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Authorization Code
Page 41
number or the authorization code is recorded in the ACCOUNT field. The factory
setting lists the home extension number in the ACCOUNT field.
An authorization code can range from 2 to 11 characters and must be unique
across the system. However, more than one user can use an authorization code
simultaneously. Authorization codes do not have a set, systemwide length.
Through system programming, the system manager can assign one authorization
code for each extension. One Authorization Code button can be programmed on
any MLX or analog multiline telephone (except QCCs). A button with an LED is a
good idea.
If a user does not have a physical telephone, a phantom extension may be
programmed as a home extension to allow the user to use restricted telephones
and for call control and accounting purposes.
The Authorization Code feature can be activated by modems, fax machines, and
other devices that can dial or enter #80 and then the authorization code followed
by a #.
Activating an Authorization Code
0
You can pick up any telephone (except a QCC) in the system and use an
authorization code. You obtain home extension calling privileges by entering your
home extension’s authorization code. Do this in one of the following ways:
■
Press a programmed Authorization Code button and then enter the
assigned authorization code.
■
Press the Feature button on an MLX display telephone and then select
Auth Code.
■
Press the Feature button on an MLX telephone or analog multiline
telephone and dial 80.
■
Press #80 while off hook on an SA/ICOM button.
If you activate the feature while on hook, the feature selects an SA/ICOM button
and turns on the speakerphone, if present.
After you activate the feature, the green LED (if present) next to a programmed
Authorization Code button starts to flash slowly to indicate that you may enter the
code’s digits. An MLX display telephone shows Auth:, and an analog multiline
display telephone shows Auth?.
Entering an Authorization Code
0
While you enter the assigned authorization code, you hear inside dial tone. If you
do not enter the code within 15 seconds, the feature is deactivated.
If a telephone with a display is used, the display shows asterisks instead of the
entered digits.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Authorization Code
Page 42
To complete entry of the authorization code, either press a programmed
Authorization Code button again or dial a # to signify the end of the code. If the
entered authorization code matches an assigned code, you continue to hear
inside dial tone and can start dialing the telephone number.
The green LED associated with a programmed Authorization Code button
becomes steady to indicate that an authorization code has been successfully
entered. The LED remains steady as long as the Authorization Code feature
remains active.
If the authorization code is not valid, you hear an error tone (a high tone followed
by a low tone). The green LED associated with a programmed Authorization Code
button goes off to indicate that the Authorization Code feature is not active. An
MLX display telephone shows the message Auth Code Not Valid, and an
analog multiline display telephone shows the message Error.
Deactivating an Authorization Code
0
Each entry of an authorization code is good for only one phone call. After
completing a call, the current extension loses home extension privileges. It also
loses privileges for subsequent calls after putting a call on hold or after initiating
Recall, Headset Hang Up, or Park features. If a far-end disconnect is not received
from the central office, you must hang up or select another outside line to
deactivate the Authorization Code feature.
After the feature is deactivated, the green LED next to the Authorization Code
button (if present) turns off.
Considerations and Constraints
0
An authorization code can be entered only while hearing inside dial tone.
Incoming calls are not affected by an authorization code.
There is no limit to the number of users who can use the same authorization code
simultaneously.
Authorization codes cannot contain a # or begin with a *.
HotLine extensions cannot use authorization codes.
An authorization code must be no fewer than 2 and no more than 11 digits long.
An authorization code must be unique across the system.
Telephone Differences
0
Queued Call Console
0
The Authorization Code feature cannot be activated on a QCC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Authorization Code
Page 43
Analog Multiline Telephones
0
At an analog multiline telephone with a General Purpose Adapter connected to it
and set for Auto operation, you must lift the handset before activating
Authorization Code. Do not use the Spkrphone button.
Single-Line Telephones
0
On single-line telephones, entry of an authorization code is activated by dialing
#80. The entry is completed by dialing #. Single-line telephones must have
touch-tone dialing and must be programmed through Idle Line Preference (using
centralized telephone programming) to select an SA/ICOM button when the user
picks up the handset or activates the speakerphone.
On a single-line telephone, an authorization code must be entered before
accessing an outside line.
Single-line telephone users cannot enter authorization codes by using a System
Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial code because these features are activated by
dialing #. Pressing # completes the entry of an authorization code. Therefore, it
cannot also be used to activate speed dial features.
Feature Interactions
Account Code Entry
0
If an account code is not entered, the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR
printout contains the authorization code or the home extension used to
obtain restriction privileges. If an account code is entered at any time
during a call, the account code is stored in the SMDR record.
If the extension used to make a call is assigned Forced Account Code
Entry, the caller is not forced to enter the account code while using the
Authorization Code feature.
If the home extension is assigned Forced Account Code Entry, the caller
must enter an account code before entering an authorization code.
Automatic Route
Selection
An authorization code must be entered before dialing the ARS access
code.
Conference
Enter an authorization code before each outside call for a conference.
You may enter different authorization codes for different outside calls,
which is useful if different privileges are needed for different outside calls.
Digital Data Calls
Data calls can use authorization calls. If Account Code Entry is also used,
the authorization code must be entered after the account code.
Authorization codes can be used by video systems that allow the use of #
for feature codes.
Headset Options
Pressing the Headset Hang Up button deactivates the Authorization Code
feature.
Hold
Initiating hold after entering an authorization code deactivates the
Authorization Code feature for subsequent calls.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Authorization Code
Last Number Dial
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 44
For security reasons, an authorization code is not saved by the Last
Number Dial feature.
Authorization Code does not affect Last Number Dial on the extension
you are using or on your home extension. You can retrieve the last
number dialed on the phone you are using.
Night Service
An authorization code can be used when Night Service is activated.
Park
Initiating Park after entering an authorization code deactivates the
Authorization Code feature. An authorization code does not need to be
entered to pick up a parked call.
Remote Access
A caller cannot enter an authorization code on a remote access call.
Saved Number Dial
For security, the authorization code is not saved by the Saved Number
Dial feature.
Authorization Code does not affect Saved Number Dial on the extension
you are using or your home extension. You can retrieve the saved
number on the phone you are using.
SMDR
Outgoing calls made using an authorization code are recorded in the
SMDR record.
If an account code is not entered, the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR
printout contains the authorization code used to obtain either restriction
privileges or the home extension number, depending on how SMDR is
programmed. If an account code is entered at any time during a call, the
account code is stored in the SMDR record instead.
Speed Dial
Users cannot enter authorization codes by using a System Speed Dial or
Personal Speed Dial code because these features are activated by
dialing #. Pressing # completes the entry of an authorization code and
cannot also be used to activate speed dial features.
System
Renumbering
If extensions are renumbered, authorization codes remain with the logical
IDs where they were originally assigned. System Renumbering also
removes all phantom extensions and their authorization codes.
Transfer
If a user wants to transfer a call to an outside number, the authorization
code must be entered at the beginning of the transfer to obtain home
extension privileges. In this case, one-touch Transfer does not work.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Answer All
Page 45
Auto Answer All
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
MLX Display Label
Hardware
Telephone users, DLC operators, data users
Extension Information
All
Analog multiline
*754
AutoAns All (in centralized telephone programming)
General Purpose Adapter (GPA) needed to connect
answering device to analog multiline telephone; 502C
headset adapter needed for headset options.
Description
0
Auto Answer All is used on analog multiline telephones only, including analog
Direct-Line Consoles (DLCs) with a modem, answering machine, or other
answering device connected through a General Purpose Adapter (GPA) to
answer both inside and outside calls when the user is not available.
To activate Auto Answer All, slide the switch on the GPA to Auto and press the
Auto Answer All button. The green LED next to the button turns on, and incoming
calls are answered automatically.
To deactivate the feature, either slide the switch on the GPA to Basic or press the
Auto Answer All button. If the button is pressed to deactivate the feature, the
green LED next to the button turns off. In either case, the telephone returns to
normal operation.
Auto Answer All can also be used with a headset adapter to allow an analog
multiline telephone user or analog DLC operator with a headset to be connected
automatically to ringing calls. A tone heard through the headset signals an
incoming call.
A programmed button activates and deactivates Auto Answer All. Select the lines
to be answered by the device by programming Immediate Ring or Delay Ring as
the ringing option. Lines that are not to be answered should be programmed as
No Ring.
Telephone Differences
0
Queued Call Consoles
0
Auto Answer All cannot be used on a QCC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Answer All
Page 46
Other Multiline Telephones
0
Auto Answer All cannot be used on MLX telephones, cordless telephones, or
wireless telephones.
Single-Line Telephones
0
Auto Answer All cannot be used on single-line telephones. This includes
single-line telephones with speakerphones.
Some single-line telephones (such as the 8110) have their own telephone-based
Auto Answer feature, which can be used with a Release 4.0 or later MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System.
Considerations and Constraints
0
When Auto Answer All is used, all voice announcements (including Voice
Announce to Busy) should be disabled because the device connected to the GPA
cannot answer voice-announced calls.
Auto Answer All cannot be used with a Hands-Free Unit (HFU).
Occasionally a second alert (or zip) tone may sound on incoming or intercom
calls. This is normal.
Auto Answer All should be used instead of Auto Answer Intercom to allow an
answering device to answer intercom calls. Auto Answer Intercom can cause
intercom calls to be dropped.
Feature Interactions
0
Auto Answer
Intercom
Both Auto Answer All and Auto Answer Intercom can be programmed on
the same extension, but they cannot be used at the same time. Auto
Answer Intercom should not be used with answering devices.
Auto Dial
At an analog multiline telephone with a General Purpose Adapter (GPA)
connected and set for Auto operation, you must lift the handset before
pressing an Auto Dial button. Do not use the Spkrphone button.
Coverage
Auto Answer All is used when a receiver with an analog multiline
telephone wants Individual or Group Coverage calls to be answered by
an answering machine connected to the extension.
Forward and
Follow Me
An answering device connected to an analog multiline telephone can
answer forwarded calls when Auto Answer All is activated.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Answer All
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 47
Group Calling
Members in a calling group with analog multiline telephones can use Auto
Answer All when answering machines are connected to their extensions.
When the feature is activated, all incoming calls ringing on the calling
group member’s extension—both calls for the calling group and calls to
the member’s own extension—are answered automatically by the
answering machine.
Ringing Options
An analog multiline telephone user selects the lines to be answered by
programming them for Immediate or Delay Ring and selects the lines not
to be answered by programming them for No Ring. If the device is to
answer only inside calls, all personal lines (outside lines assigned to
buttons on the telephone) must be programmed for No Ring.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When Auto Answer All is activated, all calls received at an SA Ring,
ICOM Ring, SA Voice, or ICOM Voice button can be answered
automatically by the device connected to the GPA. If Shared SA buttons
are assigned, only the principal extension should be programmed for
Immediate Ring to prevent the call from being answered at the principal
extension and at extensions with the Shared SA button.
Voice Announce
Voice-announced calls received at an analog multiline telephone are not
answered by a device connected through a GPA because ringing current
is not sent to the device.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Answer Intercom
Page 48
Auto Answer Intercom
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
MLX Display Label
Hardware
Telephone users, operators
Extension Information
All
Analog multiline
*753
AutoAnsIcom (in centralized telephone programming)
Hands-Free Unit (HFU) is used to answer inside calls.
0
Description
Some older models of analog multiline telephones do not have built-in
speakerphones. People with these telephones can still answer inside calls without
lifting the handset by using Auto Answer Intercom with an optional Hands-Free
Unit (HFU).
NOTE:
MLX telephone users can automatically answer calls on their
speakerphones if the Hands-Free Answer on Intercom button (HFAI) is
activated.
To activate Auto Answer Intercom, press the Auto Answer Intercom button. The
green LED next to the button turns on. The HFU turns on automatically when an
inside call is received.
To deactivate the feature, press the Auto Answer Intercom button again. The
green LED turns off, and the HFU does not automatically turn on when an
intercom call is received.
Mode Differences
0
When Auto Answer Intercom is activated in Hybrid/PBX mode and a call is
received on an SA button, the HFU turns on, even if the button is programmed for
Delay Ring or No Ring.
Telephone Differences
0
Queued Call Consoles
0
Auto Answer Intercom cannot be used on a QCC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Answer Intercom
Page 49
Other Multiline Telephones
0
Auto Answer Intercom cannot be used on MLX telephones, cordless telephones,
or wireless telephones.
Single-Line Telephones
0
Auto Answer Intercom cannot be used on single-line telephones, whether or not
they have speakerphones.
Some single-line telephones (such as the 8110) have their own telephone-based
Auto Answer feature, which can be used with a Release 4.0 or later MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System.
Considerations and Constraints
0
Auto Answer All should be used instead of Auto Answer Intercom to allow an
answering device to answer intercom calls. Auto Answer Intercom can cause
intercom calls to be dropped.
When Auto Answer Intercom is activated in Hybrid/PBX mode and a call is
received on an SA button, the HFU turns on, even if the button is programmed for
Delay Ring or No Ring.
Feature Interactions
0
Auto Answer All
Both Auto Answer All and Auto Answer Intercom can be programmed on
the same telephone, but they cannot be used at the same time.
Coverage
Auto Answer Intercom does not allow a receiver with an analog multiline
telephone to use an HFU to answer calls received on a Primary Cover,
Secondary Cover, or Group Cover button.
Primary Rate Interface Incoming calls on a line that is a member of a B-channel group
(PRI) and T1
programmed for routing by dial plan are not eligible for answer by
Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI).
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When Auto Answer Intercom is activated, the Hands-Free Unit (HFU)
answers inside calls received on an SA button. The HFU does not answer
calls on a Shared SA button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Dial
Page 50
Auto Dial
0
At a Glance
0
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Inside
Outside
MLX Display Labels
Telephone users, DLC operators, data users
Extension Information
All
All except QCC and single-line telephones
Maximums
28 digits, including special characters
!
*22 + ext. no.
*21 + number
Auto Dial, Inside [AutoD,In]
Auto Dial, Outside [AutoD,Out]
CAUTION:
Before testing emergency numbers, call the regular number for the
organization(s) the emergency number reaches. Find out the correct
procedure for testing an emergency number without disrupting emergency
operations.
0
Description
Use Auto Dial buttons for one-touch dialing of frequently called telephone
numbers. You can program types of Auto Dial buttons:
■
Inside Auto Dial. This button automatically dials any extension or group
extension in the system such as a co-worker, calling group, fax machine, or
voice mail system. An operator can also program inside Auto Dial buttons
for park zone extension numbers.
When an inside Auto Dial button is programmed, the user can see the
status of the extension associated with the button; the green LED next to
the button is on when a person at the extension is on a call, when Do Not
Disturb is on, or when the extension is forced idle for centralized telephone
programming or system programming.
■
Outside Auto Dial. This button automatically dials frequently called
telephone numbers, as well as account codes, long-distance company
access codes, bank access codes, or emergency contact numbers.
Considerations and Constraints
0
When an Auto Dial button is used to make a call, the green LED next to the button
does not turn on.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Dial
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 51
Only company extension numbers should be programmed on inside Auto Dial
buttons. Account codes, long-distance company access codes, and outside
telephone numbers should be programmed on outside Auto Dial buttons.
If a user tries to program an incomplete extension number on an inside Auto Dial
button, the system provides an error tone and the button remains as programmed.
If numbers are dialed incorrectly by outside Auto Dial, it is possible that the digits
are being dialed before a central office dial tone is received. In this case, a Pause
character should be programmed as the first digit of the dialed number in Key
mode and the digit after the dial-out code in Hybrid/PBX mode.
To enter special characters in a telephone number programmed on an outside
Auto Dial button, use Conf for the Flash character, Drop for the Stop character,
and Hold for the Pause character (see Table 1). These special characters cannot
be programmed on inside Auto Dial buttons. If the Stop character is the last
character in the number, it has no effect on how the Auto Dial button functions.
Table 1.
Special Characters for Outside Auto Dial
Press See1 Means
Drop† s Stop. Halts dialing within a sequence of automatically dialed numbers. For
example, an outside Auto Dial button may be programmed with a password and
a Stop, followed by a telephone number. To use Auto Dial with a Stop in the
sequence, press the button to dial the password, listen for the dialing and
connection, and press the button again to dial the telephone number.
Hold
p
Pause. Inserts a 1.5-second pause in the dialing sequence. Multiple consecutive
pauses are allowed.
Conf†
f
Flash. Sends a switchhook flash. Must be the first entry in the dialing sequence.
##
#
End of Dialing (for extension programming only). Use at the end of a dialing
sequence to indicate that you have finished dialing or to separate one group of
dialed digits from another, such as account code and number dialed.
#
#
End of Dialing. Use at the end of a dialing sequence to indicate that you have
finished dialing or to separate one group of dialed digits from another.
1.
†
Display phones only.
Not available on MLC-5 cordless telephones.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, when a call is forwarded to a multiline telephone
that has an inside Auto Dial button programmed for the forwarding telephone, the
green LED next to the Auto Dial button does not flash.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Dial
Page 52
Mode Differences
1
Hybrid/PBX Mode
1
In Hybrid/PBX mode, the system automatically turns on the speakerphone and
selects an SA button when you press an inside or outside Auto Dial button before
lifting the handset.
Key Mode
1
In Key mode, the system automatically turns on the speakerphone and selects an
outside line button when you press an outside Auto Dial button without lifting the
handset. When you press an inside Auto Dial button without lifting the handset,
the system automatically turns on the speakerphone and selects an ICOM button.
Behind Switch Mode
1
In Behind Switch mode, the system automatically selects the prime line button
and turns on the speakerphone whenever the user presses an outside Auto Dial
button. If the Automatic Line Selection sequence has been changed to select the
ICOM button, press the prime line or outside line button before pressing an
outside Auto Dial button. Pressing an inside Auto Dial button without lifting the
handset turns on the speakerphone; the system automatically selects an ICOM
button but not an outside line.
Telephone Differences
1
Direct-Line Consoles
1
Inside Auto Dial can be programmed onto available buttons on a DLC. Use the
buttons to transfer a call, make an inside call, or determine availability of the
extension.
Queued Call Consoles
1
Use the Personal or System Directory instead of outside Auto Dial buttons, which
cannot be programmed on the Queued Call Console (QCC). The Extension
Directory or DSS buttons can be used instead of inside Auto Dial buttons.
Other Multiline Telephones
1
All multiline telephone users can program and use Auto Dial buttons. When using
an MLX-20L telephone, use Personal Directory in place of Auto Dial. On an MLX
display telephone, select the feature from the display to program it.
At an analog multiline telephone with a General Purpose Adapter (GPA)
connected to it and set for Auto operation, you must lift the handset before
pressing an Auto Dial button. Do not use the Spkrphone button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Dial
Page 53
Single-Line Telephones
1
Single-line telephone users cannot program Auto Dial buttons.
Feature Interactions
1
Account Code Entry
You can program frequently used account code numbers onto outside
Auto Dial buttons.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
and Calling
Restrictions
A user with a restricted extension cannot dial a restricted number
(outward or toll) using an Auto Dial button unless the number is on the
Allowed List for that extension.
Automatic Route
Selection
You cannot program Automatic Route Selection (ARS) dial-out codes on
inside Auto Dial buttons. You can program an ARS dial-out code on an
outside Auto Dial button.
Conference
Press the Conf button to enter the Flash special character in a telephone
number programmed on an outside Auto Dial button. Press the Drop
button to enter the Stop special character in a telephone number
programmed on an outside Auto Dial button.
Digital Data Calls
A terminal adapter can make a call using an Auto Dial button by dialing
the virtual number of the Auto Dial button (for example #01). A video
system that supports the use of # for entering feature codes can use Auto
Dial in the same fashion.
Display
When you press a programmed Auto Dial button, the digits appear on the
display as if you were dialing them from the dialpad, and the number is
automatically dialed. An MLX telephone user can select Auto Dial from
the display only during programming.
Do Not Disturb
When you activate Do Not Disturb, the green LED turns on next to all
inside Auto Dial buttons programmed at your extension.
Forward and
Follow Me
When a call is forwarded to a multiline telephone that has an Auto Dial
button programmed for the forwarding telephone, the green LED next to
the Auto Dial button does not flash.
Group Calling
The Calls-in-Queue-Alarm button for a calling group is assigned on a
multiline telephone by programming an inside Auto Dial button with the
calling group’s extension number. When a DSS is not available, the group
supervisor uses Auto Dial buttons programmed with each calling group
member’s extension to monitor group member availability.
Headset Options
If headset operation is activated on the telephone or console, select a line
button before using Auto Dial to dial an extension or an outside number.
Hold
The Hold button is used to enter the Pause special character in a
telephone number programmed on an Auto Dial button.
You cannot dial an outside number using an Auto Dial button when the
number is on a Disallowed List assigned to the extension.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Dial
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 54
Last Number Dial
A number you dial by pressing a programmed outside Auto Dial button is
saved for Last Number Dial as if you dialed it with the dialpad, but special
characters do not work. An extension dialed when you press a
programmed inside Auto Dial button is not saved for Last Number Dial.
Microphone Disable
When an MLX telephone user’s microphone is disabled, pressing an Auto
Dial button turns on the speakerphone so the user can hear the number
being dialed. However, the user must lift the handset to talk once the call
is answered.
Paging
You can program an extension for a speakerphone paging group on an
inside Auto Dial button.
Park
An operator can program park zone codes on inside Auto Dial buttons. An
inside Auto Dial button can also be programmed with a user’s or system
operator’s own extension number and can be used to park calls. When
the system is programmed for one-touch Hold with manual completion,
you hear a busy signal when parking a call at your own extension number
and must complete the transfer by hanging up or pressing the Transfer
button.
Personal Lines
Only an outside Auto Dial button—not an inside one—can be used on a
personal line.
Pools
Pool dial-out codes cannot be programmed on inside Auto Dial buttons. A
pool dial-out code can be programmed on an outside Auto Dial button
when a telephone number is also included.
Recall/Timed Flash
The Conf button is used to enter the Flash special character, which
simulates pressing the Recall button, in a telephone number
programmed on an Auto Dial button.
If Recall is used during an inside call made on an Auto Dial button, the
call is disconnected and the user hears inside dial tone.
Saved Number Dial
A number you dial by pressing a programmed outside Auto Dial button
can be saved for Saved Number Dial by pressing the programmed Saved
Number Dial button.
Signal/Notify
You cannot program a Signal button and an Auto Dial button for the same
extension. Attempting to program both types of buttons for one extension
causes the system to erase the button that has been programmed first.
SMDR
All numbers dialed on an outside call using Auto Dial are recorded on the
SMDR report.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When you press an inside Auto Dial button, the system automatically
selects an SA or ICOM button and turns on the speakerphone. When you
press an outside Auto Dial button, the system automatically selects an
outside line button in Key mode, a prime line button in Behind Switch
mode, or an SA button in Hybrid/PBX mode.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Auto Dial
Transfer
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 55
To transfer calls, you can press inside Auto Dial buttons instead of dialing
extension numbers. To use the One-Touch Transfer option, you must
program inside Auto Dial buttons for extensions to which you transfer
calls. When an operator transfers a call and it returns unanswered, the
green LED next to the Auto Dial button flashes to indicate the extension
from which the call is returning. Only system operators receive this
indication.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference
Page 56
Automatic Line Selection and
Ringing/Idle Line Preference
1
At a Glance
1
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Ringing/Idle Line
Preference
On
Off
ALS sequence
Telephone users, operators, data users
Extension Information
All
All
Begin button sequence
End button sequence
MLX Display Labels
*14
**14
Maximums
Buttons for each extension
in ALS sequence
Factory Settings
Ringing/Idle Line
Preference
ALS Sequence by Mode
MLX Telephone
Analog Multiline
Telephones
Single-Line Telephones
Direct-Line Consoles
Queued Call Consoles
Description
*343
*344
(centralized telephone programming only for single-line
telephones)
Line Prefer [LnPrf]
AutoLineSel (centralized telephone programming only)
8
On
Hybrid/PBX
3 SA
3 SA
Key
8 personal lines
8 personal lines
3 SA
2 ICOM
2 SA +
8 personal lines
6 personal lines
5 Call (fixed)
Behind Switch
1 prime line
1 prime line
1 prime line
1 prime line +
7 personal lines
1
Automatic Line Selection (ALS) and Ringing/Idle Line Preference are two closely
related features. Ringing/Idle Line Preference directs the system to automatically
select a specific line button for making or answering a call, while ALS specifies the
order in which buttons should be selected.
Ringing/Idle Line Preference
1
Ringing/Idle Line Preference is a single option that controls two aspects of an
extension’s behavior: selection of a line when a call arrives and selection of a line
when a user hangs up. Turn this option on or off for each extension through either
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference
Page 57
extension programming or centralized telephone programming, using the display
or programming codes. When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on for an extension,
the system selects a line button automatically, as follows:
■
Ringing Line Preference. Selects a ringing outside line, SA or ICOM
button, or Cover button; that is, the red LED turns on next to the button with
the ringing call. If you lift the handset or press the Speaker button, you are
automatically connected to the ringing call.
The button must be programmed for Immediate Ring or Delay Ring. The
red LED next to a button programmed for No Ring does not turn on unless
you press that button to select that line. See ‘‘Ringing Options’’ on page
533 for additional information.
■
Idle Line Preference. Selects an available outside line, SA, or ICOM
button for an outgoing call. If you lift the handset or press the Speaker
button when no call is ringing, the red LED turns on next to an available line
button, and you are automatically connected to that line.
On is the factory setting for Ringing/Idle Line Preference for all extensions. If
Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned off for an extension, no line button at that
extension is ever selected automatically. The red LED is never on until you press
the line button with a ringing call (flashing green LED) or an available line button
(green LED off) to make a call.
Automatic Line Selection
1
When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on at an extension, the system uses
the programmed ALS sequence to select an idle SA or ICOM button or outside
line button for originating a call. When you lift the handset or press the Speaker
button without selecting a line button, the red LED next to the first button in the
programmed sequence turns on and you are connected to that line. If the first line
is busy, the system selects the second button in the sequence, and so on.
For example, if you normally make toll calls, a WATS line assigned to the
extension can be programmed as the first line in the sequence, and local lines as
the second, third, and so on. When you lift the handset or press the Speaker
button, the WATS line, if available, is selected automatically.
On a multiline telephone, override ALS by pressing the desired line button before
you lift the handset or press Speaker. The red LED next to the button goes on.
Up to eight line buttons (except on single-line telephones) can be programmed in
the ALS sequence for an extension, either through centralized telephone
programming or through extension programming, using programming codes only.
NOTE:
Your current Automatic Line Selection table is deleted immediately after
you press *14. There is no way to cancel the operation. You must program
new selections and then press **14 to end the operation.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference
Page 58
Table 1 shows the factory-set ALS sequence for each kind of telephone according
to operating mode. When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on, buttons are selected
in the order shown. For multiline telephones, including operator consoles, the
factory-set sequence begins with the lower left button, moves up in the first
column of buttons, then moves to the bottom of the next column on the right, and
finally moves up until the maximum of eight buttons is included in the sequence.
When outside line buttons are part of the sequence, they are selected in numeric
order (by default, 801, 802,…), up to the maximum number of lines shown.
Table 2.
Factory-Set Automatic Line Selection Sequence
Telephone
Multiline (MLX
or Analog)
Hybrid/PBX
3. SA O
2. SA V
1. SA R
Single-Line
3. SA O
2. SA R
1. SA R
5. Line 3
4. Line 2
3. Line 1
2. SA V
1. SA R
5. Call 5
4. Call 4
3. Call 3
2. Call 2
1. Call 1
Direct-Line
Consoles
(MLX or
Analog)
Queued Call
Console
Mode
Key
Behind Switch
8. Line 8 1. Prime line
3. Line 3
7. Line 7
2. Line 2
6. Line 6
1. Line 1
5. Line 5
4. Line 4
2. ICOM R
1. Prime line
1. ICOM R
8. Line 6 3. Line 3
7. Line 5 2. Line 2
6. Line 4 1. Line 1
8. Line 8 3. Line 3
7. Line 7 2. Line 2
6. Line 6 1. Prime line
5. Line 5
4. Line 4
8. Line 8
7. Line 7
6. Line 6
5. Line 5
4. Line 4
SA R, ICOM R = SA Ring, ICOM Ring
SA V, ICOM V = SA Voice, ICOM Voice
SA 0, ICOM 0 = SA Originate Only, ICOM Originate Only
Considerations and Constraints
2
Outside line buttons and SA or ICOM buttons can be included in the ALS
sequence. However, inside and outside lines should not be interleaved. A typical
sequence would consist of all desired SA or ICOM buttons, followed by all desired
outside line buttons.
When personal line or Pool buttons are assigned to a single-line telephone or
other tip/ring device (such as a fax machine) connected to a 012 module, a 016
module, or a Multi-Function Module (MFM), the buttons are automatically added
to the ALS sequence.
When a user or system manager enters ALS programming, the system clears the
current ALS sequence for the extension. If the person programming the extension
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference
Page 59
exits without selecting any buttons, the extension has no ALS sequence. The
effect is as if Idle Line Preference is turned off: no line is selected automatically
when the user lifts the handset to place a call.
Mode Differences
2
Hybrid/PBX Mode
2
The factory-set ALS sequence for multiline and single-line telephones includes
only SA buttons. Make outside calls by dialing the main pool dial-out code
(usually 70) or Automatic Route Selection code (usually 9).
In Release 3.0 and earlier systems, the factory setting gives users access to
pools. In Release 3.1 and later systems, the factory setting restricts access to
pools or Automatic Route Selection. In order for a user to access the main pool,
the system manager must use system programming to remove the restriction for
the specific extension.
Key Mode
2
The factory-set ALS sequence for multiline telephones (including DLCs) includes
only personal line buttons. Users can make inside calls by pressing an available
ICOM button before dialing.
The factory-set ALS sequence for single-line telephones includes only ICOM
buttons. Users can make outside calls by dialing the Idle Line Access code
(usually 9).
Behind Switch Mode
2
The factory-set ALS sequence includes only the prime line. The sequence can be
changed to an ICOM line followed by the prime line or outside lines. This allows a
single-line telephone user to use system features and to select the prime line
and/or outside lines by dialing the Idle Line Access code (usually 9).
Telephone Differences
2
Queued Call Consoles
2
The ALS sequence on a QCC starts at the lowest Call button and moves upward,
and Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on. Neither can be changed.
Other Multiline Telephones
2
The ALS sequence is assigned either through extension programming, using
programming codes only, or through centralized telephone programming.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference
Single-Line Telephones
Page 60
2
The ALS sequence for a single-line telephone can be changed only through
centralized telephone programming. It cannot be changed by the telephone user.
The ALS sequence for single-line telephones and other tip/ring equipment
connected to 012 modules, 016 modules, 008 OPT modules, or Multi-Function
Modules is factory-set to include only SA or ICOM buttons. As outside lines or
pools are assigned to the extension, they are automatically added to the ALS
sequence.
In Key mode, if the ALS sequence for a single-line telephone is changed to
include only outside lines, the user cannot use system features except through
pressing and releasing the Recall or Flash button. (If the telephone does not
have positive disconnect, the user can press and release the switchhook.)
In Behind Switch mode, the factory setting for the ALS sequence is the prime line.
The sequence can be changed to an ICOM button followed by the prime line or
outside lines. This allows a single-line telephone user to use system features and
to select the prime line and/or outside lines by dialing the Idle Line Access code.
Feature Inter1
2
actions
Account Code Entry
A single-line telephone user can enter account codes only when ALS is
programmed to select an SA or ICOM button when the user lifts the
handset.
Coverage
When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on for an extension, the system
automatically selects a Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover
button with a ringing call. However, these buttons cannot be programmed
in an ALS sequence because they cannot be used to make calls.
Headset Options
When an MLX telephone or console is in headset operation, Ringing/Idle
Line Preference is off automatically. Select a line manually to make a call.
If Headset Auto Answer is off, manually select a ringing line to answer the
call.
Multi-Function
Module
When an MFM is installed in an MLX telephone, the ALS sequence for
the MFM should be set to select SA Ring or ICOM Ring, then SA
Originate Only or ICOM Originate Only, then outside lines (or the prime
line in Behind Switch mode) assigned to the MFM. Ringing/Idle Line
Preference should be on for an MFM.
Ringing Options
Even when Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on, the system does not
automatically select an outside line, SA, ICOM, or Cover button
programmed for No Ring. If a call is coming in on such a button, select the
button manually to answer. The green LED flashes when the call arrives;
the red LED turns on when the button is pressed.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 61
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
SA (including Shared SA) or ICOM buttons can be programmed in an
ALS sequence. Different button types (personal line, Pool, ICOM, SA, or
Shared SA buttons) should not be interleaved in an ALS sequence.
Transfer
ALS does not apply when the Transfer button is pressed.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Maintenance Busy
Page 62
Automatic Maintenance Busy
2
At a Glance
2
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Mode
System Programming
Telephone users, operators, data users
System Information (SysSet-up)
Hybrid/PBX
System→MaintenBusy
2
Description
When Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled, a malfunctioning loop-start,
ground-start, or tie line/trunk is automatically put in a maintenance-busy state,
preventing outside calls from being made on that line/trunk. Incoming calls are
never blocked.
In general, the two reasons for putting an outside line in a maintenance-busy state
are as follows:
■
Faulty or delayed signaling between the system and the central office. To
avoid busying out lines because of slow telephone company central office
responses rather than faulty lines/trunks, four consecutive occurrences of
faulty or delayed signaling are required before the line/trunk is put in
maintenance-busy state.
■
Central office failure to disconnect (make the line/trunk available for use)
after a user hangs up. The line/trunk is put in maintenance-busy state after
two occurrences of a failure to disconnect.
When a line/trunk is put in maintenance-busy state, an error is recorded on the
internal error log. The log indicates which type of error occurred: faulty or delayed
signaling, or central office failure to disconnect.
Once a line/trunk is in maintenance-busy state, the three ways to clear the
condition and put the line/trunk back into service are as follows:
■
Periodic testing of the line/trunk by the system’s internal maintenance
software to verify proper functioning
■
Manual clearing of the error from the error log
■
Manual seizure of the line/trunk at an operator console or through
maintenance dial codes
Considerations and Constraints
2
Incoming calls are received and processed normally on lines/trunks in a
maintenance-busy state.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 63
Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks (Hybrid/PBX mode only) are not affected by
Automatic Maintenance Busy because these trunks only can receive calls and are
not pooled.
100D (DS1) modules configured as ground-start, loop-start, or tie lines/trunks are
monitored and maintained by Automatic Maintenance Busy.
No more than 50 percent of the lines/trunks in a pool can be placed in
maintenance-busy state at one time, except when the central office has failed to
disconnect a line/trunk (preventing its use) or when an entire line/trunk module is
manually taken out of service (called a user-imposed maintenance-busy state). In
the case of the 100D module, any failure in the DS1 link causes the module to
generate a loss-of-service alarm, and the entire module is taken out of service.
Mode Differences
2
Hybrid/PBX Mode
2
To provide optimal performance, Automatic Maintenance Busy should be enabled
when a Hybrid/PBX system includes pools.
Key and Behind Switch Modes
2
Automatic Maintenance Busy is not available in Key and Behind Switch modes.
2
Feature Interactions
Alarm
The red LED next to the Alarm button on system operator consoles turns
on, and the designated maintenance alarm alert device sounds or flashes
when more than 50 percent of the lines/trunks in a pool are in a
maintenance-busy state.
Automatic Route
Selection
When Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is used to make an outside call,
the system does not select lines/trunks that are in maintenance-busy
state.
Pools
To provide optimal performance, Automatic Maintenance Busy should be
enabled when a Hybrid/PBX system includes pools.
Automatic Route Selection
2
At a Glance
2
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Telephone users, operators, data users
Automatic Route Selection, Extension Directory, Extension
Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Mode
Telephones
System Programming
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 64
Hybrid/PBX only
All
Specify the type of table (6-digit, area code, local exchange,
or 1 + 7) and the area codes and/or exchanges to be included
in the table:
●
Tables→ARS→ARS Input
Specify that 1 + 7 tables should be searched when a leading 1
is dialed:
●
Tables→ARS→ARS 1 + 7Dial
Specify time of day when calls are routed by using Subpattern
A or B routing information:
●
Tables→ARS→Sub B Start/Stop
Identify the pools (up to six) on which calls are to be routed:
●
Tables→ARS→Sub A Pools/Sub B Pool
Assign or remove the FRL associated with each route:
●
Tables→ARS→Sub A FRL/Sub B FRL
Specify the number of digits that need to be absorbed by the
system when it routes calls on an identified route:
●
Tables→ARS→Sub A Absorb/Sub B Absorb
Specify the digits or special characters that must be added by
the system to the number dialed by a user when calls are
routed on an identified route:
●
Tables→ARS→Sub A Digit/Sub B Digit
Specify the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) and/or digits that
must be added when people dial emergency numbers in the
Special Numbers (N11) table:
● Tables→ARS→More→SpeclNumber→ARS FRL/ARS
Digit
Specify the pool routing, FRL, and digits or special characters
that must be added by the system to the number dialed by a
user when calls are routed on the Dial 0 table:
● Tables→ARS→More→Dial 0→ARS Pool/ARS FRL/ARS
Digits
Specify whether a route is to be used for voice, data, or both
on a T1, BRI, or PRI call:
● Tables→More→Sub A Data/Sub B Data
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
At a Glance - Continued
System Programming
continued
Page 65
Allow or restrict remote access users (without barrier codes)
from using selected lines/trunks:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-TIE/TIE Lines→ARS
Restrct
Allow or restrict remote access users (with barrier codes) from
using selected lines/trunks:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→ARS
Restrct
Assign or restrict extensions from using selected lines/trunks:
●
Maximums
Programmable Routing
Tables
Entries for each table
Factory-set tables
Subpatterns
Routes
Absorbed digits
System-prefixed characters
Factory Settings
ARS dial-out code
FRL (routes assigned to
Default Toll table)
FRL (routes assigned to
Default Local table)
FRL (extensions)
FRL (Remote Access
barrier codes and trunks)
Time to Start
System-prefixed characters
Absorbed digits
1 + 7 dialing requirements
Data
Description
Extensions→ARS Restrct
16 (1–16)
100
4: Dial 0 (table 19), Special Numbers (N11, table 20), Default
Toll (table 17), Default Local (table 18)
2 for each programmable table
6 (1–6) for each subpattern
11 (0–11) for each route
20 (0–9,*, and Pause) for each route
9
3 (0–6; 0 least restrictive, 6 most restrictive)
2 (0–6; 0 least restrictive, 6 most restrictive)
3 (0–6; 0 most restrictive, 6 least restrictive)
0 (0–6; 0 most restrictive, 6 least restrictive)
00:00 (midnight, both Subpattern A and B)
None
0
Not within area code
Voice only
2
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is available only in Hybrid/PBX mode. ARS
allows outgoing calls to be dynamically routed over selected facilities after dialing
an ARS access code (usually 9). This enables the system to select the least
expensive route for each call.
Programmable lists, called tables, indicate the desired routes (line/trunk facilities)
for specified area codes and/or exchanges. There is a different ARS table for
each type of call (local, toll, special number, and so on). The tables are chosen
according to the telephone number digits that are dialed by a user. Each ARS
table has a particular pool to which it routes calls.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 66
A table contains some or all of the following types of information:
■
Table Type. Indicates how to interpret the information in the table. Table
types are Area Code, Local Exchange, 6-Digit, 1 + 7, Dial 0, Special
Numbers (N11), Default Toll, and Default Local. Details for each table type
are discussed later in this section.
■
Digit Strings. Table includes 3-digit entries, usually area codes or
exchanges. Dialed digits are compared to the stored digits. A match should
occur in only one table and cause selection of the routes in that table.
■
Subpattern. An array of up to six routes. There are two subpatterns for all
tables except the Special Numbers (N11) and Dial 0 tables. The subpattern
selected depends on the time of day that the call is made and the start time
associated with each subpattern. (The start time for Subpattern A is
specified as the stop time for Subpattern B.)
The Special Numbers (N11) Table always uses the main pool and thus has
neither subpatterns nor routes. The Dial 0 Table has no subpatterns and
only one route.
■
Routes. A structure that defines possible lines/trunks to be used in a
preferred order, usually based on lowest cost and the extension user’s
privilege level or Facility Restriction Level (FRL). Routes cannot be
programmed for the Special Numbers (N11) Table. A route contains the
following types of information.
— Pool. A group of lines/trunks that are to be used for this route. A pool
must be programmed before any other route information.
NOTE:
If you are using data in your system, program pools, including the
default pool, for the proper data type. For example, a pool with T1
data-only lines cannot be used for voice calls. Loop-start,
ground-start, T1 voice, and some PRI lines support only voice
calls, while BRI lines and other PRI lines support both voice and
data calls.
— Facility Restriction Level (FRL). A value from 0 to 6 associated with
the route. For routes, 0 is the least restrictive and 6 the most restrictive
value. In order to use a route, a caller (according to extension or remote
access barrier code/trunk) must have an FRL that is equal to or greater
than the FRL of the route.
— Absorbed Digits. The number (0–11) of user-dialed digits that ARS
absorbs (does not dial out) on this route. Digits are absorbed starting
with the first user-dialed digit, after any leading star codes.
— System-Prefixed Digits. A string of up to 20 digits (0–9, *, and Pause)
that ARS dials out on this route before dialing any remaining user-dialed
digits but after dialing any user-dialed leading star codes.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 67
ARS allows up to 16 programmable tables, each of which may contain one of the
following types of information:
■
Area Code Tables. These tables are lists of 3-digit area codes. Area code
tables are useful when just one type of line/trunk (for example, a regional
WATS trunk) is used for all calls to each area code on the list.
■
Local Exchange Tables. These tables list 3-digit exchanges within the
local area code. They can be used to route calls over in-state WATS lines.
■
6-Digit Tables. If the cost of calls to another area code varies according to
the exchange, this table can be used to route calls on different pools,
depending on both the area code and the exchange.
In a 6-Digit Table, an area code is the first entry. The remaining 99 entries
are exchanges within the area code. The system scans the first six digits of
the user-dialed number (area code and exchange) to route the call.
■
1 + 7 Tables. In some areas, callers must dial a 1 and a 7-digit number to
call certain exchanges, even though the call is within the local area code. A
1 + 7 Table contains a list of local area code exchanges that require dialing
a 1 but not an area code before the 7 digits.
In addition to the fully programmable tables, ARS has four factory-set tables:
■
Dial 0 Table. This factory-set table routes calls to numbers that start with 0.
The international dialing code, 011, is treated as a special case and can be
put into a programmable table. If 011 is not specified in a programmable
table, international calls are routed through the Dial 0 Table. Programming
of this table is limited to a single pool, its FRL, and system-prefixed digits.
■
Special Numbers (N11) Table. This factory-set table routes calls to the
special numbers 411, 611, 811, and 911. The main pool is always used.
This table is not programmable.
■
Default Toll Table. This factory-set table routes toll calls to numbers that
do not match entries in any of the area code, 6-digit, or 1 + 7 digits. This
table has two subpatterns of up to six routes each, but neither absorbed
digits nor system-prefixed digits are used.
■
Default Local Table. This factory-set table routes local calls to numbers
that do not match entries in the local exchange tables. This table has two
subpatterns of up to six routes each, but neither absorbed digits nor
system-prefixed digits are used. In Release 3.1 and later systems, routes
assigned to the default local table are factory-set with a Facility Restriction
Level of 2.
The system can have up to 20 tables, 16 of which are fully programmable. The
Dial 0, Special Numbers (N11), Default Toll, and Default Local tables are
factory-set and allow limited programming.
Each table (where appropriate) can have two subpatterns (A and B) with an
associated start time. The start time for Subpattern A is specified as the stop time
for Subpattern B. One subpattern or the other is selected based on the time of day
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 68
and the subpattern start time (if both subpatterns have 00:00 start time,
Subpattern A is selected). Each subpattern can contain up to six routes, listed in
order of preference or cost effectiveness.
In addition, each route has a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) associated with it.
The FRL is used to refine the route selection process further. Each extension or
remote access barrier code or remote access is assigned an FRL from 0
through 6. Each route is also assigned an FRL from 0 through 6. For extensions, 0
is the most restrictive and 6 is the least restrictive level. For lines/trunks, 6 is the
most restrictive and 0 is the least restrictive level. An extension can use a route
only if its FRL is greater than or equal to the route’s FRL.
Other digits or special characters may be required so the system can route a call
on a particular pool. For example, some companies use an alternate toll call
carrier that requires dialing the number with Pause characters and access codes.
Each ARS route may have up to 20 characters that are automatically prefixed
when a user dials a number. The allowed characters are the digits 0 through 9, *,
and Pause.
ARS also provides an absorb (ignore) digit capability for each route. For example,
if the CO does not require 1 before an area code, the system can be programmed
to ignore that first digit. Up to 11 characters can be automatically absorbed when
a user dials a number. For 10-digit toll calls, the prefix 1 must be dialed to signal a
toll call to ARS. If the central office does not require the prefix 1 for toll calls, the
digit absorption feature may be used to eliminate the prefix as the number is
dialed. Initially, all 20 tables are available for the call.
Star Codes and Automatic Route Selection
2
In some instances, after a user dials a star code (a star character followed by a 2or 3-digit number) the central office provides a second dial tone as a prompt for
the dialer to enter more digits. Usually, this second dial tone is immediate.
However, in cases when the second dial tone is delayed, calls can be misrouted
or dishonest users may be able to circumvent communications system dialing
restrictions. (For more information about using Allowed and Disallowed Lists to
restrict star codes, see ‘‘Allowed/Disallowed Lists’’ on page 34.)
In Release 3.1 and later systems, ARS processes star codes at the beginning of a
dialed number and sends the digits to the CO before any other digit analysis
occurs. Any programmed prepended digits are added after the star code and
before the rest of the telephone number.
Automatic Route Selection cannot route calls that consist only of a star code with
no additional digits (such as *44 for voice-activated dialing) because the user has
not dialed any digits that the system can use to choose a route.
Dialing calls with star codes using ARS can cause dropped or misrouted calls
when prepended digits are used to select facilities other than regular central office
lines/trunks. It is recommended that ARS calls containing star codes not be used
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 69
in configurations where the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is behind
another switch or is used to select nonstandard facilities.
ARS Restrictions for VMI Ports
2
In Release 3.1 and later systems, any port programmed as a VMI port is
programmed with a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) of 0. If the system manager
wants to allow access to the voice messaging system Outcalling feature, the FRL
applies to Outcalling calls.
If the system manager changes a VMI port to an non-VMI port, the FRL is not
reassigned on the port. If the default FRL should be changed, the system
manager must change it through system programming.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
Any changes to the FRL and other restrictions of these ports must be
considered carefully in order to minimize the potential for toll fraud.
How ARS Works
2
A user hears inside dial tone on an SA button and dials the ARS access code
(usually a 9) to connect to ARS, then dials a call. If the extension is restricted or
toll-restricted and the number dialed is not on the Allowed List, or if the number
dialed is on the Disallowed List, the user receives a system error tone. Otherwise,
ARS compares the number dialed with information in the tables. All tables are
available for use at first. Tables are then eliminated from possible use on the call,
one by one, until the best table is selected.
Once the table is selected, ARS chooses the appropriate subpattern and checks
restrictions, eliminating from consideration any routes with restriction levels higher
than the extension’s. Any remaining eligible routes are scanned from the
beginning of the list. The first eligible route that is not busy is selected.
Table Selection
2
411, 611, 811, 911, or 10xx (Equal Access Code)
If the caller dials one of these N11 or equal access numbers, the call is routed
over the main pool, using the factory-set Special Numbers (N11) Table.
Area Code Tables Local/Disallowed 6-Digit Tables
1+7 Tables
Exchange Tables
Dial 0 Table
Special No. (N11) Default Toll Table Default Local
Table
Table
2
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 70
First Digit Not a 1, N11, or Equal Access Code
2
All but the Local Exchange, Default Local, and Dial 0 Tables are eliminated.
Area Code Tables Local Exchange
6-Digit Tables
1+7 Tables
Tables
Special No. (N11) Default Toll Table Default Local
Dial 0 Table
Table
Table
Next, ARS examines the entries in the Local Exchange Tables:
■
If ARS finds only one match, it selects that Local Exchange Table.
■
If ARS finds more than one match, it selects the lowest-numbered Local
Exchange Table.
■
If ARS finds no match and the first digit is 0, it selects the Dial 0 Table.
■
If ARS finds no match and the first digit is not 0, it chooses the Default
Local Table.
First Digit a 1 (Not an Equal Access Code)
ARS eliminates the Default Local, Dial 0, Special Number, and Local Exchange
Tables and proceeds as described below.
6-Digit Tables
1+7 Tables
Area Code Tables Local Exchange
Tables
Dial 0 Table
Special No. (N11) Default Toll Table Default Local
Table
Table
If only a 1 and seven digits have been dialed and there is one 1+7 Table that
matches, it is chosen. If more than one table matches, the lowest-numbered table
is chosen. If there are no 1+7 Tables that match, ARS picks the Default Toll Table.
If more than seven digits have been dialed after the 1, the 1+7 Tables are
eliminated. The next three digits following the 1 are compared to the 3-digit area
codes in the Area Code Tables and the first three digits of the 6-Digit Tables; any
unmatching tables are eliminated. If there are no matches, the Default Toll Table
is selected.
If there are matching tables, the next three digits are compared to the second
through ninety-ninth entry in the remaining 6-Digit Tables. If there is only one
match, that 6-Digit Table is used. If there is more than one match, the lowest
6-Digit Table is used. If there are no matches and there are no area code tables
left, the Default Toll Table is selected. If there are no matches and there are Area
Code Tables that have not been eliminated, one of the Area Code Tables is
chosen. If there is one table left, it is used. If there is more than one table, the
lowest one is used.
Figure 1 is a flowchart that shows how a table is selected.
2
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 71
START
Is the dialed
number 411, 611, YES
811, 911, or 10xxx
(equal access
code)?
Use Special
Numbers Table
Use the table.
NO
Is the first
digit a 1?
ONE
Compare first three
digits to all entries in
Local Exchange Tables.
Any matching tables?
NO
Is first
NONE digit 0?
MANY
NO
Use
Default
Local Table.
YES
Use Dial 0
Table.
Use lowest matching
Local Exchange Table.
Use Default Toll Table.
NONE
Compare next three
digits to all entries in
each 1 + 7 table.
Any matching tables?
Does the dialed EXACTLY
number have
1+7
1+7 or more
digits?
MORE
Use lowest
matching
1 + 7 Table.
ONE
Compare next three
digits to all entries in
each Area Code table
and to first entry in
each 6-Digit Table.
Any matching tables?
YES
Are there any
6-Digit
Tables?
MANY
Use the table.
NO
Use Default
Toll table.
NO
YES
ONE
Use the table.
Compare next three
digits to 2nd through MANY
99th entry in remaining
6-Digit Tables.
Any matching tables?
Use lowest
6-Digit Table.
NONE
ONE
Use the table.
Are there any
matching
Area Code
Tables?
NONE
Use Default
Toll table.
MANY
Use lowest
Area Code
Table.
Figure 1.
ARS Table Selection
Route Selection within the Table
2
Once the table is selected, ARS checks the subpatterns within the table (if
applicable) and the restrictions on the routes.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 72
Selected Table
START
If appropriate for
the selected table,
select Subpattern
A or B depending
on time of day.
Select first route
where:
• telephone’s
FRL is > route’s
FRL and route
is not busy
• call type
matches route
type (data,
voice, or both)
Route available?
NO
Return
fast busy
YES
Route Call
Figure 2.
Subpatterns
ARS Route Selection within a Table
2
Depending on the time of the call, one of two subpatterns (each with up to six
different routes) is chosen for each table [except the Special Numbers (N11) and
Dial 0 Tables]. The time of day is compared to the start and stop times of
Subpatterns A and B (the start time for Subpattern A is the stop time for
Subpattern B). If the time of the call is between the Subpattern B start time and
stop time, then Subpattern B is selected; otherwise Subpattern A is selected. If
both Subpatterns have 00:00 start times, Subpattern A is selected. (See Figure 3.)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 73
Yes
Is Call Time
after Subpattern B
start and before
Subpattern B stop?
Dial Call and
Select Table
Figure 3.
No
Subpattern B
Subpattern A
Subpattern Selection
2
Restrictions
If the extension’s Facility Restriction Level (FRL) is equal to or greater than the
FRL of any of the routes in the selected subpattern, those routes are eligible for
selection. Table 3 shows how FRLs are used to decide whether a route is allowed.
Table 3.
Facility Restriction Levels
Extension FRL
Route FRL
Allowed
0
0 only
Yes
0
1 and up
No
1
0 and 1
Yes
1
2 and up
No
2
0–2
Yes
2
3 and up
No
3
0–3
Yes
3
4 and up
No
4
0–4
Yes
4
5 and up
No
5
0–5
Yes
5
6
No
6
Any
Yes
For a PRI or BRI call, any route that does not match the call type (voice or data) is
eliminated from eligibility. Each route may be specified as voice, data, or both.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 74
NOTE:
If a voice call is queued for callback on a digital pool, it can get stuck in an
infinite loop of queuing. The caller hears a continuous stutter tone and
cannot get rid of it. To avoid this situation, be certain to correctly program
the voice and/or data capabilities of pools of PRI and BRI facilities in the
ARS tables.
Any remaining eligible routes are scanned from the beginning of the list. The first
eligible route that is not busy is selected. If all eligible routes are busy, the user
hears fast busy and can use Callback to queue the call for the first route only.
Emergency numbers must be on an Allowed List to be called from a restricted
extension.
Considerations and Constraints
3
ARS restrictions (FRLs) operate independently of dial-access-to-pool restrictions,
providing greater flexibility in assigning the type of usage an extension is allowed.
The international dialing code (011) can be included in any fully programmable
table. If this is done, calls beginning with 011 are routed according to the table on
which 011 is entered, and not according to the Dial 0 Table.
The wild card character (Pause) cannot be used in system programming to enter
area codes and/or exchanges in ARS tables.
Calls made to the equal access code (10xxx) are always routed immediately over
the main pool, whether or not they appear in other ARS tables. People who are
restricted from using a particular ARS route hear a high-low error tone, indicating
that the call cannot be completed.
Even if the local telephone company does not require it, callers must dial 1 before
any 10-digit telephone number so that ARS can determine whether a call is toll or
local. If the 1 is not required by the local central office, the system may be
programmed to ignore it.
Some central offices still require the prefix 1 for dialing certain exchanges. If the
1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements option is programmed as Within Area Code, the
system expects either dial time-out or a # (end of dialing) to indicate whether a
1 + 7-digit or a 1 + 10-digit number has been dialed (this may result in delays
while the user waits for time-out). To avoid time-out delays, 1 + 7-Digit Dialing
Requirements can be programmed as Not Within Area Code, but all exchanges
requiring a system-prefixed 1 must be listed in a local exchange table, and the 1
must be specified as a character to be prefixed. In this case, users must not dial
the 1 before dialing those exchanges.
Area Codes 800 and 900 are treated as entries in programmable tables. They
may be programmed as either area codes or as exchanges.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Page 75
3
Mode Differences
ARS is available only in Hybrid/PBX mode.
Feature Interactions
Account Code Entry
3
When ARS is used on the system, an account code can be entered
before or after dialing the telephone number.
If Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension, the caller
must enter the code before dialing the ARS dial-out code.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) checks Allowed and Disallowed Lists
before choosing the route for a call. This prevents users with restricted
extensions from dialing numbers that are not on an Allowed List. ARS
also prevents a user from dialing numbers on a Disallowed List.
Authorization Code
An authorization code can be entered before dialing the ARS access
code. After dialing the ARS access code, you can enter an authorization
code only if a Feature button or programmed Authorization Code button
is used.
Auto Dial
The ARS code can be programmed before a telephone number on an
Auto Dial button.
Automatic
Maintenance Busy
If ARS is used to make an outside call, the system selects another
line/trunk in the pool when the first line/trunk is in maintenance-busy
state.
Callback
When a call is made using ARS and all possible line/trunk routes are
busy, the call can be queued only for the first route in the pattern.
However, if the FRL for the extension does not allow the call to be made
over the route, the call is not queued.
If a voice call is queued for callback on a digital line/trunk pool, it can get
stuck in an infinite loop of queuing. The caller hears a continuous stutter
tone and cannot get rid of it. To avoid this situation, be certain to correctly
program the voice and/or data capabilities of pools of PRI and BRI
facilities in the ARS tables.
Calling Restrictions
The use of ARS does not allow callers to avoid calling restrictions. The
system checks for outward or toll restrictions assigned to the extension or
barrier code before it selects the best route for making the call.
Calling Restrictions
continued
ARS and the dial-access-to-pools restriction function independently of
each other. If ARS restrictions are programmed to allow access to a pool,
a user may seize a pool that the extension is not normally allowed to use
with pool dial-access restrictions.
Digital Data Calls
Data calls can be made using ARS. To make calls using ARS, terminal
adapters and video systems simply dial the ARS dial out code (usually 9)
followed by the telephone number. The data calls must be routed through
ARS pools that have only PRI, NI-1 BRI, and/or Switched 56 T1 data
lines. To make a 2B data call, a user must access two separate lines.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 76
Direct Station
Selector
The LED next to a DSS button for the ARS code is always off.
Directories
System Directory and Personal Directory (MLX-20L telephones only)
numbers can include the ARS dial-out code.
Display
Only the ARS dial-out code and the dialed number are displayed. Digits
added by ARS before the dialed number and digits ignored by ARS are
not displayed. The digit 9 is replaced with OUTSIDE when ARS selects a
line.
Forward and
Follow Me
When the ARS code is dialed before the telephone number, ARS can
select the facility on which to forward calls to an outside telephone
number. The FRL for the call is that of the extension from which calls are
being forwarded.
HotLine
HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later systems) can use the ARS
access code if it is programmed into their Personal Speed Dial number.
Night Service
When Night Service with Outward Restriction is programmed, enter the
password before dialing the ARS dial-out code, unless either the
extension is assigned to an Exclusion List or the number is on the Night
Service Emergency Numbers List.
Pools
ARS ensures appropriate and cost-effective use of pools. ARS and the
dial-access-to-pools restriction function independently of each other. If
ARS restrictions are programmed to allow access to a pool, a user may
seize a pool that the extension is not allowed to use under existing pool
dial-access restrictions.
Primary Rate Interface An incoming call can access Automatic Route Selection (ARS) only
(PRI) and T1
through Remote Access, transferring, or Remote Call Forwarding through
ARS. A PRI line can be a member of a pool accessed through ARS.
Before ARS routes a call to a pool, it checks whether one or more
member lines in that pool are available. If not, it selects an alternative
pool so that the call is not blocked. Even if a B-channel is available when
ARS selects a pool with an available line, there may be none available
when it is time to send a setup message to the network. Or, after the
setup message is sent, the network may determine that the B-channel
proposed by the system is not available. In either case, the call fails and
fast busy tone is heard.
Recall/Timed Flash
In systems prior to Release 2.0, Recall cannot be used to hold an outside
line if ARS has been used to make the call. In Release 2.0 and later
systems, Recall can be used with calls made through ARS.
Remote Access
Remote access users can make calls using ARS by dialing into the
system, entering a barrier code if required, and dialing the ARS code
while listening to the system dial tone. Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs)
can be assigned to restrict the routes that remote callers can use. When
barrier codes are not used, FRLs are assigned to all remote access
lines/trunks. When barrier codes are used, FRLs are assigned to
individual barrier codes.
Saved Number Dial
The ARS dial-out code is saved with the telephone number dialed.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 77
SMDR
SMDR reports for systems with ARS show all the digits dialed by a user in
the CALLED NUMBER field, including any absorbed (ignored) digits, and
the facility used to make the call. The reports do not include the ARS
dial-out code or any digits added by ARS.
Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dial and System Speed Dial numbers can include the
ARS code.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
The ARS FRL assigned to the extension being used to make the call
applies to calls made on both SA and Shared SA buttons.
System
Renumbering
The ARS access code can be renumbered (factory setting is 9).
Toll Type
In certain areas, the local telephone company requires the prefix 1 for
certain exchanges. In these cases, the exchanges can be assigned to a
1 + 7 table; the 1 + 7-Dialing Requirements must be set to Within Area
Code so that people calling numbers in other exchanges do not have to
dial 1.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Barge-In
Page 78
Barge-In
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
QCC Display Label
Telephone users, operators
Extension Information
All
All except single-line telephones
*58 (centralized telephone programming only)
Barge In
Description
3
Barge-In allows a caller to contact a co-worker in an emergency or when the caller
has been given special instructions to interrupt. If the extension is busy, Barge-In
includes the user in the call. If Do Not Disturb is activated, Barge-In overrides the
feature and makes the telephone ring.
On multiline telephones, except QCCs, the caller interrupts a call or overrides Do
Not Disturb by calling the extension number and then pressing the programmed
Barge-In button. On a QCC, an operator presses the Feature button and selects
Barge In from the display.
A tone, heard by the user and the people on the call, signals that the user has
joined a conversation in progress. Ringing indicates that Do Not Disturb is on at
the extension.
Considerations and Constraints
3
Barge-In does not override Privacy.
If Caller A is in the process of dialing and Caller B uses Barge-In to reach Caller A,
the touch tones generated by dialing cancel the Barge-In tone. As a result, Caller
A may not be aware that someone else is joining the call.
If a caller presses the Barge-In button while calling an MLX telephone, an extra
ring occurs on the MLX telephone. A Barge-In button can be programmed only
through centralized telephone programming.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Barge-In
Page 79
Telephone Differences
3
Direct-Line Consoles
3
If a DLC operator uses Barge-In to reach someone with Coverage or Forwarding
(including Remote Call Forwarding) on, the call from the operator is not directed to
the destination (receiver’s) extension. The call is directed to the extension on
which Barge-In is used.
Queued Call Consoles
3
A QCC operator can use Barge-In only by selecting the feature from the display.
Barge-In can be used to join an inside call to a QCC operator only if the user dials
the caller’s extension instead of the QCC operator’s number. If a user tries to
activate Barge-In after dialing a QCC system operator’s extension and waiting in
the QCC queue, the feature has no effect and the user hears an error tone. If the
error tone times out while the call is still in the QCC queue, the call is
disconnected. However, if a QCC system operator becomes available before the
error tone times out, the error tone is removed and the call is delivered to the
operator normally.
Single-Line Telephones
3
Single-line telephones cannot use Barge-In, but other telephone users can use
Barge-In to interrupt or monitor calls on single-line telephones.
Feature Interactions
3
Basic Rate Interface
Barge-In can be used for a voice calls on a BRI line, but not on BRI data
calls.
Callback
If Callback is used to request a busy extension or pool and the user is
waiting on the line for the callback call, Barge-In cannot interrupt.
Conference
Barge-In can interrupt conference calls; all participants hear the Barge-In
tone. Barge-In does not connect the user to a conference call if the
conference already has the maximum number of participants. If Barge-In
is used to connect to a conference call that involves an outside line/trunk
and the person on the outside line/trunk hangs up, the person using
Barge-In is also dropped.
Coverage
Barge-In can be used for Individual or Group Coverage calls answered at
any receiver’s extension. However, if an operator uses Barge-In to reach
an extension with Coverage, the call from the operator is not directed to
the receiver’s extension.
Digital Data Calls
Data calls cannot be barged into.
Direct Station
Selector
After making a call to an extension by using a DSS button on a DLC,
activate Barge-In by pressing a programmed Barge-In button. QCC
operators select the feature from the display.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Barge-In
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 80
Display
Barge-In appears on the display as a feature choice only on QCC
operator consoles. On an MLX display telephone receiving a Barge-In
call, the message Barge In and either the name or extension number of
the person joining the call remains on the display until the receiving
telephone user hangs up. If Barge-In is denied because Privacy has been
activated, no error message is displayed on the calling telephone to
indicate that the attempt has been unsuccessful.
Do Not Disturb
If Do Not Disturb is activated, Barge-In overrides the feature and makes
the telephone ring.
Forward and
Follow Me
If an operator uses Barge-In to call an extension with Forwarding or
Remote Call Forwarding turned on, the call from the operator is not
directed to the destination extension. When a forwarded call is answered
at the destination extension, Barge-In can be used to join the call only by
dialing the extension number for the destination extension (not the
number for the originating extension). Barge-In cannot be used to join a
call forwarded to an outside telephone number.
Group Calling
Barge-In can be used for calling group members, but the member’s
extension must be used instead of the calling group extension. If a user
tries to use Barge-In after dialing the calling group extension number and
waiting in the queue, the feature has no effect. If a person uses Barge-In
to reach another user who is waiting in a calling group queue, the call is
removed from the queue, and both people and the delay announcement
(if programmed) are connected. If a person uses Barge-In for the delay
announcement extension and the device is playing a message to a caller,
the call is removed from the queue, and both people and the delay
announcement are connected.
In Release 5.0 and later systems when the Most Idle agent hunt type is
used, if a supervisor or operator barges in on a calling group call and
hangs up before the agent does, then Most Idle status is not affected. If
the agent hangs up first, he or she moves to the end of the Most Idle
queue.
Headset Options
If Barge-In is used to contact a user with Headset Auto Answer, the call is
automatically answered.
HotLine
HotLine (Release 5.0 and later systems) calls can be barged into.
Messaging
If Barge-In is used to contact a user with a posted message, the caller’s
telephone does not display the posted message.
Paging
Barge-In cannot be used to join speakerphone or loudspeaker paging
calls.
Privacy
Barge-In does not override Privacy. The caller hears a busy signal.
All VMI ports always have Privacy on. Barge-In cannot be used to join
calls to VMI ports.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Barge-In
Recall/Timed Flash
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 81
In Release 2.0 and later systems, Recall can be used by a user who has
joined a call with Barge-In, as well as by the user who has been
interrupted.
In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, Recall cannot be used with Barge-In
because Barge-In is used on an SA or ICOM button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Page 82
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
800 NI-BRI Module
Telephone users, operators, digital data users
System Information (SysSet-up), BRI Information
Key, Hybrid/PBX
All (display support on MLX telephones only)
Specify 800 NI-BRI modules that provide primary, secondary,
and tertiary clock synchronization and source of clock
synchronization; also activate/deactivate clock:
● LinesTrunks→More→ClockSync
Assign telephone numbers (SPID and DN) to BRI lines:
● LinesTrunks→More→BRI→SPID/DN→ SPID→Enter→
DN→Enter
Specify BRI timer settings:
● LinesTrunks→More→BRI→Timers
Maximums
BRI modules
Factory Settings
Systemwide Clock
Synchronization Source
Primary Clock
Clock
BRI
Service Profile Identifier
(SPID) assigned to BRI
line
Directory Number (DN)
assigned to BRI line
Timer and counter
thresholds for all BRI
ports in system
T200 Timer
T203 Timer
T303 Timer
T305 Timer
T308 Timer
5
Loop (not definable by system manager)
First port in service on an 800 NI-BRI module or first 100D
module in service in control unit
Active
0 digits
0 digits
1000 ms (range 500–5,000 ms, increments of 500 ms)
33 seconds (range 10–255 seconds, increments of 1 second)
4 seconds (range 2–10, increments of 1 second)
30 seconds (range 2–60, increments of 1 second)
4 seconds (range 2–10, increments of 1 second)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Page 83
3
Description
Basic Rate Interface (BRI), like Primary Rate Interface (PRI), is a standard
protocol for accessing Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) services. By
using BRI, the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System can connect its users
to the speed and accuracy of ISDN services. National ISDN-1 (NI-1) BRI service
is available for MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems Release 4.0 and
later systems only.
BRI lines offer the capability of voice, high-speed data, local area network (LAN)
interconnection, and video transmission. BRI lines (along with PRI and T1
Switched 56) also allow you to take advantage of the 2B Data feature for
videoconferencing systems with ISDN-BRI interfaces. The 2B Data feature allows
one application (such as a desktop video system or a high-speed digital
communications device) to use two B-channels for data transfer rates up to 128
kbps. For more information, see ‘‘Digital Data Calls’’ on page 183.
The following benefits are provided by NI-1 BRI service:
■
Speed. Data calls to outside destinations can be established on the same
B-channels used for voice calls if the service allows; Modems and
dedicated, conditioned lines/trunks are not needed. By supporting
high-speed digital data transmission, BRI provides the capability for
videoconferencing and Group IV (G4) fax using existing wiring. Each
B-channel supports up to 64 kbps throughput.
■
Improved Toll Restriction. The ways that toll restriction can be bypassed
are limited on BRI lines/trunks. Specifically, three types of toll fraud are
eliminated with BRI service:
— Because dialing is in the form of out-of-band messages that must be
generated by the system, a person cannot use a touch-tone generating
device, such as a pocket dialer, to send dialed digits directly through the
system to the line/trunk.
— Without BRI service, toll restriction can be deceived by dialing digits on a
loop-start line before the far-end switch applies dial tone. These initial
digits may indicate a local call to the system’s toll-restriction checking
while the subsequent digits, those actually recognized by the far-end
switch, may produce a toll call. This is not possible with BRI service
because every dialed digit is screened by the system’s toll-restriction
check.
— A BRI line’s far-end disconnect signal provides a reliable indication
when a call ends, and a new call cannot be initiated until the line has
been released from the prior call on both ends. This prevents a person,
waiting off hook for the restoration of dial tone after a previous call, from
placing a second call before toll restriction is reapplied.
■
Reliable Indication of Far-End Disconnect. This prevents an incoming
call from being blocked because a line/trunk has not been released when a
call is ended.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Terminology
Page 84
3
Lines/Trunks
3
In this section on BRI, lines are the representations that appear on extensions or
are put into pools. Trunks are the facilities that link switches. For all trunks except
DS1 (T1 or PRI) and BRI, inside line numbers have a one-to-one correspondence
to line/trunk jacks. Because there are two transmission channels, or bearer
channels (called B-channels), for each BRI connection, two inside line numbers
are assigned for each BRI port. B-channels are present for each Digital
Subscriber Line (DSL); therefore 16 inside lines are assigned for each module
used.
A B-channel is used to carry user information, such as the voice or data content of
a call, between the system and the far-end switch.
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
3
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) is used to refer to the facility from the central office
that supports BRI service. A Digital Subscriber Line provides full-duplex service
on a single twisted-pair wire (2-wire) at a rate sufficient to support ISDN Basic
Rate Access.
Directory Number (DN)
3
In general, the Directory Number is the telephone number that is dialed to reach a
destination. When an incoming call arrives on a BRI line, the central office
presents the Directory Number as the Called Party Number. Only one call to a
particular Directory Number is accepted at any one time. The Directory Number is
usually a subset of the Service Profile Identifier The DNs for each BRI are still
subsets of the SPIDs. Only the DN for the hunt group are unrelated to the SPIDs.
ISDN Ordering Code (IOC))
3
The ISDN Ordering Code (IOC) is defined by Bellcore as part of the National
ISDN Package. The IOC defines a number of capabilities for the BRI connection,
which are aimed at different user applications. The MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System supports the IOC capability package S. IOC package S
supports circuit-switched voice and data calls over both B-channels with a Calling
Party Number identifier.
Multiline Hunt Group
A multiline hunt group can be programmed at the central office to send calls to a
number of separate Directory Numbers (DNs) that are grouped together.
A multiline hunt group consists of a group of BRI lines with one main telephone
number (Directory Number). When this number is dialed by an outside caller, the
CO tries to deliver the call to one of the BRI lines in the hunt group. If the BRI line
is busy, the central office directs the call to the next available idle line.
3
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 85
In order to know the available options of Multiline Hunt Group and to set it up
correctly, you must find out what type of switch your CO uses.
For the different switches, Multiline Hunt Group has the following capabilities:
■
5ESS®. Multiline Hunt is available for voice-only and digital data-only
applications. Multiline Hunt capability is provided under a switch feature
called Series Completion. Do not use the 5ESS feature named Multiline
Hunt Group. For alternate voice and digital data applications, special CO
features, for example, call forwarding, are also required in the line
provisioning. As a result, this configuration may not be supported by some
of the RBOCs (Regional Bell Operating Companies) or other local carriers.
■
DMS-100. Multiline Hunt is available for voice-only, digital data-only, and
alternate voice and digital data applications.
■
EWSD. Multiline Hunt capability is provided under a switch feature called
Series Completion. However, it is limited to six DSLs (Digital Subscriber
Lines) in a group, and may not be supported by some central offices. Do
not use the EWSD feature named Multiline Hunt Group. Multiline Hunt is
available for voice-only and digital data-only applications. Alternate voice
and digital data applications are not supported.
NOTE:
Multiline Hunt is not part of the IOC package S. If Multiline Hunt is
needed, you must order the appropriate feature and inform the
central office of the switch settings (see Appendix H of System
Planning) that you need.
Called Party Number (CdPN)
3
In general, the term Called Party Number (CdPN) denotes a telephone number
that has been dialed to reach a destination. However, while routing the call, the
network can change the Called Party Number to make routing easier. In either
case, the network sends the Called Party Number to the system when a call
arrives at the system. The called party number is usually displayed on the second
page of the MLX display.
Calling Party Number (CPN)
The Calling Party Number (CPN) provides incoming calling party number
information that identifies the originator of a call in the call-handling displays of
MLX telephones. If the owner of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
subscribes to this BRI feature, each incoming call to the system over a BRI line
can be accompanied by the CPN or by the billing number of the calling party
supplied by the network.
NOTE:
If the calling party subscribes to the central office Directory Number Privacy
feature, no number is received.
3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Page 86
3
Service Profile (SP)
A Service Profile (SP) defines the interface on a BRI line between the central
office and an ISDN terminal. It specifies the parameters and their values
necessary to provide services to the terminal.
3
Service Profile Identifier (SPID)
A Service Profile Identifier (SPID) is a unique identifier used by the central office
to associate an ISDN terminal with a Service Profile. It is provided by the central
office at subscription time. The system manager must program the SPID for each
BRI line to bring the BRI line into service (activate). If dial tone is received, then
the correct SPID has been programmed.
Clock Synchronization
3
Clock synchronization is an arrangement where digital facilities operate from a
common clock. Whenever digital signals are transmitted over a communications
path, the receiving end must be synchronized with the transmitting end in order to
receive the digital signals without errors.
The system synchronizes itself by extracting the timing signal from the incoming
digital stream. If the system has one 100D module, that module provides its own
primary synchronization. If the system has at least one 800 NI-BRI module, more
than one 100D module, or a combination of 100D modules and 800 NI-BRI
modules, then one of the connections provides primary clock synchronization for
all 800 NI-BRI and 100D module ports and for the system’s time-division
multiplexing (TDM) bus. The primary clock synchronization source must be
identified during system programming. The factory setting is the first 100D module
in service or the first port in service on the first 800 NI-BRI module in the carrier.
This can be changed through system programming.
In the event of a maintenance failure of primary synchronization, backup
synchronization can be provided by secondary and tertiary clock synchronization.
In addition, the source of synchronization is factory-set to Loop Clock Reference
Source, so that the clock is synchronized to the outside source. With a 100D
module, it can be set to Local Clock Reference Source so that the clock is
free-running. However, this is not recommended for most permanent installations
and systems with Primary Rate Interface (PRI). This setting must be made for the
primary, secondary, and tertiary synchronization sources.
On a frigid start (System Erase), the first 100D or BRI port in service is the default
primary loop clock source.
The following lists the options for primary, secondary, and tertiary clock
synchronization sources in order of preference:
1.
The clock sources on BRI ports with DSLs in service. If at all possible, all
three clock sources should be on the same 800 NI-BRI module.
2.
The loop clock source on any 100D module.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Page 87
3.
The loop clock source on any 100D module in T1 mode emulating tie
trunks.
4.
The local clock source on any 100D module.
NOTE:
Ports that are not in service should never be programmed as clock
sources.
Clock Switching
3
When the primary clock source is not able to provide the system clock, the
secondary clock source is used, if it exists and is capable of providing the system
clock. If the secondary clock source is incapable of providing the system clock,
the tertiary clock source is used. If none of these is capable of providing the
system clock, the communications system selects a system clock.
The system searches 800 NI-BRI and 100D modules for a clock source, starting
from the first module in the system and ending with the last module. The clock is
chosen with the following order of preference.
1.
Loop clock source on an 800 NI-BRI or 100D module.
2.
Local clock source on an 800 NI-BRI or 100D module.
3.
Local clock source on the processor module.
Timers and Counters
3
This option sets the timer and counter thresholds. The factory settings for
thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed (see “At a Glance” in this
section for factory settings and valid ranges). When no response is received from
the network before the duration of the timer setting, the communications system
takes the appropriate corrective action.
The programmable timers and counters are as follows:
■
T200 Timer. Times the minimum time that the link layer waits for an
acknowledgment of link establishment, information, or polling supervisory
frames sent from the communications system to the network before
resending the frames.
■
T203 Timer. Maximum time that the link layer can remain inactive.
■
T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a setup message to initiate an outgoing
call.
■
T305 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a disconnect message to clear a call.
■
T308 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a release message to clear a call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Page 88
Other timers and counters used by the system are not programmable.
■
N200 Counter. Counts the number of times the communications system
can transmit a message on a D-channel because no link layer
acknowledgment is received from the network. The value for this counter
is 3.
■
N201 Counter. Counts the maximum number of Layer 3 bytes the system
can send or receive in a single D-channel message. The value for this
counter is 260.
■
N202 Counter. Counts the maximum number of times that Layer 2 should
retransmit TEI-REQUEST frames before notifying Layer 3. The value of
this counter is 3.
■
K Counter. Counts the number of Layer 3 unacknowledged messages
sent from the communications system to the network on a D-channel. The
value for this counter is 1.
■
T202 Timer. Minimum time Layer 2 must wait for an acknowledgment of a
TEI-REQUEST frame before initiating retransmission. The value of this
timer is 2 seconds.
■
T309 Timer. Times the duration of a D-channel data link failure (a loss of
signaling for the entire BRI connection). The value of this timer is 90
seconds.
■
T310 Timer. Times the network delay following the receipt of a call
preceding message on an outgoing call. The value of this timer is 60
seconds.
■
T313 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a connect message that indicates the
completion of an incoming call. The value of this timer is 4 seconds.
!
CAUTION:
After initial installation, these timers rarely if ever should be changed.
Call Processing
3
An explanation of incoming and outgoing call processing follows.
Incoming Calls
BRI calls can be received on personal line or Pool buttons, or by calling groups or
the QCC Queue. Incoming calls appear to a user just as those on other types of
lines do.
Display Operation. The display provides call-related information about incoming
BRI calls delivered over the B-channel, if available. If calling party information is
available and the receiving telephone is an MLX telephone, the information is
displayed on the telephone. Called party information is usually displayed on the
second screen of the MLX display.
3
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 89
Hyphens are inserted between the digits on incoming calls, for example,
555-1234 for a 7-digit display and 123-555-1234 for a 10-digit display. Any other
number of digits appears without hyphens.
A brief description of the display support provided in Release 4.0 and later
systems follows. Refer to ‘‘Display’’ on page 225 for additional details.
NOTE:
BRI display support for Release 4.0 and later systems applies to MLX
display telephones only. There is no BRI-specific display support for analog
multiline telephones.
■
Incoming BRI Calls (Non-Group Calling). When the calling party
information is available from the network, the Calling Party Number (CPN)
appears on the user’s display. Pressing the More button shows the Called
Party Number on the second screen of the display. If the Called Party
Number is more than 15 characters in length, the digits at the end are
dropped.
■
Group Calling. The MLX display of a calling group member shows the
original Called Party Number. Pressing the More button shows the Calling
Party Number on the second screen of the display.
■
Transfer without Consultation. In Release 4.0 and later systems,
pressing the More button on an MLX display telephone that is a transfer
destination shows the original Called Party Number.
Outgoing Calls
Outgoing calls on BRI lines can be made using one of three methods:
■
Personal Line. When an idle personal line that represents a BRI line is
accessed, the communications system sets up a call to establish a
connection to the central office. The status light turns green and dial tone is
provided by the central office. As digits are dialed, they are transmitted to
and processed by the central office.
■
Pool Button. Like any other type of line/trunk, a BRI line can be accessed
via a Pool button or by using an SA button and dialing a pool access code.
■
Automatic Route Selection. Like any other type of line/trunk, a BRI line
can be accessed by using an SA button and dialing the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) access code. ARS processing may modify the dialed
number through standard digit deletion and addition processing. ARS can
also take advantage of the distinction between voice and data calls for
routing purposes when making outbound calls over BRI lines. For example,
if data is frequently sent to a particular number in another area of the
country, ARS can route calls to that number over high-speed data lines.
3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Page 90
Considerations and Constraints
3
Because the 391A, 391A1, and 391A2 power supplies have limited capacity,
when one of these power supplies is used, the total number of 800 NI-BRI
modules and 100D modules in a single carrier cannot exceed three. When using
these power supplies with more than three modules, you must install the fourth
and any additional 800 NI-BRI or 100D modules in an expansion carrier. The
391A3 power supply eliminates this restriction.
A Directory Number (DN) is busy when no extension is available to answer or
cover the call. An extension may be unavailable when one of the following
conditions applies: no SA button (aside from Originate Only buttons) is available;
Do Not Disturb is activated; the extension is being programmed; the extension is
forced idle; or, the extension alarm clock is being set. The caller hears a busy
tone, or the call receives coverage, if programmed.
For BRI lines, the SMDR format should be set to ISDN format.
In Release 4.1 and prior systems, an SMDR record is not recorded for a BRI
facility call that is shorter than the programmed SMDR call length. Usually, the
SMDR call length is programmed to compensate for connection and ringing time
of calls on non-ISDN facilities before they are answered. In systems where most
lines are ISDN lines, the call length should be programmed for one (1) second.
In Release 4.2 and later systems with the SMDR Talk TIme option enabled, call
timing for incoming calls to Auto Logout or Auto Logout calling groups begins
when the system detects the call.
Feature Interactions
Account Code Entry
3
At an extension assigned to a BRI line, either enter an account code
before the call is made or during the call. Forced account codes must be
entered before the call is made.
If the SMDR feature is not enabled to record incoming calls, the system
does not accept Account Code Entry information for incoming calls.
Barge-In
Barge-In can be used for voice calls on a BRI line, but not data calls.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting is provided on BRI lines at extensions so programmed. The
call-waiting tone is not blocked from BRI at an extension.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Conference
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 91
Calls on BRI lines can be part of a conference call processed by the
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System, not by the central office
(CO). The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System determines the
number of active parties on the call.
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System supports up to five
people on a conference: two within the system, two outside the system,
and the call originator.
If a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System user is part of a
conference established by an outside party through the central office
conference feature, the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System may
play Music On Hold (if so programmed) when the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System user puts the call on hold.
Hold
An active call on a BRI line can be placed on hold by using the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System Hold feature. All call appearances
(such as LEDs) are the same as for other non-BRI lines.
Recall
Recall is not recognized by the central office (CO) on BRI lines.
Therefore, the CO ignores the press of a telephone’s Recall button.
Remote Access
A BRI line may be used for remote access.
SMDR
The number of a BRI line is shown in the LINE field of the SMDR report.
Outgoing call timing begins when a call is answered. Therefore, calls that
are not answered at the far end are not reported.
In Release 4.1 and prior systems, call timing for incoming calls begins
when the call is answered. In Release 4.2 and later systems with the Talk
Time option enabled, timing for incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto
Logout calling groups begins when the system detects the call.
Transfer
Calls on BRI lines are available for the system Transfer feature. The
central office-based transfer feature is not supported by the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Call Waiting
Page 92
Call Waiting
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
On
Off
Feature Code
MLX Display Labels
Telephone users, DLC operators
Extension Information
All
All except QCC
Factory Setting
Off
*11
**11
87 (for call-waiting pickup)
CallWaiting,On [CWait,On]
CallWaiting,Off [CWait,Off]
3
Description
When an extension is programmed with Call Waiting, a user hears a tone when
his or her extension is busy, the user is off hook, and another call is arrives. For
an inside call, the user hears one beep; for an outside call, the user hears two
beeps. MLX display telephone users also see Call Waiting on the display. The
caller hears a special ringback to indicate that the extension is busy and that the
call-waiting tone has been sent.
A multiline telephone is considered busy when no SA or ICOM button is available
for incoming calls and, if Coverage is programmed, all coverage points are busy.
When the called party frees an SA or ICOM button and there is a call waiting, the
caller hears dequeuing tone and the waiting call appears on the free SA or ICOM
button of the called party.
A single-line telephone is considered busy when a call rings on the telephone or
the user lifts the handset and, if Coverage is programmed, all coverage points are
busy.
Each extension can be programmed with Call Waiting on or off. The default is Call
Waiting off.
The user hears a call-waiting tone for the following types of calls that ring on an
SA or ICOM button:
■
An inside call
■
A call received on a Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk
■
A call from a remote access user
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Call Waiting
Page 93
■
A call received on an automatic dial-in tie trunk
■
A call transferred to the extension
■
The user does not hear a call-waiting tone for a call received on a personal
line unless the business subscribes to call-waiting service from the local
telephone company.
The person receiving the call-waiting tone has these options:
■
Ignore the new call and continue with the current call; the caller continues
to hear the special ringback.
■
Complete the current call, hang up, and answer the waiting call when it
rings; the caller hears normal ringback.
■
On a multiline telephone, put the current call on hold and answer the new
call using an ICOM Originate Only or SA Originate Only button (if one is
available) by using call-waiting pickup. Call-waiting pickup is activated on
an ICOM Originate Only or SA Originate Only button by pressing the
Feature button followed by 87 or by dialing #87.
■
On a single-line telephone, put the current call on hold by pressing and
releasing the switchhook or the Flash or Recall button. Dial #87 to answer
the waiting call.
Considerations and Constraints
3
A user can have more than one call waiting. If there is more than one call waiting,
then a user who activates call-waiting pickup answers the individual calls on a
first-come, first-served basis.
Call Waiting is not activated if a line button of the appropriate type (such as ICOM
or SA) is available to receive a call.
An extension programmed as a fax extension can activate Call Waiting so that
callers can wait until a fax machine is available. To prevent disruption of a fax
message in progress, a call-waiting tone is not sent to a fax extension.
If a person with Call Waiting on is in the process of dialing and receives a call, the
touch tones generated while dialing cancel the call-waiting tone. As a result, the
person may not be aware that a call is waiting.
Telephone Differences
3
Queued Call Consoles
3
Call Waiting cannot be used on Queued Call Consoles (QCCs); the calls are
already queued. The operator releases a call to a busy extension either by
selecting Camp On from the display or by pressing the Release button. If Camp-On
is used, the call does not return to the QCC queue until the Camp-On return
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Call Waiting
Page 94
interval expires. If the operator presses the Release button, the extension being
called receives the call-waiting tone (not Camp-On), and the call returns to the
QCC queue when the transfer return interval expires.
If the system is programmed for Automatic Extended Call Completion, a QCC
operator must press the Start button to use Camp-On, then dial the extension
manually, activate Camp-On, and press Release. If the operator presses a DSS
button, the transfer is automatically completed and Camp-On cannot be used.
Other Multiline Telephones
3
If a multiline telephone does not have an SA Originate Only or ICOM Originate
Only button assigned or available, the user cannot pick up the waiting call. To
pick up the call, the user presses an available SA Originate Only or ICOM
Originate Only button, presses the Feature button, and dials 87.
If either Transfer or Camp-On is used to transfer a call to a busy extension, the
call is placed in the call-waiting queue and the caller hears the call-waiting tone,
whether or not the extension has the Call Waiting feature activated.
Single-Line Telephones
3
If a single-line telephone user presses and releases the Recall or Flash button—
or on a telephone without positive disconnect, presses and releases the
switchhook—after picking up a waiting call, the picked-up call is disconnected and
the user is reconnected to the original call. If the user hangs up after picking up a
waiting call, the picked-up call is disconnected and transfer is initiated for the first
call; the original call goes on hold and transfer return applies.
Feature Interactions
3
Basic Rate Interface
Call Waiting is provided on BRI lines at extensions so programmed. The
call-waiting tone is not blocked from BRI at an extension.
Callback
When Automatic Callback is used to queue a call at an extension that has
Call Waiting, Callback overrides Call Waiting. The user with Call Waiting
does not hear the call-waiting tone, and the call is queued until the
extension becomes available.
Callback
continued
When Selective Callback is used to queue a call at an extension that has
Call Waiting, the user with Call Waiting hears the call-waiting tone and the
call is queued until the extension becomes available.
Camp-On
A user with no available buttons to receive a transferred call hears the
call-waiting tone when a co-worker uses Camp-On to transfer a call, even
if Call Waiting is not activated.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Call Waiting
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 95
Conference
A call-waiting tone is heard only by the person receiving the call and not
by other conference participants. If the conference originator reaches a
busy extension, hears the call-waiting special ringback, and tries to add
the call to the conference, the system returns a busy tone. To drop the
busy tone from the conference, the originator presses the Drop button
and then the line button used to call the busy extension.
Coverage
A call to a sender with Call Waiting activated goes to Individual and/or
Group Coverage first. If all coverage points are busy, the sender hears
the call-waiting tone.
Changing the status of Coverage On/Off to On after hearing the
call-waiting tone does not force the waiting call to coverage receivers but
sends subsequent calls to coverage.
Digital Data Calls
Call Waiting does not work with data calls. The call appears to wait but
does not return to the extension when it becomes available. This feature
should be disabled at video systems and data extensions.
At a passive-bus MLX telephone, Call Waiting requires one of the
B-channels needed for a 2B video call and should be used only when the
video system is not active on, or receiving, a call.
Display
When a user has a call waiting, Call Waiting is shown on the display.
Forward and
Follow Me
Call Waiting does not apply to forwarded calls because the system tries
the destination extension instead of the forwarding extension. However, if
the call is not forwarded for any reason (for example, the line/trunk
selected is an unreliable loop-start line), Call Waiting functions normally.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, a user with no SA or ICOM buttons
available and with Forward or Follow Me turned on does not hear the
call-waiting tone when a call is forwarded using the Forward on Busy
enhancement. Instead, the caller hears ringback.
Group Calling
Calls made to a calling group are not eligible for Call Waiting because the
calls ring into the calling group’s queue. However, Call Waiting can be
used for calls to individual members of the calling group.
Hold
A person with all calls on hold cannot hear the call-waiting tone.
HotLine
Call Waiting can be activated for a HotLine extension, but the telephone
cannot put the current call on hold and pick up a waiting call. Instead, the
user must hang up the current call and wait for the call-waiting call to ring.
Paging
Call Waiting cannot be used for Group Paging calls to busy extensions.
Personal Lines
A user does not hear a call-waiting tone for a call received on a personal
line unless the business subscribes to a call-waiting service from the local
telephone company.
Pickup
Pickup features cannot be used to answer a waiting call at another
extension.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Call Waiting
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 96
Primary Rate Interface Call Waiting is provided on PRI lines at extensions so programmed. The
(PRI) and T1
call-waiting tone is not blocked from PRI at an extension. Until the call is
answered, answer supervision is not returned to the network and the
caller hears regular ringback instead of call-waiting ringback.
Call Waiting does not work with data calls.
Recall/Timed Flash
If Recall is used while a user is hearing special ringback, the call is
disconnected and the user hears inside dial tone.
Reminder Service
Reminder calls are not eligible for Call Waiting.
SMDR
In Release 4.1 and prior systems, SMDR does not begin measuring the
duration of a call-waiting call until the call is answered. In Release 4.2 and
later systems with the Talk Time option enabled, timing for calls to Auto
Login and Auto Logout calling groups starts as soon as the system
detects the calls.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
An extension is considered busy when all SA or ICOM buttons (excluding
SA Originate Only or ICOM Originate Only) are in use. A multiline
telephone user can dial the Call Waiting feature code to pick up a waiting
call only when an SA Originate Only or ICOM Originate Only button is
available.
Transfer
A user with no available buttons to receive a transferred call hears the
call-waiting tone when a co-worker uses the Transfer feature to transfer a
call, even if Call Waiting is not activated.
A call received by using call-waiting pickup can be transferred only if an
SA or ICOM button on which to transfer the call becomes available.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Page 97
Callback
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Auto on
Auto off
Selective
Feature Codes
Selective
Cancel request
MLX Display Label
System Programming
Telephone users, DLC operators, data users
Extension Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information,
System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All except QCC
*12
**12
*55
55
*55 (single-line telephones, data equipment)
Cback Auto,On [CbckA,On]
Cback Auto,Off [CbckA,Off]
Cback Sel [CbckS]
Specify the number of rings to the callback originator before
the system cancels a callback request:
●
Options→Callback
Enable or disable the use of Callback for busy pools for
remote access users:
●
Maximums
Dialed digits for each
queued call
Queued calls in the system
Factory Settings
Automatic Callback rings
Automatic Callback
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→AutoQueuing
40
64
3 before system cancels callback request (range 1–6)
Off
3
Description
Callback provides an easy way to complete calls to busy extensions and, in
Hybrid/PBX mode, to outside numbers when all lines/trunks are busy in the pool
through which calls are made. (See ‘‘Line Request’’ on page 372 for information
about busy lines in Key and Behind Switch modes.)
Two types of Callback can be programmed for an extension:
■
Automatic. Callback is activated automatically whenever the caller
reaches a busy extension or when all lines/trunks in a pool are busy. This
feature is set to On or Off for each extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Page 98
■
Selective. Callback is activated only when a caller chooses it by dialing a
feature code or, on multiline telephones, by pressing a programmed
Selective Callback button. On MLX display telephones, a caller can also
select the feature from the display.
When Automatic Callback is on and a caller reaches a busy extension or pool, he
or she hears the queuing tone (five short beeps) instead of the busy tone. The
tone indicates that the system is putting the call into the callback queue.
When a caller wishes to use Selective Callback for a call and reaches a busy
extension, he or she must activate Callback while listening to the busy signal. If
the caller tries to make a call by using a pool in which all lines/trunks are busy, he
or she hears a fast busy signal immediately after dialing the pool dial-out code.
After activating Callback, the caller receives dial tone; after all digits are dialed,
the caller hears the queuing tone and the call is added to the callback queue.
With both types of Callback, a caller can either stay on the line until the call is
completed or hang up.
■
If the caller stays on the line, the red and green LEDs are on next to the line
button used to make the call. When the busy extension or pool is available,
the caller hears the out-of-queue tone (three short beeps) and the call is
completed automatically.
■
If the caller hangs up, the green LED flashes next to the line button,
indicating that the button is being held for the queued call. When the busy
extension or pool is available, the caller hears a priority ring (four bursts of
ring on an MLX telephone and three bursts of ring on an analog multiline or
single-line telephone). If the user does not answer the callback call within
the number of rings programmed for the system (1–6), the callback request
is canceled.
For inside and outside calls, the caller hears ringback when the extension is
available, but the system does not make the call until the caller picks up.
Considerations and Constraints
3
Callback cannot be used for personal lines assigned to buttons on a telephone.
See ‘‘Line Request’’ on page 372 for additional information. If more than one call
is waiting for the same extension or pool, the call that has been queued the
longest is connected first.
When a call is waiting in queue for an extension, no new calls are sent to the
extension until after the queued call is completed.
When the queue contains 64 calls (system limit), additional calls sent to the queue
result in a busy signal.
No more than 40 dialed digits can be included in a queued call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Page 99
In order to use Callback with pools consisting of loop-start lines, the loop-start
lines must be programmed for reliable disconnect.
Mode Differences
3
Hybrid/PBX Mode
3
Callback can be used for busy extensions and for outside calls on pools where all
lines/trunks are busy.
Key and Behind Switch Modes
3
Callback can be used only for busy extensions. Line Request is used for busy
outside lines that are assigned to line buttons.
Telephone Differences
3
Queued Call Consoles
3
A QCC operator cannot use Callback.
Other Multiline Telephones
3
On all other multiline telephones, Selective Callback is activated by pressing a
programmed Callback button or by pressing the Feature button and dialing 55.
On MLX display telephones, Selective Callback is also activated by pressing the
Feature button and selecting the feature from the display. If the user is on another
call when the system tries to call back, he or she hears an abbreviated ring.
A multiline telephone user can queue more than one call to the same extension.
On a multiline telephone, cancel a callback request by pressing the SA or ICOM
button used to make the call, lifting the handset, pressing the Drop button, and
pressing the SA or ICOM button again. The red and green LEDs next to the
button go off, and the request is canceled.
Single-Line Telephones
3
A single-line telephone user can make and receive other calls while waiting for the
call to be completed. The request remains in the queue until the user who initiated
the request is available. Queued calls ring at a single-line telephone in the order in
which they were queued.
A single-line telephone can queue only one call at a time. If a single-line telephone
user who has already queued one call tries to transfer a second call to a busy
pool, the transferred caller hears a fast busy tone. The system considers the
transfer complete, and the call is not returned to the single-line telephone user
who transferred the call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Page 100
Cancel a callback request by lifting the handset and dialing #*55 while listening to
inside dial tone. The system sends a confirmation tone to indicate that the request
is canceled.
A single-line telephone user cannot use Callback if another call is on hold. A
waiting outside call rings at a single-line telephone before any calls queued for
that extension.
Feature Interactions
Account Code Entry
3
An account code should be entered before activating Callback. If it is not,
wait until after the call is connected before entering the account code.
Account codes cannot be entered while the call is queued.
A forced account code must be entered before Callback is activated. If
not, the user hears a busy tone.
Automatic Route
Selection
When a call is made using Automatic Route Selection (ARS) and all
possible line/trunk routes are busy, the call can be queued for the first
route in the pattern. However, if the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) for the
extension does not allow the call to be made over the route, the call is not
queued.
Barge-In
If Callback is used to request a busy extension or pool and the caller is
waiting on the line for the callback call, Barge-In cannot be used.
Calling Restrictions
In Hybrid/PBX mode, a person with a restricted extension can use
Callback for a busy pool because restrictions are based on the specific
line/trunk being used to make the call. When a line/trunk in the busy pool
is available, the system checks for restrictions assigned to the extension.
If the extension is restricted, a fast busy signal indicates that the call is not
dialed.
Call Waiting
When Automatic Callback is used to queue a call at an extension that has
Call Waiting, Callback overrides Call Waiting. The user with Call Waiting
does not hear the call-waiting tone, and the call is queued until the
extension becomes available.
Call Waiting
continued
When Selective Callback is used to queue a call at an extension that has
Call Waiting, a user with Call Waiting hears the call-waiting tone and the
call is queued until the extension becomes available.
Conference
With Automatic Callback, the call is automatically queued; however, if a
person tries to add the queued call to the conference, the system returns
a busy tone. With Selective Callback, the system also returns a busy
tone. To drop the busy tone from the conference, the originator presses
the Drop button and then the line button used to call the busy extension.
Coverage
The sender and all coverage receivers must be busy before a call to the
sender can be queued. The call is sent to coverage before it is put in the
callback queue. Once a call is in the callback queue, it is not sent to
coverage again. The callback call indicating that a busy extension or pool
is available is not eligible for Individual or Group Coverage.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Digital Data Calls
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 101
Videoconferencing systems that can dial feature codes using # can use
Selective Callback. When a pooled line becomes available or the busy
video system is idle, the queued call is made, one B-channel at a time.
When the second B-channel becomes available, it can be used for the
connection as well, providing the video system supports this capability.
Although video systems can use either off-hook or on-hook Callback, you
should use only off-hook Callback for 2B data connections. If you use
on-hook Callback, the returning callback call is connected using only one
B-channel.
Automatic Callback should be disabled for digital data and
videoconferencing extensions. It can be used at an MLX passive-bus
extension at a desktop video workstation.
Display
When a call is queued by Automatic Callback on a multiline telephone or
by Selective Callback on an analog multiline telephone, the display shows
a feedback message. When an MLX telephone user activates Selective
Callback, the display prompts the user to enter the telephone number.
When the queued call rings the user’s telephone, the display indicates
that it is a returning callback call.
Do Not Disturb
Calls to extensions that are using Do Not Disturb are not eligible for
callback queuing. If a callback originator is using Do Not Disturb, the
system overrides the feature and the telephone rings when the busy
extension or line/trunk is available.
Extension Status
In Hotel mode, an extension in Extension Status 1 or 2 cannot use
Callback to request busy pools.
Forward and
Follow Me
If a user queues a call and then uses Forward, Remote Call Forwarding,
or Follow Me, the call does not ring back at the destination extension or
telephone number; the callback call returns only to the forwarding
telephone.
Forward and
Follow Me
continued
If a forwarding extension is busy when a user calls, the user can queue
the call for callback. Callback is completed when the forwarding extension
is no longer busy. If the forwarding extension and the forwarded-to
extension are available, the call rings at both extensions. If the
forwarded-to extension is not available, the call rings at the forwarding
extension only.
If an inside caller using Automatic Callback calls an extension with
Remote Call Forwarding on and no pools are available, the caller hears
queuing tone, but the call queues for the extension only, not for the
remote number. When the extension becomes available, dequeuing tone
sounds and the call is placed to the extension (not the Remote Call
Forwarding number) if the user has stayed on the line. If the caller has
hung up, priority ring is heard as the callback call is dispensed to the
caller.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 102
In a case where no pools are available and an inside caller is not using
Automatic Callback, a call to an extension with Remote Call Forwarding
follows the extension’s coverage path. If there is no coverage and the
inside caller activates Selective Callback while listening to the busy
signal, the call queues for the extension but not for the Remote Call
Forward number.
Group Calling
Calls made to a calling group are not eligible for Callback because the
calls ring into the calling group’s queue. However, Callback can be used
for calls to individual calling group member extensions or to delay
announcement devices. Calling group calls are not sent to a group
member when the member has used Callback for a busy extension or
pool, or if another person used Callback to reach the member and the
callback call is ringing on the member’s telephone.
Headset Options
Callback calls are answered automatically by using Headset Auto
Answer, but a user hears the out-of-queue tone instead of the zip tone.
When both calling and receiving users have headsets with Headset Auto
Answer activated (MLX telephones only), the person being called hears
the zip tone when the callback call is completed; the callback originator
does not hear zip tone or dequeuing tone.
Hold
Pressing the Hold button while waiting for a callback call is similar to
hanging up. The green LED flashes next to the line button, indicating that
the button is being used for the queued call.
HotLine
Callback is not intended for HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later
systems). However, Automatic Callback may be used, if programmed, for
inside and ARS (Hybrid/PBX mode only) calls. Selective Callback is also
available.
Line Request
Returning callback calls cancel Line Request.
Multi-Function
Module
Both Automatic and Selective Callback can be used from an MFM;
however, a callback call cannot be manually canceled because the MFM
does not recognize the switchhook flash produced by pressing the Drop
button.
Music On Hold
An outside caller waiting in the callback queue hears Music On Hold if it is
programmed.
Paging
Callback cannot be used for calls to a speakerphone paging group. A
voice-announced inside call that is queued using Callback automatically
becomes a ringing call. Systems with Loudspeaker Paging can be set up
to allow calls to be queued for the Loudspeaker Paging system by placing
the Loudspeaker Paging jack in its own pool and having users access the
paging system through the pool. When the pool is busy, the call can be
queued.
Park
Calls waiting in a callback queue cannot be parked.
Personal Lines
The Callback feature cannot be used to request a busy personal line. See
‘‘Line Request’’ on page 372.
Pickup
A callback request cannot be picked up at another extension.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Pools
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 103
In Hybrid/PBX mode, Callback can be used to complete calls to an
outside number only when all lines/trunks in the pool are busy.
Primary Rate Interface Callback cannot be used to request a busy PRI line assigned as a
(PRI) and T1
personal line, but it can be used to request a line from a pool of PRI lines.
An idle PRI line is not considered an available pool member unless a
check determines that it is associated with an available B-channel. Even if
a B-channel is available when the pool selects a line for a queued call,
there may be none available when it is time to send a setup message to
the network. Or, after the setup message is sent, the network may
determine that the B-channel proposed by the system is not available. In
either case, the call fails and a fast busy tone is applied.
Some applications (such as video systems) that use data lines may work
improperly when releasing data facilities requested by Callback.
Recall/Timed Flash
If Recall is used while a user is off hook with a queued callback request,
the call is disconnected and the user hears dial tone.
Reminder Service
Reminder calls cannot be queued by using Callback.
Remote Access
Remote access users can use Callback if the system is programmed for
remote access Callback (Autoqueuing). The user cannot hang up but
must wait on the line until the extension or pool is available. The caller
hears Music On Hold if it is programmed.
SMDR
SMDR begins measuring the duration of a callback call when the call is
completed.
Speed Dial
When a Stop character is programmed as part of a Speed Dial number,
stay on the line, wait for the callback call, and then reactivate Speed Dial.
This signals the system to continue dialing the digits following the Stop
character.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Callback can be used on SA and ICOM buttons. When Callback is used
on an SA button, the call rings and the green LED next to the button
flashes only at the telephone that originated Callback. If a user other than
the person originating the callback call selects the flashing SA button with
the callback call and lifts the handset, he or she hears the queuing tone
and the green LED on the originator’s telephone goes from flashing to
steady. If the second person hangs up, the green LED on the originator’s
telephone goes back to flashing and the system directs the callback call
to the originator. If the second person stays on the line, the system directs
the call to the second person and not to the callback originator.
Selective Callback can be used from an SA or Shared SA button. The
green LED next to the button at the telephone that originated Callback
and all those next to other related SA and SSA buttons remain on.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Callback
Transfer
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 104
A queued callback call cannot be transferred, but calls transferred to busy
extensions are eligible for Callback. When a user reaches a busy
extension while transferring a call, he or she can use Automatic Callback
or Selective Callback to queue the call before completing the transfer.
The caller hears ringback or Music On Hold, if programmed, as with any
transfer. When the extension is available, the call is transferred to the
extension automatically. If the extension is not available before the
transfer return interval expires, the call is removed from the callback
queue and returned to the transfer originator.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Caller ID
Page 105
Caller ID
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Special Services
Hardware
Factory Setting
Type of Facility
Telephone users, operators, data users
SMDR, System Information (SysSet-up), GS/LS/Trunk
Information
All
MLX Display only
LinesTrunks→More→LS-ID Delay→Entry Mode
Custom Local Access Signaling System (CLASSSM) Caller
Identification
800 GS/LS-ID circuit module
LS-ID Delay option off
Loop-start
3
Description
Beginning with Release 3.0, the system supports Caller ID. This feature is part of
local telephone companies’ Custom Local Access Signaling Service (CLASS). It
provides a user with calling party number information from the central office (CO)
when a call rings on a loop-start line connected to an 800 GS/LS-ID module. This
information appears on MLX display telephones, much like the Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) Automatic Number Identification (ANI).
NOTE:
Calling number identification is not available in all areas or jurisdictions.
Check with your local telephone company. The availability of caller
identification information may also be limited by the local-serving (caller’s)
jurisdiction, availability, or central office equipment.
800 GS/LS-ID Circuit Module
3
The 800 GS/LS-ID circuit module provides eight analog loop-start or ground-start
line/trunk jacks, with each port capable of processing Caller ID information (over
loop-start lines only). It also provides two touch-tone receivers (TTRs) and can
have updated firmware downloaded to it through a PCMCIA card inserted in the
processor module.
The module may be programmed through the MLX-20L or through the PC-based
System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) interface. It is stored with other
system information about the PCMCIA memory card. Beginning with Releases
following 3.0, this module is upgradable through the memory card. (For
information about system programming, see ‘‘Programming’’ on page 480.)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Caller ID
Page 106
NOTE:
Lines/trunks used for incoming Caller ID service should not have any
equipment other than the 800 GS/LS-ID module port connected to them.
LS-ID Delay Option
3
Caller ID information is sent from the central office during the first silent interval of
ringing. Because it is possible to answer a call before this information arrives, you
can turn on the LS-ID Delay option, which suppresses ringing until the Caller ID
information arrives. This option can be programmed for each line. The factory
setting is Off.
On telephones with personal lines, users see the green LED flash next to the
personal line button when a call arrives on the line. The red LED lights and the
telephone rings after a 6-second delay or when Caller ID information arrives,
whichever occurs first. Other telephones do not receive the call until after the
6-second delay or Caller ID information arrives.
NOTE:
The caller may hear one or two extra bursts of ringback if LS-ID Delay is
programmed while the person receiving the call has not yet heard a ring.
When the option is programmed on a 2-way trunk, the system does not seize a
trunk from the pool for an outgoing call while that trunk is receiving an incoming
call.
The differences between LS-ID Delay and Delay Ring are that Delay Ring
provides a fixed delay for all calls that arrive on the button programmed for Delay
Ring. LS-ID Delay affects calls that are received on lines connected to an
800 GS/LS-ID module. LS-ID Delay causes a variable delay in ringing at every
extension throughout the system on incoming calls to 800 GS/LS-ID modules.
The call is delayed only until Caller ID information is received from the central
office (on loop-start lines).
3
Facilities
The interface to Caller ID is provided by the 800 GS/LS-ID line/trunk module. This
module supports loop-start lines and ground-start trunks but supports Caller ID
only on loop-start lines.
Lines/trunks used for incoming Caller ID service should not have any equipment
other than the 800 GS/LS-ID module port connected to them.
Display Operation
3
Caller ID information is displayed on MLX display telephones only.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Caller ID
Page 107
The display shows No Caller ID when the call is answered before the Caller ID
data arrives, when the Caller ID data is corrupted, or when no Caller ID data is
sent from the central office.
Private may appear if the caller has subscribed to a central office service that
blocks call identification. The phrase Out of Area appears on the display when
the call originates from a line or caller area without Caller ID or caller information,
or sometimes from areas run by local service companies other than your own.
Hyphens are inserted between the digits, for example, 555-1234 for a 7-digit
telephone number and 916-555-1234 for a 10-digit number.
See ‘‘Display’’ on page 225 for more information.
3
Normal Incoming Call
When a call comes in on a personal line or Shared SA button, the calling party
number information appears at the principal owner’s extension. Incoming call
information is displayed on Line 1 of the first and second screens.
3
Group Calling
Caller ID information appears in the PRI Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
format without called party information.
3
Transferring a Call
The phone receiving the transfer displays standard incoming call identification
information until the transfer is completed. The second screen shows call transfer
information. Caller ID information appears on the display.
Calls returned after the transfer return interval expires also display standard
incoming call identification information.
Mode Differences
3
Behind Switch Mode
3
If a customer subscribes to both Caller ID and a CO’s call-waiting service on the
same line, Caller ID information for the first incoming call is transmitted and
appears at the display. However, the communications system does not provide
the Caller ID information for the second (call-waiting) call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Caller ID
Page 108
Considerations and Constraints
3
General
3
An organization must subscribe to the Caller ID service in order for incoming calls
through the 800 GS/LS-ID port module to receive Caller ID information (loop-start
lines only).
Caller ID/PRI ANI Comparison
3
Caller ID information arrives between the first and second ring at an extension.
PRI ANI uses the second screen of the telephone display to show the called party
number, while Caller ID generally uses this page to display the facility number.
Feature Interactions
3
Conference
The number of participants is shown on Line 1 of the display. The
conference originator can view call information associated with any
participant by pressing the Inspct button and the button the caller is on.
Coverage
Caller ID information is available to users receiving coverage calls.
Display
No Caller ID is displayed if the call is answered before the Caller ID
data arrives. Calling Party Number information appears in the PRI ANI
format. However, outgoing calling information is not displayed.
Do Not Disturb
Caller ID information is not displayed when a user turns on Do Not
Disturb.
If a user turns on Do Not Disturb while receiving Caller ID information, the
information remains on the display.
Forward and
Follow Me
The systemwide LS-ID delay, if programmed, is in addition to the
Forwarding Delay. The total delay is the LS-ID delay plus the Forwarding
Delay.
Group Calling
Caller ID information appears on the display. Outgoing call information is
not displayed.
Headset Options
When using Headset Auto Answer, program the LS-ID Delay option to
avoid loss of Caller ID information.
Night Service
Caller ID information appears on the display whether or not Night Service
has been activated.
Personal Lines
Caller ID information appears on the display of shared personal lines.
Outgoing call information is not displayed.
Pools
Collisions are avoided on 2-way trunks. Trunks programmed with the
LS-ID Delay option are not seized from a pool for outgoing calls if a call is
coming in on that trunk.
Remote Access
Caller ID information is not retrieved on remote access lines/trunks unless
LS-ID Delay is programmed for the line/trunk because the calls are
answered too quickly.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Caller ID
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 109
Ringing Options
LS-ID Delay or Delay Ring can be used to delay the ringing on lines
answered automatically so Caller ID information is not lost. If a line/trunk
has LS-ID Delay, Delay Ring gives an additional delay.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Calls ringing on both SA and Shared SA buttons display Caller ID
information on Line 1 of the first display screen. The information remains
on the answering extension’s display only. If another person picks up on
that extension, he or she sees In Use on the display and the answering
extension shows Shared Line: Ext Alpha/# of the other extension on
Line 2 of the first display screen.
SMDR
Use the ISDN format if you subscribe to Caller ID, whether or not your
company subscribes to PRI. The calling party number of an incoming call
appears in the NUMBER field. Also, an I appears in the CALL TYPE field.
If no information has been received from the CO, the word IN appears in
the NUMBER field and a C appears in the CALL TYPE field.
If you do not use any type of delay option and are using a device with
automatic pickup or if you manually pick up the call before the Caller ID
information arrives, IN appears in the NUMBER field and a C appears in
the CALL TYPE field.
Transfer
If Caller ID information is available, the caller’s telephone number is
shown on Line 1 of the first screen. Outgoing call information is not
displayed. The extension that initiated the transfer is shown on Line 1 of
the second screen. Caller ID information is also displayed when a call
returns from transfer.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Calling Restrictions
Page 110
Calling Restrictions
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Telephone users, operators, data users
Reports Affected
Extension Directory, Extension Information, Remote Access
(DISA) Information
All
All
Assign or remove outward/toll restriction for individual
extensions:
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
●
Extensions→Restriction
Assign or remove pool dial-out code restriction for individual
extensions:
●
Extensions→Dial OutCd
Assign or remove outward/toll restriction from non-tie trunks
used for Remote Access:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-TIE Lines→
Restriction
Assign or remove outward/toll restriction from tie trunks used
for Remote Access:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→TIE Lines→ Restriction
Assign or remove outward/toll restriction for each remote
access barrier code:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→Restriction
Assign or remove the ARS FRL for individual extensions:
● Extensions→More→ARS Restrct
Assign or remove the ARS FRL associated with each route:
●
Tables→ARS→Sub A FRL or Sub B FRL
Assign or remove the ARS FRL associated with non-tie trunks
used for Remote Access:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccssNon-TIE→ARS Restrct
Assign or remove the ARS FRL associated with tie trunks
used for Remote Access:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→TIE Lines→ARS Restrct
Assign or remove the ARS FRL for each remote access
barrier code:
●
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→ARS
Restrct
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Calling Restrictions
At a Glance - Continued
Factory Settings
Extensions
Outward/Toll Restriction
ARS FRL
Pool Dial-Out Code
VMI Ports
Outward/Toll Restriction
ARS FRL
Disallowed List
ARS FRL for ARS Table
Local
Toll
Remote Access Trunks/
Barrier Codes
Outward/Toll Restriction
ARS FRL
Page 111
Unrestricted
3 (range 0–6)
No access to any pool
Outward
0 (range 0–6)
Default Disallowed List (List 7)
2 (range 0–6)
3 (range 0–6)
Unrestricted
3 (range 0–6)
See ‘‘Allowed/Disallowed Lists’’ on page 34, ‘‘Remote
Access’’ on page 522, and ‘‘Night Service’’ on page 398 for
additional calling restrictions.
Description
3
The Calling Restrictions features are used to control outgoing calls from individual
extensions, specific pools, types of lines/trunks used for Remote Access, or
specific lines/trunks associated with individual barrier codes. When used in
conjunction with Automatic Route Selection, calling restrictions can be used to
apply ARS Facility Restriction Levels on specific extensions, routes, types of
lines/trunks used for Remote Access, and specific lines/trunks associated with
individual barrier codes (incoming calls are never restricted). Through calling
restrictions, users at individual extensions can be restricted from making certain
types of calls, as described in the following sections.
Outward and Toll Restrictions
3
An extension cannot be used to make toll calls if toll-restricted and cannot be used
to make any outside calls if outward-restricted.
If the restrictions are too limiting, an Allowed List can be used in conjunction with
calling restrictions. An Allowed List is a list of telephone numbers (such as
emergency numbers) that a user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension can
dial. If no calling restrictions are assigned to an extension or to supplement calling
restrictions, a Disallowed List can be used. A Disallowed List is a list of telephone
numbers (for example, 900 numbers) that cannot be dialed from an extension.
See ‘‘Allowed/Disallowed Lists’’ on page 34 for additional information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Calling Restrictions
Outward Restriction for VMI Ports
Page 112
3
In Release 3.1 and later systems, any port programmed as a VMI port is
programmed with outward restriction on.
If the system manager wants to allow access to the voice messaging system
Outcalling feature, the outward restriction applies to Outcalling calls.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
Any changes to the restrictions of these ports must be considered carefully
in order to minimize the potential for toll fraud.
If the system manager changes a VMI port to an non-VMI port, the outward
restriction of the port is not turned off for the port. If outward restriction should be
turned off, the system manager must change it thorough system programming.
Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
(Hybrid/PBX Only)
3
A restricted extension cannot dial specific pool dial-out codes. This restricts
outgoing calls from specific pools and can be used to reserve pools for special
purposes, for example, data communications.
In Release 3.1 and later systems, the factory setting is for all extensions to be
restricted from using any pool.
Facility Restriction Level (Hybrid/PBX Only)
3
The Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Facility Restriction Level (FRL) is used to
restrict the extension to certain routes. When ARS is used, an FRL is assigned to
control or restrict access to specific routes in an ARS table. There are seven FRLs
assigned to routes, ranging from 0 to 6, where 0 is the least restricted and 6 is the
most restricted.
FRLs from 0 to 6 are also assigned to extensions and are used to determine
whether callers have permission to use the routes. To use a route, an extension
must have an FRL equal to or greater than the route’s FRL. Therefore, the
restrictions of the FRL assigned to an extension are the opposite of the
restrictions of an FRL assigned to a route. In other words, an extension with an
FRL of 0 has the fewest ARS privileges (routes with levels 1 through 6 cannot be
used), and an extension with an FRL of 6 has the most privileges (any route may
be used). See ‘‘Automatic Route Selection’’ on page 63 for additional ARS
information.
Restrictions for VMI Ports
In Release 3.1 and later systems, any port programmed as a VMI port is
factory-set with a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) of 0.
3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Calling Restrictions
Page 113
If the system manager wants to allow access to the voice messaging system
Outcalling feature, the FRL applies to Outcalling calls.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
Any changes to the FRL and other restrictions of these ports must be
considered carefully in order to minimize the potential for toll fraud.
If the system manager changes a VMI port to a non-VMI port, the FRL is not
reassigned on the port. If the default FRL should be changed, the system
manager must change it through system programming.
3
Remote Access
Outward/toll and FRL calling restrictions can also be applied to remote access
users. These calling restrictions can be applied to each individual barrier code (up
to 16) or, if barrier codes are not used, to all remote access tie/DID trunks and all
remote access non-tie/non-DID trunks. See ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 522 for
additional information.
3
Night Service
Other calling restrictions can be applied when Night Service is activated. Night
Service can be set up to require a password to be dialed before a non-emergency
number. When the correct password is entered, the system then checks for calling
restrictions assigned to each extension before allowing calls to outside numbers.
A Night Service Exclusion List can be created to exempt specific extensions from
the password requirement. However, normal calling restrictions (if any) assigned
to the extension are still in effect. A Night Service Emergency Allowed List can
also be created, which can contain up to 10 numbers that can be dialed without
entering the Night Service password. See ‘‘Night Service’’ on page 398 for
additional information.
Considerations and Constraints
3
In Hybrid/PBX mode, an outward-restricted extension cannot be used to make an
ARS call except to emergency numbers. See ‘‘Allowed/Disallowed Lists’’ on page
34 for additional information.
Only outgoing calls are affected; users can receive inside, local, and toll calls on
restricted extensions and can join any type of call in progress.
When a user with an outward-restricted extension presses the dialpad while on a
call, the call is disconnected, the user hears a fast busy signal, and the line/trunk
is released. The system assumes that the user is trying to make an outside call,
which is not allowed because of the outward restriction assigned to the extension.
Users with Pool buttons on their telephones can use the pool even if the pool
dial-out restriction is assigned to the extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Calling Restrictions
Page 114
Outward and toll restriction do not work with tie trunks or with T1 lines emulating
tie trunks which are set to tie-PBX. Automatic Route Selection or pool dial-out
codes should be used to restrict these types of line/trunks.
Because calling restrictions apply to extensions used to initiate a transfer to an
outside number, a user with a restricted extension can circumvent restrictions by
asking an operator with an unrestricted console to connect an outside call.
When a marked System Speed Dial code is used to dial a number, the System
Speed Dial number overrides calling restrictions (such as outward or toll
restrictions).
If Centrex service is used, any calling restrictions for the extension must be
programmed by the telephone company at the central office.
Mode Differences
3
Hybrid/PBX Mode
3
In Hybrid/PBX mode, all calling restrictions can be assigned.
Key and Behind Switch Modes
3
In Key and Behind Switch modes, outward and toll restrictions can be assigned,
while pool dial-out code restrictions and ARS FRL cannot be assigned.
Feature Interactions
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
3
When used with calling restrictions, Allowed Lists can permit the dialing of
specific numbers (such as emergency numbers) from an outward- or
toll-restricted extension.
Disallowed Lists can prevent the dialing of specific numbers from an
unrestricted or toll-restricted extension.
A Disallowed List takes precedence over an Allowed List.
Auto Dial
A user with a restricted extension cannot dial a restricted number
(outward or toll) by using an Auto Dial button unless the number is on the
Allowed List for that extension.
Automatic Route
Selection
ARS does not allow users to avoid calling restrictions. The system checks
for outward or toll restrictions assigned to the extension before it selects
the best route for making the call. If the ARS FRL assigned to the
extension restricts use of the route, a user hears an error tone and the call
does not go through. Because FRL assignment determines pools
selected in each route, a user may be allowed to select a pool using ARS
even if the extension is restricted from the pool dial-out code.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Calling Restrictions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 115
Callback
In Hybrid/PBX mode, a user with a restricted extension can use Callback
for a busy pool because restrictions are based on the specific line/trunk
being used to make the call. When a line/trunk in the busy pool is
available, the system checks for restrictions assigned to the extension. If
the extension is restricted, the user hears a fast busy signal to indicate
that the call is not allowed.
Centrex Operation
Centrex users should not be assigned calling restrictions because the
calling restrictions should be assigned through the CO.
Conference
A user with an outward/toll-restricted extension cannot add an outside/toll
participant to a conference unless the participant’s number is on an
Allowed List for that extension.
Coverage
In Release 2.1 and later systems, users answering calls on Cover buttons
can generate touch tones (for example, dialing a 1 to accept a collect call)
if their extensions are not outward- or toll-restricted. If the telephone is
outward- or toll-restricted, the user hears the touch tones, but the tones
are not sent out over the line.
Directories
Using a marked System Directory listing to dial a number overrides any
calling restrictions (such as toll or outward restrictions) assigned to the
extension.
Display
Call Denied appears on an MLX display when a call is denied because
of calling restrictions. The message is not shown on an analog multiline
display telephone.
Extension Status
To allow users in the Hotel configuration of Extension Status to dial
emergency or other selected numbers when the extension is in Status 1
or 2, the extension must be assigned to an Allowed List.
Forward and
Follow Me
A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot forward calls to
a number (outward or toll) unless the number is on an Allowed List for that
extension. No error tone sounds when a user with a restricted extension
activates the Forward feature; however, when a call is received at the
extension, the system checks restrictions and denies the forward if the
number is not on the Allowed List.
HotLine
Calling restrictions can be applied to HotLine extensions (Release 5.0
and later systems).
Night Service
For Night Service with outward restriction, a Night Service Emergency
Allowed List must be created; it consists of emergency numbers that can
be dialed from any extension without dialing the password (10 emergency
numbers, 9 digits each). Any restrictions assigned to an extension on the
Night Service Exclusion List are in effect when Night Service is activated.
Personal Lines
A user at an outward-restricted extension cannot dial a restricted number
(outward or toll) on a personal line unless the number is on an Allowed
List for that extension.
Pools
Specific pools can be restricted from being used for outgoing calls by
assigning a pool dial-out code restriction to extensions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Calling Restrictions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 116
Primary Rate Interface Outward and toll restrictions do not work with T1 lines emulating tie trunks
(PRI) and T1
when the lines are set to Tie-PBX or Tie Switched 56 Data. Use
Automatic Route Selection or pool dial-out codes instead.
Recall/Timed Flash
If Recall is used on a personal line or Pool button—or, in Release 2.0 and
later systems, on an SA or ICOM button—to access an outside loop-start
line, the accessed line is kept, the user hears outside dial tone, and
calling restrictions are reapplied.
Speed Dial
A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot dial a restricted
number by using Personal Speed Dial or System Speed Dial (excluding a
marked System Speed Dial code), unless the number is on an Allowed
List for that extension.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
For Shared SA buttons, calling restrictions apply to the extension with the
SSA button, not to the principal user.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Camp-On
Page 117
Camp-On
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
Telephone users, operators
System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All except single-line telephones and data equipment
Feature Codes
57
87 (Call Waiting Pickup)
Camp On [Camp] + caller’s extension label
MLX Display Label
System Programming
*57
Change the amount of time before a camped-on call returns to
originator:
●
Factory Setting
Return Interval
Options→CampOn
90 seconds (range 30–300, in increments of 10 seconds)
Description
3
Camp-On allows you to complete a transfer to a busy extension. The call is put on
hold until the extension can receive a call; then it rings automatically. While the
call is on hold, the caller (inside or outside) hears special ringback. The person at
the busy extension hears a call-waiting tone to indicate that a call is waiting. If the
call is not answered within the programmed Camp-On return interval (30–300
seconds), the call returns to the originator. The originator hears a priority ring (one
ring and two beeps) to indicate a returning Camp-On call.
Camp-On can also be used to complete a transfer to an extension that is not
busy. This can increase the amount of time before the call returns to the originator
because the return call is timed according to the Camp-On return interval (30–300
seconds) instead of the transfer return interval (1–9 rings). Camp-On can be
activated by using either a programmed button or a feature code.
Considerations and Constraints
3
A Camp-On return interval of 30 to 300 seconds in increments of 10 seconds can
be programmed. The factory setting is 90 seconds.
A person at a destination telephone hears a call-waiting tone when a call is
camped on even if Call Waiting is not programmed on the destination extension.
Multiple calls can be camped-on to individual extensions.
To use Camp-On, the feature must be activated while the person is listening to
ringing, a busy tone, or call-waiting ringback. Camp-On cannot be activated at
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Camp-On
Page 118
other times, and no error tone sounds when a caller unsuccessfully tries to use
Camp-On at an inappropriate time.
Camp-On cannot be used on a system that includes a voice messaging system.
Telephone Differences
3
Direct-Line Consoles
3
When a Direct-Line Console (DLC) system operator uses Camp-On to transfer a
call to a busy extension, the call is placed in the call-waiting queue; the caller
hears the call-waiting tone whether or not the user has the Call Waiting feature
activated.
If the system is programmed for one-touch Transfer with automatic completion, an
operator uses Camp-On by pressing the Transfer button, dialing the extension
manually, and activating Camp-On.
If an operator presses an Auto Dial or DSS button, the transfer is automatically
completed and Camp-On cannot be used.
Queued Call Consoles
3
A Camp-On button cannot be programmed on a QCC. Instead, the operator
makes a call to a busy extension by selecting Camp On from the display. The call
does not return to the QCC queue until the Camp-On return interval expires. If the
operator presses the Release button, the extension being called receives the
call-waiting tone and the call returns to the QCC queue when the transfer return
interval expires.
To use Camp-On when the system is programmed for automatic extended call
completion, a QCC operator must press the Start button, dial the extension
manually, activate Camp-On, and either press Release or hang up. If the operator
presses a DSS button, the transfer is automatically completed and Camp-On
cannot be used.
Other Multiline Telephones
3
Camp-On can be used when a multiline telephone user hears ringing, a busy
tone, or call-waiting ringback while transferring a call. To use Camp-On to
complete the transfer, press a programmed Camp-On button or press the
Feature button and dial 57. On MLX display telephones, a user can also press the
Feature button and select Camp On from the display.
Single-Line Telephones
3
Calls can be camped on to single-line telephones, but single-line telephone users
cannot use Camp-On.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Camp-On
Feature Interactions
Page 119
3
Call Waiting
A user with no available buttons to receive a transferred call hears the
call-waiting tone when a caller uses Camp-On to transfer a call, even if
Call Waiting is not activated.
Coverage
All individual and/or Group Coverage points must be busy before a call
can be camped-on to a coverage sender’s extension. Coverage calls
answered by a receiver can be camped-on to another user.
Digital Data Calls
Data and video calls cannot be camped on.
Direct Station
Selector
When Camp-On is used to complete a transfer and the call returns, the
DSS button for the extension to which the call has been transferred goes
off and does not flash as it does for a transfer return or Park return.
Display
After Camp-On is activated, the display on an MLX display telephone
shows Camp On: and the caller’s extension label.
Do Not Disturb
A Camp-On call does not ring when Do Not Disturb is activated.
Group Calling
A user can transfer a call to a calling group by using Camp-On, but the
call does not return to the originating extension, even if it is not answered
within the programmed Camp-On return interval.
HotLine
HotLine (Release 5.0 and later systems) calls can be camped onto but a
HotLine extension cannot camp on to calls.
Line Request
Returning Camp-On calls cancel Line Request.
Music On Hold
When Camp-On is used to complete the transfer of an outside call, the
waiting caller hears either Music On Hold or ringing, depending on the
Transfer Audible setting.
Paging
Camp-On cannot be used for calls to busy speakerphone paging groups.
SMDR
If an incoming call is camped on but not picked up by the called
extension, the extension of the user who activated Camp-On is shown in
the STN (station, that is, extension) field of the SMDR report. If an
incoming call is camped on and picked up by the destination extension,
the destination extension is shown in the STN field.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
A user can pick up a camped-on call by using an idle SA Originate Only
or an idle SA button.
Transfer
A transfer can be completed by using the Camp-On feature, whether or
not the destination extension is busy. When the feature is used, the
Camp-On return interval is used instead of the transfer return interval. If a
user wishing to transfer a call to an outside number activates Camp-On,
the call to the outside number is disconnected. The original call, waiting
for transfer, remains on hold.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Page 120
Centrex Operation
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All touch-tone telephones
Specify mode of operation:
●
SysProgram→System→Mode
For additional programming requirements, see ‘‘Recall/Timed
Flash’’ on page 511.
3
Description
Centrex is an optional telephone service that business customers can obtain from
telephone companies. A Centrex line/trunk provides access to telephone features
similar to those available from a PBX switch located on the customer’s premises.
Basic Centrex features often include the following:
■
Transfer
■
Three-way conference
■
Drop
■
Hold
■
Recall
■
Call forwarding
■
Call waiting
■
Call pickup
■
Group pickup
■
Automatic callback
NOTE:
The term communications system here refers to the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System, as distinguished from the Centrex system
provided by the central office.
Additional features, such as speed dialing and night service, may also be
available from some telephone companies. Centrex features other than those
specifically discussed in this section are accessed by sending a switchhook flash
and dialing the appropriate feature code. These codes are not intercepted or
interpreted by the communications system.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Page 121
To use the features available through Centrex, dial a Centrex feature code from a
touch-tone telephone or analog data device. Some features must be programmed
for customers by the telephone company at the central office (CO). The system
can be configured for either full or limited Centrex service.
NOTE:
The system supports Centrex on loop-start lines only, not on ground-start
or ISDN facilities.
Full Centrex
3
Full Centrex requires that each extension have a direct Centrex line/trunk (prime
line) to the CO. Full Centrex can also be used when only some extensions have
prime lines, but the extensions without prime lines have limited ability to use
Centrex features. Prime lines can be shared between extensions.
The prime line allows users to dial outside numbers directly after dialing an
access code (usually 9). For this reason, any calling restrictions for the extension
must be programmed by the telephone company.
The prime line is also used to call other 4-digit Centrex extension numbers that
may be located at different sites served by the same telephone company. The
communications system’s intercom lines are used to dial other extensions in the
communications system.
With full Centrex, users can send a switchhook flash using the Recall or Flash
button. The fixed-function buttons (Hold, Drop, and Transfer) control Centrex
features rather than communications system features (additional buttons can be
programmed for communications system use). The communications system does
not intercept or respond to Recall or fixed-function button signals. See
‘‘Recall/Timed Flash’’ on page 511 for additional information.
For full Centrex operation, the system must be in Behind Switch mode. A full
Centrex configuration operates on three levels, as shown in Figure 4 on page 122.
The extension user must be aware of the level where he or she is when making a
call or activating a feature.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Page 122
Central Office
(External Calls)
de
Centrex Service
o
sC
• 4-digit Centrex Calls
• Use of Centrex Features
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System
• 2, 3, or 4-digit intercom
• Key Mode Features
Figure 4.
Limited Centrex
es
c
Ac
es
Pr
e
Lin
im
Full Centrex Service
3
With limited Centrex service, users depend principally on the communications
system’s features, but a limited number of prime lines can be used to access the
CO Centrex. There are two cases that are particularly suitable for limited Centrex:
■
Centrex lines/trunks may be less expensive than other lines.
■
Different users may have different needs for telephone service, so that
some users benefit more from Centrex while other users benefit more from
direct use of the communications system.
In the limited Centrex configuration, some extensions may have prime lines while
other extensions access the prime lines through a pool. Extensions can also be
assigned ground-start, tie, or DID lines, which is not possible in full Centrex.
Telephones without prime lines can use a Pool button to access Centrex facilities
or may use an SA button to access pooled facilities by dialing an access code.
Once connected to a pool, users may dial other Centrex extensions or dial an
access code for outside calls. Outside calls made by using an SA button to
access a pool require two access codes for outside calls, one for the pool and one
for outside lines on Centrex.
For limited Centrex operation, the communications system must be in Key or
Hybrid/PBX mode. The total system operates on three levels, as shown in
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Page 123
Figure 5. The extension user must be aware of the level where he or she is when
making a call or activating a feature.
Central Office
Dial
-Ou
t Co
de
(External Calls)
de
Centrex Service
o
sC
• 4-digit Centrex Calls
• Use of Centrex Features
es
c
Ac
Pool
es
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System
• 2, 3, or 4-digit Numbering Plan
• Hybrid/PBX Mode Features
Figure 5.
Pr
e
Lin
im
Limited Centrex Service
Differences between Full and Limited Centrex
3
Full Centrex and limited Centrex differ in where and how PBX functions are
provided:
■
In full Centrex, the Centrex service provides PBX services to all
extensions.
■
In limited Centrex, the Centrex service provides PBX services to
extensions making calls at the Centrex level on prime lines, while other
services are provided by the communications system, acting as a switch
for calls between extensions and calls that do not require Centrex features.
In full Centrex service:
■
The communications system operates in Behind Switch mode.
■
Calls can be made between Centrex extensions at separate sites served
by the same Centrex.
■
Key mode features are provided by the communications system.
■
Intercom calls can be made between communications system extensions.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
■
Page 124
A switchhook flash, feature access code, or Feature button-press is
interpreted as intended for the Centrex service.
In limited Centrex service:
■
The communications system operates in Key or Hybrid/PBX mode.
■
Intercom calls can be made between communications system extensions.
■
Calls to Centrex extensions require access to a prime line.
■
A switchhook flash, feature access code, or Feature button-press activates
the communications system feature, not the Centrex feature.
■
Outside calls using Centrex service are made through individual prime
lines or pooled prime lines.
■
Other types of lines (tie, DID, and T1) can also be used for outside calls
without using Centrex service.
Considerations and Constraints
3
To prevent user confusion, extension numbers in the communications system
should reflect the ending digits of the Centrex prime line number. For example, an
extension with a Centrex prime line number of 4322 should have an extension
number of 4322 in a 4-digit (Set Up Space) numbering plan, 322 in a 3-digit
numbering plan, or 22 in a 2-digit numbering plan. ‘‘System Renumbering’’ on
page 583 provides information about numbering plans.
Centrex service supports only touch-tone telephones.
With full Centrex, the Recall or Flash and fixed-function buttons (Conf, Transfer,
and Drop) control Centrex functions. Corresponding communications system
functions can be programmed on buttons if any are available (see ‘‘Recall/Timed
Flash’’ on page 511 for additional information). With limited Centrex, the Recall or
Flash and fixed-function buttons control communications system functions. In
either case, some Centrex functions can be programmed on the Directory and on
Auto Dial buttons, but not on other unused feature buttons.
Centrex service is supported only on loop-start lines. Some central offices offer
Centrex features on ground-start trunks; however, the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System does not support Centrex features on ground-start
trunks or ISDN facilities. Centrex service on T1 trunks with loop-start emulation is
also not supported.
Full Centrex (Behind Switch mode) does not support data communications.
During high-traffic periods, the loop-start lines used by Centrex can cause glare
when multiple calls access the same line simultaneously. Loop-start lines also
have higher cable losses than ground-start lines/trunks and cannot guarantee
secure toll restriction.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 125
With limited Centrex in Hybrid/PBX mode, DID, tie, WATS, and T1 lines/trunks
can be used. In Key mode, tie, WATS, and T1 lines/trunks can be used. These
lines/trunks cannot be used with full Centrex in Behind Switch mode.
With limited Centrex, outside calls made by using an SA button to access a pool
require two access codes for outside calls: one code for the pool, and one for
outside lines on the Centrex service.
Centrex users should not be assigned calling restrictions because the system
prevents an extension with calling restrictions from sending a switchhook flash to
the central office. Calling restrictions should be placed through the Centrex
service.
Once a call connection is made to Centrex service, the communications system
cannot detect additional calls that are initiated following a Centrex switchhook
flash. Therefore, the SMDR and systems such as Call Accounting System (CAS),
Integrated Solution II (IS II), Integrated Solution III (IS III), and Call Accounting
Terminal (CAT) do not report the additional calls.
Users who have access to both Centrex and communications system features
must be aware of which they are connected to when they attempt to use a feature.
Use of Centrex buttons when connected to the communications system, or of
communications system buttons when connected to Centrex service, causes
misdialed calls.
If a Multi-Function Module (MFM) is not being used on an MLX telephone, the
second extension should be removed, in order to reduce the number of Centrex
lines. The automatic assignment of two extension numbers to each MLX
telephone may mean the installer must renumber the system because the
removed numbers are not automatically reassigned and their removal leaves
empty places in the sequential numbering of extensions. See ‘‘System
Renumbering’’ on page 583 for additional information.
Beginning with Release 3.0, companies may use the 800 GS/LS-ID module to
capture calling number identification information (subscribed to from the CO on
loop-start lines only, if available) and MLX display telephones in these systems to
show the number of an outside call received on a line connected to the module.
However, if the customer also subscribes to call waiting through Centrex, the
number of the waiting call is not shown on the MLX display. For more information,
see ‘‘Caller ID’’ on page 105.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Page 126
Mode Differences
3
Hybrid/PBX Mode
3
Hybrid/PBX mode can be used only in a limited Centrex configuration. In
Releases prior to 2.0, a switchhook flash can be sent to the Centrex service only
when the prime line is terminated either on a personal line or, when prime lines
are shared, on a Pool button. Accessing a prime line through an SA button does
not allow the switchhook flash to be sent to the Centrex service.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, Centrex lines active on an SA button (including
a Shared SA button) can use Recall or switchhook flash.
Tie, WATS, and T1 lines can be used in pools. They can be used only as personal
lines with Centrex service in Key and Behind Switch modes.
Key Mode
3
Key mode can be used only in a limited Centrex configuration.
Key mode avoids the requirement that each extension have a prime line or shared
prime line to make Centrex calls. It allows the use of an ICOM button for access to
Centrex lines. It also allows the use of tie, WATS, and T1 lines as personal lines.
In releases prior to Release 2.0, a switchhook flash can be sent to the Centrex
service only when the line is terminated on a personal line. Accessing the same
line through an ICOM button does not allow the switchhook flash to be sent to the
Centrex service.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, Centrex lines active on an ICOM button can use
Recall or switchhook flash.
Behind Switch Mode
3
For full Centrex configuration, the communications system must be in Behind
Switch mode.
Behind Switch mode does not support MERLIN MAIL, MERLIN LEGEND MAIL,
AUDIX Voice Power, Call Accounting System (CAS), or Call Management System
(CMS). These applications are supported only in Key and Hybrid/PBX modes.
Full Centrex service supports only loop-start facilities. While lines that are not
loop-start lines are not blocked by the communications system, they can cause
dialing errors. Even random use of modules that are not loop-start (such as E&M
modules) throws off the default line assignments. If boards other than loop-start
boards must be used, they must be positioned after the last loop-start line module,
or prime lines on later modules may be assigned incorrectly. If a DS1 module is
used, it must be placed after all other loop-start boards on the system so that
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Page 127
default line assignments on the communications system are not affected. Digital
facilities are not supported in Behind Switch mode.
In Behind Switch mode, during periods of high telephone traffic, users may
experience delays in obtaining dial tone from the Centrex system. This could
cause misdialing when using System or Personal Speed Dial.
Calls to calling groups in a system set up in Behind Switch mode follow the
communications system ring pattern, not the central office ring pattern.
Telephone Differences
3
Multiline Telephones
3
MLX Telephones
3
On MLX telephones, special ringing patterns are used to differentiate various call
types. If personalized ringing is used, the personalized ring comes before the
distinctive pattern.
■
Centrex intercom calls are indicated by the personalized ring followed by a
beep.
■
Centrex special or priority calls are indicated by the personalized ring
followed by three short rings.
■
Outside calls are indicated by the personalized ring followed by two short
rings.
■
Centrex special signaling is indicated by the facility-tracking tone.
Adjuncts connected to a Multi-Function Module (MFM) cannot send a switchhook
flash to the Centrex line. (Whenever possible, such adjuncts should be attached
to a 012 module or a 016 module.)
Analog Multiline Telephones
On analog multiline telephones, special ringing patterns differentiate various call
types. If personalized ringing is used, the personalized ring comes after the
distinctive pattern.
■
Centrex intercom calls are indicated by a beep followed by the
personalized ring.
■
Centrex special signaling is indicated by the facility-tracking tone.
■
Centrex special or priority calls are indicated by two short rings followed by
the personalized ring.
■
Outside calls are indicated by one short ring followed by the personalized
ring.
3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Centrex Operation
Page 128
3
Single-Line Telephones
When single-line telephones are used in Behind Switch mode, a prime line is
assigned automatically to the extension.
Centrex service supports only touch-tone telephones.
When single-line telephones are connected directly to a prime line, they have
limited functionality because they cannot access communications system features
or make intercom calls. They can, however, use all the Centrex features by dialing
the proper access codes.
If a single-line telephone has the Idle Line Preference programmed for an ICOM
Ring button, the user has complete use of all communications system features.
Access to Centrex lines and features is gained by dialing the Centrex access
code. However, a single-line telephone cannot use the communications system’s
Conference, Transfer, or Drop because the switchhook flash goes directly to the
Centrex line and is not intercepted or interpreted by the communications system.
Single-line telephones should be connected using a 012, 016, or OPT module. If a
single-line telephone is connected to an MFM, it cannot send a switchhook flash.
In Hybrid/PBX mode, special ringing patterns are used on single-line telephones
to differentiate various call types (personalized ringing is not available):
■
Centrex intercom calls are indicated by 2-burst ringing.
■
Centrex special or priority calls are indicated by 3-burst ringing.
■
Outside calls are indicated by 3-burst ringing.
■
Centrex special signaling is not indicated.
Feature Interactions
3
Caller ID
In Release 3.0 and later systems, companies may use the 800 GS/LS-ID
module to capture calling number identification information (subscribed to
from the central office on loop-start lines only, if available). MLX display
telephones in these systems show the number of an outside call received
on a line connected to the module. However, if the customer also
subscribes to call waiting through Centrex, the number of the waiting call
is not shown on the MLX display.
Calling Restrictions
Centrex users should not be assigned calling restrictions because the
calling restrictions should be assigned through the CO.
Conference
In Behind Switch mode, the fixed-function Conf button applies to Centrex
operation and is not recognized by the communications system. A button
can be programmed for communications system Conference.
Drop
In Behind Switch mode, the fixed-function Drop button applies to Centrex
operation and is not recognized by the communications system. A button
can be programmed for communications system Drop.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Page 129
Group Calling
Calls to calling groups in a system set up in Behind Switch mode follow
the communications system ring pattern, not the central office ring
pattern.
Recall/Timed Flash
In Behind Switch mode, a Recall button should be programmed to send
switchhook flash to activate Centrex features. The system supports the
use of a Recall button only on loop-start lines.
Speed Dial
During periods of high traffic, users may experience a delay in obtaining
dial tone from the Centrex service. This could cause misdialing when
using System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial. Pause characters can
be programmed as part of the Speed Dial number after entering the
access code.
Transfer
In Behind Switch mode, the fixed-function Transfer button applies to
Centrex transfers and is not recognized by the communications system. A
button can be programmed for communications system Transfer.
Conference
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Conference
Drop
MLX Display Label
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
System Information (SysSetup)
All
MLX telephones and analog multiline telephones except
MLC-5 cordless telephone.
*772
*773
Conference [Conf]
Drop [Drop]
Assign host system conference dial code:
●
Options→More→BehndSwitch→Conference
Assign host system drop dial code:
● Options→More→BehndSwitch→Drop
Maximums
Multiline telephones
Single-line telephones
Description
5 participants (originator + 2 inside, 2 outside)
3 participants (originator + 2)
3
Conference allows conference calls that include people on inside lines, outside
lines, or both.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Page 130
NOTE:
Conference and Drop buttons are available in all modes; they are
programmable only in Behind Switch mode.
Adding Conference Participants
3
A user can consult privately with each participant before adding the person to the
conference. Anyone who shares a personal line or Shared SA button with the
originator can join the conference on that button and is counted as a participant.
Dropping Conference Participants
3
By using the Drop button, a multiline telephone user can selectively drop
conference participants while the conference is in progress. However, a QCC
operator cannot selectively drop participants from a conference. When a QCC
operator presses the Drop button, only the most recently added participant is
dropped. Single-line telephone users can drop the most recently added participant
from the conference by issuing a switchhook flash.
Leaving a Conference
3
The conference originator can leave the conference by pressing the Hold button
(the conference continues). If a conference originator (excluding a QCC operator)
leaves a conference by either hanging up or selecting another line, the entire
conference is disconnected.
Considerations and Constraints
3
Transmission quality may vary during the conferencing of outside lines.
A call to a busy number cannot be added to a conference.
Pressing the Drop button and the line button for a participant also disconnects a
participant who joined the conference by using a shared personal line or an SA or
ICOM button.
When a conference originator puts the conference on hold, Music On Hold is not
activated.
In Release 1.1 and later systems, the system automatically selects an SA or
ICOM button when a user presses the Conf button. In Release 1.0 systems, the
system does not automatically select an SA or ICOM button; the user must select
the line manually.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 131
In addition, beginning with Release 1.1, prompts help MLX display telephone
users set up conference calls. Pressing the Conf button causes one of the
following to happen:
■
If the system is in Hybrid/PBX mode and the user has available SA
buttons, the system automatically selects one, in the following order of
preference:
— SA Originate Only (Ring)
— SA Originate Only (Voice)
— SA Ring
— SA Voice
■
If the system is not in Hybrid/PBX mode or a user has no available SA
button, the prompt Select a Line appears on Line 2 of the display on an
MLX display telephone.
After the system selects an SA button or the originator selects a line, Line 2
displays the prompt Dial. The originator can either dial a number or select
another line. Line 1 shows call-handling information, such as dialed digits, while
Line 2 is unchanged. The originator should then press Conf to connect all parties.
The prompt on Line 2 is replaced by the date and time. Line 1 displays the number
of parties in the conference.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
If the system selects a voice button, the caller hears a beep instead of
ringing. If a person does not answer at the destination extension and the
originator completes the conference, the conversation of the other parties is
broadcast on that extension’s speaker. The originator must be sure to drop
the unanswered destination extension on a voice button to prevent this from
happening. If people often use the Conference feature, the system manager
should consider using the Transfer Type setting of Ring rather than Voice,
to avoid this problem.
If the conference originator presses the Conf button, selects a line button, dials a
number, and presses the Conf button again before the person being called
answers, all conference participants hear ringback, which may cause voices to cut
in and out. If the conference originator calls a co-worker and presses the Conf
button, and the co-worker while on hold for the conference presses a Hold, Conf,
or Transfer button, the call is disconnected.
If a conference participant (excluding the originator) who is included on a
conference call on an SA or ICOM button leaves the conference temporarily by
putting the call on hold and then rejoins the conference on a shared personal line
or Shared SA button, the person is connected to the conference. However, the
LED for the original conference call line on the SA or ICOM button turns off.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Page 132
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call on hold at a programmed Cover button
can be added to a conference by an originator with a personal line for the call.
Mode Differences
3
Behind Switch Mode
3
The fixed Conf button on multiline telephones activates conference from the host
system. The dial codes for the host system for conference and drop must be
system-programmed. A multiline telephone user can program a Conference or
Drop button to use the communications system’s Conference or Drop features as
described above.
A single-line telephone user cannot use the Conference feature in Behind Switch
mode.
Telephone Differences
3
Queued Call Consoles
3
To arrange a conference call using a Queued Call Console (QCC), the operator
presses the Conf button after receiving a call or dialing the first outside number or
extension. The green LED next to the Call button flashes to indicate that the
person is on hold for the conference. An outside participant hears Music On Hold
if it is programmed; an inside participant hears nothing. Then the operator dials
the next number and presses the Conf button again; all participants are
connected.
To add another person, the operator presses the Conf button again. The green
LED next to the Call button flashes, indicating a call on hold, and the participants
can converse. The operator adds more participants by dialing their numbers and
pressing the Conf button until up to two outside lines and three extensions
(including the operator, the originator) are added. The operator can converse
privately with each participant before pressing the Conf button to join other
participants (this is called Conference with consultation).
Calls to busy numbers cannot be added to a conference. To disconnect a call to a
busy number, the operator presses the Call button with the conference call and
then continues adding participants, if desired.
All conference participants are connected together on one Call button. This allows
the operator to put the conference on hold and have other Call buttons available
to make or receive other calls. However, because all participants are on one Call
button, by first pressing the Drop button and then the Call button used to originate
the conference, the operator can drop only the last party added to the conference.
To rejoin a held conference call, a QCC operator presses the Call button with the
conference participant. To end the conference, the operator joins the conference
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Page 133
and presses the Forced Release button; all participants are disconnected. If
instead of pressing the Forced Release button, the operator hangs up, the
conference is put on hold. When the operator arranges a 3-participant conference
(the operator and two other participants) and then presses the Release button or
hangs up, the operator is released from the call and the other two participants
remain connected. If the operator arranges a 3- or 4-participant conference,
pressing the Release button has no effect; however, if the operator hangs up, the
conference is put on hold.
Other Multiline Telephones
3
To arrange a conference call using a multiline telephone, press the Conf button
after receiving a call or dialing the first outside number or extension. The green
LED next to the button used to make the call flashes, indicating that the person is
on hold for the conference. While on hold for a conference, an outside participant
hears Music On Hold, if programmed; and an inside participant hears nothing. To
add another participant, select another line button, dial the next number, and
press the Conf button again. Pressing the Conf button a second time connects all
participants, including you.
To add another person, press the Conf button again. The green LEDs next to the
line buttons flash, but the participants can converse. Then select a line or dial a
number, and press the Conf button again. Repeat the process for other
conference participants. Up to two outside lines and three extensions, including
yours, can be in the conference. You can converse privately with each participant
before pressing the Conf button to join other participants. This is called
Conference with consultation.
Calls to busy numbers cannot be added to a conference. An originator who
reaches a busy number can press any of the line buttons associated with the
conference call to disconnect the call to the busy number before continuing to add
participants.
To selectively drop a participant, press the Drop button followed by the line button
for the participant to be dropped. To leave the conference call temporarily without
disconnecting the call, press the Hold button. To rejoin a held conference call,
press any line button representing a conference participant. To end the
conference, hang up; all participants are disconnected.
A Drop button is automatically assigned to Line 6 on MDC 9000 and MDW 9000
telephones.
Single-Line Telephones
3
A total of three participants can be included on a conference call originated from a
single-line telephone. To arrange a conference call using a single-line telephone,
press and release either the Recall or Flash button or the switchhook after
receiving a call or dialing the first outside number or extension. The participant
automatically goes on hold. While on hold, an outside participant hears Music On
Hold, if programmed, and an inside participant hears nothing. To add the next
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Page 134
participant, dial another number and press and release either the Recall or Flash
button or the switchhook again. All participants are connected on the conference
call.
You can converse privately with each participant before pressing and releasing
either the Recall or Flash button or the switchhook to join other participants. This
is called Conference with consultation.
Calls to busy numbers cannot be added to a conference. If you reach a busy
number, you can press and release either the Recall or Flash button or the
switchhook to drop the outside line.
A single-line telephone user can drop the most recently added participant from the
conference by pressing and releasing either the Recall or Flash button or the
switchhook.
If a single-line telephone with a timed or positive disconnect (for example, Lucent
Technologies model 2500YMGK, 2500MMGK, or 8110M) is used, pressing the
switchhook disconnects the call. With this type of telephone, the Recall or Flash
button must be used instead of the switchhook to add a conference participant or
drop the most recently added conference participant. The 8100M telephone must
have positive disconnect programmed on the telephone, as described in its user
guide.
Feature Interactions
3
Account Code Entry
A separate account code must be entered for each outside call added to
the conference.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
A user with an outward-restricted extension cannot add an outside
participant to a conference unless the participant’s number is on an
Allowed List assigned to the extension. A user with a toll-restricted
extension cannot dial a toll number to add a participant unless the
participant’s number is on an Allowed List assigned to the extension.
You cannot add an outside number to a conference if the number is on a
Disallowed List assigned to your extension.
Authorization Code
Enter an authorization code before each outside call for a conference is
made.
You may enter a different authorization code for different outside calls if
you wish. This may be useful if different restriction privileges are required
for different outside calls for the conference.
Auto Dial
When programming an Auto Dial button, press the Conf button to enter
the Flash special character in a telephone number programmed on an
Auto Dial button. Press the Drop button to enter the Stop special
character in a telephone number programmed on an Auto Dial button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 135
Barge-In
Barge-In can be used to interrupt conference calls; all participants hear
the Barge-In tone. Barge-In, however, does not connect the user to a
conference call if the conference already has the maximum number of
participants. If Barge-In is used to connect to a conference call that
involves an outside line/trunk and the person on the outside line/trunk
hangs up, the person using Barge-In is also dropped.
Basic Rate Interface
Calls on BRI lines can be part of a conference call that is processed by
the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System rather than by the central
office (CO). The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System determines
the number of active parties on the call.
Basic Rate Interface
continued
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System supports up to five
people on a conference: two within the system, two outside the system,
and the call originator.
If a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System user is part of a
conference established by an outside party through the central office
conference feature, the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System may
play Music On Hold (if so programmed) when the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System user puts the call on hold.
Call Waiting
A call-waiting tone is heard only by the person receiving the call and not
by other conference participants. If the conference originator reaches a
busy extension, hears the call-waiting special ringback, and tries to add
the call to the conference, the system returns a busy tone. To drop the
busy tone from the conference, the originator must press the Drop button
and then press the line button used to call the busy extension.
Callback
A queued call cannot be part of a conference. With Automatic Callback,
the call is automatically queued; however, if you try to add the queued call
to the conference, the system returns a busy tone. If you use Selective
Callback to queue a call while setting up a conference, the system returns
a busy tone. Press the Drop button and the line button with the queued
call to drop the busy tone from the conference.
Caller ID
The conference originator can view Caller ID information associated with
any participant by pressing the Inspct button and the button the caller is
on.
Calling Restrictions
A user with an outward-restricted extension cannot add an outside
participant to a conference unless the participant’s number is on an
Allowed List assigned to the extension. A user with a toll-restricted
extension cannot dial a toll number to add a participant unless the
participant’s number is on an Allowed List assigned to the extension.
You cannot add an outside number to a conference if the number is on a
Disallowed List assigned to your extension.
Coverage
You can originate a conference call from a Cover button only when you
press the Transfer button, dial the number for another person, and then
press the Conf button to complete the transfer. In this case only, instead
of the call being transferred, a conference call with three participants
(including the originator) is established.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
CTI Link
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 136
CTI link applications can control 3-way conferences, including those
where one or two parties are outside the system. Screen pop occurs at
participating screen-pop-capable extensions.
When a conference is initiated manually at the telephone of an extension
using a CTI application, screen pop is not initiated at screen-pop capable
destinations, even when the application is used to complete the
conference.
CTI Link
continued
When performed by a QCC operator or unmonitored DLC operator, the
Conference feature generates screen pop at screen-pop-capable
destinations.
Digital Data Calls
Conference does not function with data calls.
Video application conference features do not function with the system.
2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. For
this reason, if a call is on hold for conferencing at a passive-bus MLX
telephone when a 2B call comes in, the passive-bus MLX telephone
cannot retrieve the held call until the 2B video call is over.
Directories
The Extension, Personal, and System Directory features can be used to
set up conference calls. Press the Conf button to enter the Flash special
character in a Directory listing telephone number. Press the Drop button
to enter the Stop special character.
Display
As with any other call, the dialed digits appear on Line 1 of the display as
you set up a conference call. On MLX telephones, Line 1 of the display
shows the number of conference participants. In addition, the MLX
telephone display prompts you each time you press the Conf button. The
display also prompts you to drop a conference participant after you press
the Drop button; then it shows the updated conference information on
Line 1 and on Line 2 shows which line or extension has been dropped.
Beginning with Release 1.1, if the system is not in Hybrid/PBX mode or
you have no available SA or ICOM button, the prompt Select a Line
appears on Line 2 of the display. After the system selects an SA or ICOM
button line or the originator selects a line, Line 2 displays the prompt
Dial. After dialing a number or selecting another line, the prompt on Line
1 changes to show call-handling information, such as dialed digits. Then
press Conf to connect all parties. The prompt on Line 2 is replaced by the
date and time, while Line 1 displays the number of parties active on the
call.
Fax Extension
If an extension is programmed as a fax extension, the telephone at that
extension is unable to use the Conference feature.
Forward and
Follow Me
When calls received on a personal line are forwarded to an outside
telephone number, another user who shares the personal line and the
line/trunk selected to forward the call can join the in-progress call by
pressing the personal line button. In this case, the person joining the call
is considered the conference originator, and the forwarded call can be
conferenced. If the person joining the call hangs up, all participants on the
conference call are disconnected.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 137
Group Calling
Calls waiting in the calling group queue or ringing at a calling group
member’s extension cannot be added to a conference call. A user must
be connected to a calling group member before the call can be added to
the conference.
Headset Options
Headset Auto Answer is disabled and must be activated manually while
an MLX telephone user with a headset is setting up a conference.
Hold
The conference originator receives the hold reminder tone when a
conference is on hold for more than one minute because the originator is
pressing the Hold button or adding other participants. If Direct-Line
Console (DLC) operator automatic Hold is programmed and used by a
DLC operator setting up a conference, the entire conference goes on
hold.
Both sides of an inside call cannot be put on hold. Therefore, if a user
presses the Hold button while waiting on hold for a conference initiated
by another user (an inside call) or if a user presses the Conf button while
waiting on hold on an inside call, all participants are disconnected.
HotLine
Conference is not available at HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later
systems),
Inspect
If a user presses the Conf button while Inspect is activated, Inspect is
canceled and the system tries to activate the Conference feature.
When a user joins a conference by using a shared outside line or Shared
SA button, the QCC display reflects the correct number of participants.
However, if the QCC operator uses the Inspect feature to verify the
number of participants, the number shown on the display does not include
participants joining the conference on a shared button.
Multi-Function
Module
The Conference feature cannot be used on the MFM because the system
ignores the switchhook flash sent by the MFM.
Music On Hold
If the first participant put on hold for a conference is an outside call, the
caller hears Music On Hold until the second participant is added. When a
conference originator puts the conference on hold, Music On Hold is not
activated.
Paging
Speakerphone and loudspeaker paging calls cannot be added to a
conference.
Park
Conference calls cannot be parked.
Pickup
A conference call cannot be picked up at another extension. A conference
originator can, however, pick up a call and add it to the conference.
Recall/Timed Flash
A single-line telephone user with a Recall or Flash button adds a
participant to a conference call and connects all participants by using the
Recall or Flash button. In addition, the Recall or Flash button can be
used either to drop the most recently added participant or to drop a busy
number.
Remote Access
An inside user can initiate a conference with the callers involved in a
remote access call by selecting the active remote access line/trunk.
Signal/Notify
Signaling can be used during a conference.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Conference
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 138
SMDR
When a conference call includes inside and outside participants, records
are generated only for outside participants. When a call is dropped from a
conference call, it is considered a completed call and is sent to the SMDR
print queue.
Speed Dial
Press the Conf button to enter the Flash special character in a Personal
Speed Dial or System Speed Dial telephone number. Press the Drop
button to enter the Stop special character.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Calls on SA and ICOM buttons (including Shared SA buttons) can be
included in a conference call. If a user involved in a conference call on an
SA or ICOM button also has an SSA button for one of the conference
participants, the call is active at the SA or ICOM button and not at the
SSA button for the other participant.
Transfer
A conference call with three or more participants, including the
conference originator, cannot be transferred. However, if the conference
originator has one person on hold for the conference and decides to
transfer the call after dialing the number for the next participant, the
originator can press the Transfer button to transfer the call instead of
conferencing it.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 139
Coverage
3
At a Glance
3
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Individual sender
Individual receiver
Group member (sender)
Group receiver
Programming Codes
Sender buttons
Coverage Off
Coverage VMS Off
Receiver buttons
Primary Cover
Secondary Cover
Group Cover
Coverage Inside Off
Coverage Inside On
MLX Display Labels
System Programming
Telephone users, DLC operators, data users
Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Information,
Group Coverage Information, Operator Information
System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All except QCC
All multiline telephones except QCC
All except QCC
Multiline telephones, QCC queue, calling group (if calling
group, no others)
*49
*46
*40 + sender’s ext. no.
*41 + sender’s ext. no.
*42 + sender’s group no.
**48 (send outside calls only)
*48 (send inside and outside calls)
CoverageOff [CvOff]
CoverInside,Off [CvIns,Off]
CoverInside,On [CvIns,On]
Coverage VMS off [Cvvms,off]
Coverage,Primary [Cover,Prmry]
Coverage,Secondary [Cover,Secnd]
Coverage,Group [Cover,Group]
Assign extensions to a coverage sender group:
Extensions→More→Group Cover
Assign a calling group as a Group Coverage receiver:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→GrpCoverage
In releases prior to 4.1, change number of rings before call is
sent to Group Coverage receivers:
● Options→More→Cover Delay
In Release 4.1 and later systems, change number of rings
before call is sent to Group Coverage receivers:
● Extensions→More→More→Cover Delay→
Group Cover→sender’s ext. no.→Enter→no. of rings
(1–9)
●
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 140
At a Glance - Continued
System Programming
continued
In releases prior to 4.1, change delay for Cover button
programmed for Delay Ring; change additional delay before
call is sent to Group Coverage receivers:
●
Options→Delay Ring
In Release 4.1 and later systems, change the delay for
Primary Cover buttons programmed for Delay Ring; change
additional delay before a call is sent to Group Coverage
receivers when Primary or Secondary Coverage Receivers
are available:
●
Extensions→More→More→Cover Delay→
Primary→sender’s ext. no.→Enter→no. of rings (1–6)
In Release 4.1 and later systems, change the delay for
Secondary Cover buttons programmed for Delay Ring:
● Extensions→More→More→Cover Delay→
Secondary→sender’s ext. no.→Enter→no. of rings (1–6)
Assign or remove principal user of a personal line (calls follow
coverage pattern of principal user only):
● LinesTrunks→More→PrncipalUsr
Assign QCC queue as receiver for specific coverage groups
and assign QCC Queue Priority for Group Coverage calls:
●
Operator→Queued Call→Call Types→GrpCoverage→
Priority
Assign QCC operator to receive calls for a coverage group:
●
Maximums
Individual Coverage
receivers for each
extension (sender)
Group Coverage receivers
for each coverage group
(senders)
Group memberships for
each extension (sender)
Cover buttons for each
multiline telephone
(receiver)
Coverage groups
Members for each
coverage group
Coverage groups sending
to one calling group or
QCC queue
Operator→Queued Call→Call Types→GrpCoverage→
Operator
8
8 (not counting QCC queue)
1
8
30
Unlimited
30
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 141
At a Glance - Continued
Factory Settings
Extensions
Coverage
Coverage Inside
Coverage VMS
Group Coverage Ring
Delay (4.1 and later
systems)
Primary Cover Ring
Delay (4.1 and later
systems)
Secondary Cover Ring
Delay (4.1 and later
systems)
Systemwide
Delay Ring Interval (4.0
and prior systems)
Coverage Delay Interval
(4.0 and prior systems)
Secondary Coverage
Delay Interval
Retry Timing Interval
Operator
QCC Queue Priority for
coverage group
QCC operator to receive
calls for coverage group
On
On (inside and outside calls covered)
On (inside and outside calls covered by VMS)
3 rings (range 1–9 rings)
2 rings (range 1–6 rings)
2 rings (range 1–6 rings)
2 rings (range 1–6 rings)
3 rings (range 1–9 rings)
2 rings (fixed)
5 seconds (fixed)
4 (range 1–7)
Primary system operator
3
Description
Coverage allows a call ringing at one extension (a sender) to ring at another
extension (a receiver) at the same time and to be answered at either extension. It
is not necessary for the sender and receiver to have shared personal lines or
Shared SA buttons. A coverage sender, whose calls are covered, can be an
individual extension (Individual Coverage) or a group of extensions (Group
Coverage).
An extension becomes a sender and has its calls covered in either or both of the
following ways:
■
An Individual Cover button is programmed for the sender on the multiline
telephone of a receiver.
■
The sender is made a part of a coverage group through system
programming. A receiver for the group is programmed in any of the
following ways:
— A Group Cover button is programmed for the group on a multiline
telephone (a receiver).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 142
— The Queued Call Console (QCC) queue is programmed to be a receiver
for the group.
— A calling group is programmed to be a receiver for the group (this option
can be used to provide voice mail coverage for a coverage group).
An individual multiline telephone can have any combination of up to eight
Individual Cover and Group Cover buttons.
Several timers, summarized in Table 4, affect the delivery of a call to coverage
and/or how a covered call rings. In Release 4.1 and later systems, additional
settings allow system managers to customize coverage delays on an
extension-by-extension basis, rather than specifying delay intervals for all
extensions on the system. The Coverage Delay Interval and Delay Ring Interval
systemwide settings are replaced by these extension timers. Explanations of
these timers are included in the descriptions of Individual Coverage and Group
Coverage later in this section.
Individual Coverage
3
An Individual Coverage receiver, who covers calls for a sender, has a
programmed button that corresponds to the sender’s extension. A given sender
can have up to eight Individual Coverage receivers covering calls. A receiver, who
must have a multiline telephone, can have separate buttons for up to eight
senders, but can have only one button to provide Individual Coverage for a given
sender.
A button for Individual Coverage can be programmed as either Primary Cover or
Secondary Cover. The Secondary option provides a 2-ring delay, the Secondary
Coverage Delay Interval, to allow the sender to answer before the receiver; in
system releases prior to 4.1, the Primary option does not provide this delay.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the system manager sets additional ring delays
for each extension, rather than programming only systemwide settings. The
Secondary Cover Ring Delay is applied in addition to the fixed systemwide
Secondary Coverage Delay Interval; it does not affect Secondary or Group
Coverage call delivery. The Primary Cover Ring Delay option also permits
extension-by-extension control of ring delays on Primary Cover buttons
programmed for Delay Ring. The Group Coverage Ring Delay option allows the
system manager to control the delay before a given sender’s covered calls are
sent to Group Coverage receivers, whether or not Group and Individual Coverage
are combined.
Table 4 summarizes the systemwide and extension-by-extension (Release 4.1
and later systems only) settings that the system manager programs. In addition, a
user or system manager can program Cover buttons with Ring Timing options:
Immediate Ring, Delay Ring, or No Ring (see Table 5).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Table 4.
Page 143
Ring Delays Affecting Coverage
Timer
Coverage Delay
Interval*
Group Coverage
Ring Delay
Primary Cover
Ring Delay
*
Issue 1
June 1997
Factory
Setting
Range
3 rings
1–9 rings
3 rings
2 rings
1–9 rings
1–6 rings
Description
Release 4.0 and prior systems, set systemwide. Delay
before sending calls to Group Coverage, when:
■
Sender also has Individual Coverage and
receiver is available.
■
Sender does not have Individual Coverage or
receiver is not available, and Group Coverage
receiver is calling group only or QCC queue only
(no Group Cover buttons on multiline
telephones).
Release 4.1 and later systems, programmable for
each extension. Delay before sending calls to Group
Coverage, when:
■
Sender has Individual Coverage and receiver is
available (in addition to Primary Cover Ring
Delay).
■
Sender does not have Individual Coverage or
receiver is not available, and Group Coverage
receiver is calling group only or QCC queue only
(no Group Cover buttons on multiline
telephones).
Release 4.1 and later systems, programmable for
each extension. This timer sets:
■
The delay before a Primary Cover button
programmed for Delay Ring begins to ring
audibly.
■
The delay, in addition to the Group Coverage
Ring Delay, before calls are sent to Group
Coverage when the sender has Individual
Coverage and any receiver is available.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, this setting is replaced by the Group Coverage Ring
Delay.
Continued on next page
Table 4.
Timer
Continued
Factory
Setting
Range
Description
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 144
Secondary Cover
Ring Delay
2 rings
1–6 rings
Release 4.1 and later systems, programmable for
each extension. In addition to the fixed Secondary
Coverage Delay Interval (2 rings), this timer sets the
delay before a Secondary Cover button programmed
for Delay Ring begins to ring audibly. This setting
does not affect Primary or Group Coverage call
delivery.
Secondary
Coverage
Delay Interval
2 rings
Fixed
Delay before sending Individual Coverage calls to a
Secondary Cover button programmed for Immediate
Ring, when sender also has Individual Coverage to a
Primary Cover button.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the delay (in
addition to the Secondary Cover Ring Delay setting
for the sender) before a Secondary Cover button
programmed for Delay Ring begins to ring audibly.
Retry Timing
Interval
5 sec
Fixed
Repetition interval for trying to send calls to group
coverage when no receivers are available; continues
until call is answered by sender or receiver (or caller
hangs up)
Ring Timing Options, summarized in Table 5, are programmable on any buttons,
including programmed Cover buttons on multiline telephones.
Table 5.
Ring Timing Options
Option
Factory
Setting
Range
Immediate
—
—
Delay Ring
2 rings
No Ring
—
Description
—
1–6 rings on Delay before sending calls to Group Coverage (in
Cover
addition to Coverage Delay Interval) when sender
buttons
also has Individual Coverage and receiver is available
—
On sender (covered) telephone, prevents calls from
going to coverage
Regardless of how these options are programmed, the green LED next to the
Cover button on the receiver’s telephone flashes immediately when a call begins
ringing at the sender’s telephone. The receiver’s telephone rings audibly as
shown in Table 6. Both telephones continue to ring as programmed. The green
LED on both telephones continues to flash until the call is answered either by the
sender or by the receiver or the caller hangs up.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Table 6.
Page 145
Ringing on Individual Coverage (Receiver) Buttons
Ringing Option
Primary Cover
Secondary Cover
Immediate Ring
Immediately
After sender’s telephone rings 2 times
(SC, fixed)
Delay Ring
After sender’s telephone rings 1–6
(DR or PRD) times
After sender’s telephone rings 2 times
(SC) + 1–6 (DR or PRD) times
No Ring
Does not ring
Does not ring
DR = Delay Ring Interval (Release 4.0 and prior systems)
PRD = Primary Cover Ring Delay (Release 4.1 and later systems)
SC = Secondary Coverage Delay Interval
Group Coverage
6
Up to 30 coverage groups can be programmed for the system. Group Coverage is
an arrangement in which senders are organized into coverage groups, and calls
received by any unavailable group member are sent to one or more receivers.
There is no limit to the number of members in a group, but a given extension can
be a member of only one group. Any telephone except a QCC can be a member
of a coverage group.
Three types of receivers can be assigned to cover calls for coverage groups:
■
A multiline telephone can have a Group Cover button for a specific
coverage group, assigned through either extension programming or
centralized telephone programming. The button is usually labeled with the
name of the group, for example Sales. A given coverage group can send
its calls to up to eight Group Cover buttons; all eight can be programmed
on one multiline telephone or can be distributed on as many as eight
telephones.
Each Group Cover button can be programmed for Immediate Ring, Delay
Ring, or No Ring as illustrated in Table 6.
A single-line telephone cannot be programmed individually as a Group
Coverage receiver. However, it can be a member of a calling group that is
a receiver.
■
The QCC queue can be assigned through system programming as a
receiver for up to 30 coverage groups, with up to 4 QCC operators (the
maximum allowed number of QCCs) assigned to receive calls for each
coverage group. A QCC cannot have programmed Group Cover buttons.
The QCC queue can be the only receiver or can be used in addition to
Group Cover buttons on multiline telephones. If both are used, the QCC
queue is not counted in the 8-receiver maximum for the group. Because
QCC calls are queued, an operator cannot distinguish a coverage call from
any other type.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 146
■
A calling group can be assigned through system programming as a
receiver for up to 30 coverage groups.
When a calling group is programmed as a receiver for a coverage group, a
call to a coverage group member enters the calling group queue and waits
for an available calling group member. When the call rings at an available
member’s telephone, it stops ringing at the sender’s telephone and the
sender’s green LED turns off. Because calling group calls are queued, a
calling group member cannot distinguish a coverage call from any other
type.
Group Coverage by a calling group is used to provide coverage by a voice
messaging system (VMS).
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the system manager can control the
delay before calls are sent from each sender’s extension to Group
Coverage receivers. When Individual and Group Coverage are combined,
the Primary Cover Ring Delay controls the interaction between Group and
Individual Coverage for each extension. Table 4 on page 143 summarizes
the ways that these options work together as well as with fixed systemwide
settings. Further information about interactions between Group and
Individual Coverage is included later in this section, in the topic ‘‘Interaction
of Individual and Group Coverage’’ on page 148.
NOTE:
If a calling group is assigned to take calls for a coverage group, no
other types of receivers—multiline telephones with Group Cover
buttons or the QCC queue—can be assigned for that coverage
group.
Selective Coverage
6
When an extension has calls covered, all of its eligible calls are covered unless
the sender uses one of the following coverage options:
■
Coverage Off turns off all coverage. (If a Group Coverage sender uses
Coverage Off, other telephone users can use Group Pickup to answer the
sender’s calls; however, they cannot use Individual Pickup.)
To turn coverage off or on, the sender must have a programmed Coverage
Off button.
■
Coverage Inside prevents or allows coverage of inside calls:
— With Coverage Inside Off, only outside calls are covered.
— With Coverage Inside On, inside and outside calls are covered.
To use Coverage Inside Off/On, the sender must use the programming
code or select it from the display of a display telephone (using
ListFeature) in extension programming. It cannot be programmed on a
button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 147
■
Coverage VMS Off prevents outside calls from being sent to voice mail.
With Coverage VMS Off, only inside calls are covered by the assigned
voice mail system (VMS) calling group. Outside calls go to any other points
of coverage. Coverage VMS Off is available only in Release 2.0 and later
systems. To use this feature, the sender must have a programmed
Coverage VMS Off button.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the system manager can set the Night
Service feature to control the active/inactive status of programmed
Coverage VMS Off buttons at extensions in a Night Service group. When
the system is put into Night Service operation, all Coverage VMS Off
buttons are automatically deactivated, so that the assigned voice
messaging system (VMS) calling group can cover eligible calls with the
normal ringing delay. When normal business-hours operation resumes and
Night Service operation ceases, the programmed Coverage VMS Off
buttons are automatically turned on; inside calls are sent to voice mail and
outside calls go to any other coverage receivers.
A person at an extension can override Night Service control of Coverage
VMS Off buttons by pressing the Coverage VMS Off button at the
extension. However, at the next transition into or out of Night Service, the
Coverage VMS Off button follows Night Service status (inactive during
Night Service operation, active during normal business-hours operation).
Consider the following example where a Coverage VMS Off button has
been manually pressed when Night Service with Coverage Control goes on
(see ‘‘Night Service’’ on page 398 for more information):
— If the Coverage VMS Off button is active and lit, the Night Service with
Coverage Control option turns it off.
— If the Coverage VMS Off button is already inactive and unlit, it remains
so.
■
Do Not Disturb. Calls go to coverage, if programmed.
Eligibility for Coverage
6
Not all calls are eligible for coverage. Eligibility is determined by the type of call
and how the sender’s telephone is set up. Table 7 shows which calls at the
sender’s telephone are eligible for coverage.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 148
Table 7.
Calls Eligible and Calls Ineligible for Coverage
Call Rings on...
Eligible
Ineligible
SA or ICOM buttons programmed for Immediate or Delay Ring
Inside calls
DID trunk calls
Inside or outside transferred calls
Calls forwarded from another extension
Calls on Shared SA buttons
Calls on Cover buttons
Voice-announced calls
Transfer return calls
Returning parked calls
Reminder service calls
Personal line buttons programmed for Immediate or Delay Ring
Sender is principal user
Someone else is principal user
No principal user is assigned
Pool buttons programmed for Immediate or Delay Ring
Any button programmed for No Ring
NOTES:
1. In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a coverage receiver calls a
coverage sender, the call can be sent to coverage. If a receiver calls a
sender for whom he or she is covering and the sender is busy or
unavailable, the call proceeds to other points of coverage. It does not
come back to the receiver who originated the call.
In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, a call from a receiver to a sender is
not sent to coverage.
2. If a sender sets the Ring Timing option for No Ring on any personal
line, Pool, SA, or ICOM buttons, calls arriving on those buttons do not
go to coverage.
Interaction of Individual and Group Coverage
7
Group Coverage can be used alone or with Primary and/or Secondary Individual
Coverage. When both Individual Coverage and Group Coverage are used, the
interactions between them follow this principle: If possible, a caller should always
get personal attention from someone with a Cover button for the sender—going
first to an Individual Coverage receiver, then to a multiline telephone with a Group
Cover button. In these cases, the receiver can answer with either the name of the
individual or the name of the group for whom he or she is covering. Only when
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 149
these types of receivers are unavailable or not programmed does the call go to
another, more impersonal type of Group Coverage—either the QCC queue or a
calling group (including a voice messaging system calling group).
A call to a sender that is also ringing on Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, and/or
Group Cover buttons rings until answered (or the caller hangs up). When the call
is answered, the ringing and flashing green LED are removed from all other
telephones providing coverage for the sender. However, when a calling group is
programmed as the receiver for a coverage group, the ringing and flashing green
LED are removed from the sender’s telephone as the call leaves the calling group
queue and is sent to an available calling group member. (A call on a personal line
button on the sender’s telephone is an exception. The ringing and flashing green
LED remain on that button until answered, either by the sender or by a receiver.)
NOTE:
The duration of the ringback heard by an outside caller is shorter than the
actual ring heard at an MLX or analog multiline telephone. Therefore, an
outside caller hears one or two rings and may also hear the number of
rings programmed for the Coverage Delay Interval plus the number of rings
programmed for the Delay Ring interval. For example, if the Coverage
Delay Interval is programmed for one ring and the Delay Ring interval is
programmed for two rings, an outside caller hears four rings before the call
begins ringing at receivers’ telephones. If both intervals are set to their
maximum values, the caller can hear up to two additional rings.
A call goes to Group Coverage depending on the following conditions:
■
Whether the sender is available or unavailable
■
Whether the sender has Individual Coverage (Primary Cover or Secondary
Cover buttons programmed on other extensions) and, if so, whether an
Individual Coverage receiver is available
■
The type of Group Coverage receivers programmed:
— Only Group Cover buttons on multiline telephones
— Both Group Cover buttons and the QCC queue
— Only the QCC queue
— Only a calling group
■
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the Group Coverage Ring Delay is set
for each sender’s extension. When Group Coverage is used in conjunction
with Individual Coverage, calls should ring at receivers for Individual
Coverage first. Consider the following factors before setting the Group
Coverage Ring Delay for an extension:
— If a sender has only Primary Coverage and any receiver’s Primary Cover
buttons are set to Delay Ring, make sure that the value for the Group
Coverage Ring Delay is higher than the Primary Cover Ring Delay value
for each sender.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 150
— If a sender has both Primary and Secondary Coverage and all the
receivers’ Cover buttons are set for Immediate Ring, the Group
Coverage Ring Delay should be set higher than the Primary Cover Ring
Delay or the 2-ring fixed Secondary Cover Delay Interval.
— If both Primary and Secondary Cover buttons are programmed for a
sender and any receiver’s Primary and/or Secondary Cover buttons are
programmed for Delay Ring, make the value higher than whichever of
the following is greater:
 The Primary Cover Ring Delay
 The fixed Secondary Cover Delay Interval (two rings) plus the
Secondary Cover Ring Delay
■
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the system manager uses system
programming to set a Primary Cover Ring Delay (1–6 rings) for each
sender.
■
In releases prior to 4.1, a systemwide value is set for the Coverage Delay
Interval through system programming (1–9 rings). When used in
combination with Delay Ring, make sure that this value is higher than the
Delay Ring interval.
NOTE:
In releases prior to 4.1, the value set for the Delay Ring Interval
(1–6 rings) through system programming affects Individual Coverage
only. This setting is replaced in Release 4.1 and later systems.
A sender is considered unavailable (his or her telephone does not ring) under the
following conditions:
■
The sender has turned on Do Not Disturb.
■
All SA or ICOM buttons are in use on the sender’s telephone.
■
The sender is using extension programming or testing the telephone.
■
The sender has an MLX display telephone and is using an Alarm Clock or
Directory feature.
■
The sender’s telephone is forced idle for system programming or
centralized telephone programming.
■
The sender’s telephone is not responding (for example, not connected).
■
The sender has activated Remote Call Forwarding.
A receiver is considered unavailable (his or her telephone does not ring) under the
following conditions:
■
The receiver has turned on Do Not Disturb (in this case, the sender can call
the receiver).
■
Another call is ringing or answered on the receiver’s Cover button for that
sender.
■
The receiver is in extension programming or is testing the telephone.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Coverage
Page 151
■
The receiver with an MLX display telephone is using the Alarm Clock or
Directory feature.
■
The receiver’s telephone is forced idle for system programming or
centralized telephone programming.
■
The receiver’s telephone is not responding (for example, not connected).
If a call is sent to Group Coverage and no receiver is available, the system
continues trying to send the call every five seconds until a Group Coverage
receiver becomes available. This repeated attempt to send the call is call retry
timing. The 5-second retry timing interval cannot be changed.
Table 8 shows when a call goes to Group Coverage receivers in Release 4.0 and
prior systems. Table 9 shows when a call goes to Group Coverage receivers in
Release 4.1 and later systems. In both tables, the rules for sending calls to Group
Coverage apply after the calls first go to any available Individual Coverage
receivers (as described in Table 6 on page 145).
See Figures 6 through 9, pages 154 through 157, for examples of LED and ringing
patterns in Release 4.0 and prior systems and in Release 4.1 and later systems.
Figures 6 and 7 show examples of what happens when only Group Coverage is
used or when all Individual Coverage receivers are unavailable. Figures 8 and 9
show examples of what happens when both Individual Coverage (Primary and
Secondary) and Group Coverage are programmed for an individual sender.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Table 8.
Page 152
Group Coverage Call Delivery Rules (Release 4.0 and Prior Systems)
Individual Coverage
Receiver Status
Call Delivered to Group
Coverage after...
Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
CD + DR*
Immediate*
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
CD + DR*
Immediate*
Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
CD + DR*
CD
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
CD + DR*
Immediate*
Receiver Type
Sender Status
Group Cover
button(s) only or
Group Cover
button(s) and QCC
queue
QCC Queue only or
Calling group only
CD = Coverage delay interval
DR = Delay Ring interval
*
Ringing is delayed an additional DR after the green LED turns on at a Group Cover button
programmed for Delay Ring on a multiline telephone.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Table 9.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 153
Group Coverage Call Delivery Rules (Release 4.1 and Later Systems)
Sender
Receiver Type Status
Group Cover
Available
button(s) only or
Group Cover
button(s) and
QCC queue
QCC Queue
only
Calling group
only
Primary Coverage Secondary Coverage
Receiver Status
Receiver Status
Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable or
Available
unassigned
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable or
Available
unassigned
Unavailable or
unassigned
Available
Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable or
Available
unassigned
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable or
Available
unassigned
Unavailable or
unassigned
Available
Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable or
Available
unassigned
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable Available
Available
Unavailable or
unassigned
Unavailable or
Available
unassigned
Unavailable or
unassigned
GCD = Group Coverage Ring Delay
PRD = Primary Cover Ring Delay
Sent to Group
Coverage after...
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
Immediate
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
Immediate
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
Immediate
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
GCD + PRD
Immediate
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Figure 6.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 154
Group Coverage Only or All Individual Coverage Receivers Unavailable
(Release 4.0 and Prior Systems)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Figure 7.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 155
Group Coverage Only or All Individual Coverage Receivers Unavailable
(Release 4.1 and Later Systems Only)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Figure 8.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 156
Individual (Primary and Secondary) and Group Coverage Ringing Patterns
(Release 4.0 and Prior Systems)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Figure 9.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 157
Individual (Primary and Secondary) and Group Coverage Ringing Patterns
(Release 4.1 and Later Systems Only)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 158
Cover to Voice Mail with Escape
to System Operator
9
When DID or Auto Attendant is used, users receive calls directly, without the
intervention of an operator. In these situations, the telephone should have voice
mail coverage instead of coverage by a receptionist (operator). The caller then
has the option to leave a message or press 0 in order to talk to the receptionist. If
after talking to the receptionist, the caller wants to leave a message, the
receptionist can transfer the call back to voice mail using the Direct Voice Mail
feature.
Call comes in
for ext 111.
Rings at ext
111
Goes to
Voice Mail
Caller
leaves a
message.
Figure 10.
DVM
Operator
transfers
directly to
voice mail.
Call rings
at
operator.
Caller
dials 0.
Cover to Voice Mail with Escape to System Operator
This configuration is usually the best solution for coverage to voice mail because
of the following advantages:
■
It reduces the burden on the receptionist or operator.
■
It allows the caller to make the choice whether to leave a message or
speak to an operator.
■
It allows the caller to leave a message without waiting for the receptionist to
answer.
Cover to System Operator before Voice Mail
9
If calls must go to a receptionist, coverage can be set up using one of the
following methods:
■
Primary Coverage (eight or fewer extensions)
■
Phantom calling groups (30 or fewer extensions)
■
Phantom extensions (30 or more extensions)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 159
9
Primary Coverage
If eight or fewer extensions require coverage to the system operator, use delayed
Primary Coverage or Secondary Coverage to allow calls to be covered by the
operator. When a caller dials the user’s number, the call is covered by the
operator, and the operator can then send the call to voice mail using the Direct
Voice Mail feature. If the operator does not answer, the call may or may not go to
coverage, depending on the status of the user’s Coverage VMS Off button. If the
Coverage VMS Off button is not selected (the light is off), the call goes to voice
mail. If the Coverage VMS Off button is selected (the light is on), the call
continues to ring at the extension.
To set up Primary Coverage to the operator before going to voice mail, do the
following:
■
Assign an extension to a coverage group. Assign the coverage group to
calling group 770 (Voice Mail).
■
Program a Primary Cover button for the extension on the operator’s
Direct-Line Console (cannot be a QCC). Set it for Delay Ring.
■
If you want to keep calls from going to voice mail when the operator does
not pick up, program a Coverage VMS Off button on the extension.
Call comes in
for ext 12.
Rings at ext
12
Figure 11.
Covers to
Operator
Operator
answers
Goes to
Voice Mail if
Coverage
VMS Off is
not activated
Operator
transfers
directly to
voice mail.
Primary Coverage
With the primary coverage configuration, a caller dials a DID number, for example.
The extension for the DID number (in the Figure 11 example, Extension 12) rings
several times. If the telephone is not answered, an operator gets the call. If the
operator fails to answer, the call either goes to voice mail or keeps ringing,
depending on the Coverage VMS Off status on the extension for the DID number.
When the operator answers and the caller asks to leave a message, the operator
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 160
uses Direct Voice Mail to transfer the caller to the extension’s voice mail. The
caller leaves a message and the extension’s message LED goes on.
Phantom Calling Groups
If fewer than 30 extensions require coverage to the main operator, phantom
calling groups can be used to provide a second extension number for each user’s
voice mail. The actual extension covers to the operator (Group Coverage) and the
calling group covers to voice mail. When someone dials the user’s number, the
call covers to the operator, who can then transfer the call to the voice mail
extension.
To set up phantom coverage to the operator before voice mail coverage, do the
following:
■
Assign an extension (in the Figure 12 example, 101) to a coverage group.
Assign a Group Cover button to the operator (if a DLC), or assign the
coverage group to ring at the QCC.
■
Renumber a calling group (for example, change 771 to 201) to a number
that is easy to associate with the sender extension. You may have to
renumber an existing 201 first.
■
Assign the calling group (in the Figure 12 example, 201) to overflow to
calling group 770 (voice mail) with a threshold of 1. Assign 101 as the
message receiver for calling group 770.
With the phantom calling groups coverage configuration, a caller dials a DID
number (for example 555-5101). The extension for the DID number (in the
example, Extension 101) rings several times. If the telephone is not answered, the
call is covered by an operator. The operator answers the call, and the caller asks
to leave a message. The operator transfers the call to 201, and the call goes to
voice mail. The Message light goes on at the extension for the DID number (in the
example, 101).
NOTE:
A user can give out a regular telephone number (555-5101) and a voice
mail number (555-5201). This way, callers can leave a message without
ringing the telephone. This is necessary to receive messages outside of
office hours. Callers cannot leave messages after hours unless they know
the second DID number.
9
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 161
Call comes in
for ext 101.
Rings at ext
101.
Covers to
Operator
Operator
answers
Operator
transfers to
201 (Voice
Mail).
Figure 12.
Phantom Calling Groups
Phantom Extensions
If more than 30 extensions require coverage to the operator, phantom extensions
can be used after the maximum number of phantom calling groups is reached.
This setup is slightly different from the previous two scenarios. In this case, the
published DID number is the number for the phantom extension. The actual
telephone has Shared SA buttons with the phantom extension as principal user,
so the call rings at the telephone with the SSA button. The operator covers the
phantom extension and can use the Direct Voice Mail feature to send calls to the
original extension’s voice mail.
To set up phantom coverage to the operator before going to voice mail, do the
following:
■
Assign the extension (in the Figure 13 example, 114) to a coverage group.
Assign a Group Cover button to the operator if a DLC, or assign the
coverage group to ring at the QCC.
■
Assign a phantom extension to a number (in the Figure 13 example, 214).
You may have to renumber the extension first. If the extension does not
have an adjunct, using the adjunct extension number helps avoid confusion
(see ‘‘System Renumbering’’ on page 583 for details about adjunct
extension numbers).
■
Assign Shared SA buttons for the phantom extension to the real extension
(in the example, assign SSA buttons for 214 to 114) and remove all but one
SA button for the real extension. You may want to make this a No Ring
9
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 162
button and move it to a virtual button that is not actually on the physical
telephone. This conserves buttons and prevents accidental calls to 114
from ringing at the extension.
■
Assign the extension (in the Figure 13 example, Extension 114) to
coverage group 1. Assign coverage group 1 to the voice mail calling group,
770.
Call comes in
for ext 214.
Rings at ext 114
on Shared SA.
Ext 214 Covers
to Operator
Operator
answers
Operator transfers
directly to 114’s
Voice Mail.
Figure 13.
Phantom Extensions
With the phantom extensions coverage configuration, a caller dials the DID
number. In the Figure 13 example, this might be 555-5214. Extension 114 rings
several times on a Shared SA button. If the call is not answered, it is covered by
an operator, and the display shows Cover ext 214. The operator answers the
call and the caller asks to leave a message. The operator transfers the caller to
the extension’s voice mail, Extension 114, using Direct Voice Mail. The caller
leaves a message for the person at the extension, and the Message light goes on.
NOTE:
A user can give out a regular telephone number (in this example,
555-5214) and a voice mail number (555-5114). This way, callers can
leave a message without ringing the telephone. This is necessary to
receive messages outside of office hours. Callers cannot leave messages
after hours unless they know the second DID number.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 163
Cover to Personal Secretary before Voice Mail
9
If you need coverage by a personal secretary who is not a system operator at an
operator console, then Primary Coverage can be used on the secretary’s
telephone. The secretary can use Direct Voice Mail to transfer the call back to the
user’s voice mail. If the secretary is out, calls can either continue to ring or go to
voice mail, depending on the status of the user’s Coverage VMS Off button.
To set up Primary Coverage to a personal secretary before going to voice mail, do
the following:
■
Assign the extension to a coverage group. Assign the coverage group to
calling group 770 (Voice Mail).
■
Program a Primary Cover button for the extension on the secretary’s
telephone. Program it for Delay Ring.
■
If you want to keep calls from going to voice mail when the secretary does
not pick up, program a Coverage VMS Off button on the extension.
Call comes in
for ext 23.
Rings at ext
23
Figure 14.
Covers to
Secretary
Secretary
answers
Goes to
Voice Mail if
Coverage
VMS off is
not activated
Secretary
transfers
directly to
voice mail.
Coverage and Direct Voice Mail
A caller dials the DID number. In the Figure 14 example, this might be 555-5523.
Extension 23 rings several times. The covering secretary answers, and the caller
asks to leave a message. The secretary uses the Direct Voice Mail feature to
transfer the call to the extension’s voice mail. The caller leaves a message, and
the extension’s Message light goes on. If the operator fails to answer, the call
either goes to voice mail or keeps ringing, depending on the Coverage VMS Off
status at the extension for the DID number.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 164
Considerations and Constraints
9
In Release 2.0 and later systems, if a receiver calls a sender for whom he or she
is covering and the sender is busy or unavailable, the call proceeds to other points
of coverage. It does not come back to the receiver who originated the call. In
Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, a call from a receiver to a sender is not covered.
A maximum of eight Primary Cover and Secondary Cover buttons can be
assigned to provide Individual Coverage for a given sender. Only one Cover
button for each sender can be programmed on a multiline telephone.
A maximum of eight Group Cover buttons can be assigned to provide Group
Coverage for each coverage group. All eight can be programmed on one multiline
telephone, or the Group Cover buttons can be distributed on as many as eight
multiline telephones.
A receiver with a multiline telephone can have as many as eight Cover buttons,
which can be programmed for any combination of Group and Individual Coverage.
If a receiver has both a Primary Cover or Secondary Cover button for a sender
and a Group Cover button for the group of which the sender is a member, a call
for the sender rings only at the receiver’s Primary Cover or Secondary Cover
button. This prevents multiple deliveries of the same call to the same receiver.
Each coverage group can have any number of members, from none to all the
extensions in the system.
Each sender can be a member of only one coverage group.
If a sender without Individual Coverage is a member of a coverage group and no
receivers are assigned for the group, a caller hears ringback instead of a busy
tone when the sender is unavailable.
If a calling group is assigned as a receiver for a coverage group, it is the only
receiver for that group; no other types of Group Coverage receivers can be
programmed. However, individual members of the coverage group can be
senders to Individual Coverage receivers.
A calling group can be a receiver for up to 30 coverage groups.
A receiver with a Group Cover button can also be a member of the coverage
group for which the button is programmed. Calls to that receiver are sent to all
other receivers programmed for the group.
When both the QCC queue and multiline telephones are programmed as
receivers for a coverage group, the QCC queue is not counted in the 8-receiver
maximum for the group.
A QCC cannot be a coverage sender.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 165
When Group Coverage is the only type of coverage programmed for a sender, the
QCC queue should not be programmed along with Group Cover buttons on
multiline telephones. Because the QCC cannot be programmed for Delay Ring,
eligible calls ring immediately both at the sender’s telephone and at the QCC
queue. This may not allow the sender enough time to answer the call before a
QCC operator answers.
If a call is sent to coverage because the sender does not have a button available
to take the call, the call does not return to the sender’s telephone, even if a button
becomes available while the call is ringing at a coverage receiver’s telephone.
An inside voice-announced call made on an SA Voice or ICOM Voice is not
covered. If it is converted to a ringing call—for example, because the sender’s
speakerphone is in use—the ringing call is sent to coverage.
No type of Cover button can be used to make calls.
When the sender also has Individual Coverage and an Individual Coverage
receiver is available, the Delay Ring interval is used as an delay in addition to the
Coverage Delay Interval before a call goes to Group Coverage.
When no principal user is assigned for a personal line, calls received on the
personal line cannot be forwarded to outside telephone numbers. Calls follow the
Individual Coverage patterns of all senders who share the line and the Group
Coverage pattern of the extension with the lowest logical identification number
(lowest numbered jack on the module).
In Release 4.1 and later systems, coverage delay settings affect the ability of
Integrated Administration to program some Coverage options for AUDIX Voice
Power. See ‘‘Integrated Administration’’ on page 328 for details.
In Release 4.1 and later systems only, Night Service Coverage Control, when
enabled through system programming (factory setting is Disabled), controls voice
messaging system (VMS) coverage only and has no effect on Individual
Coverage (Primary or Secondary) or on other types of Group Coverage. When
disabled, the feature has no effect whatsoever on coverage.
In Release 4.1 and later systems only, in a system with Night Service Coverage
Control enabled, Night Service transitions do not toggle the programmed
Coverage VMS Off button to the opposite status. Instead, when Night Service
goes on or off after a user has manually pressed the button, the button follows
Night Service status just as other programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons do.
The status of programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons is always set to match the
most recent user press or transition into or out of Night Service operation. For
more information about Night Service, see ‘‘Night Service’’ on page 398.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 166
Telephone Differences
9
Direct-Line Consoles
9
A DLC can be both an Individual or Group Coverage receiver and a member of a
coverage group.
Queued Call Consoles
9
The Queued Call Console (QCC) cannot be a sender for either Individual or
Group Coverage. The QCC queue can be a Group Coverage receiver for up to 30
coverage groups. Because Cover buttons cannot be programmed on the QCC,
the queue is not counted in the 8-receiver maximum allowed for each coverage
group. The QCC cannot be an Individual Coverage receiver.
The QCC queue priority and the individual QCC operator to receive calls for each
coverage group are assigned independently for each group.
If a line/trunk is programmed to ring in to the QCC queue and also appears as a
personal line on a telephone that is a member of a coverage group covered by the
QCC queue, a call on that line/trunk does not appear as a coverage call at the
QCC.
If Group Cover buttons are programmed for a coverage group in addition to the
QCC queue and all QCC operators are in Position-Busy mode, a Group Coverage
call goes to all receivers except the QCC queue.
When Group Coverage is the only type of coverage programmed for a sender, the
QCC queue should not be programmed in addition to Group Cover buttons on
multiline telephones. Because the QCC cannot be programmed for Delay Ring,
eligible calls ring immediately both at the sender’s telephone and at the QCC
queue. This may not allow the sender enough time to answer the call before a
QCC operator answers.
When the QCC queue is assigned as a receiver for a coverage group and a call
transferred to a group member is not answered, the call returns to the queue as
follows:
■
If the QCC return ring interval is shorter than the Coverage Delay Interval
(releases prior to 4.1) or the Group Coverage Delay setting (Release 4.1
and later systems), the call returns as a returning transfer call.
■
If the QCC return ring interval is longer than the Coverage Delay Interval
(releases prior to 4.1) or the Group Coverage Delay setting (Release 4.1
and later systems), the call returns as a Group Coverage call.
Other Multiline Telephones
9
Any type of multiline telephone can be a sender and/or receiver for either
Individual Coverage or Group Coverage and can have up to eight Cover buttons.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Page 167
Single-Line Telephones
9
A single-line telephone can be a sender for either Individual or Group Coverage. A
single-line telephone can be a receiver for Individual Coverage. It can be a
receiver for Group Coverage only when it is a member of a calling group assigned
as a receiver for a coverage group.
Transferred calls to a busy single-line telephone are not eligible for coverage
unless Coverage Inside is on. A transferred call to a busy single-line telephone
with Group Coverage and Coverage Inside off camps on at the single-line
telephone and returns to the originator if not answered before the transfer return
interval expires.
Feature Interactions
Account Code Entry
9
When answering calls on a programmed Primary Cover, Secondary
Cover, or Group Cover button, a receiver cannot enter an account code.
When attempting to enter an account code, the receiver hears no error
tone, but the account code does not appear on the SMDR report.
Because Cover buttons are not required when the QCC queue is
assigned as a receiver for a coverage group, a QCC operator can enter
an account code, and the account code appears on the SMDR printout.
Auto Answer All
A sender or receiver at an analog multiline telephone can use Auto
Answer All to have calls answered by an answering machine connected
to the telephone.
Auto Answer
Intercom
Auto Answer Intercom prevents a receiver on an analog multiline
telephone from using a Hands-Free Unit (HFU) to answer calls received
on a Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover button.
Automatic Line
Selection
Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, and Group Cover buttons cannot be
programmed in an ALS sequence because they cannot make calls.
Barge-In
Barge-In can be used to join an Individual or Group Coverage call
answered at any receiver telephone, but not at a VMI port. VMI ports
always have Privacy on.
Callback
The sender and all receivers must be busy before a call to a sender is
eligible for Callback. The call is sent to coverage before it is put in the
callback queue. Once a call is in the callback queue, it is not sent to
coverage again. A callback call indicating that a busy extension or pool is
now available is not sent to coverage.
Caller ID
Caller ID information is available to users receiving coverage calls.
Calling Restrictions
In Release 2.1 and later systems, users answering calls on Cover buttons
can generate touch tones (for example, by dialing a 1 to accept a collect
call) if their telephones are not outward- or toll-restricted. If the telephone
is outward- or toll-restricted, the user hears the touch tones, but the tones
are not sent out over the line (and the user cannot, for example, accept
collect calls by dialing a 1).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 168
Call Waiting
A call to a sender with Call Waiting turned on goes to Individual and/or
Group Coverage first. If all coverage points are busy, the sender receives
the call-waiting tone.
Camp-On
Coverage calls answered by any receiver can be camped on to another
user.
Conference
Conference calls can be originated from a Cover button only when the
user with a caller on the Cover button presses the Transfer button, dials
the number for another person, and then presses the Conf button to
complete the transfer. In this case only, instead of the call being
transferred, a conference call with three participants (including the
originator) is established.
CTI Link
When an extension is programmed as a CTI link, it is removed from
membership in coverage groups.
When a call is transferred from a programmed Cover button on a
unmonitored DLC, screen pop is not initiated at the destination extension,
even if it is using a CTI application.
Digital Data Calls
Individual Coverage is not recommended for 2B data calls. Because a
coverage receiver can have only one Cover button for each coverage
sender, only a 1B data call arrives at the receiver. The second call of a 2B
call continues to ring at the coverage sender.
Coverage delays do not apply to data calls. Calls ring immediately.
Coverage is not recommended for video extensions. However, an MLX
passive-bus telephone can be covered during 2B video calls (when both
B-channels are busy), but it must have a programmed Do Not Disturb
button. The user at the telephone activates Do Not Disturb during 2B
calls.
A passive-bus MLX telephone can be a coverage receiver, but this gives
the user little control when B-channels must be available for 2B data.
Direct Station
Selector
When a system operator transfers an Individual or Group Coverage call
and the call returns, the red LED next to the DSS button for the sender
does not flash as it does for a transfer return for calls received on other
types of line buttons.
Direct Voice Mail
Direct Voice Mail overrides coverage-inhibiting features such as
Coverage Off, Coverage VMS Off, and Coverage Inside Off.
Display
When an Individual or Group Coverage call is answered by a receiver
with a display telephone, Cover is shown for the call type, followed by the
sender’s name, if programmed, or extension number. The display also
shows the reason why the call went to coverage: No Ans, Busy, or DND.
On an MLX telephone, other reasons why calls are sent to coverage are
also shown: Invalid/unknown DID number or Invalid/unknown
Remote Access number. The receiver sees the caller information by
pressing the More button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Do Not Disturb
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 169
When a sender turns on Do Not Disturb, Individual Coverage or Group
Coverage receivers for that sender can call the sender. All other calls to
the sender go to coverage.
When a receiver turns on Do Not Disturb, he or she does not receive
coverage calls. However, a sender whose calls are set to be covered by
the receiver can call that receiver, despite Do Not Disturb.
If both a sender and all receivers have Do Not Disturb on, the sender’s
calls do not go to coverage and the caller hears a busy signal. On a
personal line, the caller hears ringback and the green LED flashes, but
the telephone does not ring.
Forward and
Follow Me
In Release 3.0 and prior systems (or if the Forwarding Delay is
programmed to 0 rings), when a coverage sender forwards, calls are
forwarded and sent to coverage at the same time. Calls received on any
type of Cover button are not forwarded.
If a coverage receiver has activated Remote Call Forwarding, calls sent to
that extension through Coverage are not forwarded to the remote
location.
n Release 4.0 and later systems, if both coverage and forwarding are on
and the Forwarding Delay is more than 0, one of the following occurs:.
Forward
and Follow Me
continued
Group Calling
■
A call that is sent to Group Coverage before the Forwarding attempt
is not forwarded.
■
A call that is remote call-forwarded before any coverage is not
covered.
■
A call that is remote call-forwarded while Primary and/or Secondary
Coverage extensions are alerting is removed from those coverage
points and is not sent to Group Coverage.
■
If a call is sent to Group Coverage after forwarding, the call is
removed from the called extension, the forwarded-to extension, and
any Primary and Secondary Coverage buttons.
A calling group can be a receiver for up to 30 coverage groups. A calling
group cannot be a receiver for Individual Coverage. A coverage group
can have only one calling group as a receiver, but members of the
coverage group can also have Individual Coverage receivers.
As soon as a Group Coverage call is sent from the calling group queue to
a calling group member, ring and LED flashing are removed from the
sender’s telephone, except for outside calls received on personal lines.
A calling group cannot be a sender, but an individual calling group
member can be a sender for Individual Coverage and/or a member of a
coverage group. When a call to the calling group extension number is
sent from the queue to the calling group member, it goes only to the
member’s Individual Coverage receivers and not to the member’s Group
Coverage receivers. Calls to the member’s individual extension go to both
Individual and Group Coverage receivers.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 170
Hold
Coverage calls answered by any type of receiver can be put on hold. The
hold timer or operator hold timer applies to a coverage call on hold.
HotLine
Coverage features are not recommended for HotLine extensions
(Release 5.0 and later systems).
Integrated
Administration
AUDIX Voice Power and private fax extensions are automatically
assigned to coverage group 30, which is covered by the AUDIX Voice
Power calling group. This assignment can be changed on the Application
Switch Defaults screen.
If the Automated Attendant service is configured for delayed call handling,
a backup (phantom) extension should be assigned. Integrated
Administration sets up coverage for it.
The total of the values programmed for the systemwide Coverage Delay
Interval (Release 4.0 and prior systems) or extension-by-extension
coverage delay settings (Release 4.1 and later systems) plus Delay Ring
should be less than either the transfer return time or the VMS transfer
return interval. In Release 4.1 and later systems, coverage delay settings
affect the ability of Integrated Administration to program some Group
Calling options for AUDIX Voice Power. See ‘‘Integrated Administration’’
on page 328 for details.
Multi-Function
Module
A Multi-Function Module (MFM) can be a sender or a receiver for
Individual or Group Coverage. This allows an MLX telephone user to
screen calls by using an answering machine connected to the MFM or to
supplement ringing with an external alert connected to the MFM. A
sender can use Coverage Off to prevent calls from being sent to an
answering machine.
Night Service
When a system manager enables the Night Service with Coverage
Control option, a transition into Night Service operation (by the press of a
Night Service button or automatically through the Time Set option)
automatically deactivates Coverage VMS Off buttons (LEDs are unlit) at
Night Service group extensions. When the system resumes normal
business-hours operation (by the press of a Night Service button or
automatically through the Time Set option), the feature automatically
activates Coverage VMS Off buttons (LEDs are lit) at Night Service group
extensions. When the option is disabled, Night Service has no effect on
programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons.
Park
A returning parked call is not eligible for coverage. A call answered on a
Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover button cannot be
parked on that button. To park calls received on a Cover button at your
extension, press the Transfer button, dial your own extension, and press
the Transfer button again to complete parking the call.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Personal Lines
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 171
When a principal user is assigned a personal line, calls arriving on the
personal line follow that user’s coverage pattern, if any. Calls received on
personal line buttons on senders’ telephones other than the principal
user’s do not go to coverage.
If no principal user is assigned, calls received on the personal line are
sent to all available Individual Coverage receivers for all senders sharing
the line and to the Group Coverage receivers programmed for the sender
whose telephone is connected to the lowest jack in the lowest-numbered
slot in the control unit.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, calls received on personal lines with Do
Not Disturb on go immediately to coverage instead of waiting for any
coverage delay.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call answered on a personal line
using a Cover button can be picked up by anyone with a button for that
personal line. However, the picked-up call cannot be transferred because
it is still considered to be on hold at the covering extension. In systems
prior to Release 2.1, once a receiver answers a call received on a
personal line using a Cover button and puts the call on hold, the sender
and any other user who shares the personal line cannot pick up the call
by pressing the personal line button. For proper handling, the receiver
should transfer the call to the sender.
Pickup
A coverage sender or receiver can be a member of a Pickup group. This
allows Pickup to be used to answer a ringing Individual or Group
Coverage call. If a sender who is a member of a Pickup group uses
Coverage Off to stop calls from going to Individual or Group Coverage
receivers, his or her calls can be picked up by using the Individual Pickup
feature. However, calls cannot be picked up by using the Group Pickup
feature. When a coverage call is answered using Pickup, the call is
removed from other extensions in the coverage arrangement.
Pools
Calls received on a sender’s Pool button programmed for Immediate or
Delay Ring are eligible for Individual or Group Coverage.
Recall/Timed Flash
Recall has no effect on a call answered on any Cover button.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, Recall can be used on a Group
Coverage call answered by a member of a calling group. In Release 1.0
and 1.1 systems, Recall cannot be used on a call of this type because it is
answered on an SA or ICOM button.
Reminder Service
Reminder calls are not eligible for Individual or Group Coverage.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Coverage
Ringing Options
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 172
Calls received on line buttons programmed for No Ring are not sent to
coverage.
Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, and Group Cover buttons can be
programmed for Immediate Ring, Delay Ring, or No Ring. If an Individual
or Group Coverage receiver is on a call when a coverage call is received,
the receiver hears an abbreviated ring (if abbreviated ringing is enabled).
Calls received on a Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover
button ring with the receiver’s (not the sender’s) personalized ringing
pattern.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the ringing at a programmed Primary or
Secondary Cover button, set for Delay Ring, is controlled by the Primary
or Secondary Ring Delays set for the sender’s extension. The
systemwide Secondary Ring Delay Interval (fixed at two rings) also
augments ringing on Secondary Cover buttons set for Delay Ring. For
more information, see Figure 7 on page 155 and Figure 9 on page 157.
SMDR
The extension number answering an Individual or Group Coverage call is
shown on the SMDR report.
In Release 4.2 and later systems, when an Auto Login or Auto Logout
calling group is programmed as a Group Coverage receiver and the
SMDR Talk Time option is enabled, calls are reported following the same
rules that apply to other incoming calling group calls. This is true even if a
call is transferred from an operator to a Group Coverage sender before
being directed to the calling group.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
A covered call remains on the sender’s SA or ICOM button until it is
answered at the receiver’s telephone.
A call received on a Shared SA button is not eligible for any coverage.
If a receiver programs a Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group
Cover button for a sender and also has an SSA button associated with
the sender, the green LEDs next to both the Cover button and the Shared
SA button flash. The red LED stays on at the Shared SA button, but does
not go on at the Cover button.
Transfer
A call answered on any Cover button can be transferred.
Calls transferred to a sender are eligible for Individual and/or Group
Coverage. However, the sender hears a call-waiting tone if he or she is
using Coverage Off to prevent calls from going to coverage and does not
have an available SA or ICOM button to receive a transferred call.
With one-touch Transfer, a call answered on a Cover button can be
transferred by using a DSS button, but not by using an Auto Dial button.
Transfer returns are not eligible for coverage
Voice Announce to
Busy
If the sender’s speakerphone is available, a voice-announced call is
answered as soon as it is made. If the sender’s speakerphone is in use,
the call is converted to a ringing call and sent to coverage.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 173
CTI (Computer Telephony
Integration) Link
9
At a Glance
9
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Mode
Telephones
MLX Display Label
System Programming
Description
MLX and analog multiline telephone users at companies with
LANs (local area networks) running Novell NetWare
System Information (SysSet-up), Extension Information
Hybrid/PBX
MLX telephones and analog multiline telephones
CTILINK
First, follow the instructions in the System Manager’s Guide to
busy-out the module for the CTI link. If there is only one MLX
module on the system, you must use System Programming
and Maintenance (SPM) software to program the link. Then to
assign the CTI link extension:
● AuxEquip→CTI Link→Dial extension number
9
Release 5.0 and later systems support the use of an MLX port as a Computer
Telephony Integration (CTI) link on Hybrid/PBX mode systems. The CTI link
feature allows CTI applications to interact with the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System over a local area network (LAN). The CTI link is the
system’s hardware and software interface to the Lucent Technologies
PassageWay Telephony Services product, which supports the Windows® 95,
Windows NT, Windows 3.1, Windows 3.11 for Workgroups, Apple® Macintosh®
OS and UNIX® systems platforms on the client side. CTI link circuitry connects to
an MLX port on the system and to a LAN server using Novell NetWare (releases
3.12, 4.1, and 4.11) software.
NOTE:
The Apple Macintosh and some of the UNIX client libraries for Telephony
Service do not support MERLIN LEGEND Communications System private
data. They only support standard TSAPI call services and events. For
details, regarding this issue, see the PassageWay Telephony Services
Network Manager’s Guide.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 174
Software using the CTI link can perform the following actions on a user’s
computer:
■
Screen pop
■
Power dial
■
Basic call control
CTI link applications can control functions at extensions with MLX or analog
multiline telephones.
Following are brief descriptions of the platform requirements for a CTI link as well
as the features listed above. For more detailed information about these features,
see the PassageWay Telephony Services Network Manager’s Guide.
Platform Requirements
9
A CTI link requires the following equipment and software:
■
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0 or later, in
Hybrid/PBX mode
■
A standalone LAN telephony server with an Intel® i386, i486, or Pentium®
class central processing unit and at least 16 megabytes of RAM (more
memory may be needed; see PassageWay Telephony Services Network
Manager’s Guide for details).
■
Novell NetWare version 3.12, 4.1, or 4.11
NOTE:
For a NetWare version 3.12 installation, additional files must be
obtained from Novell’s web site. For details, see PassageWay
Telephony Services Network Manager’s Guide.
■
5 megabytes of available disk space in the system volume
■
PassageWay Telephony Services for NetWare software, Release 2.21 or
later
■
Eicon/G. Diehl SCOM circuit board with an available 8- or 16-bit ISA slot, to
link the communications system and the telephony server
■
An MLX line/trunk or extension module, with a free extension jack (not the
first or fifth or any port programmed as an operator or programming
console), installed in the communications system control unit. The firmware
vintage should be 28 or later, not including vintage 29.
NOTE:
If the MLX module for the CTI link is the only MLX module in the
system, SPM software, version 5.01 or later, is also required in order
to program the CTI link.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 175
For more information about these requirements and about installing a CTI link,
see PassageWay Telephony Services Network Manager’s Guide.
9
Screen Pop
Screen pop occurs when a CTI application takes inside or outside caller
information, queries a database, and displays caller information on a user’s PC
screen. Screen pop requires that an identifying number or code be available to
identify the outside calling party. This number may be a telephone number
provided by Caller ID, Automatic Number Identification (ANI), or another network
service.
Screen pop can also occur when the caller enters an identifying code after
connecting to a voice response unit in the system. The voice response unit,
MERLIN LEGEND MAIL for example, may prompt the caller to dial a social
security number, account number, customer number, or other database index
code. These collected digits are used to initiate screen pop of database
information (for more information, see the next topic, “Collected Digits”).
Screen pop can occur on incoming voice calls from the following sources:
■
Calling group distribution
■
ISDN PRI routing by dial plan
■
An extension on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
■
Remote access
NOTE:
In this case, the only information that the application can collect
about the caller is the remote telephone number.
■
A transfer of a call that has been answered by a voice response unit
■
A transfer or conference of a call that has been answered at a DLC or at a
QCC
NOTES:
1. Some CTI applications can initiate screen pop from the called
number on a BRI (Basic Rate Interface) or PRI (Primary Rate
Interface) line. To find out whether this feature is available,
check your application’s documentation.
2. To obtain calling party information on a loop-start line, your
organization must subscribe to Caller ID services, if available,
from the local telephone company. An 800 LS-ID line/trunk
module is also required, and the system must be programmed
for Caller ID (see ‘‘Caller ID’’ on page 105). On BRI and PRI
lines, calling party identification services may be available from a
network service provider. For more information, see ‘‘Basic Rate
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 176
Interface (BRI)’’ on page 82 and ‘‘Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
and T1’’ on page 441.
Some CTI applications allow screen pops either on demand or when a call is
answered. These applications may initiate screen pops for all calls, even those
answered at the telephone on a line button other than an SA button. However, if a
call does not come in on an SA button, screen pop does not occur when the call is
ringing, only after it is answered. In addition, when a call does not arrive on an SA
button, the CTI application cannot handle a transfer, conference, hold, or other
activity for that call. The user must perform these actions manually, using the
telephone.
When an outside call is answered initially by a voice response unit that prompts
for caller information (such as a customer number), that information is passed on
to the person receiving the call, assuming that the receiver has screen-pop
capability and that the application uses transfer with consultation. As a result,
screen pop occurs at the destination.
NOTE:
In a transfer or conference with consultation, available on inside calls
only, the user initiating the transfer or conference calls the
destination extension and speaks to the person at that extension
before completing the transfer.
The Transfer and Conference features, when activated manually (using the
telephone) at a non-operator extension do not provide the original caller’s
information (telephone or extension number or information) to the recipient who
has screen-pop capability. For example, if a user manually presses the Transfer
button, instead of using the application, then dials an extension and has the
application complete the transfer, original caller information is not sent to the
receiver.
Collected Digits
9
As noted in the previous section, another method of using the screen-pop
capability is to display a screen based on information entered directly by the
caller, rather than on the caller’s telephone number. This requires a voice
messaging system capable of collecting the caller's input.
When the voice messaging system answers a call, it plays a message instructing
the caller to enter additional digits, such as a social security number, zip code, or
customer account number. These additional digits are referred to as collected
digits or prompted digits.
Based on the caller's input, the voice messaging system transfers the call to the
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System switch, which then routes the call to
the proper destination. When the call arrives at the monitored extension, the
switch passes the digits to the CTI application, which, in turn, passes these digits
to the customer's existing database. The database searches its records for
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 177
information relating to the collected digits, and returns a screen displaying the
data it found.
The system manager programs the voice messaging system to collect a specific
number of digits (the maximum is 32) and creates the message instructing the
caller to enter the digits with a pound sign (#) at the end (the pound sign hastens
the processing of the call). Refer to the voice messaging system documentation
for instructions on installing and programming the collected digits feature.
Release 5.0 and later systems support the collected digits feature on voice
messaging systems whose ports are programmed as a calling group of type VMI.
See System Programming for instructions about programming the VMI port.
If you plan on using a second voice messaging system with the one that collects
digits, you must program two voice mail user databases.
■
In the voice messaging system that collects the digits, the “transfer to
subscribers only” option must be active and the extensions must be
allowed to transfer calls. To do this in MERLIN LEGEND MAIL systems,
program the extensions as Class of Service 20.
■
In the second voice messaging system, program regular voice mailboxes
as normal cover answer mailboxes.
9
Power Dial
Power Dial is an application feature where software on a user’s computer initiates
a voice call on a specified telephone to an inside or outside number. It is generally
used by people who must make a large volume of calls to individuals whose
telephone numbers are stored in a customer or client database. For example,
Power Dial is often appropriate for telemarketers and fundraisers.
Basic Call Control
9
A CTI application on your PC can control an extension’s SA button operations. No
other buttons (for example, personal lines) are monitored by applications or
allowed to perform the CTI services. Basic call control includes:
■
Answering calls arriving on an SA button
■
Making calls from an SA button
■
Hanging up calls
■
Hold and retrieving a call on hold at the user’s extension
■
Inside transfer
■
Three-party conference, including those conferences where one or two
parties are outside the system
CTI applications vary in how they use the system’s features. The list of basic call
control activities includes the functions that a CTI application may control; a given
application does not necessarily use these system features.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 178
DLC operator extensions can use CTI applications, although QCCs cannot. If a
DLC’s SA button operations are controlled by a CTI application, caller information
is passed on to a 3-way conference or transfer destination, as long as the
operator uses the application to perform the transfer or conference (the DLC
extension works as any other screen-pop-capable extension does). If a DLC
operator’s SA calls are not controlled by a CTI application, then caller information
for transferred or conferenced calls is also passed on to a screen-pop-capable
extension, just as with a QCC. The only exception occurs when a call is
transferred from a Cover button on a DLC. In this case, there is no screen pop at
the destination extension.
Programming a CTI Link
9
System Programming includes complete information about programming a CTI
link. When you program a CTI link, ensure that no telephone, fax,
videoconferencing system, or digital communications equipment is connected to
the MLX port. A working or potential system programming or operator position
extension cannot be programmed as a CTI link; therefore, a CTI link cannot be
programmed on the first or fifth extension jack of an MLX module. A CTI Link can
be programmed on port 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, or 8 of the MLX module.
In order to program a new CTI link, or remove an existing one, you must first
busy-out the slot where the MLX module for the CTI link is located or where you
plan to install it. For this reason, if you program the CTI link using an MLX-20L
telephone programming console, that console must not be connected to the same
MLX module where you have installed or plan to install the CTI link. (See
‘‘Programming’’ on page 480 for more information about programming options.
For details about busying-out a slot in the control unit, see the System Manager’s
Guide.)
NOTE:
If your system includes only one MLX extension module, you must use a
PC and System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software to
program the CTI link.
!
CAUTION:
The Maintenance procedures that you use to busy-out and restore a module
are normally reserved for Lucent Technologies technicians only.
When you add a CTI link, the system performs the following actions:
■
Reverts button programming to the default for a non-operator MLX
telephone
■
Informs you when there are programmed Cover buttons for the CTI link
extension on other extensions in the system. These Primary and/or
Secondary Cover buttons are not removed from the associated extensions.
To identify these extensions and remove the Cover buttons, consult the
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 179
Extension Information Report for the system, or refer to the relevant
system planning forms for extensions and groups (for example, Form 4d,
MLX Telephone and Form 7c, Group Coverage). Appendix D includes
instructions for removing button programming.
■
Deactivates forwarding to the extension
■
Removes the extension from membership in calling groups
■
Removes the extension from membership in coverage groups
■
Changes the Extension Directory label for the extension to CTILINK
■
Sets the Alarm feature to the default setting (on) for a CTI link
■
Restricts dial access to pools for the extension
■
If the jack is programmed for 2B data, renders the 2B data programming
nonfunctional. The 2B data programming is not removed from the main or
adjunct extension. If you want to use 2B data, reassign the feature to
another port. See System Programming for information about removing or
assigning 2B data.
Mode Differences
9
Key and Behind Switch Modes
9
A CTI link cannot be used with communications systems operating in Key mode
or Behind Switch mode.
Considerations and Constraints
9
The Transfer and Conference features, when activated manually (using the
telephone) at a non-operator extension do not provide the original caller’s
information to the recipient who has screen-pop capability.
Some CTI applications may initiate screen pops for all calls, even those answered
at the telephone on a line button other than an SA button. Screen pop, in this
case, occurs only after a call is answered. In addition, if a call does not come in on
an SA button, the CTI application cannot handle basic call control for that call. The
user must perform these actions manually, using the telephone.
When a DLC is not using a CTI application, calls transferred from a DLC’s
programmed Cover button do not initiate screen pop, even when the destination is
a screen-pop-capable extension
CTI link extensions cannot be programmed on tip/ring or analog multiline
telephone module ports. You must choose an extension that is on an MLX port
module (008 MLX or 408 MLX).
You cannot program the first or fifth port on an MLX module as the CTI link
extension, because these ports are reserved for operator positions.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 180
If you program a CTI link for a jack that is already programmed for 2B data, the
CTI programming overrides the 2B data programming, and a 2B data device that
you later connect to the jack will not function as such. For more information about
2B data, see ‘‘Digital Data Calls’’ on page 183.
You cannot use a system programming port as the CTI link extension.
You cannot program a port as a CTI link if it has a telephone or other device
connected to it. However, the port may have the CTI link hardware plugged in.
You cannot program a CTI link port on an MLX module with firmware vintage 29.
Use an earlier or later vintage.
Because CTI link programming requires that you busy-out the control unit slot
where the MLX module with the CTI link is being added or removed, either you
must use SPM software to program the CTI link, or the link must be located on a
different module from the one where the system programming MLX-20L console
is connected. The busy-out programming procedure is available from the system’s
Maintenance menu. For details about busying-out a slot in the control unit, see the
System Manager’s Guide.
An extension programmed as a CTI link should not be used as a phantom
extension—an extension that does not serve equipment plugged into the system
but used for a special purpose, for example, coverage by a voice messaging
system.
Telephone Differences
9
Queued Call Consoles
9
A call to a QCC does not initiate screen pop at the operator position, which cannot
use a CTI application. It can initiate screen pop at a screen pop capable-extension
either when an operator transfers a call immediately, or during consultation when
the operator talks to the system user before transferring a call. The screen pop
shows calling party identification information, if available.
Direct-Line Consoles
9
A DLC can function either as an operator and unmonitored extension or it can use
a CTI application and function as a monitored extension. An unmonitored
extension uses the telephone to transfer or conference a call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Page 181
A monitored DLC position functions like any other MLX or analog multiline
extension that is using a CTI application. An outside call to the position initiates
screen pop at the DLC extension. When a monitored DLC manually transfers or
conferences a call, only the DLC extension number is passed to the destination
extension(s).
9
In most respects, unmonitored DLCs operate like QCCs where screen pop is
concerned. Calls to unmonitored DLCs do not initiate screen pop at the operator
extension but when transferred or conferenced do initiate screen pop at a
destination extension using a CTI application. However, calls transferred from a
DLC’s programmed Cover button do not initiate screen pop, even when the
destination is a screen-pop-capable extension.
Single-Line Telephones
9
Single-line telephone extensions cannot take advantage of CTI applications.
Feature Interactions
9
Alarm
When a CTI link is reset (called a broadcast reset), any programmed
Alarm buttons on operator consoles or connected alarm devices go on.
Conference
CTI link applications can control conferences of up to three parties,
including those where one or two parties are outside the system.
When performed by a QCC operator or unmonitored DLC operator, the
Conference feature generates screen pop at screen-pop-capable
destinations.
Conference
continued
When a conference is initiated manually at the telephone of an extension
using a CTI application, screen pop is initiated for inside parties only (not
initiated for outside parties) at screen-pop-capable destinations, even
when the application is used to complete the conference.
Coverage
When an extension is programmed as a CTI link, it is removed from
membership in coverage groups.
When a call is transferred from a programmed Cover button on an
unmonitored DLC, screen pop is not initiated at the destination extension,
even if it is using a CTI application.
Digital Data Calls
If you program a CTI link for an extension that is already programmed for
2B data, the 2B data programming is overwritten. The 2B data
programming should be removed from the extension.
Directories
The extension that is programmed as a CTI link can have its label
changed through system programming.
Forward and
Follow Me
When an extension is programmed as a CTI link, forwarding to the
extension is deactivated.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link
Group Calling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 182
When an extension is programmed as a CTI link, the extension is
removed from membership in calling groups.
To ensure that calling group overflow calls initiate screen pop at
destination extensions, set all personal lines at calling group overflow
receivers to No Ring. For example, if a unmonitored DLC overflow
receiver has only a personal line—set to Immediate Ring—available for a
calling group overflow call, the call arrives on the personal line button.
Therefore, caller information is not sent to the destination extension when
the DLC operator transfers the call.
Hold
A CTI link application can put an SA button call on hold.
Pools
When an extension is programmed as a CTI link, dial access to pools is
removed from the extension.
Personal Lines
If an unmonitored DLC transfers a call that arrived on a personal line, the
screen-pop caller information is sent to the destination extension,
providing that the destination extension is using a CTI application.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
CTI allows software applications on a worktop application to control
placing a call on hold, retrieving a call from hold, inside transfer and
3-party conference, answering, and hanging up on the SA buttons of an
extension using the application.
System
Renumbering
When the dial plan changes, the applications must use the new extension
number in any request. The Passageway Telephony Services security
database should be updated with the dial plan changes so that
permissions are set for the new extension numbers and cleared for the
old extension numbers. Some settings in the CTI software applications
may need to be updated as well.
Transfer
CTI link applications can control inside transfers, not transfers to outside
numbers. When a CTI application is used to initiate a transfer, caller
information is passed to a screen-pop-capable destination.
When a transfer is initiated manually, using the telephone at an extension
where a CTI application is installed, screen pop is not initiated at a
screen-pop capable destination, even if the CTI application is used to
complete the transfer.
A transfer by a QCC or unmonitored DLC operator generates screen pop
of inside or outside caller information at screen-pop-capable destinations.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Page 183
Digital Data Calls
9
At a Glance
9
Users Affected
Users with digital data communications devices or
videoconferencing systems only
Reports Affected
Modes
Factory Settings
2B Data
System Programming
Extension Directory, Extension Information
Key, Hybrid/PBX
Disabled
To assign the 2B Data feature to an MLX adjunct extension:
● More→Data→2xB Data→Enter adjunct extension number
9
Description
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System supports many options for highspeed digital data transfer over ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) and
T1 Switched 56 facilities, or between two extensions on the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System. To transfer data, you must have an ISDN terminal
adapter or other system-compatible digital communications device connected to
an MLX port.
NOTE:
A communications device may be included in a hardware and software
application, for example, a video system. For more information about digital
data and 2B data, see the Data/Video Reference.
The supported connections for making digital data calls are:
■
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
■
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
■
T1 Switched 56 lines
An extension that includes a digital data communications equipment (DCE) device
is called a digital data workstation. It may or may not include a telephone, but is
always connected to at least one MLX extension jack. If the DCE includes an
ISDN-BRI interface, it can use the system’s 2B Data feature to combine the
B-channels of a single MLX jack. Many group and desktop videoconferencing
systems support 2B data, as do some DCE devices used for data only (not video)
communications. 2B data is described in more detail in ‘‘2B Data’’ on page 184.
An MLX telephone can be connected to a desktop videoconferencing system that
supports 2B data. This is called a passive-bus MLX telephone.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Page 184
If a videoconferencing system requires two B-channels but does not have an
ISDN-BRI interface (some older group video systems have V.35 interfaces, for
example), it may need to use the adjunct extension numbers of two different MLX
extension jacks.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
9
The ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) is a
standard access arrangement that can be used to connect the system to a
network providing voice and digital data services.
PRI is a standard access arrangement that uses a DS1 facility (also called a pipe)
to support twenty-three 64-kbps data connections (known as B-channels) and one
64-kbps connection (known as a D-channel) used to convey signaling information.
Some PRI service allows only voice calls and does not support data. For more
information, see ‘‘Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1’’ on page 441.
T1 Switched 56 Lines
9
A T1 facility can be connected to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
to supply a number of data and voice services. Release 4.0 and later systems can
support one Switched 56 (56 kbps) data connection on each Digital Signal Level 0
(DS0) channel of the T1 facility. There are twenty-four DS0 channels on each T1
facility. For more information, see ‘‘Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1’’ on page
441.
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
9
ISDN NI-1 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) is a standard access arrangement that can
be used to connect the system to a network providing voice and digital data
services. BRI is supported in Release 4.0 and later systems only. BRI supports
two 64-kbps data connections (known as B-channels or lines) for up to 128 kbps
data throughput. For more information, see the section ‘‘Basic Rate Interface
(BRI)’’ on page 82.
2B Data
9
The combination of two data-bearing channels (B-channels) allows ISDN-BRI
devices (such as desktop and group video systems with ISDN-BRI interfaces) to
connect to a single MLX port and make full 128-kbps connections using ISDN
NI-1 BRI or ISDN PRI B-channels, or make 112-kbps connections when
T1 Switched 56 facilities are used.
NOTE:
For more information about 2B data, see the Data/Video Reference.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Page 185
Devices used for 2B data must be connected to MLX jacks that are programmed
as 2B data-capable. Devices that do not support 2B data should not be connected
to ports programmed for 2B data.
The MLX extension numbers used to add 2B data capability must correspond to
the adjunct extension number for the MLX telephone. By default in a 2-digit
numbering plan, these adjunct extensions are numbered beginning with the digit
7. If the MLX extension is 20, its corresponding adjunct extension is 720. In a
3-digit or Set Up Space numbering plan, the adjunct extension number is, by
default, the main extension number plus 200. (For details about numbering plans,
see ‘‘System Renumbering’’ on page 583.)
Once an MLX jack is correct programmed, a 2B data-capable device properly
connected to the jack should operate at the same data rate (up to 128 kbps) as an
NI-1 BRI line connected directly to a central office.
2B data calls are really two calls, one for each B-channel. (Similarly, ISDN
terminal adapters that connect to V.35 video systems must make and receive two
calls in order to provide double the speed of a single digital call.)
NOTE:
Users can use any combination of PRI, NI-1 BRI, and T1 to obtain a
2B data connection. However, data transfer speeds are slower on T1
Switched 56 lines (56 kbps on each line). Because of potential speed and
other conflicts, it is best to use the same type of facility for both the calls
that make up a 2B data call.
Considerations and Constraints
9
When a desktop video system is in passive-bus configuration (an MLX telephone
is connected to it), and the connected MLX telephone is using one of the
B-channels for any reason, the desktop video system can receive a call only as a
1B data call (some video systems do not support 1B data). This is called
B-channel contention and can cause problems with features that require two
B-channels, such as Voice Announce to Busy, Hold (including Hold for transfer or
conferencing), Call Waiting, and Automatic Callback.
Features that redirect calls (for example, Coverage, Forwarding, Data Hunt
Groups, and Night Service) can present problems for 2B data calls. For example,
a video system should not be a coverage sender because another video system
receiving calls for it can be assigned only one Cover button for the sending
extension. Therefore, only one call of a 2B data call is sent to the receiver, and the
second call continues to ring at the sending system.
See “Feature Interactions,” later in this topic, for more information.
MLX modules of firmware vintage 29 are not compatible with 2B data. You must
program the feature on a jack whose module is of earlier or later vintage.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Page 186
9
Applications
The high-speed data capabilities of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System can be used for a number of applications, including videoconferencing,
Internet access, and data transfer.
Depending upon its capabilities, a videoconferencing system may offer
application-sharing, video collaboration, and data-sharing on either one or two
data channels at a time (most video systems require two channels). If one
channel is used, the maximum data speed is 64 kbps; if two channels are used,
the maximum data speed is 128 kbps.
Telephone Differences
9
Queued Call Consoles
9
Queued Call Consoles cannot be programmed for 2B data. If a DLC is
programmed for 2B data, the DLC cannot be changed to a QCC unless 2B data
programming is first removed from the DLC.
Feature Interactions
9
Account Code Entry
Account Code Entry can be entered for calls made by digital data
workstations and by video systems that support the use of # for feature
codes. The account code must be entered before the telephone number.
Authorization Code
Data calls can use authorization calls. If Account Code Entry is also used,
the authorization code must be entered after the account code.
Authorization codes can be used by video systems that support the use of
# for feature codes.
Auto Dial
A terminal adapter can make a call using an Auto Dial button by dialing
the virtual number of the button (for example #01). A video system that
supports the use of entering # for feature codes can use Auto Dial in the
same fashion.
Automatic Route
Selection
Data calls can be made using ARS. To make calls using ARS, digital
devices simply dial the ARS dial-out code (usually 9) followed by the
telephone number. Data calls must be routed through ARS pools that
access only PRI, NI-1 BRI, and/or Switched 56 T1 data lines. To make a
2B data call, a user must make two calls on different lines.
Barge-In
Data calls cannot be barged into.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting does not work on data calls. A call appears to wait but does
not return to the extension when it becomes available. This feature should
be disabled at video systems and data extensions.
At a passive-bus MLX telephone, Call Waiting requires one of the
B-channels needed for a 2B video call and should be used only when the
video system is not active on, or receiving, a call.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Callback
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 187
Videoconferencing systems that can dial feature codes using # can use
Selective Callback. When a pooled line becomes available or the busy
video system is idle, the queued call is made, one B-channel at a time.
When the second B-channel becomes available, it can be used for the
connection as well, providing the video system supports this capability.
Although video systems can use either off-hook or on-hook Callback, you
should only use off-hook Callback for 2B data connections. If you use
on-hook Callback, the returning callback call is connected using only one
B-channel.
Automatic Callback should be disabled for digital data and
videoconferencing extensions. It can be used at MLX passive-bus
extensions at desktop video workstations.
Camp-On
You cannot camp onto data or video calls.
Conference
Conference does not function with data calls.
2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. For
this reason, if a call is on hold for conferencing at a passive-bus MLX
telephone when a 2B call comes in, the passive-bus MLX telephone
cannot retrieve the held call until the 2B video call is over.
Coverage
Individual Coverage is not recommended for 2B data calls. Because a
coverage receiver can have only one Cover button for each coverage
sender, only a 1B data call arrives at the receiver. The second call of a 2B
call continues to ring at the coverage sender.
Coverage delays do not apply to data calls. Calls ring immediately.
Coverage is not recommended for video extensions. However, an MLX
passive-bus telephone can be covered during 2B video calls (when both
B-channels are busy), but it must have a programmed Do Not Disturb
button. The user at the telephone activates Do Not Disturb during 2B
calls.
A passive-bus MLX telephone can be a coverage receiver, but this gives
the user little control when B-channels must be available for 2B data.
CTI Link
If you program a CTI link for an extension that is already programmed for
2B data, the 2B data programming is no longer functional. The 2B data
programming should be removed from the extension.
Directories
Digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems cannot
make use of Extension, Personal, or System Directories.
Do Not Disturb
Digital communications devices can activate Do Not Disturb by dialing the
virtual button number (for example #01) of the Do Not Disturb button. Do
Not Disturb can be activated by video systems that have the ability to dial
strings and feature codes beginning with #.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 188
A Do Not Disturb button should be programmed at MLX passive-bus
telephones, and the feature should be activated during 2B video calls.
Otherwise, voice calls ring and flash at the MLX telephone during 2B data
calls, although they cannot be answered.
The use of Do Not Disturb at a passive-bus MLX telephone allows voice
calls to be covered while 2B video calls are in progress.
Forward and
Follow Me
Digital communications devices can forward calls by dialing the
associated feature code.
Forward can be activated by video systems that have the ability to dial
strings and feature codes beginning with #. 2B data calls are forwarded
as two 1B data calls.
Remote Call Forwarding is not available at video system extensions.
Group Calling
Lines intended for data calls should not be mixed in the same calling
group with lines intended for voice calls.
Video systems can connect only using 1B data connections (providing the
video application supports 1B data) when receiving a call through a
calling group (called a Data Hunt Group when used for data calls)
because a calling group dispenses only one call to each calling group
member.
Hold
Data calls cannot be put on hold.
2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. For
this reason, if a call is on hold at a passive-bus MLX telephone when a 2B
call comes in, the passive-bus MLX telephone cannot retrieve the held
call until the 2B video call is over.
Last Number Dial
Terminal adapters can use Last Number Dial by dialing the Last Number
Dial feature code. Last Number Dial can be activated by video systems
that can dial strings and feature codes beginning with #.
Messaging
Messaging features are not available for data or video extensions, but
they can be used by telephones at these workstations.
Multi-Function
Module
An MFM cannot be used to connect a digital communications device or
videoconferencing system.
Night Service
If a digital communications device or videoconferencing system is a
member of the Night Service group, voice calls to the Night Service group
do not ring at these extensions. Data or video calls do ring, and 2B data
calls can be established. However, if there are two or more 2B data
extensions receiving Night Service calls, the two 1B data calls that form a
2B data call may be directed to different extensions instead of the same
one during Night Service operation.
Paging
Digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems can be
assigned to paging groups. However, they should not be: they are not
alerted if there is a call to a paging group, and they cannot make group
pages.
Park
Data calls cannot be parked.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Personal Lines
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 189
Personal lines can be assigned to digital communications devices and
videoconferencing systems, which ideally should not share personal lines
except with extensions at the same workstations. If they do share
personal lines, the system manager should ensure that enough idle lines
are available, particularly when a video system is receiving 2B data calls.
Otherwise, the video system may receive only 1B data while another
extension is using a second personal line.
When a personal line is shared between a digital data device and a
telephone, voice calls are directed only to the telephone and data calls
are received only by the digital communications device.
Personal lines can be shared between an MLX telephone and a desktop
video system in passive-bus configuration. 2B data calls can be
completed in this situation.
Personal lines can also be shared between an MLX telephone and a
digital communications device connected to the MLX adjunct extension,
provided that the communications device supports this capability.
Pickup
A digital communications device can pick up a data call. Pickup is not
recommended at video system extensions, although it can be used at a
passive-bus MLX telephone.
Pools
If a videoconferencing system is programmed to have a single Pool
button, two calls to that pool result in a 1B data call. However, if two
separate pools are assigned to a videoconferencing system extension,
then a 2B data call can be established. If a system includes two or more
video systems sharing the same pools, incoming 2B data calls can be
misrouted.
Privacy
Privacy is activated automatically for digital data calls.
Reminder Service
Digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems cannot
receive reminder calls.
Remote Access
Data calls cannot be made into lines programmed for remote access.
Ringing Options
Personalized ringing has no effect on digital data calls.
Some terminal adapters follow programmed ringing options and should
be set to Immediate Ring.
Videoconferencing systems are not affected by ringing options.
Signal/Notify
Signaling can be activated by video systems that have the ability to dial
strings and feature codes beginning with #.
A Notify signal can be received at a passive-bus MLX telephone, even
when a 2B data or voice call is active.
Speed Dial
Personal and System Speed dial codes can be used on digital
communications equipment (DCE).
Speed Dial codes can be used only on digital video systems that have the
ability to dial feature codes or number strings beginning with #.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Data calls cannot be presented as voice calls, although digital equipment
can make calls using ICOM or SA Voice Announce buttons.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Digital Data Calls
Transfer
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 190
Data calls cannot be transferred.
2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. For
this reason, if a call is on hold for transfer at a passive-bus MLX telephone
when a 2B call arrives, the passive-bus MLX telephone cannot retrieve
the held call until the 2B video call is over.
Voice Announce to
Busy
Voice Announce to Busy should be disabled at digital data workstations.
At a passive-bus MLX telephone, Voice Announce to Busy requires one
of the B-channels needed for a 2B video call and should be used only
when the video system is not active on, or receiving, a call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
Page 191
Direct-Line Console
9
At a Glance
9
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
MLX
Analog Multiline
System Programming
DLC operators only
System Information (SysSet-up), Operator Information,
Extension Information
All
MLX-20L, MLX-28D®
BIS-22D, BIS-34, BIS-34D, MERLIN II System Display
Console
Assign or remove an individual DLC position:
●
Operator→Positions→Direct Line
Enable or disable DLC operator automatic Hold systemwide:
●
Operator→DLC Hold
When one-touch Transfer is programmed, select either
automatic or manual completion for system operators:
●
Options→Transfer→One Touch→Transfer
Change the duration of the timer signaling a call still on hold:
●
Maximums
Operator positions (total
DLCs and QCCs)
DLCs for each module
MLX Display Labels
Factory Settings
Personal Lines
MLX DLC
Analog DLC
DLC Operator Automatic
Hold
Operator Hold Timer
One-Touch Transfer with
Automatic Completion
Primary System Operator
Position
Park Zone Extensions
Operator→Hold Timer
8
2
See ‘‘Display’’ on page 225.
Lines 1–18
Lines 1–32
Disabled
60 sec (range 10–255 sec)
Enabled
First (lowest) jack on first MLX or analog extension module,
fixed
881–888
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
Page 192
9
Description
A Direct-Line Console (DLC) is an answering position that system operators use
for the following purposes:
■
Answer outside calls that are not directed to an individual user or group.
■
Answer inside calls.
■
Transfer inside and outside calls to an extension or an outside telephone
number.
■
Make outside calls, for example, for users with extensions restricted from
making outside calls.
■
Set up conference calls.
■
Monitor system operation.
■
Monitor group member or room status when used with Extension Status in
calling group Call Management System (CMS) or Hotel mode.
A DLC operates like other multiline telephones. In all three modes of operation,
outside lines are assigned as personal lines to individual buttons on the console.
The lines assigned on an individual DLC can also be assigned to buttons on other
consoles or other extensions. Incoming calls can ring on any of the line buttons,
and several calls can ring simultaneously. The operator uses the Transfer button
to direct calls to other extensions or outside numbers.
When programmed systemwide, DLC operator automatic Hold puts an active call
on hold when a DLC operator presses another line button. When one-touch Hold
is programmed systemwide, pressing an Auto Dial button or DSS button also puts
an active outside call on hold. Both prevent accidental disconnection of callers
and speed call handling. A DLC operator hears an abbreviated ring as a reminder
of a call on hold every time the interval programmed for the operator hold timer
(10–255 seconds) expires.
A multiline telephone, assigned as a DLC through system programming, can use
both operator features and telephone features available for non-operator multiline
telephones to increase call-handling efficiency. The operator features that can be
assigned to buttons on the console are Alarm, Night Service, Missed Reminder,
and Send/Remove Message.
On a system with 29 or fewer lines, Alarm, Night Service, and Send/Remove
Message are assigned by default to analog DLCs on buttons 32–34. On a system
with more than 29 lines, Alarm is replaced with line 30, Night Service is replaced
with line 31, and Send/Remove Message is replaced with line 32. The first 18
lines on an MLX DLC are always factory-set as personal lines.
Each MLX DLC can have one or two Direct Station Selector (DSS) adjuncts
attached. A DSS cannot be attached to an analog DLC; however, the MERLIN II
System Display Console provides a built-in DSS.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
Page 193
Inside Auto Dial buttons can also be programmed on DLCs. The operator can use
these buttons to transfer a call, make an inside call, or determine whether an
extension has Do Not Disturb turned on.
Considerations and Constraints
9
The maximum number of DLC operator positions is eight. These can be all DLCs
or a mixture of DLCs and QCCs. When both DLCs and Queued Call Consoles
(QCCs) are assigned, no more than four can be QCCs. In a system with both DLC
and QCC positions, the primary system operator position must be a QCC. The
primary operator position is the first (lowest) jack on the first MLX or analog
extension module.
Only multiline telephones connected to the first and fifth extension jacks on an
MLX or analog module can be assigned as DLCs. This includes DLC positions
used for calling group supervisors and Call Management System (CMS)
supervisors.
A maximum of two DLCs can be assigned for each MLX or analog extension jack
module.
A DLC cannot be located off premises.
When only DLCs (and not QCCs) are assigned, the first DLC connected to the
control unit is the primary system operator position. When the system is first
connected, all Dial 0 calls, invalid destination calls from remote access users, and
unassigned Direct Inward Dial (DID) calls are directed to this position. Call
Management System equipment is connected to analog extension jacks that are
assigned as DLCs. Two DLCs on the same module must be assigned for each
CMS (maximum of two) connected to the system.
In Release 3.1 and later systems, if an extension is changed from a Direct-Line
Console to a Queued Call Console, pool dial-out codes are disallowed on the
QCC. You must use system programming to allow the use of pool dial-out codes
on the QCC.
Mode Differences
9
Hybrid/PBX Mode
9
If QCCs are assigned with DLCs, a QCC must be connected to the first extension
jack on the first MLX module in the first carrier as the primary system operator
position.
Pool buttons cannot be assigned on a DLC; however, lines/trunks included in a
pool can be assigned as personal line buttons on a DLC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
Page 194
Lines that are not assigned to buttons on the DLC can be selected by the operator
only by dialing the pool dial-out code from the SA button or, on an MLX DLC, by
selecting a DSS button for the pool dial-out code.
Lines that are not assigned to a pool cannot be selected from a DLC unless they
are assigned to buttons on the console. Shared SA buttons cannot be assigned to
DLCs.
Key and Behind Switch Modes
9
Only DLCs (not QCCs) are allowed in Key and Behind Switch modes.
A DLC operator cannot select lines that are not assigned to buttons on the
console.
Telephone Differences
9
MLX Telephones
9
An MLX-20L assigned as a DLC can also be used for system programming by
connecting it to any of the first five extension jacks on the first MLX module and
designating the extension jack for system programming. The Home screens of the
MLX-20L and MLX-28D are the same as those of non-operator telephones.
The built-in DSS field on the MERLIN II System Display Console corresponds to
physical extension jacks in the control unit instead of specific extension numbers
in the numbering plan. Therefore, DSS buttons on the MERLIN II System Display
Console cannot be used to monitor the busy status of pools or calling groups.
All Dial 0 calls are directed to the QCC queue and do not ring at any DLC
positions. A DLC cannot use Position Busy, which is only for QCCs. A DLC cannot
be assigned as a position-busy backup for a QCC (only calling groups can provide
backup for a QCC).
Analog Multiline Telephones
9
An analog DLC cannot be used for system programming.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
Feature Interactions
Alarm
Page 195
9
A DLC operator uses an Alarm button to monitor system operation. The
red LED next to the Alarm button on the operator console goes on when
the system detects a problem that requires immediate attention. An
operator with an MLX DLC can use Inspect to display the number of
alarms; an operator with an analog DLC cannot use Inspect. On a system
with fewer than 29 lines, an Alarm button is factory-assigned to analog
DLCs with 34 or more buttons.
On a system with more than 29 lines, Alarm is replaced with line 30. The
Alarm button is not a fixed feature and can be assigned to any available
button on an analog or MLX DLC.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
Allowed and Disallowed Lists can be assigned to DLCs.
Auto Dial
An inside Auto Dial button can be programmed on a DLC. A DLC operator
can use the button to transfer a call, make an inside call, or determine
whether or not the extension is available.
Calling Restrictions
Calling restrictions can be assigned to DLCs to prevent users with
restricted extensions from bypassing restrictions by asking system DLC
operators with unrestricted consoles to connect them to an outside call.
Call Waiting and
Camp-On
When a DLC operator uses Camp-On to transfer a call to a busy
extension, the call is placed in the call-waiting queue and the caller hears
the call-waiting tone whether or not the extension has Call Waiting
activated. If the system is programmed for one-touch Transfer with
automatic completion, the operator uses Camp-On by pressing the
Transfer button, dialing the extension manually, activating Camp-On,
hanging up, and pressing either another line button or the Transfer
button again. If the operator presses an Auto Dial or DSS button, the
transfer is automatically completed and Camp-On cannot be used.
Coverage
A DLC can be both an Individual or Group Coverage receiver and a
member of a coverage group. No more than eight Primary Cover,
Secondary Cover, or Group Cover buttons can be assigned on a DLC. A
DLC can also be a sender.
When a DLC is used in a system with a CTI link and is not itself using a
CTI link application (that is, the DLC is unmonitored), calls transferred
from a Cover button on the DLC do not initiate screen pop, even at
screen-pop-capable destinations.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
CTI Link
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 196
A DLC’s SA calls can be controlled by a CTI application. When they are,
the DLC position functions like any other MLX or analog multiline
extension that is using a CTI application. An outside call to the position
initiates screen pop at the DLC extension.
Calls to unmonitored DLCs (those not using a CTI application) do not
initiate screen pop at the operator extension but when transferred or
conferenced—even if they arrived on the DLC’s personal line button—do
initiate screen pop at a destination extension using a CTI application.
However, calls transferred from a DLC’s programmed Cover button do
not initiate screen pop, even at screen-pop-capable destinations.
Directories
An operator with an MLX DLC can use all Directory features.
Do Not Disturb
The green LED next to an Auto Dial or DSS button on a DLC turns on
when a user activates Do Not Disturb. In Release 2.0 and later systems,
an operator can inspect a DSS button with a red LED on to see whether
the extension is busy or using Do Not Disturb. If the user at the extension
has turned on Do Not Disturb, the Do Not Disturb message is posted and
appears on the operator’s display. The message may also mean that the
user has posted the message without turning on the feature.
Extension Status
Extension Status capability can be assigned to DLCs only. In hotel
configuration, only a DLC operator can change an extension to Status 0.
In the Group Calling/Call Management System configuration, a calling
group or CMS supervisor uses a DLC to monitor and change group
member status.
Forward and
Follow Me
A DLC operator can forward calls to extensions and, if the capability is
assigned in system programming, to outside telephone numbers. In Key
mode because outside lines are assigned as personal line buttons on the
console, the ability to forward calls received on each outside line
(excluding loop-start lines with unreliable disconnect) to an outside
number must also be assigned in system programming; it can be
assigned to only one telephone for each individual line/trunk. In addition,
the DLC must be designated as the principal user. In Hybrid/PBX mode, it
can be assigned to multiple telephones for each pool.
Group Calling
A DLC can be a member of a calling group and is used in the calling
group supervisor position.
Hold
When programmed systemwide, DLC operator automatic Hold puts an
active call on hold when a DLC operator presses another line button.
When one-touch Hold is programmed systemwide, pressing an Auto Dial
button or DSS button also puts an active outside call on hold. This
prevents accidental disconnection of callers and speeds call handling. If a
call is on hold, a DLC operator hears an abbreviated ring as a reminder
each time the interval programmed for the operator hold timer (10–255
seconds) expires.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 197
Messaging
The Send/Remove Message feature is only for operators. It is used by a
DLC operator to turn on the Message LED to indicate a waiting message.
For telephones without a display, Send/Remove Message is the only way
the Message LED can be turned on and off by operators. The
Send/Remove Message button is factory-assigned to analog DLCs on
button 34. The Send/Remove Message button is replaced with line 32
when the system has more than 29 lines. Send/Remove Message can be
assigned to any available button on an analog or MLX DLC.
Multi-Function
Module
An MFM cannot be assigned as a DLC position.
Night Service
A Night Service button is assigned only to operators and is used to
activate and deactivate Night Service. It is factory-assigned to analog
DLCs on button 31. On a system with more than 29 lines, the Night
Service button is replaced with line 31. The Night Service button can be
assigned to any available button on an analog or MLX DLC.
Paging
A line/trunk jack programmed for Loudspeaker Paging can be assigned to
a button on an analog or MLX DLC for one-touch access. An MLX DLC
operator can also access a loudspeaker paging system by dialing the line
number (801–880) for the line/trunk jack of the loudspeaker system.
Park
Eight park zone codes (factory set extension numbers 881–888) are
automatically reserved for parking calls from a DLC. These numbers
cannot be assigned to the DSS buttons on a MERLIN II System Display
Console. To assign park zones to a DSS connected to an MLX DLC, the
numbers must be in the range programmed for the Page buttons. An
operator can program park zone codes on inside Auto Dial buttons. An
inside Auto Dial button can also be programmed with a user’s or
operator’s own extension number and can be used to park calls.
Personal Lines
The factory setting in all modes for analog DLCs automatically assigns
the first 32 lines connected to the system as personal lines. On MLX
DLCs, the first 18 lines are automatically assigned as personal lines.
Pickup
A DLC can be part of a pickup group, allowing other group members to
provide backup for the DLC. In turn, a DLC operator uses Pickup to
answer calls on lines that are not assigned to buttons on the console.
Pools
In Hybrid/PBX mode, a Pool button cannot be assigned to a DLC. A DLC
operator accesses a pool by dialing the pool dial-out code from an SA
button or, on an MLX DLC with a DSS, by pressing the DSS button
associated with the pool dial-out code. Lines/trunks assigned to pools can
be assigned as personal lines only on a DLC.
Reminder Service
DLC operators can use Reminder Set to set or cancel reminders directed
to other users. The operator can also see when a reminder has been
missed, because the user did not answer the call, and then cancel the
missed reminder. The Missed Reminder feature can be used only at
operator positions.
Remote Access
Invalid remote access calls can be programmed to ring on an SA or ICOM
button on a DLC.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct-Line Console
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 198
Speed Dial
System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed from the first DLC
connected to the first (lowest) analog extension jack on the module in slot
01 of the control unit.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Shared SA buttons cannot be assigned to DLCs.
Transfer
A DLC operator uses transfer to direct calls to other users. See ‘‘Transfer’’
on page 601 for further information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Page 199
Direct Station Selector: MLX
9
At a Glance
9
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Maximums
Factory Settings
Page 1 button
Page 2 button
Page 3 button
Operators
Operator Information
All
MLX-20L, MLX-28D
Assign extension numbers selected when DSS buttons are
pressed:
● SysRenumber→Single→More→DSS Button
16 DSSs for each system
2 DSSs for each console (1 for each console if 3 or more
consoles in one carrier)
150 extension numbers for each DSS (3 pages of extension
numbers, 50 extension numbers for each page)
Starts with Extension 0
Starts with Extension 50
Starts with Extension 100
9
Description
One or two Direct Station Selectors (DSSs) can be connected to an MLX-20L or
MLX-28D telephone assigned as an operator position. The DSS enhances the
call-handling capabilities of an operator with a Direct-Line Console (DLC) or a
Queued Call Console (QCC). When connected to an MLX-20L telephone used as
a system programming console, the DSS facilitates system programming and
centralized telephone programming procedures. When used with the Extension
Status feature or by a calling group or Call Management System (CMS)
supervisor, the DSS allows a user to determine, at a glance, calling group or CMS
group member status or room status.
The DSS provides the following call-handling capabilities or information:
■
One-touch dialing of inside extensions
■
One-touch Transfer
■
One-touch Hold (DLC only)
■
On-hook, off-hook, or Do Not Disturb status of extensions in the system
■
Extension status indication (room or group member status)
■
Calling group queue status
■
Message-waiting LED status
■
Operator park zones
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 200
The DSS, shown in Figure 15, has an array of 50 buttons, called DSS buttons,
with red LEDs. A maximum of two DSSs can be connected to provide a field of
100 button. Ten additional fixed-feature buttons with green LEDs are at the
bottom of the DSS. The first three (from left to right) on the top row are Page
buttons, which are used to select the range of extension numbers represented by
the DSS buttons. A fourth button (lower leftmost) is the Message Status button,
which is used to turn message status operation on and off. When you are using
the Message Status feature, the LED next to each DSS button indicates whether
or not a message is waiting from a system operator. The remaining six buttons on
the first DSS and the 10 buttons at the bottom of the second DSS are not
operable (reserved for future use), except on a QCC, where the rightmost button
on the second to last row of the first DSS activates the Direct Voice Mail feature.
A page is the range of extension numbers assigned to a DSS. A single DSS can
have three pages of extension numbers, with 50 extension numbers for each
page, for a total of 150 extension numbers. When two DSSs are connected, each
page’s capacity is increased to 100 extension numbers. The two connected DSSs
can have three pages of extension numbers for a total of 300 extension numbers.
The beginning number for each page is assigned through system programming.
When an operator presses a Page button, the page of the DSS corresponds to a
range of 50 (for a single DSS) or 100 (for two connected DSSs) extension
numbers. The factory settings for Page buttons are as follows: the Page 1 button
begins with Extension 0; the Page 2 button begins with 50; and the Page 3 button
begins with 100.
If only one DSS is attached, each Page button assignment sets the console for a
range of 50 extension numbers. If two DSSs are attached, each Page button
assignment sets the console for a range of 100 extension numbers. If 2 DSSs are
used, the factory setting must be changed so that the difference between
extensions assigned to the range is at least 100. For example, assign Page 1
button to begin with Extension 100, Page 2 button to begin with Extension 200,
and Page 3 button to begin with Extension 300.
The beginning extension number associated with each Page button is the same
for all operator positions and cannot be programmed differently for individual
operator positions.
Each Page button range can begin with any extension number that is a multiple of
50, in the range of 0 to 9950. However, to speed call handling, the assignments
should be sequential; the range starting with the lowest extension number should
be assigned to Page 1, the range starting with a higher extension number should
be assigned to Page 2, and the range starting with a still higher extension number
should be assigned to Page 3. You cannot program individual buttons on a DSS.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Page 201
DSS Buttons
00
Page
Buttons
Message
Status
Button
10
20
30
40
01
11
21
31
41
02
12
22
32
42
03
13
23
33
43
04
14
24
34
44
05
15
25
35
45
06
16
26
36
46
07
17
27
37
47
08
18
28
38
48
09
19
29
39
49
100
700
800
MSG
Reserved Buttons
Figure 15.
Direct Station Selector
Each of the 50 DSS buttons corresponds to one of three extension numbers. The
specific extension number is determined by the Page button that an operator
presses. For example, if the first extension number for the Page 1 button is
programmed to be Extension 100, the DSS buttons and associated LEDs on a
single DSS correspond to Extensions 100 to 149. The specific extensions
represented by each DSS button are assigned from top to bottom, left to right, as
shown in Figure 15.
A DSS button can represent one of the following:
■
User extension number
■
Line/trunk number (801–880)
■
Pool dial-out code (Hybrid/PBX only)
■
Calling group extension number
■
Paging group extension number
■
Operator park zone extension number
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Page 202
■
Access code (usually 9) for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) or Idle Line
Preference
■
Remote access dial code
■
Listed Directory Number (the extension for the QCC queue)
The use and definition of each DSS button’s LED depend on the extension
represented by the button and on whether the operator position is used for normal
call handling, calling group or CMS supervisory operation, Extension Status in
Hotel configuration, or message status operation. See ‘‘Extension Status’’ on
page 256 and ‘‘Group Calling’’ on page 281 for additional information.
Normal Call-Handling Operation
9
Normal call-handling operation is active when the position is not in Message
Status or Extension Status operation. The DSS buttons are used for one-touch
dialing of extension numbers. When a button for a telephone extension, calling
group extension, or paging group extension is pressed, the extension number is
dialed automatically. In Hybrid/PBX mode, an operator can either select a specific
pool or dial the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) code by pressing the DSS
button for a pool dial-out code or ARS code. If, before lifting the handset, an
operator presses a DSS button for any of the extensions or codes mentioned
above, the speaker is turned on automatically and an SA or ICOM button is
selected.
An operator can also use a DSS button to activate a feature that requires an
extension number, for example, Barge-In, Conference, Send/Remove Message,
Forward (including Remote Call Forward), Follow Me, Leave Message, Reminder
service, and Transfer. To do this, the operator presses the Feature button, dials
the feature code, and then presses the DSS button for the extension number.
The result of pressing a DSS button while on a call depends on the type of
operator position, the type of button pressed, and whether the system is
programmed for one-touch Hold or one-touch Transfer, as described in Table 10
and Table 11. For a QCC operator position, see Table 12.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Table 10.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 203
Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: DLC Position with
One-Touch Hold
Extension Type
Result
Individual, calling
group, paging group
An outside caller is put on hold, an SA or ICOM button is selected
automatically, and the extension number is dialed automatically.
Transfer is not completed automatically.
An inside call is not put on hold, and transfer is not activated
automatically. If the DSS button is for a user, a beep is sent to that
user. If the DSS button is for a calling group or paging group,
pressing the button has no effect.
Pool dial-out code,
ARS code
The caller is put on hold, transfer is initiated, the pool dial-out code
or ARS code is automatically dialed, and the operator can then dial
the outside telephone number. Transfer completion is always
manual—the operator must press another button or hang up to
complete the transfer.
Park zone
The Park feature is activated, and the call is put on hold on the
selected park zone to allow Pickup from any extension in the
system.
Ignored, no effect
Line/trunk number,
Listed Directory
Number, unassigned
extension numbers, dial
0 calls
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Table 11.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 204
Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: DLC Position with
One-Touch Transfer
Extension Type
Result
Individual or calling
group
The caller is put on hold, transfer is initiated, an SA or ICOM button
is selected automatically, and the extension number is dialed
automatically. If manual completion is programmed, an operator
must press another button or hang up to complete the transfer. If
automatic completion is programmed, the transfer is completed
automatically.
Pool dial-out code or
ARS code
The caller is put on hold, transfer is initiated, the pool dial-out code
is automatically dialed, and the operator can then dial the outside
telephone number. Transfer completion is always manual; the
operator must press another button or hang up to complete the
transfer, whether the system is programmed for manual or
automatic completion.
Paging group
The caller is put on hold, an SA or ICOM button is selected
automatically, and the paging group extension number is dialed
automatically. Transfer is not completed automatically, whether the
system is programmed for one-touch Hold or one-touch Transfer,
because calls cannot be transferred to a paging group.
Park zone
The Park feature is activated and the call is put on hold in the
selected park zone to allow Pickup from any extension in the
system.
Ignored, no effect
Line/trunk number,
Listed Directory
Number, unassigned
extension numbers, dial
0 calls
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Table 12.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 205
Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: QCC Position
Extension Type
Result
User or calling group
The caller is put on hold, the transfer is initiated, and the extension
is dialed automatically. If extended call completion is programmed
with the Manual option, the operator must press the Release button
or hang up to complete the transfer. If extended call completion is
programmed with the Automatic option, the transfer is completed
automatically.
Pool dial-out code or
ARS code
The caller is put on hold, the transfer is initiated, and the pool
dial-out or ARS code is dialed automatically. The operator can then
dial the telephone number. Transfer completion is always manual
whether extended call completion is programmed as manual or
automatic.
Paging group
The caller is put on hold, a Call button is automatically selected, and
the paging group extension number is automatically dialed. The call
transfer process is not initiated automatically because calls cannot
be transferred to a paging group.
Park zone
The Park feature is activated, and the call is put on hold in the
selected park zone to allow Pickup from any extension in the
system.
Ignored, no effect
Line/trunk number,
Listed Directory
Number, unassigned
extension numbers, dial
0 calls
The red LEDs for each DSS button are used to determine whether a user is on a
call (off hook), has no call active (on hook), or is using Do Not Disturb. The LED
indication (on) is the same for off hook and Do Not Disturb; however, in Release
2.0 and later systems, an operator can inspect the DSS button to determine
whether the user is on a call or has activated Do Not Disturb.
For a calling group extension on a DSS button, the red LED indicates the status of
the queue. In Release 5.0 and later systems, the DSS button flashes if the
number of calls waiting in the queue is greater than or equal to Threshold 1 but
fewer than Threshold 3. The LED lights steadily if the number of waiting calls is
greater than or equal to Threshold 3. If three thresholds are needed, an inside
Auto Dial button should be used to monitor queue status.
For a pool dial-out code on a DSS button, the red LED indicates line/trunk
availability.
Table 13 shows the meanings of the red LEDs for DSS buttons while the operator
position is in normal operation and message status is not active.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Table 13.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 206
LED Meanings for Normal Call-Handling Operation
LED Status
Off
Extension Type
Individual
Meaning
The person is not on the telephone and is not using Do
Not Disturb.
Line/Trunk number
The line/trunk is not in use.
Pool dial-out code
At least one line/trunk is available for making an
outside call.
Calling group
The calling group queue is below the programmed
threshold (in Release 5.0 and later systems, below
Threshold 1).
Paging group
The group is available for making a group
announcement.
Operator Park Zone A call is not parked on this park zone code.
On
ARS, Remote
access, Listed
Directory Number
Not applicable, red LED is always off.
Individual
The person is on the telephone or has activated the
Do Not Disturb feature.
Line/trunk number
The line/trunk is in use.
Pool dial-out code
No lines/trunks are available in this pool for outside
calls.
Calling group
The calling group queue is at or above the allowable
threshold (in Release 5.0 and later systems, at or
above Threshold 3).
Paging group
An announcement is being made to a paging group.
■
Operator Park Zone A call is parked in this park zone.
ARS, Remote
Access, Listed
Directory Number
Not applicable, red LED is always off.
Fast flashing
Individual
The person is calling the system operator position.
Slow flashing
Individual
A call transferred by the system operator to the
extension is returning.
Calling group
The group queue is at or above Threshold 1 and below
Threshold 3 (Release 5.0 and later systems).
Line/trunk number
A call is ringing on this line/trunk.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Page 207
NOTE:
Fast flashing is applicable only to individual extensions. Slow flashing is
applicable only to individual extension types and line/trunk numbers.
Calling Group or CMS Supervisory Operation
31
A supervisor with a DLC switches from normal call handling to supervisor
operation by pressing the Feature button, dialing 32, and pressing the Hold
button. The effect of pressing a DSS button while in supervisor operation is the
same as that described for normal call-handling operation. See ‘‘Group Calling’’
on page 281 for additional information.
When the supervisory position is not in Message Status operation, the green LED
next to the Message Status button is off. The red LED next to each DSS button
for a calling group member’s extension is used to monitor the availability of
members to take calls directed to the calling group. The meaning of the red LED
associated with each group member is shown in Table 14.
Table 14.
LED Meanings for Supervisor Operation without Message Status Active
LED Status
Off
Extension
Status
0
On
2
■
Slow Flashing 1
Meaning
The extension is signed out from the group, and the member
is unavailable to take calls.
The extension is signed into the group, and calls can be sent
to the member.
Used for CMS only: the extension is in the after-call work
state, and the group member is not available to take calls.
NOTE:
The LEDs next to DSS buttons for all other types of extensions are always
off and have no meaning.
Extension Status Operation (Hotel Configuration)1
4
When Extension Status is in Hotel configuration, the Extension Status feature is
assigned to and removed from individual DLCs through system programming (see
‘‘Extension Status’’ on page 256 for details). Hotel Extension Status operation is
always active unless the operator presses the Message Status button to use the
Auto Dial or DSS buttons to see message-waiting status for each extension.
Pressing a DSS button while in Hotel Extension Status operation has the same
effect as for normal call-handling operations.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Page 208
When not in Message Status operation, the red LED next to each DSS button for
a room extension is used to monitor room availability, and the DSS button is used
to restrict the extensions when the rooms are not occupied.
The meaning of the red LED next to the DSS button for each room is shown in
Table 15.
Table 15.
LED Meanings for Hotel Extension Status Operation without Message Status
Active
LED Status
Off
Extension
Status
0
On
2
The room is vacant and available for occupancy, and outside
calls cannot be made from the extension.
1
The room is vacant and ready for cleaning. Outside calls
cannot be made from the extension.
■
Slow flashing
Meaning
The room is occupied, and the extension is in regular
call-handling state.
NOTE:
The LED next to the DSS button for all other types of extensions is always
off and has no meaning.
Message Status Operation
51
Message Status operation activates when an operator presses the Message
Status button (the lower left feature button on the first DSS) while in normal
call-handling, calling group, CMS supervisory, or Extension Status operation. The
green LED next to the Message Status button is on when Message Status
operation is active.
While the position is in Message Status operation, the red LEDs next to the DSS
buttons for user extensions indicate whether or not the Message LED has been
turned on by a system operator and do not light when a Message LED has been
turned on by another source, such as a fax machine or another user. An LED
associated with a calling group extension or a pool dial-out code is always off
while the position is in Message Status operation.
If an operator wants to turn on the message-waiting LED to indicate that a
message is waiting, the operator first checks the LED next to the recipient’s DSS
button to determine whether or not the recipient’s message-waiting LED is on.
The operator’s DSS or console LEDs do not light when a message-waiting LED
has been turned on by another source, such as a fax machine or another user. To
leave a message-waiting indication when the LED is apparently off, the operator
presses the programmed Send/Remove Message button, followed by the DSS
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 209
button or Auto Dial button for the person for whom the message is intended. The
operator presses the Message Status button to return to normal call handling.
By pressing the Feature button and selecting Leave Msg from the display, MLX
DLC operators can leave a message at another extension. This does not affect
Message Status operation because Message Status shows only messages sent
with the Send/Remove Message button. See ‘‘Messaging’’ on page 374 for more
information about sending and receiving messages.
For calling group or CMS supervisory operation or for Hotel Extension Status in
Message Status operation, the red LED next to a DSS button for a user extension
indicates whether or not a message has been sent by any of the operator
positions. On a button for a calling group extension number, the red LED indicates
the status of the queue. When a DSS button stores a pool dial-out code, the red
LED indicates line/trunk availability. The meanings of the red LEDs next to the
DSS buttons while the operator position is in Message Status operation are
shown in Table 16 and Table 17.
Table 16.
LED Meanings for Hotel Extension Status Operation with Message Status
Active
LED Status
Off
Extension Type
Individual
Meaning
A system operator has not turned on the
Message LED.
On
Individual
A system operator has turned on the Message LED to
indicate a waiting message.
All other types of
extensions
No meaning
■
Off
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Table 17.
Page 210
LED Meanings for Supervisor or Hotel Extension Status Operation with
Message Status Active
LED Status
Off
On
Extension Type
Individual
Meaning
The person is not on the telephone and is not using Do
Not Disturb.
Line/trunk number
The line/trunk is not in use.
Pool dial-out code
At least one line/trunk is available for making an
outside call.
Calling group
The calling group queue is below the programmed
threshold (in Release 5.0 and later systems, below
Threshold 1).
Paging group
The group is available for making a group
announcement.
Operator park zone
A call is not parked on this park zone code.
ARS, Remote
Access, Listed
Directory Number
Not applicable; the red LED is always off.
Individual
The person is on the telephone or is using Do Not
Disturb.
Line/trunk number
The line/trunk is in use.
Pool dial-out code
No lines/trunks are available on this pool for outside
calls.
Calling group
The calling group queue is at or above the allowable
threshold (in Release 5.0 and later systems, at or
above Threshold 3).
Paging group
An announcement is being made to the paging group.
Operator park zone
A call is parked on this park zone code.
ARS, Remote
Access, Listed
Directory Number
Not applicable; the red LED is always off.
Calling group
The group queue is at or above Threshold 1 and below
Threshold 3 (Release 5.0 and later systems).
■
Slow flashing
Considerations and Constraints
71
One or two DSSs can be connected to an MLX-20L or MLX- 28D telephone.
DSSs cannot be connected to an MLX-5, MLX-5D, MLX-10®, MLX-10DP®,
MLX-10D®, MLX-16DP®, analog multiline, or single-line telephone.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Page 211
Only a DLC or QCC can have a DSS.
Operator park zone codes must be included in the extension number range
specified for one of the Page buttons.
If an extension is busy because features are being assigned through system or
centralized telephone programming, the red LED next to the associated DSS
button is on to indicate the busy condition.
When a QCC is active on a call, a press of a DSS button for a line/trunk number,
Listed Directory Number, or unassigned extension number is ignored.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, when a call is forwarded to a multiline telephone
that has a DSS button for the forwarding telephone, the light next to the DSS
button does not flash.
DSSs that are out of the building require additional local power. Any console with
two DSSs requires local power.
Mode Differences
71
Behind Switch Mode
71
In Behind Switch mode, DSS buttons for operator park zones do not work.
Feature Interactions
71
Automatic Route
Selection
The LED next to a DSS button for the ARS code is always off.
Barge-In
After making a call to an extension by using a DSS button on a DLC,
activate Barge-In by pressing a programmed Barge-In button. QCC
operators select the feature from the display.
Camp-On
When Camp-On is used to complete a transfer and the call returns, the
LED of the DSS button associated with the extension transfer destination
stays off and does not flash as it does for a transfer return.
Coverage
When an operator transfers an Individual or Group Coverage call and it
returns, the red LED next to the DSS button for the sender does not flash
as it does when a call received on another type of line button returns.
Direct Voice Mail
On a Queued Call Console’s DSS, the Direct Voice Mail button is a fixed
button, the rightmost button in the second row from the bottom.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Display
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 212
When an operator presses a DSS button for an extension number, the
extension label, if any, and the extension number show on the display
while it is dialed. When an operator presses the Inspct button and then a
Page button, the display shows Page, the page number selected, and the
first extension number in the range. When and operator presses the
Inspct button and then the Message Status button, the display shows
Message Status to indicate that the DSS is in Message Status operation.
When an operator presses a DSS button representing an extension
number after pressing the Inspct button, the display shows the extension
label, extension number, number of messages, and for Release 2.0 and
later systems, any posted messages.
Do Not Disturb
In Release 2.0 and later systems, an operator can use the Inspct button
to check the status of an extension whose red LED is on. If the user at the
extension is using Do Not Disturb, the Do Not Disturb message is also
posted and appears on the operator’s display. (However, the message
may also mean that the user has posted the message without turning on
the Do Not Disturb feature.)
Extension Status
A calling group, CMS supervisor, or an operator at a DLC with Extension
Status assigned can change the status of a group member or room by
pressing a programmed Available or Unavailable extension status button
and then pressing the DSS button for the group member or room.
Forward and
Follow Me
Activate Forwarding by pressing a programmed button or using a feature
code and then pressing a DSS button for the extension where calls
should go. Activate Follow Me by dialing the feature code and then
pressing a DSS button for the sender’s extension number.
Group Calling
In releases prior to 5.0, The DSS button’s LED for a calling group
extension number indicates the status of calls in the calling group queue.
The LED is on when calls are at or above the programmed threshold and
off when the number is below the threshold.
In Release 5.0 and later systems, a DSS button used as a Calls-in-Queue
Alarm button only indicates two alarm threshold levels instead of the three
that a programmed inside Auto Dial button can display. A DSS either
flashes or lights steadily. The button is unlit when the number of calls in
the queue drops below Threshold 1. The LED lights steadily when the
number of calls in queue is greater than or equal to Threshold 3.
Otherwise, it flashes. If DSS buttons are used to monitor calling group
queue status, only two alarm thresholds should be set.
Hold
If one-touch Hold is programmed, only outside callers are automatically
put on hold when a DSS button for a user, calling group, or paging group
is pressed while another call is active. For an inside caller, pressing a
DSS button for a user sends a manual signal to the user’s extension;
pressing a DSS button for a calling group or paging group has no effect.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 213
Inspect
Inspect can be used to determine the corresponding extension for each
DSS button. To use Inspect, press the Page button for the range of
extensions, press the Inspct button, and press each DSS button to see
what it represents; the label and number of messages in the mailbox are
also shown. Information is displayed on only one extension at a time. To
see information for another range of extensions, press the Home button
and repeat the process. In Release 2.0 and later systems, if a message is
posted at an extension associated with a DSS button, the message is
shown on Line 2 of the display when the operator inspects the DSS
button.
Last Number Dial
An extension dialed by pressing a DSS button is not stored for Last
Number Dial.
Messaging
When an operator presses the Message Status button on a DSS, the
LEDs on the DSS reflect only messages left by an operator’s using the
Send/Remove Message or Leave Message features and not messages
left by any co-worker (non-operator) using the Leave Message feature.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, an operator can view a posted
message at an extension by pressing the Inspct button and then the DSS
button.
Paging
The DSS button for a line/trunk programmed as a loudspeaker paging
jack only indicates whether or not the paging system is in use. The button
cannot be used to gain access to the loudspeaker paging system. It can
be used only to dial an extension for a paging group. When a DSS button
for a paging group is pressed, the transfer process is not initiated, even if
one-touch Transfer (DLC only) or automatic extended call completion
(QCC only) is programmed for the system. Calls cannot be transferred to
a paging group extension number.
Park
Park zone codes cannot be assigned to DSS buttons on MERLIN II
System Display Consoles. In order for the park zones to be assigned to a
DSS connected to an MLX telephone, the extension numbers must be in
the range programmed for the Page buttons. Only DSS buttons
corresponding to an operator park zone can be used to park calls; calls
cannot be parked on a DSS button corresponding to any other type of
extension.
When an operator parks a call by using a park zone DSS button and the
call returns, the red LED associated with the park zone where the call is
parked stays off and does not flash as it does for a transfer return.
To park a call at a park zone, an operator with a DSS presses the DSS
button for the park zone while the caller is on the line. If an operator tries
to park a call by pressing the Transfer button followed by the DSS button
for the park zone, the call is put on hold for transfer and is not parked.
This error can transfer a call to an outside number.
Pickup
DSS buttons associated with line/trunk numbers (801–880) cannot be
used for answering calls on specific lines through individual Pickup.
These DSS buttons are used only for checking the busy or not busy
status of each line/trunk.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Station Selector: MLX
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 214
Saved Number Dial
An extension dialed by pressing a DSS button is not stored for Saved
Number Dial.
Signal/Notify
If a user presses a Signal button programmed with an operator’s
extension while making a call to the operator, the LED next to the DSS
button associated with the user changes from flashing to on while the
Signal button is held down.
System
Renumbering
The beginning extension number for each page is assigned through
system programming. The factory settings are as follows: Page 1 button
begins with Extension 0, Page 2 button begins with Extension 50, and
Page 3 button begins with Extension 100.
Transfer
The Transfer option of one-touch Hold applies only to outside calls on a
DLC and not to calls on a QCC. When one-touch Hold is programmed
and an operator presses a DSS button with an inside caller on the line (or,
in Hybrid/PBX mode, with an outside caller on an SA button), the call is
not put on hold and a signal is sent to the extension corresponding to the
DSS button pressed. When one-touch Transfer (with either manual or
automatic completion) is programmed and an operator presses the DSS
button while the caller is on the line and no SA or ICOM button is
available to transfer the call, the call does not go on hold. If the operator
hangs up, the caller is disconnected.
Transfer is always initiated and transfer completion is manual when an
operator presses the DSS button corresponding to a line/trunk number,
pool dial-out code (Hybrid/PBX only), or ARS access code (Hybrid/PBX
only), even if one-touch Hold, one-touch Transfer with automatic
completion (DLC only), or automatic extended call completion (QCC only)
is programmed for the system.
When an operator transfers an Individual or Group Coverage call and the
call returns, the red LED next to the DSS button for the sender does not
flash as it does for a transfer return for calls received on other types of
line buttons.
When an operator transfers a call to a calling group and the call returns,
the red LED associated with the calling group does not flash as it does for
a transfer return from a user’s extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Voice Mail
Page 215
Direct Voice Mail
71
At a Glance
71
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
MLX Display Label
Programming Code
Feature Code
Telephone users, operators
Extension Directory
Hybrid/PBX, Key
All
Direct VM [DrcVM]
*56
56
71
Description
Direct Voice Mail allows you to place or transfer a call directly to another person’s
voice mail without ringing that person’s telephone.
You can either transfer an active call to an extension’s voice mail or place an
intercom call directly to the extension’s voice mail. Activating Direct Voice Mail
while on hook selects the next available SA or ICOM button (at least one SA or
ICOM button must be available). To activate Direct Voice Mail, do one of the
following:
■
Press the programmed Direct Voice Mail button and press a DSS button or
Auto Dial button, or select a Directory entry for the extension.
■
Press the programmed Direct Voice Mail button and dial the extension
number.
■
Press the Feature button, select Direct VM [DrcVM], and dial the
extension number.
■
For a single-line telephone only:
— If active on a call, press the Flash or Recall button (or if your telephone
does not have positive disconnect, press and release the switchhook).
Then dial #56 followed by the extension number.
— If you hear dial tone, dial #56 followed by the extension number.
On display telephones, the display shows the message Send Voice Mail to:
before the extension is selected or dialed.
The green LED associated with the Direct Voice Mail button lights when the
feature is activated. The LED turns off when the feature is deactivated (by
pressing the Direct Voice Mail button again) or when the call or transferred call
has gone to voice mail.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Voice Mail
Page 216
If you have a programmed Direct Voice Mail button, you can also activate Direct
Voice Mail while transferring or making a call by pressing the Direct Voice Mail
button. The call or transferred call goes to the extension’s voice mail. In this case,
the green LED does not turn on.
If you activate Direct Voice Mail to transfer a call and then press the Direct Voice
Mail button to deselect the feature, the original call is still on hold for transfer. You
can either enter an extension number and complete the transfer to another
extension (by hanging up or pressing the Transfer button) or press the line button
to pick up the call.
Considerations and Constraints
71
You cannot place a call to your own voice mail by using Direct Voice Mail.
If you have an MLX display telephone and use the System or Extension Directory
to select the extension to receive voice mail, the display does not show the
message Send Voice Mail to:.
Mode Differences
71
Behind Switch Mode
71
Although programming a Direct Voice Mail button is allowed, the button serves no
function in Behind Switch mode because no on-premises voice mail systems are
supported. Direct Voice Mail does not work with a voice mail system on the host
PBX or with Centrex voice mail.
Telephone Differences
71
Queued Call Consoles
71
On a Queued Call Console’s DSS, the Direct Voice Mail button is a fixed button,
the rightmost button in the second row from the bottom.
QCC operators may also select the feature from the display.
Single-Line Telephones
71
If you already hear dial tone and want to call directly to an extension’s voice mail,
dial #56 followed by the extension number. Single-line telephone users must
press a Recall or Flash button and dial #56 to transfer a call to an extension’s
voice mail. If the telephone does not have positive disconnect, press and release
the switchhook instead of pressing the Recall or Flash button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Direct Voice Mail
Feature Interactions
Page 217
71
Coverage
Direct Voice Mail overrides coverage-inhibiting features such as
Coverage Off, Coverage VMS Off, and Coverage Inside Off.
Direct Station
Selector
On a Queued Call Console’s DSS, the Direct Voice Mail button is a fixed
button, the rightmost button in the second row from the bottom.
Forward/Follow Me
In Release 4.0 and later systems, if Forwarding is active and Delayed
Forwarding is not set to 0 rings, pressing the Direct Voice Mail button at
the forwarding extension while a call is ringing on a button causes the call
to go directly to voice mail coverage and does not get forwarded.
In Release 3.0 and later systems, a call that is transferred to an extension
using Direct Voice Mail is not forwarded.
Headset Options
When an MLX telephone user (except for a QCC operator) transfers a call
using Direct Voice Mail, Headset Auto Answer is turned off and must be
turned on manually to resume using the feature.
Transfer
A user with a Direct Voice Mail button can activate Direct Voice Mail after
starting to transfer a call. While a transfer is being made, press the Direct
Voice Mail button to transfer the call to the extension’s voice mail.
Complete the transfer as usual by pressing the Transfer button or
hanging up.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Directories
Page 218
Directories
71
At a Glance
71
Users Affected
System Directory
Extension Directory
Personal Directory
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Directory
Extension Directory
Personal Directory
MLX Display Label
System Directory
Extension Directory
Personal Directory
System Programming
Telephone users
MLX display telephone users
MLX-20L telephone users
Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Label
Information, System Directory, System Information
(SysSet-up)
All
All
MLX display telephones
MLX-20L telephones
Directory, System Dir [Dir, SysDir]
Directory, Ext Dir [Dir, ExtDir]
Directory, Per Dir
Create, change, or delete System Directory listings:
More→Labeling→Directory→System
Create, change, or delete Extension Directory listings:
● More→Labeling→Directory→Extension
Create, change, or delete Personal Directory listings:
● More→Labeling→Directory→Personal
Assign outside line/trunk labels:
● More→Labeling→LinesTrunks
Assign calling group labels:
● More→Labeling→Grp Calling
●
Maximums
System Directory
Extension Directory
Personal Directory
Description
130 listings
3 digits for each Speed Dial field
11 characters for each name field
40 digits for each number field
1 listing for every extension in the system
7 characters for each name field
4 digits for each extension field
50 listings for each Personal Directory
48 MLX-20L users
11 characters for each name field
28 digits for each number field
71
The Directory feature is a built-in, interactive telephone book that stores listings of
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Directories
Page 219
names and telephone or extension numbers. People with MLX display telephones
can dial numbers by selecting listings from the display.
Directory listings are divided into three types:
■
System Directory. Names and numbers of outside contacts (such as
clients and suppliers). These listings are created in system programming
and are assigned System Speed Dial codes to allow users with telephones
other than MLX display telephones to dial these listings in the directory.
See ‘‘Speed Dial’’ on page 550 for details.
■
Extension Directory (MLX display telephones only). System extensions
and the names of the users assigned to them. This directory can be
accessed only with a name. Names are added to the directory by using the
Labeling feature of system programming.
■
Personal Directory (MLX-20L telephones only). Individual users’ listings
of names and numbers, that is, outside telephone numbers and
extensions. This directory is accessible only at the extension where it was
created or through system programming.
System Directory
71
System Directory listings are established and changed only through system
programming using the Labeling feature. Each listing consists of a 3-digit Speed
Dial number, an 11-character name field, and a 40-digit number field. Up to 130
listings are stored. Any listing can be specifically designated to suppress the
display of a confidential number. When dialing a number designated or marked in
this way, users see only the System Speed Dial code associated with the listing. A
marked System Speed Dial code can be identified in the System Directory Report
by an asterisk preceding the telephone number.
When a marked System Speed Dial code is used to dial a number, any calling
restrictions associated with that number (such as outward or toll restrictions) are
overridden. Marked System Speed Dial does not override Automatic Route
Selection restrictions.
Special characters may be needed during programming of System Speed Dial
codes. Each of these characters counts as one of the 40 digits allowed in the
telephone number. For information about special characters and their meanings,
see Appendix H, “Programming Special Characters.”
Access the System Directory by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker
button, pressing the Feature button, and dialing a 3-digit System Speed Dial
code. If the System Speed Dial code is associated with a telephone number that
begins with a dial-out code (usually 9), you must use an SA or ICOM button. If the
associated telephone number does not begin with a dial-out code, you must use
an outside line button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Directories
Page 220
Extension Directory
71
Extension Directory listings are established and changed only through system
programming, using the Labeling feature. Each listing consists of a 7-character
name field and a number field of up to four digits. There can be one listing for
every extension on the system. All of the extensions in the system can be stored.
While the extension is being dialed, the display of the extension number cannot
be suppressed.
Personal Directory
71
Personal Directory listings can be established and changed through system
programming (using the Labeling feature) or by an MLX-20L user. Each listing
consists of an 11-character name field and a 28-digit number field. Up to 50
listings can be included in each Personal Directory; up to 48 users of MLX-20L
telephones can have Personal Directories.
For purposes of privacy or security, any listing can be marked to suppress the
display of the telephone number during dialing. The tag, however, does not
prevent the telephone number from being displayed when an MLX-20L telephone
user selects Show Number to display the telephone number associated with an
individual listing.
Special characters may be needed during programming of Personal Directory
entries. Each of these characters counts as one of the 28 digits allowed. For
information about special characters and their meanings, see Appendix H,
“Programming Special Characters.”
A listing cannot be used if the first character of the listing is a punctuation
character such as a hyphen.
Any MLX-20L telephone user, except a Queued Call Console (QCC) operator,
can display up to 16 Personal Directory listings on the Home screen, on two
screens. Frequently used features, not Personal Directory listings, are displayed
on a QCC operator’s Home screen. A QCC operator can access the Personal
Directory by selecting Directory on the Home screen.
Extension numbers can be programmed in a Personal Directory. However, in Key
and Behind Switch modes, press an ICOM button before selecting a listing to dial
a number.
Considerations and Constraints
71
While a Personal Directory on an MLX-20L telephone is being programmed, the
user cannot receive calls (the caller hears a busy signal).
Personal Speed Dial is not related to the Personal Directory. See ‘‘Speed Dial’’ on
page 550 for additional information about Personal Speed Dial.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Directories
Page 221
In Release 2.1 and later systems, when an MLX telephone other than an
MLX-20L is plugged into a port that has a Personal Directory resource allocated,
and the Personal Directory does not contain any entries, the Personal Directory
resource is released and can be programmed to be used by another user. (Up to
48 Personal Directories can exist on a system.)
Telephone Differences
71
Direct-Line Consoles
71
An operator with a digital Direct-Line Console (DLC) can use all Directory
features.
Queued Call Consoles
71
To dial extensions or telephone numbers with the touch of a button, Directory
features must be used. QCC operators cannot use Auto Dial.
A QCC operator can access the Personal Directory by selecting Directory on
the Home screen. A QCC operator can place only 12 entries in the Personal
Directory, 6 on the first page and 6 more on the second page of entries.
Directory features can be used for transferring calls. If an operator releases the
call immediately after pressing the button for the listing, the caller hears the dial
tone plus the touch tones for the dialed digits. If the operator waits until after
dialing begins, the caller does not hear the dial tone and dialed digits.
Other Multiline Telephones
71
Analog Multiline, MLX-10, or MLX-5 Telephones
71
A user with an analog multiline telephone, MLX-10, or an MLX-5 telephone cannot
use the Extension Directory feature or the Personal Directory feature but can dial
the listings in the System Directory by dialing the System Speed Dial codes
assigned to them.
MLX-20L Telephones
71
While a Personal Directory on an MLX-20L telephone is being programmed, the
user cannot receive calls (the caller hears a busy signal) but can still hear the
telephone ringing. In Release 1.0 systems, ringing is normal. In Release 1.1 and
later systems, ringing occurs at 20-second intervals.
To use the System or Extension Directory feature on an MLX-20L telephone,
press the Menu button, select Directory from the display, and select either type
of directory from the display. Next, choose a range of letters from which to begin
the search. The display shows the first seven listings that begin with the first letter
in the range.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Directories
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 222
To scroll through the listings, select either Next Page to display the next seven
entries are shown or Prev Page to display the previous seven entries are shown.
To display the telephone number associated with an individual listing, select Show
Number from the display—Show Number is highlighted—and press the button next
to the listing. To exit the Show Number function, select Show Number again—the
highlight is removed from Show Number. To dial a number for a listing shown on
the display, press the button next to the listing.
To use the Personal Directory on an MLX-20L telephone, press the Home button;
a QCC operator selects Directory from the Home screen. If listings have been
programmed to appear on the Home screen, the first eight listings (six listings for
a QCC operator) are shown. To see the second eight listings (six listings for a
QCC operator), select Next Page. To select listings by using a range of letters,
select Next Page from the Home display twice. Use the same procedure to
search for listings as you do for System and Extension Directories. To dial a
number for a listing shown on the display, press the button next to the listing.
NOTES:
1. The number for a marked Personal Directory listing is displayed when
you choose Show Number. A marked Personal Directory listing is
specifically designated during programming to suppress the telephone
number from the display when the number is dialed from the display.
2. Marked System Speed Dial entries (entries that do not display) are not
affected by the Second Dial Tone setting. If a marked System Speed
Dial entry uses star codes and the central office does not immediately
supply dial tone when a star code is entered, then the appropriate
number of pauses (1.5 seconds each) must be programmed in the
entry following each star code.
MLX-28D, MLX-16DP, MLX-10DP, MLX-10D, and MLX 5-D Telephones1
7
To use the System or Extension Directory, press the Menu button, select
Directory from the display, then select either type of directory from the display.
To begin searching, spell the name of the directory entry by using the dialpad. For
example, to spell Wayne, dial 92963 and select Enter from the display; the name
with the closest match is displayed.
Scroll through the listings by selecting Prev (the previous listing is shown) or Next
(the next listing is shown). To start a new search, select New. To dial the number
for the name currently shown on the display, select Dial, and the number is
automatically dialed. If the display of the telephone number has not been
suppressed, > appears on the far right of the display. To see the number dialed,
press the More button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Directories
Page 223
Single-Line Telephones
71
Single-line telephone users cannot use the Extension Directory feature or the
Personal Directory feature but can dial the listings in the System Directory by
dialing the System Speed Dial codes assigned to the listings.
Feature Interactions
71
Account Code Entry
An MLX-20L telephone user can program an account code as a listing in
a Personal Directory. Enter the account code from the display by
activating Account Code Entry and selecting the directory entry
containing the actual account code.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot dial an outside
number by using a Personal Directory or System Directory listing
(excluding a marked System Directory listing), unless the number is on an
Allowed List assigned to the extension.
If a number is on a Disallowed List for an extension, it can be dialed only
by using a marked System Directory listing, not a regular Personal
Directory or System Directory listing.
Automatic Route
Selection
In Hybrid/PBX mode, System Directory and Personal Directory numbers
can include the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) dial-out code.
Calling Restrictions
Using a marked System Directory listing to dial a number overrides any
calling restrictions (toll or outward restrictions) assigned to the extension.
Conference
The Extension, Personal, and System Directory features set up
conference calls. Press the Conf button to enter the Flash special
character in a Directory listing telephone number.
CTI Link
Through system programming, you can change the label of an extension
programmed as a CTI link (Release 5.0 and later systems). If you change
the system language, the label remains in the language assigned during
the initial system programming.
Digital Data Calls
Digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems cannot
make use of Extension, Personal, or System Directories.
Display
MLX display telephone users can use the Extension and System
Directories. Search for stored listings on the display and automatically dial
the listing by pressing the corresponding button. MLX-20L telephone
users also can create a Personal Directory. When dialing a number using
a Directory feature, the digits dialed are shown on Line 1 of the display.
Drop
Press the Drop button to enter the Stop special character in a directory
listing telephone number.
Hold
Press the Hold button to enter the Pause special character in a directory
listing telephone number.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Directories
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 224
Labeling
Use Labeling to enter names of people, groups, and locations associated
with the extensions in the system and stored as listings in the Extension
Directory. You can also enter labels, such as the name of a person or a
business, associated with System Speed Dial numbers by using the
Labeling feature, and they are stored as listings in the System Directory.
Last Number Dial
Last Number Dial does not store a number dialed by using a Directory.
Messaging
When the Extension Directory is used to call a co-worker with a posted
message, the posted message is not displayed on the caller’s telephone.
Personal Lines
A System or Personal Directory can be used to dial numbers on a
personal line. An Extension Directory is used only for inside calls and
cannot be used to dial calls on a personal line.
Pools
When a pool dial-out code is included in the telephone number for a
Personal or System Directory listing, a Pause character may be needed
following the pool dial-out code, depending on the local telephone
company. Pause characters are entered by pressing the Hold button.
Recall/Timed Flash
Press the Conf button to enter the Flash special character in a Directory
listing telephone number.
Saved Number Dial
Saved Number Dial does not store numbers dialed by using a Directory.
Second Dial Tone
Timer
Marked System Speed Dial entries, which do not display, are not affected
by the Second Dial Tone setting. If the central office does not immediately
supply dial tone when a star code is entered and a marked System Speed
Dial entry uses star codes, then the appropriate number of pauses (each
1.5 seconds) must be programmed in the entry following each star code.
Speed Dial
System Speed Dial numbers are stored in the System Directory. MLX
display telephone users can dial one by selecting the name from the
display. If the number is on a marked System Directory listing, select the
listing; you can dial it regardless of any calling restrictions (toll and
outward) assigned to your extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 225
Display
71
At a Glance
71
Users Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
All
MLX display telephones, MERLIN II System Display Console,
BIS-22D, BIS-34D
See ‘‘Labeling’’ on page 360.
71
Description
The following display telephones can be connected to the system:
■
MLX display telephones:
— MLX-20L (7-line by 24-character display)
— MLX-28D (2-line by 24-character display)
— MLX-16DP (2-line by 24-character display)
— MLX-10D (2-line by 24-character display)
— MLX-5D (2-line by 24-character display)
■
Analog multiline display telephones:
— MERLIN II System Display Console (2-line by 40-character display)
— BIS-34D (1-line by 16-character display)
— BIS-22D (1-line by 16-character display)
The telephone display provides prompts, messages, and menu selections that
help users handle calls, use features, and program their extensions. In addition,
the display of the MLX-20L telephone supports system programming when the
telephone is used as the system programming console. (For information about
system programming displays, see ‘‘Programming’’ on page 480.)
Beginning with Release 3.0, when a number is displayed for an incoming call, it
appears with hyphens inserted between the digits (for example, 555-1234 for
7-digit numbers and 908-555-1234 for 10-digit numbers). Any other number of
digits appears without hyphens.
The level of support the display provides depends on the telephone:
■
The displays on analog multiline telephones provide call-handling
information but do not support menu-driven telephone programming,
selection of features, or operation in languages other than English.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 226
■
MLX display telephones provide menu-driven telephone programming and
allow people to select and use features from the display. In Release 1.1
and later systems, MLX telephones can display information in English,
French, or Spanish. (The system can be programmed to provide all
displays to MLX telephones in one of these languages; each MLX
telephone can be programmed to operate in English, French, or Spanish,
independently of the system language.)
Table 18 shows examples of call-handling displays.
Table 18.
Call-Handling Displays
Making Calls
When a user makes a call, the digits appear on
the display as they are dialed with the dialpad
or any of the quick-dialing features (Auto Dial,
Speed Dial, Directories, Last Number Dial, or
Saved Number Dial).
If the caller dials an extension and labels are
programmed, the name is displayed after all
the digits are dialed. (MLX only)1
If a caller dials 0 to reach a system operator or
dials the Listed Directory Number (the QCC
queue extension), the display identifies the
number as the operator. When the call is sent
immediately to a system operator without
waiting in the QCC queue, the extension or
label for the operator receiving the call is
shown instead.
When a caller goes off hook on a personal line
or Pool button, the display shows the label (if
programmed) for the line or pool that is
selected (MLX only). On MLX telephones, this
information remains on the display. On analog
multiline telephones, the line label is erased
when the caller begins dialing. If the caller dials
more than 15 digits on an MLX telephone or
more than 16 digits on an analog multiline
telephone, the remaining digits are shown on
Line 2.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
1234
1234
12
YVONNE Ext 12
0
OPERATR 0
5551234
FX-NYC 5551234
Continued on next page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Table 18.
Page 227
Continued
Receiving Calls
For inside calls, the display shows the name of
the caller (if labels have been programmed)
and/or the extension number. On analog
multiline telephones, the display also shows
whether the call is a voice call (V) or a ringing
call (R).
For outside calls, the display shows the line
that the call came in on.
If PRI-based extension identification and/or
automatic number identification are available,
the number of the caller is shown on Line 1 of
an MLX display. This information is also
provided for transferred, forwarded, and calling
group calls.
For Caller ID, the number of the caller is shown
on Line 1 on MLX display telephones and the
information is provided for transferred,
forwarded, and calling group calls.
For certain types of incoming calls, the display
also shows the type:
Transfer
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
MICHEL - Ext R
MICHEL - x1234
FX-NYC
FX-NYX
No display
FX-NYX 555-1234
No display
OUTSIDE 555-1234
Transfer Receive Transfr
Return from Transfer
Trf Ret -
Return
Coverage
Cvr
Cover
Forwarded
Forward
Forward
Returning Callback
Callbck
Callbck
No display
GrpCl
Group Calling
1.
For calls received on tie trunks, the display shows information only if the receiver
preselects the button.
MLX Display Telephones
81
Four types of screens appear on both the 7-line and the 2-line displays:
■
Home screen
■
Menu screens
■
Feature screen
■
Inspect screens
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 228
NOTE:
MLX display telephones allow you to change the contrast of the screens.
The method varies among the different MLX display telephones. The
MLX-20L has a sliding control immediately behind the screen. The
MLX 5-D, MLX-10D, MLX-10DP, MLX-16DP, and MLX-28D allow you to
adjust the contrast through the Ctrst item in the Menu screen. Select
Ctrst and then raise or lower the contrast by selecting Up or Down.
The display ordinarily shows the Home screen; at other times, users access the
Home, Menu, Feature, and Inspect screens by pressing the corresponding fixed
Home, Menu, Feature, or Inspct button.
The fixed More button is used to read screens that include too much information
to fit on the display all at once. The availability of more information is indicated by
the appearance of a > character on the right side of the screen. On the 7-line by
24-character display, in Release 2.0 and later systems, this More symbol appears
on Line 1, next to the More button. In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, the More
symbol appears on Line 7.
81
Home Screen
The Home screen, illustrated in Figures 16 and 17, is the display’s home base. It
remains on the display unless the user selects another screen. If the user has
programmed a posted message and no call is active on the extension, Line 1
shows the posted message. When the user makes or receives a call, Line 1 is
overwritten with call-handling information, such as a number being dialed, the
name or number of a caller, and the type of incoming call. In Release 2.0 and later
systems, the date is shown as pictured in Figures 16 and 17; in Release 1.0 and
1.1 systems, the date is shown as, for example, 3/15.
IN CONFERENCE
MAR 15
Home
Figure 16.
Menu
Inspct
12:30
More
2-Line Display Home Screen
When the extension is idle, Line 2 of the Home screen shows the date and time. If
the timer is running or there is a programmed Alarm button, this information is also
shown on Line 2.
On an MLX-20L telephone, two pages of listings from the user’s Personal
Directory (a total of 16 entries) can be programmed to appear on the Home
screen. The Queued Call Console (QCC) does not have this capability.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 229
Activating features causes information on the Home screen to be replaced with
prompts and feedback. In general, prompts appear on Line 1 and feedback
appears on Line 2.
IN CONFERENCE
Inspect Mode
Home
Menu
More
AIRLINE
STEVENSON
HOTEL
ANDERSON
TRAVEL AGNT
EPSTEIN
BANK
CAHALL
Show Number
Figure 17.
Inspct
MAR 15 12:30
Next Page
7-Line Display Home Screen
81
Menu Screen
The Menu screen, illustrated in Figures 18 and 19, lists features and functions that
are used through the display, such as Alarm Clock and Directories. For everyone
with displays, except QCC operators, the Menu screen also provides access to
the extension programming function used to program the extension.
Press the Menu button next to or below the display to access the Menu screen.
To access additional menu choices on the 2-line display, press the More button.
After you make a selection from the menu by pressing the button next to the
selection on a 7-line screen or below the selection on a 2-line screen. A submenu,
feature screen, or data-entry screen appears. When programming is complete,
the Menu screen reappears. To exit from the Menu screen, press the Home
button.
MENU MODE:Select Feature
Post Ctrst>
Msgs
Dir
Home
Figure 18.
Menu
2-Line Display Menu Screen
Inspct
More
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 230
Home
MENU MODE: Select Feature
Menu
Press HOME to Exit
More
Inspct
Directory
Messages
Posted Msg
Alarm Clock
Timer
Figure 19.
Ext Program
7-Line Display Menu Screen
NOTE:
The Menu screen on a QCC does not include the Ext Program option.
Feature Screen
81
The Feature screen provides quick access to commonly used features. Press the
Feature button to display one of four Feature screens with feature names. The
feature names shown depend on the current activity and how the system and the
extension are programmed, as shown in Table 19.
To select a feature, press the button next to or below its name on the Feature
screen. On a 2-line display, it may be necessary to press More to access the
desired feature. Once selected, the feature is activated unless more information is
required. If more information is needed, you are asked to enter it. For example, if
you choose the Account Code Entry feature, the display prompts for an account
code. Once account code entry is completed correctly, the Home screen returns.
Table 19 lists the features that users see on the Feature screen, depending on
their current calling activity.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Table 19.
Page 231
Feature Screen Options
Telephone...
Is on hook or has a
dial tone on an
inside line
Has reached a busy
extension
Is ringing at an
extension or
connected to an
inside call
Is connected to an
outside line
*
Feature Options
Last Number Dial
Pickup Group*
Pickup
Loudspeaker Page*
Account Code
Follow Me
Authorization Code
Direct Voice Mail
Selective Callback
Barge-In*
Leave Message
Camp-On*
Leave Message
Barge-In*
Park*
Camp-On*
Direct Voice Mail
Last Number Dial*
Park*
Camp-On*
Account Code
Follow Me
Direct Voice Mail
2-by-24 Display
7-by-24 Display
Last#
LastNumDial
PkupG
Pickup Grp
Pkup
Pickup
LdsPg
Loudspkr Pg
Acct
AccountCode
FlwMe
Follow Me
Auth
Auth Code
DrcVM
CbckS
Direct VM
Cback Sel
Barge
Barge In
LvMsg
Leave Msg
Camp
LvMsg
Camp On
Leave Msg
Barge
Barge In
Park
Park
Camp
Camp On
DrcVM
Last#
Direct VM
LastNumDial
Park
Park
Camp
Camp On
Acct
AccountCode
FlwMe
Follow Me
DrcVM
Direct VM
See Notes.
NOTES:
1. Pckup Grp appears on the display only if the extension is part of a
Pickup Group.
2. Barge In appears only on operator consoles.
3. Loudspkr Pg appears only if a loudspeaker paging system has been
programmed.
4. LastNumDial and Park do not appear on a QCC.
5. Camp-On can be used only to complete a transfer to an inside
extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 232
91
Inspect Screens
The Inspect screen, illustrated in Figures 20 and 21, appears when the you press
the Inspct button and then press a line button. Two kinds of information can
appear:
■
If the button is associated with a call, calling information is displayed. If you
are already on a call and another call arrives, pressing Inspct and the line
button with the new call displays information about that call, without
interrupting the first call.
■
If the button is not associated with a call, the line or feature programmed on
the button is displayed, with the exception of Last Number Dial and Saved
Number Dial:
— In Release 2.0 and later systems, inspecting a programmed Last
Number Dial or Saved Number Dial button displays the number stored
on the button if the button has been used; otherwise it displays the
feature name.
— In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, the Inspect screen shows the name of
the feature on the button.
To exit from the Inspect screen, press the Home, Feature, or Menu button.
Privacy
INSPECT MODE
Home
Figure 20.
Inspct
More
2-Line Display Inspect Screen for Programmed Button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 21.
Menu
Home
Menu
Privacy
INSPECT MODE
More
Inspct
7-Line Display Inspect Screen for Programmed Button
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 233
Analog Multiline Display Telephones
91
The following types of information appear on the 1-line by 16-character or 2-line
by 40-character display of an analog multiline display telephone:
■
Call-Handling Information. Shows telephone numbers as they are dialed,
the name or number of a caller, and the type of incoming call.
■
Feature Programming Support. Allows a user to see what features have
been programmed on buttons.
■
Prompts and Feedback. Prompts for information such as an account
code, and provides feedback, such as confirmation of feature activation.
■
Posted Message and Leave Message. Allow a user to see messages
from other telephone users and operators.
■
Timekeeping Functions. Include an alarm clock and a built-in timer, as
well as the ability to set the date and time that appear on the display.
Analog multiline display telephones do not offer menu-driven telephone
programming and do not allow users to select and use features from the display.
The procedure for changing the contrast on the analog multiline display
telephones varies among display telephones. The BIS-34D and the MERLIN II
Display Console have dials to change the contrast of the screens. The BIS-22D
has no controls for contrast.
Considerations and Constraints
91
The date and time shown on MLX telephones are controlled by the processor
module in the control unit. When the date or time changes, the control unit sends
the message to MLX telephones one at a time, which can cause a slight
difference in the time and/or date displayed on each telephone.
Users with analog multiline telephones with displays must set the time and date at
their individual telephones.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 234
91
Feature Interactions
Feature
Account
Code Entry
Description
When you activate the feature,
the display prompts for an
account code.
As the code is dialed, it
appears on the screen next to
the prompt.
Alarm Clock An MLX telephone user
programs the Alarm Clock
feature from the Menu screen.
An analog multiline telephone
user sets the alarm by using the
timekeeping buttons next to the
display. Once the alarm is set
on either type of telephone, a
bell appears on the display.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
Acct:
Acct:
Acct: 123456
Acct: 123456
5-08 %
May 08 % 12:00
Auth?
Auth:
5551234
5551234
In Release 1.0 systems, the bell
appears next to the time, not
the date and, on MLX
telephones, the date appears
as mm/dd (05/08).
On an MLX telephone, the
ringer and the LEDs are turned
off when Alarm is selected from
the display. If you are on a call
and select Alarm, the call is
dropped.
Authorization When a display telephone user
activates Authorization Code,
Codes
the screen prompts for an entry.
Auto Dial
When you press a programmed
Auto Dial button, the digits
show on the display as if you
were dialing from the dialpad.
The number is dialed
automatically (special
characters for dialing strings
are described in Appendix H). If
the Auto Dial number includes a
Stop character, press the Auto
Dial button to complete dialing.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 235
Feature
Automatic
Route
Selection
Description
Only the ARS dial-out code
and the dialed number are
displayed. Digits added by ARS
before the dialed number and
digits ignored by ARS are not
displayed. The digit 9 is
replaced with OUTSIDE when
ARS selects a line.
Barge-In
Calendar
Callback
Calling
Restrictions
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
95551234
95551234
OUTSIDE 5551234
OUTSIDE 5551234
An MLX telephone user sees
a message when using
Barge-In. If Barge-In is denied,
no message appears.
No display
Barge-In
The extension receiving the call
also sees a message indicating
who barged in. The message
remains on the display until the
person hangs up.
No display
Barge In: JUANITA
Call is Queued
Queued MARIA 1234
Call is Queued
When an MLX telephone user
uses Selective Callback, the
display prompts the user to dial
the telephone number. After the
number is dialed, the display
provides the same feedback as
on an Automatic Callback call.
No display
Dial Telephone Number
When the queued call rings at
the user’s extension, the
display indicates that the call is
a returning Callback call.
Callbck 1234
Cback MARIA 1234
When a restricted MLX
telephone user tries to dial a
number that is restricted, the
user sees a message on the
display.
No display
Call Denied
See “Date and Time” in this
table.
When a call is queued using
Automatic Callback on an MLX
or analog multiline telephone,
or using Selective Callback on
an analog multiline telephone, a
feedback message appears.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 236
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
Feature
Description
Call Waiting When a call is waiting, a
message appears.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting
Camp-On
After Camp-On is activated, the
MLX display shows a feedback
message.
No display
CampOn: JORGE Ext1234
On the QCC only, returning
camped-on calls are identified
by call type and by the name
and extension number of the
person to whom the call was
transferred. The second line of
the QCC display also shows the
caller information.
As with any other call, dialed
digits appear on Line 1 of the
display as a user sets up a
conference call.
No display
CampRet JORGE Ext1234
Caller: ELAINE Ext1244
1234
1234
On MLX telephones, Line 1
shows the number of
conference participants.
No display
Conference: 4
If an SA button is not selected
automatically, the MLX
telephone user is prompted to
select a line.
No display
Select a Line
After a line is selected by the
system or the user, the MLX
telephone display prompts the
user to dial the next participant.
No display
Dial, then Press Conf
The MLX display also prompts
the user to drop a conference
participant after the Drop
button is pressed and then
shows the updated conference
information on Line 1 and the
dropped line or extension on
Line 2.
No display
Conference: 3
MARIA Dropped
Conference
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Conference
Page 237
Description
During the conference, the
number of participants is shown
on Line 1 of the display. The
conference originator can view
Caller ID or ISDN calling party
information, if available,
associated with any participant
by pressing the Inspct button
and the button the caller is on.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
No display
Conference: 3
OUTSIDE 555-1234
Cov No A JUAN
Cov Bsy JUAN
Cov DND JUAN
Cover JUAN No Ans
Cover JUAN Busy
Cover JUAN DND
No display
DID#?
No display
DISA#?
MLX telephones also show the
caller’s information on Line 2 of
the Home screen.
No display
Caller: FX-NYC Trk825
CTI Link
In Release 5.0 and later
systems, an MLX extension
programmed as a CTI link has
its extension label changed.
CTILINK
CTILINK
Date and
Time
An analog multiline telephone
user can set the date and time
on the display. On MLX
telephones, the date and time
are controlled by the system
time.
3:00p We 4-01
Apr 01 3:00
continued
Coverage
When a call is sent to coverage,
the person who answers the
call sees a message on the
display, indicating for whom the
call is intended and the reason
why the call is being sent to
coverage:
All telephones:
No Answer
Busy
Do Not Disturb on
MLX telephones
(additional reasons):
Invalid/unknown DID
number
Invalid/unknown remote
access (DISA) number
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Date and
Time
continued
Page 238
Description
In Release 1.1 and later
systems, when the system or
MLX display telephone is set for
operation in French or Spanish,
the date displays as day month,
and the time uses a 24-hour
clock.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
01 Apr 15:00
01 Abr 15:00
In Release 1.0 systems, the
date is displayed as month day
on an MLX display telephone.
Directories
4/1 3:00
When a number is dialed from a
directory, the dialed digits are
shown on Line 1 of the display
unless the number is marked.
No display
5551212
Direct Station When an operator with one or
two DSSs connected to an MLX
Selector
telephone presses the Inspect
button and then the Page
button, message indicates the
page number and the first
extension number in the range.
No display
Page 1: 100
Do Not
Disturb
When a user with coverage
turns on Do Not Disturb, the
receiver who answers sees a
message showing that the call
is redirected because the
sender has Do Not Disturb on.
COV DND-AGNES
Cover RUBEN DNDS
An MLX display telephone with
Do Not Disturb on shows a Do
Not Disturb message on the
Home screen.
No display
DO NOT DISTURB
In Release 2.0 and later, an
inside caller to an extension
with Do Not Disturb on sees DO
NOT DISTURB. (Analog multiline,
MLX-10 and MLX-5 telephones
must have a Posted Message
button programmed for DO NOT
DISTURB to be displayed
automatically.)
DO NOT DISTURB
DO NOT DISTURB
Feature
Description
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Do Not
Disturb
continued
Page 239
When a user dials an extension
that has Do Not Disturb
activated and is covered by
another extension, the display
depends on the type of button
the call is placed on:
For SA Ring:
For SA Voice
Extension
Status
Hotel/Motel mode:
When a supervisor changes a
room’s ES status, the
supervisor is prompted to select
the room.
When the room has been
selected and the supervisor has
selected ES1, ES2, or ES3,
confirmation is displayed.
ES1 = Checked Out
ES2 = Available
ES3 = Occupied
When the guest or
housekeeper changes a
room’s ES status to ES1 or
ES2, a confirmation is
displayed.
Calling group/CMS mode:
When the supervisor position is
put into Supervisor mode, the
supervisor is prompted to press
Hold. After the supervisor
presses the Hold button, the
new status is confirmed.
When the supervisor position is
taken out of Supervisor mode,
the supervisor is prompted to
press Drop. After the
supervisor presses the Drop
button, the new status is
confirmed.
12
STEPHEN Ext 12
DO NOT DISTURB
STEPHEN Ext 12
DO NOT DISTURB
No display
Select Room
No display
Checked Out
Available
Occupied
No display
Checked Out
Available
No display
PressHoldEnterGrpCl/CMS
Entered Grp/Cl/CMS
Supvr
No display
Press
Drop-ExitGrpCl/CMS
Exited GrpCl/CMS Supvr
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Extension
Status
Page 240
Description
When a supervisor changes an
agent’s ES status, the
supervisor is prompted to select
the agent.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
No display
Select Agent for ACW
Select Agent to Log In
Select Agent to Log Out
When the agent has been
selected, a confirmation is
displayed.
No display
After Call Work
Available
Unavailable
If the ES status is changed at
the extension, a confirmation is
displayed.
No display
After Call Work
Available
When an extension logs into or
out of a calling group, a
confirmation is displayed.
No display
Available
Unavailable
Fax
Extension
On MLX display telephones,
message-waiting indications
received by a fax
message-waiting receiver are
identified as FAX. On analog
multiline telephones,
messages are indicated by
Call extension or caller’s
name.
Call 12
FAX
Follow Me
When Follow Me is turned on or
off, MLX telephone users see a
prompt, then a confirmation.
No display
Follow
Cancel
Signed
Signed
Forward
If the extension from which calls
are being forwarded is an MLX
display, a message indicates
that calls are being forwarded.
No display
Forward to: JEANNE
If an MLX user enters an invalid
destination, the display clears.
If an analog multiline user
enters an invalid destination, an
error message appears.
Error
No display
When an MLX user turns on
Forward, the display prompts
the user for the extension. After
entering the extension, the user
sees a confirmation displayed.
No display
Page 1:
Forward to:
Forward to:
continued
Call Andre
from:
from:
IN: INES
OUT: INES
Juan
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Forward
continued
Page 241
Description
For outside calls, Page 2 shows
the line the call came in on and,
if ISDN calling party information
or Caller ID is available, the
caller’s number.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
No display
No Caller ID:
Caller: OUTSIDE Trk801
With Caller ID:
OUTSIDE 555-1234
For inside calls, Page 2 shows
the caller’s name and
extension.When an MLX user
forwards calls to an outside
number (Remote Call
Forwarding), the display asks
the user to enter the telephone
number.
No display
Caller: PABLO
x1234Forward to:
On MLX and analog multiline
telephones, the digits appear as
the number is dialed.
12015551234
12015551234
An MLX user sees confirmation.
No display
Forward to:
12015551234
A user receiving a forwarded
call sees a message indicating
who forwarded the call.
Group
Calling
Page 2:
Forward from HITOSHI
A calling group agent with MLX
telephone sees feedback
messages on the display when
logging in to the Available state.
No display
Available
When a calling group
supervisor with an MLX
telephone logs an agent in or
out, a message appears on the
supervisor’s display and on the
group member’s display.
No display
Available
Unavailable
After pressing either the
Available or Unavailable button
or dialing the feature code, a
supervisor with an MLX
telephone is prompted to
indicate which group member to
log in or out.
No display
Select Agent to Log In
Select Agent to Log Out
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Group
Calling
continued
Page 242
Description
When a group member with an
MLX telephone receives an
outside call for the group, the
type of call is shown on the
display with the label for the line
the call came in on. If caller
identification is available, the
caller’s number is shown on
Page 2 on MLX telephones. For
ISDN calls, Page 1 shows
Called Party Number (if you
have the network service)
instead of the line/trunk label.
Analog multiline telephone
users see only line information.
Any MLX telephone user can
inspect the number of calls in
queue by pressing the Inspct
button and then pressing a
button programmed with the
calling group’s extension. The
display shows the label
associated with the calling
group and the number of calls.
Hold
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
Page 1:
No calling group label:
GrpCl WATS
Calling group label:
SALES WATS
ISDN calling party ID calls:
OUTSIDE 212-555-1234
Page 2:
No Caller ID present:
Trk805
Caller ID present:
Trk805 908-555-1234
WATS
No display
Group Call SALES 12
When an MLX telephone user
or an MLX DLC operator places
a call on hold, a confirmation is
displayed.
No display
Call on Hold
When an MLX telephone user
or an MLX DLC operator has a
call on hold for a longer time
than the hold timer value, a
message appears on the
display.
No display
Call on Hold
No display
HoldRet AHMED x10
Caller: MATHILDE x1235
On a QCC only, when a held
call returns to the queue after
the second hold reminder, it is
identified by call type and by the
name and extension of the
operator who put the call on
hold. Line 2 of the QCC display
also shows the caller
information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Inspect
Last
Number
Dial
Messaging
Page 243
Description
An MLX telephone user can
inspect the contents of
programmed buttons by
pressing the Inspct button and
then pressing the programmed
button. In most cases, the
display shows the feature or
line assigned to the button. (In
Release 2.0 and later systems,
inspecting a Last Number Dial
or Saved Number Dial button
shows the number stored on
the button.)
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
No display
Account Code
Users can also inspect
incoming calls or their calls on
hold. The display shows
standard call information (see
“Receiving Calls,” in this table).
No display
FX-NYC (outside)
DANNY x1234 (inside)
If a user inspects a line that
someone else is using, the
display shows that the line is in
use.
No display
In Use
When a user presses a
programmed Last Number Dial
button, the user sees digits on
the display as if dialing them
from the dialpad.
5551234
5551234
In Release 2.0 and later
systems, inspecting a Last
Number Dial button shows the
stored number.
No display
5551234
When a user sends a message to
another telephone, a feedback
message appears.
Msg Sent CARLOS
Msg. Sent to: CARLOS
Cannot Send
Cannot Send Message
Message Box Full Message Box Full
When a user tries to retrieve
messages and the message box
is empty, the display indicates
that there are no messages.
No Messages
No Messages
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Messaging
continued
Page 244
Description
When a user has a message,
the display shows the name or
extension of the caller and, on
MLX telephones, the time and
date the message was left.
Messages can be sent from
inside extensions, by an
operator, by a fax machine, or,
if the extension has voice mail,
by outside callers.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
On MLX telephones, an unread
message is marked with an
asterisk (*). On analog multiline
telephones, an unread
message is also marked with an
asterisk, but no message
information is shown.
Messages can be of the
following types:
Unread message
*
Note:
Press the More button to
see Page 2.
Page 1:
*JOSE
10:43P>
Page 2:
06/15 Ext2846
>
Co-worker
Call ROSA
Page 1:
ROSA
11:03P>
Page 2:
06/15 Ext1625
>
Voice mail message
V
Page 1:
VMS
11:03P>
Page 2:
06/15 Ext1234
>
System operator
A
Page 1:
ATT OPERATOR
11:03P>
Page 2:
06/15 Ext1223
>
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 245
Fax
F
Page 1:
FAX
11:03P>
Page 2:
06/15 Ext1236
>
Feature
Messaging
continued
Night
Service
Description
The type of message does not
allow a calling group
message-waiting receiver to
distinguish between a
message left for the calling
group and a fax or personal
message.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
A user with a display telephone
who calls an extension with a
posted message sees the
message on the display.
IN A MEETING
IN A MEETING
A display telephone user
posting a message sees the
message displayed on the
Home screen.
AT HOME
AT HOME
When an operator using an
MLX telephone sends or
removes a message with the
Send/Remove message
feature, the operator is
prompted for the number.
No display
Dial Telephone Number:
After the number is dialed, a
confirmation is displayed.
Msg Sent to: MANUEL
Msg Sent MANUEL
Msg Rmvd DOROTHY Msg Rmvd from: DOROTHY
When an operator with an MLX
telephone uses a programmed
Night Service button to turn on
Night Service, a confirmation is
displayed.
No display
Night Service ON
If the operator must enter a
password to turn Night Service
on and off, the display prompts
the operator for the password.
No message is displayed when
the operator turns on Night
Service by using a feature code
or when Night Service is off.
No display
Enter Password:
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 246
Paging
An MLX telephone user who
uses Group Paging sees a
message showing the number
of the paging group.
Feature
Park
Description
When a call is parked, a
confirmation is displayed.
No display
Paging 793
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
Parked ANITA
Parked: ANITA
On a QCC, returning parked
calls are identified by call type
and the name or extension
number of the operator who
parked the call.
No display
ParkRet JUAN Ext1220
Line 2 of the QCC display also
shows the caller information.
No display
Caller: ANITA Ext1235
When an MLX telephone user
activates Pickup, a prompt
appears on the display. (The
prompt is not displayed if a
button programmed for a
specific line or extension is
used.)
No display
Pickup Line/Ext:
After the user enters the line or
extension number to pick up the
call, a confirmation message is
displayed.
No display
No display
Pickup: OUTSIDE
Pickup: JOE
If the call cannot be picked up,
a feedback message is
displayed.
Cannot Pickup
Cannot Pickup Call
Pools
When a display telephone user
selects a Pool button and lifts
the handset, the display shows
the label (if programmed) for
the lines in the selected pool.
OUTWATS
OUTWATS
Privacy
When an MLX display
telephone user turns on
Privacy, the display briefly
shows the message Privacy
On before returning to the Home
screen or call-handling display.
When the user turns off Privacy,
the display briefly shows the
message Privacy Off.
No display
Privacy On
Privacy Off
Pickup
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Page 247
Feature
Description
Programming When an analog multiline
telephone user enters
extension programming, a
confirmation appears on the
display. An MLX telephone user
sees the first extension
programming screen.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
Program Mode
MLX-20L:
Extension Program 10
Press HOME to Exit
Start
Other MLX:
Extension Program 10
(HOME to Exit)
Start
If the user presses a button that
is already programmed, the
name of the feature appears.
Camp On
Camp On
If the button is not programmed,
the display shows that the
button is blank.
Blank
Blank
Digits dialed while programming
appear on an analog multiline
telephone display.
5551234
No display
Status feedback messages are
shown on analog multiline
telephones when features that
affect telephone operation are
programmed. Status messages
are not shown on MLX
telephones. (For more about
extension programming, see
Appendix D.)
RecvVoiceAnn
On/Off
No display
Call Waiting
On/Off
AutoCallback
On/Off
Shared SA Ring
On/Off
AbbreviateRing
On/Off
Cover Inside
On/Off
Recall/Timed When an MLX telephone user
presses a programmed Recall
Flash
button while on an outside line,
the line information is
redisplayed just as if the user
had gone off hook on the line.
No display
FX-NYC
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Reminder
Service
Remote
Access
Page 248
Description
When Reminder Set is
activated, the extension number
and either the set time or an
indication that no time has been
set is displayed.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
7103: 9:15a
7103: 9:15a
7103: No Rmdr Set 7103: No Reminder Set
If the user enters a new time,
the display changes with the
first digit.
Time: 12:30p
Time: 12:30p
When the time is set, a
confirmation including the
extension and the time is
displayed.
7103: 12:30p
7103: 12:30p
When a reminder call alerts an
extension, the display indicates
a reminder call.
Rmdr Call
Reminder Call
When an extension cancels a
reminder, a confirmation is
displayed.
Rmdr Off at 7103 Reminder Off: JAQUES
When an operator sets or
cancels a reminder for an
extension, the MLX operator is
prompted for the extension.
Rmdr Set
A call received through remote
access shows standard call
information for outside calls,
including the caller’s number
(MLX only) if network caller
identification or Caller ID is
available.
WATS Trk 825
Rmdr Off
If a remote access call is sent to No display
coverage because an invalid
number is dialed, an MLX
telephone user who receives the
call sees a message. If Caller ID
or ISDN caller identification is
available, pressing the More
button shows the calling party
number and facility label.
Press DSS Key to Select
Reminder Set
Press DSS Key to Select
Reminder Off
WATS Trk 825
WATS 555-1234
Page 1:
Cover DISA#?
Caller Outside
Trk801
Page 2:
OUTSIDE 908-555-8989
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Saved
Number
Dial
Page 249
Description
When an MLX telephone user
presses a programmed Saved
Number Dial button, a
confirmation is displayed.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
No display
Number Saved
When a user dials a number by
pressing a programmed Saved
Number Dial button, the digits
appear on the display as if from
the dialpad.
5551234
5551234
In Release 2.0 and later
systems, inspecting a Saved
Number Dial button shows the
number stored on the button.
No display
5551234
System
Access/
Intercom
Buttons
If a user with a display phone
calls an extension and the
call is answered at a Shared SA
button, the caller’s display
shows the principal extension,
not the answering extension.
1234
Jose
1234
Jose
Timer
Display telephones have a
built-in timer that allows timing
of calls or other events. The
timer appears on Line 2 of the
display and counts to 59
minutes and 59 seconds, then
resets to zero and continues
counting.
39:15
39:15
Transfer
When an MLX telephone user
presses the Transfer button,
the display prompts the user to
dial the extension number.
No display
Transfer To:
When an MLX telephone user
initiates a transfer on a
voice-announce button (SA
Voice or ICOM Voice), the user
is asked to enter the extension.
No display
Announce To:
The display shows the digits
as they are dialed. When all
digits are dialed, the display
shows the name of the person if
labels are programmed.
1234
1234
JOSE x1234
No display
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Display
Feature
Transfer
continued
Page 250
Description
On MLX telephones, when the
transfer is completed, a
confirmation is displayed.
Sample Displays
Analog Multiline MLX
No display
Call Transferred
Calls returning from transfer are
identified by call type and by the
name and extension to which
the call was transferred. Line 2
of the MLX telephone display
also shows the caller
information.
TrfRet-CHARLES
Return CHARLES x1234
Caller: ANNA x1235
When an MLX telephone user
does not complete a transfer
(for example, Do Not Disturb is
on at the destination), the call
returns to the user’s telephone
and call information is displayed
but not the reason for the
incomplete transfer.
No display
Incomplete Transfer
Caller: SUSAN x1235
When an MLX telephone user
receives a transferred call, the
display shows the type of call
and the caller information on
Line 1. When an inside call is
being transferred, the extension
or name is shown.
Transfer Receive Transfer an inside
extension:
When an outside call is being
transferred and ISDN caller
identification or Caller ID
information is not available, the
line the call came in on is
shown. If ISDN caller
identification or Caller ID
information is available, the
caller’s number is shown
(line/trunk information is not).
The transfer originator is shown
on Line 2 on a QCC. On all
other telephones, press the
More button to show Page 2.
Page 1:
Transfr ANGELA
Page 2 (Line 2 on QCC):
Transfr by MIGUEL
Transfer an outside call
with Calling Party Number:
Page 1:
Transfr 555-1212
Page 2 (Line 2 on QCC):
Transfr by MARIA
Transfer an outside call
without Calling Party
Number:
Page 1:
Transfr OUTSIDE Trk 801
Page 2 (Line 2 on QCC):
Transfr by MARIA
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Do Not Disturb
Page 251
Do Not Disturb
91
At a Glance
91
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
MLX Display Label
Telephone users, DLC operators
Extension Information
All
All except QCC and single-line telephones
*47
DO NOT DISTURB [DND]
91
Description
Do Not Disturb prevents calls from ringing and prevents paging over a
speakerphone. When you turn on the feature and receive an outside call, the
caller hears ringback, but your telephone does not ring. The green LED next to the
line button with the ringing call flashes to indicate an incoming call, and, if you
choose, you can answer the call. If the feature is turned on and you receive an
inside call, the inside caller hears a busy signal. The telephone does not ring, and
the green LED next to an SA or ICOM button does not flash.
The types of priority listed below calls override Do Not Disturb and cause the
telephone to ring; the green LED also flashes.
■
A call (including a transferred call) from any coverage receiver to a sender
with Do Not Disturb on
■
A Barge-In call
■
A returning transferred or camped-on call, or a parked call returning to a
Direct-Line Console (DLC) operator
■
A callback call, notifying you that a call to a busy extension or to a busy
pool (Hybrid/PBX mode only) can be completed
■
A Reminder call
■
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a user turns on the feature, the
system automatically posts the message DO NOT DISTURB. Users with
analog multiline telephones, MLX-10, or MLX-5 nondisplay telephones
must program a Posted Message button in order to display the message
for callers. This message appears on the Home screen of an MLX display
telephone with Do Not Disturb turned on, and on the screen of any inside
caller with a display telephone who calls. When you turn off Do Not Disturb,
the system automatically removes the message. You can also post and
remove the message by using a programmed Posted Messages button.
However, using this button only posts or removes the message; it does not
turn on or turn off the Do Not Disturb feature.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Do Not Disturb
Page 252
Considerations and Constraints
91
Do Not Disturb must be programmed onto an available button.
If you turn on Do Not Disturb while receiving a call (ringing or voice-announced),
the caller continues to hear ringback (or a voice-announced caller may stay on the
line), but you do not hear ringing. The Do Not Disturb feature remains on.
When the principal’s Do Not Disturb is turned on, his or her calls ring at other
telephones with shared personal lines or at coverage receivers but not at other
telephones with Shared SA buttons.
Telephone Differences
91
Direct-Line Consoles
91
The green LED next to an Auto Dial or DSS button on a DLC turns on when a user
turns on Do Not Disturb, indicating that the user is not available.
Queued Call Consoles
91
Do Not Disturb cannot be used on a QCC; Position Busy must be used instead.
The green LED next to a DSS button turns on when a user turns on Do Not
Disturb, indicating to the QCC operator that the user is not available.
Other Multiline Telephones
91
Activate Do Not Disturb on a multiline telephone by pressing the programmed Do
Not Disturb button. The green LED next to the button goes on to indicate that the
feature is active. To turn off the feature, press the programmed Do Not Disturb
button again. The green LED next to the button turns off. Feature codes cannot be
used to turn Do Not Disturb on and off.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, turning on Do Not Disturb on an analog
multiline, MLX-10, or MLX-5 nondisplay telephone does not automatically post the
Do Not Disturb message; program a Posted Messages button for the message to
be posted automatically. In this case, when Do Not Disturb is turned on, the green
LED next to the Posted Messages button lights automatically and the system
posts DO NOT DISTURB. When Do Not Disturb is turned off, the system
automatically turns off the green LED next to the Posted Messages button.
Single-Line Telephones
91
Do Not Disturb is not available on single-line telephones.
Feature Interactions
Auto Dial
91
When you turn on Do Not Disturb, the green LEDs next to all Auto Dial
buttons programmed with your extension go on.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Do Not Disturb
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 253
Barge-In
Barge-In overrides Do Not Disturb.
Callback
Calls to a user with Do Not Disturb on are not eligible for callback
queuing. If the callback originator is using Do Not Disturb, the system
overrides the feature; the telephone rings when the busy extension or
line/trunk is available.
Caller ID
Caller ID information is not displayed if the user turns on Do Not Disturb. If
the user turns on Do Not Disturb while receiving Caller ID information,
that information remains on the display.
Camp-On
A Camp-On call does not ring when the destination extension has Do Not
Disturb turned on.
Coverage
When a sender turns on Do Not Disturb, calls go to Individual and/or
Group Coverage receivers. Individual and/or Group Coverage calls are
not sent to a receiver with Do Not Disturb turned on. If a sender and all
receivers have Do Not Disturb turned on, the call is not sent to coverage
and the caller hears a busy tone.
When a sender turns on Do Not Disturb, any receivers for that sender can
call the sender.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, calls received on personal lines with Do
Not Disturb on go immediately to coverage instead of waiting for the
Coverage Delay Interval.
Digital Data Calls
Digital communications devices can activate Do Not Disturb by dialing the
virtual button number (for example #01) of the Do Not Disturb button. Do
Not Disturb can be activated by video systems that have the ability to dial
strings and feature codes beginning with #.
A Do Not Disturb button should be programmed at an MLX passive-bus
telephone, and the feature should be activated during 2B video calls.
Otherwise, voice calls ring and flash at the MLX telephone during 2B data
calls, although they cannot be answered.
The use of a Do Not Disturb button at a passive-bus MLX telephone
allows voice calls to be covered while 2B video calls are in progress.
Direct Station
Selector
In Release 2.0 and later systems, an operator can check the status of an
extension whose red LED is on by using the Inspct button to determine
whether the extension is busy or using Do Not Disturb. If the user at the
extension is using Do Not Disturb, the Do Not Disturb message is also
posted and appears on the operator’s display. (However, the message
may also mean that the user has posted the message without turning on
the Do Not Disturb feature.)
Display
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a multiline telephone user with
coverage turns on Do Not Disturb and calls are sent to coverage
receivers, the receiver with a display sees a message when answering
the call; it shows that the call has been redirected because the sender
turned on Do Not Disturb.
If a display telephone user tries to transfer a call to a user with Do Not
Disturb active, the display shows DO NOT DISTURB.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Do Not Disturb
Forward and
Follow Me
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 254
Calls are not forwarded to a destination extension that has Do Not Disturb
turned on; the call rings only at the forwarding telephone as described in
Table 22 on page 269. Turning on Do Not Disturb at the forwarding
extension does not prevent the calls from being forwarded.
In Release 4.0 and later systems, turning on Do Not Disturb at a
forwarding extension causes calls to be forwarded immediately. The
Forwarding Delay has no effect.
Group Calling
If a calling group member uses Do Not Disturb, calls are not sent to the
group member even if he or she is logged in and available.
Headset Options
If an MLX telephone user with Headset Auto Answer uses Do Not Disturb,
any calls that override Do Not Disturb (such as Barge-In calls and
callback calls) are automatically answered.
Messaging
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when Do Not Disturb is turned on, the
system automatically posts DO NOT DISTURB. This message appears on
the Home screen of an MLX display telephone user with Do Not Disturb
turned on. It also appears on the screen of any inside caller with a display
telephone who calls a user with the feature turned on. The system
automatically removes the message when the user turns off the feature.
Users with analog multiline, MLX-10, or MLX-5 nondisplay telephones
must program a Posted Messages button for the system to automatically
post or remove the message when the feature is turned on or off. A user
can post or remove a Do Not Disturb message by pressing a programmed
Posted Messages button.
Posting the DO NOT DISTURB message does not turn the feature on;
removing the posted message does not turn the feature off.
Multi-Function
Module
Using Do Not Disturb is not recommended because the device connected
to the MFM does not have an LED to indicate when the feature is active.
Labeling
Labeling is used to enter the names of the persons or businesses
associated with the System Speed Dial numbers stored as listings in the
System Directory. It is also used to enter the names of people, groups,
and locations associated with the extensions in the system stored as
listings in the Extension Directory. Labeling is used to enter the telephone
numbers and label information associated with Personal Directories on
MLX-20L telephones. This information can also be programmed by the
user at the extension.
Paging
Group pages cannot be made to a telephone with Do Not Disturb on.
Reminder Service
Reminder calls ring at telephones with Do Not Disturb turned on.
Signal/Notify
Signaling cannot be used when the destination telephone user turns on
Do Not Disturb.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Do Not Disturb prevents ringing of incoming calls at SA or ICOM buttons
(including Shared SA buttons) on the telephone where the feature is
turned on. This also prevents calls received on the principal’s SA buttons
from ringing at other telephones with Shared SA buttons for that
extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Do Not Disturb
Page 255
Transfer
Calls transferred to telephones that have Do Not Disturb turned on are
returned after the transfer return interval expires, unless the telephone
has coverage and a receiver is available. In that case, the transferred call
is sent to the receiver.
Voice Announce to
Busy
A user with Do Not Disturb active does not receive voice-announced
calls.
91
Drop
See ‘‘Conference’’ on page 129.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Extension Status
Page 256
Extension Status
91
At a Glance
91
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
DLCs/Supervisors
Status 0/Unavailable
Status 1/ After-call work
state
Status 2/Available
Telephones (rooms or
agents)
Status 1/ After-call work
state
Status 2/ Log in or out
Feature Codes
Activate Extension
Status/Supervisory
Operation
Deactivate Extension
Status
DLC
Status 0/Unavailable
Status 1/ After-call work
state
Status 2/ Available
Telephones (rooms or
agents)
Status 0/ Unavailable
Status 1/ After-call work
state
Status 2/Available
MLX Display Labels
Status 0/Unavailable
Status 1/After-call work
state
Status 2/Available
DLC operators, hotel or calling group supervisors/rooms or
members, Call Management System (CMS)
supervisors/members
Direct Group Calling Information, SMDR, System Information
(SysSet-up), Extension Information
All
DLCs and rooms or calling group member (agent) telephones
*760
*761 (hotel and CMS only)
*762
*45 (hotel and CMS only)
*44
32 + Hold (calling group/CMS only)
32 + Drop (calling group/CMS only)
760 + DSS
761 + DSS (hotel and CMS only)
762 + DSS
*44 (calling group/CMS only)
45 (hotel and CMS only)
44
ES Status,ES Off [ES,ESOff]
ES Status,ES1 [ES,ES1]
ES Status,ES2 [ES,ES2]
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Extension Status
Page 257
At a Glance - Continued
System Programming
Designate either Hotel or Calling Group/CMS mode:
●
Options→Ext Status
In Hotel mode, activate Extension Status on DLC:
●
Extensions→More→Ext Status
Printer for reports
Hardware
NOTE:
For more information about calling groups, see ‘‘Group Calling’’ on page
281.
91
Description
Extension Status allows an operator or a calling group or Call Management
System (CMS) supervisor with a Direct-Line Console (DLC) to monitor extensions’
status. It provides alternatives to the standard call-handling LED indicators of
available, busy, and Do Not Disturb. The red LEDs next to DSS buttons or the
green LEDs next to Auto Dial buttons programmed with extension numbers are
on, off, or flashing, depending on the extension’s status. The two modes for
Extension Status that can be selected during system programming are as follows:
■
Hotel. Employees at the front desk at a hotel or motel can use Extension
Status to monitor room availability and restrict the telephones when the
rooms are not occupied. Table 20 shows Extension Status 0, 1, and 2 for
Hotel mode and the associated LED status for each.
Hotel mode allows different meanings to be assigned to extension
statuses. The system restricts or unrestricts telephones based on the
meaning assigned.
■
Calling Group/CMS. A calling group or CMS supervisor can use Extension
Status to monitor the availability of agents who can take calls directed to
the calling group. Table 21 shows Extension Status 0, 1, and 2 for the
Calling Group/CMS mode and the associated LED status for each.
In either Hotel or Calling Group/CMS mode, an operator or a calling group or CMS
supervisor with a DLC can change the status of an extension either by using a
programmed button or by pressing the Feature button and dialing a code. In
addition, users in either mode with any type of telephone can change to Status 1
and Status 2. In calling groups, agents do not change to Status 1. In Calling
Group/CMS mode, users can change sign out of the group by changing to
Status 0. In Hotel mode, an extension can be changed to Status 0 only from a
DLC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Extension Status
Table 20.
Page 258
Extension Status for Hotel Mode
Extension Status
0
LED Status
Off
Meaning
Room is occupied and telephone is in regular
call-handling state.
1
Flashing
Room is unoccupied and ready for cleaning; outside
calls cannot be made from the telephone.
On
Room is vacant and outside calls cannot be made from
the telephone.
2
■
Table 21.
Extension Status for Calling Group/CMS Mode
Extension Status
0
LED Status
Off
Meaning
Telephone is logged out from the group; member is
unavailable to take calls.
1
Flashing
Used for CMS only. Telephone is in the after-call work
state; group member is unavailable to take calls.
2
On
Telephone is signed into the group; calls can be sent to
group member.
■
Considerations and Constraints
12
The system can be set up for either Hotel or Calling Group/CMS mode but not for
both.
In Hotel mode, when DSS buttons are used to monitor status, operators can use
the Message Status button to see whether an operator turned on message LEDs
at the telephones. In Calling Group mode, message status shows busy/not busy
status of the agents.
If a hotel has more than three floors and you wish to have the first digit of the
extensions correspond to the floor number—for example, Floor 5 has extensions
501 through 520—then you should use a MERLIN II System Display Console with
built-in DSS buttons instead of DSS adjuncts. This is because the DSS buttons on
the MERLIN II System Display Console correspond to the extension jacks instead
of a range of extension numbers, as on the DSS adjunct. A DSS adjunct cannot
have buttons for more than three ranges of numbers. The status of the first 120
rooms is displayed. If the hotel has more than 120 rooms, Auto Dial buttons can
be assigned to up to 33 line buttons on the console to be used for Extension
Status and for transferring calls to the rooms.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Extension Status
Page 259
In Hotel mode, the MERLIN MAIL, MERLIN LEGEND MAIL, or AUDIX Voice
Power outcalling feature does not work.
In Hotel mode, when Auto Dial buttons are used to monitor the status of
telephones (instead of buttons on a DSS), the green LED next to the button
indicates extension status (0, 1, or, 2) and the red LED indicates message status.
In calling group mode, the green LED also indicates extension status, but the red
LED indicates busy/not busy status.
If the system is programmed for Extension Status in Hotel mode, telephones can
be changed to Status 0 (regular call handling) only from the operator console.
Extension Status cannot be changed from rotary telephones.
In Hotel mode, when the system restarts (for example, for maintenance) and the
calling group type is set for Auto Logout (see ‘‘Group Calling’’ on page 281 for
details), extensions that are assigned Status 1 are changed automatically to
Status 0 and restrictions are removed. If the calling group type is changed to Auto
Login, extensions assigned Status 1 are changed automatically to Status 2 and
restrictions remain.
Telephone Differences
12
Direct-Line Consoles
12
Extension Status/Supervisory Operation can be assigned to DLCs only. In Hotel
mode, only a DLC operator can change an extension to Status 0. In Calling
Group/CMS mode, a calling group or CMS supervisor uses a DLC to monitor and
change group member status.
Queued Call Consoles
12
Extension Status/Supervisory Operation cannot be used on a Queued Call
Console (QCC), and a QCC cannot be a calling group or CMS supervisor console
or a calling group member.
Multiline Telephones
12
Only a telephone assigned as a DLC can activate Extension Status/Supervisory
Operation to see the status of telephones. In Hotel mode, the feature is assigned
to the console in system programming and is always active on the console unless
the operator either presses the Message Status button to use Auto Dial or the
DSS buttons to see message-waiting status for each telephone.
To activate Extension Status/Supervisory Operation in Calling Group/CMS mode,
the calling group or CMS supervisor assigned as a DLC presses the Feature
button, dials 32, and presses the Hold button. To deactivate the feature and
return to normal call handling, the supervisor presses the Feature button, dials
32, and presses the Drop button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Extension Status
Page 260
To change the status of a telephone, a DLC operator or supervisor activates
Extension Status (if not already active) and then presses a programmed button for
Status 0, Status 1, or Status 2, and finally presses the Auto Dial or DSS button for
the telephone. A DLC operator or supervisor can also change the status of
telephones by pressing the Feature button, dialing the feature code (760 for
Status 0, 761 for Status 1, and 762 for Status 2), and pressing the Auto Dial or
DSS button for the extension.
NOTE:
MLX display telephone users see only the first three characters dialed (for
example, F76) when changing the status of telephones.
In either Hotel or Calling Group/CMS mode, regular multiline telephone users can
change to Status 1 or Status 2 by pressing a programmed button for each state or
by pressing the Feature button and dialing the feature code (45 for Status 1 or 44
for Status 2). In Calling Group/CMS mode only, a user can change to Status 0 by
pressing the Feature button and dialing *44.
Single-Line Telephones
12
A single-line telephone user can change to Status 1 (CMS or Hotel only) or
Status 2 by lifting the handset, which must be connected to an ICOM or SA line,
and dialing either #45 for Status 1 or #44 for Status 2. In Calling Group/CMS
mode only, a user can change to Status 0 by dialing #*44.
12
Feature Interactions
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
and Calling
Restrictions
To allow users in Hotel mode to dial emergency or other selected
numbers when the telephone is in Status 1 or 2, access must be assigned
to an Allowed List.
Callback
In Hotel mode, an extension in Extension Status 1 or 2 cannot use
Callback to request busy pools.
Direct Station
Selector
A calling group or CMS supervisor or a DLC with Extension Status
assigned can change the status of a group member or room by pressing a
programmed Available or Unavailable button and then pressing the DSS
button for the group member or room.
Display
See ‘‘Display’’ on page 225.
Do Not Disturb
The LED next to an Auto Dial or DSS button is on when the user activates
Do Not Disturb or is busy on a call. In Release 2.0 and later systems, an
MLX operator can inspect the DSS button to see if a Do Not Disturb
message is posted.
Group Calling
Extension Status allows calling group supervisors to change and monitor
calling group member status and to enable group members to sign in and
out of the calling group.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Extension Status
HotLine
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 261
Extension Status is not recommended for HotLine extensions because
HotLine extension cannot dial the # codes to change the Extension
Status.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Fax Extension
Page 262
Fax Extension
12
At a Glance
12
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory,
Extension Information, Label Information
All
Tip/ring for fax extension. All for message-waiting receiver.
Identify fax extension jacks:
●
AuxEquip→Fax→Extension
Assign fax message-waiting receivers:
●
AuxEquip→Fax→Msg Waiting
Specify length of time before system sends fax
message-waiting indication:
●
Maximums
Fax machines using the
Fax Extension feature
Message-Waiting
Receivers programmed for
each fax extension
Factory Setting
Fax Message Threshold
AuxEquip→Fax→Threshold
16
4
10 seconds (range 0–30)
12
Description
The Fax Extension feature provides special treatment for single-line ports (ports
on 012 or 016 modules) when used with a facsimile machine or fax modem. This
special treatment disables those features normally provided to single-line ports
but not suitable for fax machines, such as:
■
Distinctive ringing
■
Call Waiting
■
Transfer, Hold, and Conference
In addition to the above, the Fax Extension feature also provides the ability to
notify certain extensions when a fax is received by turning on the Message LED
(fax message-waiting extension).
The Fax Message Threshold setting is the length of time (0–30 seconds) before
the system assumes that a fax has arrived. When a fax extension answers a call,
the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System waits until the fax message
threshold is exceeded and then sends a message-waiting indication to the
designated message-waiting extensions(s). If the message-waiting telephone has
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Fax Extension
Page 263
a Message LED, the Message LED turns on. Single-line telephone users without
a Message LED hear a stutter dial tone when a message is waiting. Telephones
located off premises are unable to receive message-waiting indications.
Return Call is not operable for messages received from a fax machine and cannot
be used to make a call to the fax. Return Call is a feature available on MLX
display telephones (including QCCs) that enables a user to automatically call an
extension that left a message.
The Fax Extension feature overrides the distinctive ringing pattern for calls
transferred to a fax extension. When a fax extension receives a transferred call, it
provides one long ring (similar to an inside call) instead of three short rings.
NOTE:
Fax extensions only can send message-waiting indications. They cannot
receive message-waiting indications.
To use the Fax Extension feature, perform the following system programming
tasks for each fax machine:
1.
Specify the tip/ring extension connected to the fax machine or fax modem.
2.
Specify the extension(s) to receive the message-waiting indication.
3.
Specify the number of seconds the system waits before it registers that a
fax has arrived and sends the message-waiting indication (this is the fax
message threshold, which is a systemwide parameter). The range is 0–30
seconds, with a default of 10 seconds.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the default setting (10 seconds) be used for the fax
message threshold. If the fax message threshold is set to less than 10
seconds, the Message LED could be activated on a receiver’s telephone
every time the fax machine goes off hook to answer a call, even if a fax has
not arrived. If the fax message threshold is set to more than 10 seconds,
there is a greater likelihood that the Message LED will not be activated on a
receiver’s phone whenever short faxes (that is, fax transmissions of less
than 10 seconds in duration) arrive.
Considerations and Constraints
12
A fax extension can send a message-waiting indication, but it cannot be assigned
as a message-waiting receiver for another fax or for a calling group.
If a fax message-waiting indication is deleted by one of the four message-waiting
receivers, the message is deleted from all of the telephones programmed as
message-waiting receivers for the fax.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Fax Extension
Page 264
Do not use this feature for fax machines connected to analog multiline telephones
with a General Purpose Adapter (GPA). In a GPA configuration, features cannot
be assigned to the fax independently of the telephone.
A maximum of 16 fax machines (tip/ring ports) can be assigned the Fax
Extensions feature. Additional fax machines can be installed, but these additional
fax machines cannot use the Fax Extension feature.
12
Feature Interactions
Conference
If an extension is programmed as a fax extension, the telephone at that
extension is unable to use the Conference feature.
Display
On MLX display telephones, message-waiting indications received by a
fax message-waiting receiver are identified as FAX. On analog multiline
telephones, messages are indicated by Call extension or caller’s name.
The type of message indicated does not allow a calling group
message-waiting receiver to distinguish between a message left for the
calling group and a fax or personal message.
Group Calling
The calling group receives fax message-waiting indications directed to
the calling group. The message-waiting receiver cannot distinguish
between messages left for the calling group and fax or personal
messages.
Hold
If an extension is programmed as a fax extension, the telephone at that
extension is unable to use the Hold feature.
Messaging
Return Call is not operable for messages received from a fax machine
and cannot be used to make a call to the fax.
Multi-Function
Module
A single-line telephone with a Message LED connected to an MFM can
receive message-waiting indications but not stutter dial tone.
Ringing Options
The Fax Extension feature overrides the distinctive ringing pattern for
calls transferred to a fax extension. When a fax extension receives a
transferred call, the fax extension provides one long ring (similar to an
inside call) instead of three short rings.
Transfer
If an extension is programmed as a fax extension, the telephone at that
extension is unable to use the Transfer button.
Forced Account Code Entry
12
See ‘‘Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry’’ on page 25.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Page 265
Forward and Follow Me
12
At a Glance
12
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Sending
Receiving
Programming Code
Forward
Feature Codes
Forward On
To inside ext.
To outside no.
Follow Me On
Forward/Follow Me Off
At sending ext.
At receiving ext., for one
sending ext.
At receiving ext., for all
sending extensions
MLX Display Labels
Telephone users, operators
Extension Information, Operator Information
All
System Programming
Allow (or disallow) individual extensions to forward calls to
outside telephone numbers (Remote Call Forwarding):
● Extensions→More→Remote Frwd
Assign or remove principal user of a personal line (only the
principal user can use Remote Call Forwarding for calls on the
personal line):
● LinesTrunks→More→PrncipalUsr
Assign the number of rings that a call rings at an extension
before it is forwarded (Forwarding Delay):
● Extensions→More→Delay Frwd→extension no.→
Enter→no. of rings→Enter
Factory Setting
Forwarding Delay
All except QCC
All
*33
33 + ext. no.
33 + dial-out code + telephone no. + #
34 + sending ext no.
33 + sending ext no.
*34 + sending ext no.
*34*
Forward [Forwd]
Follow Me [FlwMe]
CanclFollow (QCC only)
0 rings (range 0–9 rings)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Page 266
12
Description
Forward and Follow Me provide two ways for a user to send calls to another
number. Calls can be forwarded either to another inside extension (for example,
when a user is temporarily working at a different desk) or to an outside number
(for example, if a user is working at home). When calls are forwarded to an
outside number, the feature is called Remote Call Forward.
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, an SA or ICOM line must be ringing at a
forwarding extension before an inside call can be sent to the programmed
destination, even when the programmed Forwarding Delay is 0 rings (factory
setting). In Release 4.1 and later systems, the Forward on Busy feature
enhancement forwards calls immediately when all available SA or ICOM buttons
on the Forwarding extension are busy. The caller no longer receives a busy signal
from the forwarding extension. This enhancement works with Forward, Follow Me,
and Remote Call Forwarding.
NOTE:
Calls forwarded to outside telephone numbers may vary in transmission
quality.
In Release 4.0 and later systems, both Forward and Follow Me are affected by the
Forwarding Delay option, which allows calls to an extension to ring for at least a
programmed number of rings (0–9) before the call is forwarded to the receiving
extension. If a call cannot be forwarded while certain conditions exist, the Delay
may be greater than the programmed Forwarding Delay setting. The Forwarding
Delay setting can be programmed only by the system manager through system
programming.
NOTE:
In Release 4.1 and later systems, SA or ICOM calls forwarded from an
extension where all available lines are busy do not have the Forwarding
Delay applied. They are forwarded immediately and may arrive at the
destination before other forwarded calls that are ringing for the Forwarding
Delay period.
Whether calls are sent using Forward or using Follow Me depends on where the
feature is turned on:
■
Forward and Remote Call Forward are turned on at a user’s own extension
or from an outside telephone by remote access. Forward can be turned off
at a user’s own extension, at an extension to which the user’s calls are
forwarded, or from an outside telephone by remote access. (System
programming is required to allow Remote Call Forwarding.)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
■
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 267
Follow Me is turned on at another inside extension to send a user’s calls to
that extension. It can be turned off at a user’s own extension or at the
extension to which calls are sent. Follow Me can be used only to send calls
to an extension, not to an outside telephone number.
If several extensions are sending their calls to a user, that user can turn off
Forward and Follow Me either for one extension at a time or for all extensions at
once.
All users except Queued Call Console (QCC) operators can use Forward or
Follow Me to forward calls to another extension. Calls cannot be forwarded to a
calling group.
The factory setting for Remote Call Forward is that users are not allowed to
forward calls to outside numbers. Through system programming, use of the
feature can be allowed for individual extensions.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
The Remote Call Forwarding feature allows a user to forward an incoming
call to an outside number. When a call is placed to the extension forwarding
calls to an outside number, the caller can stay on the line after the call is
concluded and receive another dial tone. At this point, the caller could
initiate a toll call. For additional information, see Appendix A, “Customer
Service Information.”
Forward, Remote Call Forward, and Follow Me send the following types of calls:
■
Ringing inside calls in Release 4.0 and prior systems; when all SA or ICOM
buttons are busy, all inside calls in Release 4.1 and later systems
■
Inside or outside calls transferred to the forwarding extension
■
Outside calls directed to the forwarding extension and received on a tie
trunk
■
Outside calls received on a Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk
■
Outside calls received on PRI lines with routing by dial plan
An available calling group member is automatically logged out when the member
forwards his or her calls. If a calling group member logs in while calls are being
forwarded, Forward or Remote Call Forward is automatically canceled.
Forward, Remote Call Forward, and Follow Me do not send the following types of
calls:
■
Voice-announced inside calls
■
Calls received on a Cover button
■
Returning parked or transferred calls
■
Callback calls from the system
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 268
■
Calls received on a Shared SA button
■
Calls received on a Call button on a QCC
■
Calls transferred from a calling group for a voice messaging system (VMS)
connected to a jack programmed as generic VMI.
■
Calls forwarded from other extensions
Calls received on a personal line (an outside line assigned to a button on the
telephone) are forwarded to outside numbers using Remote Call Forward only
under the following circumstances:
■
The extension must be assigned as the principal user of the personal line
through system programming. Only one extension can be the principal user
for a given line/trunk.
■
If the personal line is a loop-start line, it must provide a reliable disconnect
signal. A disconnect signal is the signal sent by the local telephone
company to notify the system that an outside caller has hung up.
Disconnect signaling is considered reliable when a disconnect signal is
sent on every call when the caller hangs up. The line is considered
unreliable when a disconnect signal is not sent on every call. The factory
setting for loop-start lines is Unreliable Disconnect; this setting can be
changed to Reliable Disconnect through system programming. Remote
Call Forward cannot be used to forward calls arriving on a line programmed
as unreliable.
NOTE:
Programming a loop-start line as reliable when, in fact, it does not
provide reliable disconnect signaling leaves the line in a permanent
busy condition after a call on that line has been forwarded to an
outside number.
A forwarded call rings as shown in Table 22.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Table 22.
Page 269
Forwarded Call Ringing
Telephone
Type
Multiline
Calls forwarded to Inside Extension
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, the forwarding
telephone must ring once for an SA or ICOM call. If all
SA or ICOM buttons are busy, the caller hears the
busy tone and the call is not forwarded.
Outside Number
Forwarding
telephone does not
ring. Destination
telephone rings.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, if SA or ICOM
buttons are all busy, the call is forwarded immediately,
regardless of the delay setting.
If an SA or ICOM button is available, the green LED
continues flashing; the call can still be answered.
Single-line
The receiving telephone rings, and the green LED
flashes at an available SA or ICOM button until the
call is answered.
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, the forwarding
telephone rings until the call is answered. If the SA or
ICOM line is busy, the caller hears a busy tone and
the call is not forwarded. In Release 4.1 and later
systems, if the SA or ICOM line is busy, the call is
forwarded immediately, regardless of the delay
setting.
Forwarding
telephone does not
ring. Destination
telephone rings.
The destination telephone rings, and the green LED
flashes at an available SA or ICOM button until the
call is answered.
Delayed Forwarding
22
In Release 4.0 and later systems, each user can program a Forwarding Delay
setting for calls that are forwarded using Forward, Remote Call Forwarding, or
Follow Me. The Forwarding Delay is the number of rings that a call rings at the
forwarding extension before it is forwarded to the receiver. The number of rings
can be set from zero to nine (0–9 rings) through system programming. Once the
Forwarding Delay is programmed, it is in effect until it is reprogrammed.
The user may use this feature to screen calls during that time by checking the
displayed calling number if it is available.
Do Not Disturb overrides Delayed Forwarding. Calls are immediately forwarded if
Do Not Disturb is on while Forward or Follow Me is active.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, if a call arrives on an SA or ICOM line to a
forwarding extension where all SA or ICOM buttons are busy, the call is sent
immediately to its destination. The Forwarding Delay has no effect.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Considerations and Constraints
Page 270
22
On multiline telephones, Forward should be programmed on a button so that the
LEDs provide a visual reminder when calls are being forwarded.
A user can forward calls to only one extension or outside telephone number.
A user can receive forwarded calls from an unlimited number of extensions.
Forward (including Remote Call Forward) and Follow Me cannot be used at the
same time. When the second feature is turned on, the first one is automatically
turned off.
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, an SA or ICOM call to an MLX or analog
multiline telephone extension must ring once at the forwarding telephone, or
according to the programmed Forwarding Delay in Release 4.0 systems. It rings
until answered at an available SA or ICOM button on the destination telephone
(see Table 22). In Release 4.1 and later systems, the call need not ring when all
SA or ICOM buttons are busy. A call forwarded to an outside number does not
ring at the forwarding telephone. A call forwarded to a single-line telephone rings
until the call is answered.
A forwarded outside call rings as an inside call (one-ring burst) at the destination
extension; it does not ring with the normal distinctive ring for an outside call.
The ability to use Remote Call Forward to forward calls received on a personal
line to an outside number must be assigned through system programming. If this
ability is assigned, only the principal user of a personal line can forward calls on
that line to an outside number. If a principal user is not assigned, calls on a
personal line cannot be forwarded to an outside number. When the principal user
turns on Remote Call Forward, all calls received at that extension on an SA or
ICOM button are forwarded to the outside number. Only one inside call at a time
can be forwarded. However, multiple outside calls can be forwarded. No error
tone sounds when a user with a restricted telephone uses Remote Call Forward.
However, when a call eligible for forwarding is received, the system checks
restrictions and denies the forward if the outside telephone number either is not
on an Allowed List assigned to the restricted extension or is included on a
Disallowed List assigned to the restricted extension.
If a user is off hook on an SA or ICOM button while turning on Forward, Remote
Call Forward, or Follow Me, and enters an invalid destination, he or she hears an
error tone. On an MLX display telephone, the display clears. If a user enters an
invalid extension while turning on Forward, Remote Call Forwarding, or Follow Me
at an analog multiline display telephone, the display shows Error.
Reliable disconnect cannot be programmed for a T1 channel programmed to
emulate a loop-start line. When a call is received on a loop-start emulation
channel and Remote Call Forward is used, the call is forwarded to the primary
system operator instead of to the destination telephone number.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 271
A user who shares a personal line cannot join a call in progress forwarded to an
outside telephone number unless the user shares both the personal line on which
the call was received and the line/trunk selected to forward the call to the outside
number.
When two or more people sharing a personal line use Forward or Follow Me to
send to extensions, calls received on the personal line are forwarded to all
destinations.
If Forward is turned on at an extension while it is ringing with an incoming call, the
call continues to ring at that extension and also begins to ring at the destination
extension after the delay time interval.
Forward, Remote Call Forward, and Follow Me forward a call only once. For
example, if Extension A forwards calls to Extension B, which in turn is forwarding
calls to Extension C, calls arriving for Extension A are forwarded only to Extension
B and do not go on to Extension C.
Calls received on a Cover button are not forwarded. When a coverage sender
turns on Forward, his or her calls are forwarded and go to coverage at the same
time.
A call can be forwarded to a multiline telephone that has a DSS or Auto Dial
button for the originator. When this occurs in Release 2.1 and later systems, the
red LED next to the DSS button or green LED next to the Auto Dial button does
not flash.
The reasons that a call may ring for more than the programmed Delayed Call
Forwarding setting are the following:
■
If a button is programmed as Delayed Ring, the Forwarding Delay begins
after the Delayed Ring period ends. The two delays are cumulative.
■
The destination for the Forwarded call may not be available to receive the
call.
■
There are no lines/trunks available (Remote Call Forwarding only).
In Release 4.0 and later systems, if the Forwarding receiver is unavailable, a call
rings at the Forwarding extension (assuming a button is available) until the
Forwarding receiver is available or the call is answered. If a call is forwarded to a
line/trunk through Remote Call Forwarding, the call rings at the forwarding
extension until a line/trunk is seized for the outgoing call.
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, a call arriving on an SA or ICOM line to a busy
forwarding extension is not forwarded. The caller hears a busy tone.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, if all SA or ICOM buttons are busy at the
forwarding extension and the receiving extension is also unavailable, the caller
receives a busy signal.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Page 272
The Forwarding Delay setting cannot be copied from one extension to another
because it is not associated with a button.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, an SA or ICOM call placed to a forwarding
extension with no available SA or ICOM buttons is forwarded immediately. As a
result, the call may arrive before other forwarded calls that are still ringing
according to a programmed Forward Delay setting.
Forward on Busy (Release 4.1 and later systems only) is automatic and cannot be
changed through programming. It is not activated when the forwarding telephone
is busied-out for maintenance or system programming, or when the forwarding
telephone is unplugged or in extension or system programming mode.
In Release 3.1 and later releases, Remote Call Forwarding checks the
dial-access-to-pools restriction and denies the call if pool access is restricted.
Telephone Differences
22
Direct-Line Consoles
22
A DLC operator can forward calls to extensions and, if allowed through system
programming, to outside telephone numbers. Because outside lines are assigned
as personal line buttons on the console, the ability to forward calls received on
each outside line (excluding loop-start lines with unreliable disconnect) to an
outside number must also be assigned through system programming and can be
assigned to only one telephone for each individual line/trunk.
Queued Call Consoles
22
Calls cannot be forwarded from a QCC to another extension or an outside number
(a QCC operator uses Position Busy instead). However, users can forward calls to
an individual QCC.
To turn on Follow Me for another extension at a QCC, press the Feature button
and select the Follow Me feature from the display. At the prompt, dial the
extension of the forwarding telephone.
To cancel Forward and Follow Me from other extensions: at the destination QCC,
press the Feature button, select CanclFollow (Cancel Follow Me) from the
display. Then do one of the following:
■
To cancel forwarding from one extension, dial that extension number.
■
To cancel forwarding from all extensions, dial *.
Other Multiline Telephones
22
To forward calls to an extension, either press a programmed Forward button and
dial the destination extension number, or press the Feature button, dial 33, and
dial the destination extension number. If you are off hook on an SA or ICOM
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Page 273
button, you hear a confirmation tone (double break in dial tone), and then dial tone
is removed. If a programmed Forward button is used, the green LED next to the
button turns on.
To forward calls to an outside telephone number, either press a programmed
Forward button or press the Feature button and dial 33. Then select the outside
line/trunk or pool on which to route forwarded calls by dialing either the Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) or pool dial-out code (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the Idle
Line Access code (usually 9; Key and Behind Switch modes only), or the
line/trunk number (usually 801–880). Then dial the destination telephone number
followed by a pound sign (#) to signal the end of the dialing sequence. If you are
off hook on an SA or ICOM button, you hear a confirmation tone, and then dial
tone is removed. If a programmed Forward button is used, the green LED next to
the button turns on.
To turn on Follow Me, press the Feature button, dial 34, and dial the forwarding
telephone’s extension. If you are off hook on an SA or ICOM button, you hear a
confirmation tone and dial tone is removed. An MLX display telephone user can
also use Follow Me by pressing the Feature button, selecting the feature from the
display, and dialing the forwarding telephone’s extension.
To turn off Forward, Remote Call Forward, and Follow Me at the originating
multiline telephone, press the programmed Forward button, or press the Feature
button, dial 33, and dial your own extension number (in effect, “forwarding” calls to
that extension). If you are off hook on an SA or ICOM button, you hear a
confirmation tone, and then dial tone is removed. If a programmed Forward
button is used, the green LED next to the button turns off.
At a destination (receiving) multiline telephone, to cancel Forward and Follow Me
from other extensions, press the Feature button, dial *34, and do one of the
following:
■
To cancel forwarding from one extension, dial that extension.
■
To cancel forwarding from all extensions, dial *.
If you are off hook on an SA or ICOM button, you hear confirmation tone, and then
dial tone is removed.
Single-Line Telephones
22
At a single-line telephone, you must connect to an SA or ICOM line to turn on
forwarding or Follow Me to an extension or outside line.
To forward to an extension, lift the handset and then dial #33 followed by the
destination extension number. You hear a confirmation tone, which is a double
break in dial tone, and dial tone is removed.
To forward calls to an outside telephone number, lift the handset and dial #33.
Then select the outside line/trunk or pool on which to route forwarded calls. Dial
the ARS or pool dial-out code (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the Idle Line Access code
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 274
(usually 9; Key and Behind Switch modes only), or the line/trunk number (usually
801–880). Then dial the destination telephone number followed by a pound sign
(#) to signal the end of the dialing sequence. You hear a confirmation tone, and
dial tone is removed.
To turn on Follow Me, lift the handset and dial #34 and your own extension
number. You hear a confirmation tone, and dial tone is removed.
To cancel Forward, Remote Call Forward, and Follow Me at the originating
single-line telephone, lift the handset and dial #33 and your own extension
number, in effect, “forwarding” calls to that extension. You hear a confirmation
tone and dial tone is removed.
At a destination single-line telephone, cancel Forward and Follow Me from other
extensions by lifting the handset and dialing #*34. Then do one of the following:
■
To cancel forwarding from one extension, dial that extension number.
■
To cancel forwarding from all extensions, dial *.
If you are off hook on an SA or ICOM button, you hear confirmation tone. Then
dial tone is removed.
Calls are forwarded to single-line telephone extensions even if there is no
telephone or other tip/ring device connected to the specified extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Feature Interactions
Account Code Entry
Page 275
22
You cannot enter account codes for calls forwarded to outside numbers.
Account codes are not necessary for calls forwarded to extensions.
Telephones with Forced Account Code Entry assigned can forward calls
only to extensions and not to outside telephone numbers. If Forced
Account Code Entry is activated at an extension, the extension cannot
use Remote Call Forwarding to program an outside number. If the
extension already has Remote Call Forwarding on with an outside
number programmed when Forced Account Code Entry is activated, then
Remote Call Forwarding is overridden and calls ring only at the extension.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
and Calling
Restrictions
A user with an outward- or toll-restricted telephone cannot forward calls to
an outside number unless the number is on an Allowed List assigned to
the restricted extension. No error tone sounds when a user with a
restricted telephone uses Remote Call Forward. However, when a call
eligible for forwarding is received, the system checks restrictions and
denies the forward if the outside telephone number is not on an Allowed
List (or is on a Disallowed List) assigned to the restricted extension.
Auto Answer All
An answering device connected to an analog multiline telephone can
answer forwarded calls when Auto Answer All is turned on.
Auto Dial
When a call is forwarded to a multiline telephone that has an Auto Dial
button programmed for the forwarding telephone, the green LED next to
the Auto Dial button does not flash.
Automatic Route
Selection
To have ARS select the facility on which to forward calls to an outside
telephone number, enter the ARS code before the telephone number.
The Facility Restriction Level (FRL) for the call is that of the extension
from which calls are being forwarded.
Barge-In
When a forwarded call is answered at the destination extension, Barge-In
can be used to join the call only by dialing the extension number for the
destination (not the number for the originating extension). Barge-In
cannot be used to join a call forwarded to an outside telephone number.
Callback
If a user queues a call and then uses Forward, Remote Call Forward, or
Follow Me, the call does not ring back at the destination extension or
telephone number; the callback call returns only to the forwarding
telephone.
If a forwarding extension is busy when a user calls, the user can queue
the call for callback. Callback is completed when the forwarding extension
is no longer busy. If the forwarding extension and the forwarded-to
extension are available, the call rings at both extensions. If the
forwarded-to extension is not available, the call rings at the forwarding
extension only.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Callback
continued
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 276
If an inside caller using Automatic Callback calls an extension with
Remote Call Forward and no pools are available, the caller hears queuing
tone. When the extension becomes available, dequeuing tone is heard
and the call is placed to the extension (not the Remote Call Forwarding
number) if the user has stayed on the line. Otherwise, if the caller has
hung up, priority ring is heard as the callback call is dispensed to the user.
When no pools are available and an inside caller is not using Automatic
Callback, a call to an extension with Remote Call Forwarding follows the
extension’s coverage path. If there is no coverage and the inside caller
activates Selective Callback while listening to the busy signal, the call
queues for the extension but not for the Remote Call Forward number.
Caller ID
The systemwide LS-ID delay, if programmed, augments the Forwarding
Delay. The total delay is the LS-ID delay plus the Forwarding Delay.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting does not apply to forwarded calls because the system tries
the destination telephone instead of the forwarding telephone. However, if
the call is not forwarded for any reason (for example, because the user
has tried to use Remote Call Forward from a restricted telephone), Call
Waiting functions normally.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, if a user has no available SA or ICOM
buttons and has Forward or Follow Me turned on, he or she does not hear
the call-waiting tone when a call is forwarded using the Forward on Busy
enhancement. The caller hears ringback.
Conference
When calls received on a personal line are forwarded to an outside
telephone number, another user who shares the personal line and the
line/trunk selected to forward the call can join the in-progress call by
pressing the personal line button. In this case, the person joining the call
is considered the conference originator, and the forwarded call can be
conferenced. If the person joining the call hangs up, all participants on the
conference call are disconnected.
Coverage
In Release 3.0 and earlier systems, or if the Forwarding Delay is
programmed to 0 rings in Release 4.0 and later systems, when a
coverage sender forwards, calls are forwarded and sent to coverage at
the same time. Calls received on any Cover button are not forwarded.
If a coverage receiver has activated Remote Call Forward, calls sent to
that extension by Coverage are not forwarded to the remote location.
In Release 4.0 and later systems, one of the following occurs if both
coverage and forwarding are on and the Forwarding Delay is not set to 0
rings.
■
A call that is sent to Group Coverage before the forwarding attempt
is not forwarded.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Coverage
continued
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 277
■
A call that is remote call-forwarded before any coverage is not
covered.
■
A call that is remote call-forwarded while Primary and/or Secondary
Coverage receivers are alerting is removed from those coverage
points and is not sent to Group Coverage.
■
If a call is sent to Group Coverage after forwarding, the call is
removed from the called extension, the forwarded-to extension and
any primary and secondary Cover buttons.
CTI Link
When an MLX extension is programmed as a CTI link (Release 5.0 and
later systems only), forwarding is deactivated for that extension.
Digital Data Calls
Digital communications devices can forward calls by dialing the
associated feature code.
Forward can be activated by video systems that have the ability to dial
strings and feature codes beginning with #. 2B data calls are forwarded
as two 1B data calls. Remote Call Forwarding is not available at video
system extensions.
Direct Station
Selector
Forward can be turned on by pressing a programmed Forward button or
using the feature code, then pressing a DSS button for the destination
extension. Follow Me can be turned on by using the feature code and
pressing a DSS button corresponding to the forwarding extension.
A call can be forwarded to a multiline telephone that has a DSS or Auto
Dial button for the originator. When this occurs in Release 2.1 and later
systems, the red LED next to the DSS button or green LED next to the
Auto Dial button does not flash.
Direct Voice Mail
In Release 4.0 and later systems, if Forwarding is active and Delayed
Forwarding is not set to 0 rings, pressing the Direct Voice Mail button at
the forwarding extension while a call is ringing on a button causes the call
to go directly to voice mail without being forwarded.
In Release 3.0 and later systems, a call that is made or transferred to an
extension by using Direct Voice Mail is not forwarded or remote call
forwarded.
Display
When an MLX display telephone user forwards calls to an extension, the
display prompts for the extension. After Forward is turned on, the user
sees a confirmation message. A user receiving a forwarded call sees a
message indicating which extension forwarded the call. For an outside
call, pressing More displays the line the call came in on and, if ISDN
calling party identification or Caller ID is available, the caller’s number.
For an inside call, pressing More shows the caller’s name and extension.
Display
continued
When an MLX display telephone user forwards calls to an outside
number, the display prompts for the number. On MLX and analog
multiline telephones, the digits appear on the display as the user dials the
number. An MLX display telephone user receives a feedback message
confirming that his or her calls are now forwarded to an outside number.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 278
When an MLX display telephone user turns Follow Me on or off, the
display prompts for the forwarding extension. After the feature is turned
on, the message Signed In appears. After the feature is turned off,
Signed Out appears.
If an MLX display telephone user enters an invalid destination while
turning on Forward, the display clears. If a user enters an invalid
extension while turning on Forward, Remote Call Forwarding, or
Follow Me at an analog multiline display telephone, Error is displayed.
Do Not Disturb
Calls are not forwarded to a destination extension that has Do Not Disturb
turned on; the call rings only at the forwarding telephone as described in
Table 22 on page 269. Turning on Do Not Disturb at the forwarding
extension does not prevent calls from being forwarded.
In Release 4.0 and later systems, turning on Do Not Disturb at a
forwarding extension causes calls to be forwarded immediately. The
Forwarding Delay has no effect.
Group Calling
An available calling group member is automatically logged out when the
member forwards his or her calls. If a calling group member logs in while
calls are being forwarded, Forward or Remote Call Forward is
automatically canceled.
Calls cannot be forwarded to a calling group.
When a line/trunk programmed to ring into a calling group is assigned as
a personal line on a principal user’s telephone, an incoming call received
on the personal line is not sent to the calling group if the principal user
forwards calls to an outside telephone number through Remote Call
Forwarding.
HotLine
Forward and Follow Me are not intended for HotLine extensions (Release
5.0 and later systems) but can be used at these extensions. Forwarding
must be programmed at the extension before it is assigned as a HotLine
extension. Follow Me cannot be activated at a HotLine extension, and
both Forward and Follow Me must be cancelled at non-HotLine
extensions.
Remote Call Forwarding is not intended for HotLine extensions but can
be programmed before the extension is assigned as a HotLine. To cancel
Remote Call Forwarding, remove HotLine programming first.
Multi-Function
Module
Forward (including Remote Call Forwarding) and Follow Me should not
be used on an MFM because the user does not have an LED that
indicates when the feature is active.
Night Service
When Night Service is turned on, calls arriving for a Night Service group
member can be forwarded to an extension using Forward or Follow Me.
However, calls cannot be forwarded to an outside telephone number
using Remote Call Forward.
Paging
Calls cannot be forwarded to a paging group. The line/trunk number used
to connect loudspeaker paging equipment cannot be used to forward calls
to outside telephone numbers.
Park
Returning parked calls are not forwarded.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
Personal Lines
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 279
When an extension is programmed as the principal user of a personal
line, calls arriving on the personal line can be forwarded to an outside
number (if the extension can use Remote Call Forward), unless the
personal line is a loop-start line with unreliable disconnect.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, the Forward on Busy enhancement
does not apply to calls received on personal lines.
Pickup
Pickup cannot be used to answer calls being forwarded to an outside
telephone number.
Pools
A pool can be used to forward calls to an outside telephone number.
Enter the pool dial-out code before the telephone number.
Primary Rate Interface A PRI line that has been programmed for routing by dial plan cannot have
(PRI) and T1
Remote Call Forwarding allowed. A T1 Switched 56 line cannot be used
for Remote Call Forwarding.
Recall/Timed Flash
A multiline telephone user on an inside Forward or Follow Me call can use
Recall. In Release 2.0 and later systems, Recall can also be used on an
outside call received on a loop-start line.
Remote Access
Turn on Forward or Remote Call Forward through Remote Access. To do
so, call into the system on a line/trunk that is programmed for Remote
Access and enter the barrier code, if required.
To forward calls to an extension, dial *33 while listening to system dial
tone. Then dial the forwarding extension number and the destination
extension number.
To forward calls to an outside telephone number, dial *33 and the
forwarding extension number. Then dial either the ARS or pool dial-out
code (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the Idle Line Access code (usually 9; Key
and Behind Switch modes only), or the line/trunk number (usually
801–880). Finally, dial the destination telephone number and # to signal
the end of the dialing sequence.
To cancel forwarding calls to an extension, dial *33 while listening to
system dial tone; then dial the forwarding extension number and then the
forwarding extension number again.
Ringing Options
If the forwarding telephone is set to Immediate Ring, only the
programmed Forwarding Delay is applied (Release 4.0 and later
systems). If the forwarding telephone button is set to Delay Ring, calls
that arrive on that button are delayed before forwarding. In Release 4.0
and later systems, the Forwarding Delay is added to the Delay Ring
setting. If the forwarding telephone button is set to No Ring, calls that
arrive on that button are not forwarded.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, a call that cannot arrive at the
forwarding extension—because it has no available SA or ICOM button—
is forwarded immediately. It does not ring at the forwarding extension,
regardless of the Ring Timing options (Delay, Immediate, or No Ring) set.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Forward and Follow Me
SMDR
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 280
If the system is programmed to track both incoming and outgoing calls,
two Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) records are generated
when an outside call is forwarded to an outside telephone number. One
record shows the incoming call, and the other record shows the call made
to the destination telephone number with the forwarding telephone as the
originator.
Programming of the Remote Call Forwarding number to which incoming
calls are to be forwarded is completed by pressing #. The SMDR report
includes the # with the number for calls forwarded to the number.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
A Shared SA button cannot be used to turn on Forward or Remote Call
Forward for the principal’s telephone. Calls received on a Shared SA
button are not forwarded.
When calls are forwarded to an extension, a call received on an SA or
ICOM button rings once at the forwarding extension’s SA or ICOM button
—including all assigned Shared SA buttons, even though a call received
on these buttons is not forwarded—and rings at the destination
extension’s SA or ICOM button, including all assigned Shared SA
buttons, until it is answered. In Release 4.1 and later systems, calls are
forwarded immediately when no SA or ICOM button is available at the
forwarding extension.
Transfer
Inside and outside calls transferred by another user or by an operator are
forwarded. If a user transfers a call to an extension with calls forwarded,
the extension receiving the forwarded calls hears one burst of ring,
indicating an inside call. If the extension is a display telephone, the call
information appears as an inside call and not an outside call. Returning
transferred calls are not forwarded.
Voice Announce
Voice-announced calls are not forwarded.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 281
Group Calling
22
At a Glance
22
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Supervisor
Member
Programming Codes
Any multiline telephone
Calls-in-Queue Alarm
Calling group supervisor
Unavailable (ES Status 0)
Available (ES Status 2)
Calling group members
Log in/out
Feature Codes
Calling group supervisor
Enter Supervisory
Operation
Exit Supervisory
Operation
Unavailable (ES Status 0)
Available (ES Status 2)
Calling Group members
Log In
Log Out
MLX Display Labels
Unavailable (ES Status 0)
Available (ES Status 2)
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
Dial Plan Information, Direct Group Calling Information,
Extension Information, System Information (SysSet-up)
All
One of the following assigned as a DLC:
MLX-20L
MLX-28D
MERLIN II System Display Console
BIS-34D
BIS-22D
All
*22 + calling group ext. no.
*760
*762
*44
32 + Hold
32 + Drop
760 + DSS
762 + DSS
44
*44
ES Status,ES Off [ES,ESOff]
ES Status,ES2 [ES,ES2]
Assign calling group members and calling group supervisors
to each calling group:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Members
Assign lines/trunks to ring into calling group:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Line/Pool
Select hunt type, Circular, Linear, or Most Idle (Release 5.0
and later systems):
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Hunt Type
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
At a Glance - Continued
System Programming
continued
Maximums
Calling groups
Telephones for each group
Calling groups for each
telephone
Calling groups for each
line/trunk
Delay announcement
devices for each system
Primary devices per group
Secondary devices per
group
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 282
Designate delay announcement device. In Release 5.0 and
later systems, designate as many as ten primary delay
announcement devices and one secondary device, set
interval between the first and second announcements, and
specify whether second announcement repeats:
●
Extensions→More→Grp Calling→DelayAnnce
Calling group as receiver for a Group Coverage sender:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→GrpCoverage
Assign message-waiting receiver for calling group:
●
Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Message
Set overflow threshold and designate calling group or QCC
queue as overflow receiver:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Overflow→Calling
Group No./QCC→Number Based Overflow
Choose calling group type to determine whether calling group
members are automatically logged in after a system restart.
When calling group is used for voice messaging systems,
specify whether VMI type is integrated or generic:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Group Type
Set calls-in-queue alarm threshold; in Release 5.0 and later
systems, specify up to three alarm levels to signal increasing
number of callers waiting:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Queue Alarm
Set the overflow threshold time:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Overflow→Calling
Group No.→ Time Based Overflow
Assign external alert to notify calling group members of
calls-in-queue alarm:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Xtnl Alert
Enter display label for calling group:
● More→Labeling→Grp Calling
32
20
1
1
32 (Releases prior to 5.0, can be shared among groups)
200 (Release 5.0 and later, can be shared among groups)
1 (Releases prior to 5.0)
10 (Release 5.0 and later)
1 (Release 5.0 and later
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 283
At a Glance - Continued
Maximums
continued
Message-waiting receivers
for each calling group
Calls-in-Queue Alarm
threshold levels
External Alerts for each
group
Overflow Receivers for
each group
Factory Settings
Overflow Threshold
Number-based
Time-based
Repeat Secondary Delay
Announcement
Time between
Announcements
Calls-in-Queue Alarm
Calls-in-Queue Alarm
Levels
Threshold 1
Threshold 2
Threshold 3
Calling group extension
numbers
Extension Status
Hunt Type
Group Type
1 (can be shared among groups)
3 per group (Release 5.0 and later; in earlier systems, 1)
1 (cannot be shared among groups)
1 (can be shared among groups)
1 call (range 1–99 calls)
0 (0–900 sec)
Off; Release 5.0 and later systems
0 (0–900 sec); Release 5.0 and later systems
1 call (range 1–99 calls); Release 4.2 and prior systems
Release 5.0 and later systems only
1 call (range 1–99 calls)
1 call (range 1–99 calls)
1 call (range 1–99 calls)
770–791, 7920–7929
Calling Group/CMS
Circular
Auto Logout
NOTE:
For additional information about calling group activities, see ‘‘Extension
Status’’ on page 256.
Description
22
Group Calling is used to direct incoming calls to a specific group of telephones (a
calling group). A calling group is a team of individuals who answer and handle the
same kinds of calls, for example, high-volume work groups such as sales, service,
marketing, repair, and technical support. Also, fax machines that receive a large
number of fax messages can be placed in a calling group to allow multiple calls to
be sent.
Through Group Calling, all members in the calling group are assigned to a single
extension number. Specific lines/trunks can be assigned to ring directly into the
calling group so that outside callers can dial a published telephone number to
reach the group, bypassing the operator.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 284
Individual calling group member extensions are assigned an extension number,
allowing a group member to receive calls as an individual and as a group
member. Outside calls that come into a calling group are usually not intended for
a particular group member and can be handled by any member. However, inside
callers can reach a specific calling group member by dialing the individual
extension number assigned to the member.
As calls come into the calling group, the system hunts for an available group
member in a circular or linear manner or, in Release 5.0 and later systems,
according to which member is most idle (see ‘‘Hunt Type’’ on page 286). If a
group member is available, the call rings on an SA or ICOM button. If all group
members are busy or otherwise unavailable, calls are held in a queue. As calling
group members become available, the calls are distributed on a first-in, first-out
basis.
When all calling group members are busy, inside callers who are transferred to
the calling group hear regular ringback and the call is sent to the calling group
queue; outside callers hear special ringback or Music On Hold if it is programmed
for the system. For a summary of what callers hear while waiting in queue or
being transferred, see Table 29 on page 396
In addition, an announcement device can be assigned to the group to play a
recorded announcement to each waiting caller, in the order that the calls arrive in
the queue. In Release 5.0 and later systems, the system manager can assign up
to ten primary and one secondary announcement devices for each group and can
specify the delay between announcements as well as whether the second
announcement repeats while a caller waits.
NOTE:
In Release 5.0 and later systems, combining multiple delay announcement
devices with tiered alarm thresholds (see ‘‘Overflow Threshold’’ on page
290 for additional details) allows the calling group supervisor or system
manager to monitor the effectiveness of delay announcements. See ‘‘Using
Alarm Thresholds to Monitor the Effectiveness of Delay Announcements’’
on page 293 for more information.
Calling group members log in when they are ready to take calls (called available
status) and log out while they finish call-related activities or when they leave their
positions (called unavailable status). Calls are sent to a calling group member
only if the member is logged in and is not busy on another call. When the group
type is set to Auto Logout (the factory setting) and a call sent to a calling group
member is not answered within 30 seconds (5 rings), the call is sent to another
member or to the front of the queue if another calling group member is not
available. The system automatically logs out the extension where the call went
unanswered and makes it unavailable for subsequent calls until the calling group
member logs in.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 285
A calling group member is considered available if all of the following conditions
are met:
■
The extension is logged into the calling group (available status).
■
The extension handset is on hook and a red light is on next to the next line
button to be used by Automatic Line Selection; or a headset user has
disconnected the last call, no red light is on at any line buttons, and the
speakerphone is off.
■
The extension is not ringing or busy on another call.
■
The extension does not have a call on hold (except for a call awaiting
transfer).
■
The extension is not in programming or test mode.
■
An SA or ICOM button is available for call delivery.
■
Do Not Disturb is off.
■
Calls are not being forwarded through Forward, Remote Call Forward, or
Follow Me.
■
The calling group member has not activated Callback to reach a busy
line/trunk (Hybrid/PBX mode only) or extension.
■
The calling group member is not about to receive a call from a caller who
has used Callback to reach the member.
Calling Group Options
22
This section describes the Group Calling options assigned through system
programming and available only for calling groups.
Calling Group Supervisor Position
22
The calling group supervisor position is a Direct-Line Console (DLC) with
Extension Status assigned through system programming. The calling group
supervisor monitors and controls calling group activity by using the LEDs and
programmed buttons on the console or DSS.
The supervisor console should include the following programmed buttons:
■
For each calling group member, one button programmed with the
member’s extension on the telephone (inside Auto Dial) or optional DSS.
■
A Calls-in-Queue Alarm button (either on the console or on a DSS),
programmed with the calling group’s extension, for monitoring calls in
queue. A supervisor who manages more than one group needs a button for
each group.
NOTE:
In Release 5.0 and later systems, a DSS button used as a
Calls-in-Queue Alarm button only indicates two alarm threshold
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 286
levels, with either a flash or steady lighting. If DSS buttons are used
to monitor calling group queue status, only two alarm thresholds
should be set.
■
Status buttons for controlling calling group member availability; an
Available (ES2) button and an Unavailable (ES1) button. Extension Status
features allow a calling group supervisor to change and monitor calling
group members’ status (and enable members to sign in and out of the
calling group). See ‘‘Extension Status’’ on page 256 for additional
information.
22
Hunt Type
The placement of each extension in the hunting sequence used by the system to
search for an available calling group member is determined by the order in which
each extension is assigned to the group during system programming. When the
first call arrives for a calling group after a system is installed or restarted (cold
start), the system searches for an available group member, starting with the first
extension assigned to the group during system programming.
The order in which the system searches for available calling group members for
subsequent calls can be circular, linear, or according to which agent is most idle
and is called the hunt type. The hunt types are as follows:
■
Circular. The system searches for an available calling group member
starting with the extension after the last extension to receive a call. The
circular order is the factory setting and is used when all group members
have the same responsibilities for handling calls.
■
Most Idle (Release 5.0 and later systems only). The system distributes
calls according to the most-idle queue. Whenever an agent transfers or
hangs up on a call, he or she moves to the end of the queue. For some
applications, this hunt type is more efficient than the circular method,
because it takes into account the varying duration of calls. Members are
selected based on when they last completed a calling group call, not on
when they last received one. When an agent first logs into a group, he or
she is most likely to be the most idle and receive the next call. The Most
Idle hunting method ignores non-calling group calls. For example, if an
agent transfers a call that arrived on a personal line, the calling group
member’s most-idle status is unaffected. This setting is also used when all
group members have the same responsibilities for handling calls.
NOTE:
In a Hybrid/PBX mode system, a calling group member may receive
a calling group call at an SA button, then put that call on hold at the
SA button. If the agent then picks up the call at a personal line button
at his or her telephone, the agent moves to the end of the most-idle
queue.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 287
■
Linear. The system distributes calls starting with the first extension
assigned to the group through system programming. Consequently, most
calls are handled by the first member assigned to the group. This method is
used, for example, when the primary responsibility of the first calling group
member is to take calls, while other group members provide backup.
Delay Announcements
22
Delay announcement devices play a message for callers waiting in a calling group
queue, explaining the delay to the caller or asking that the caller continue to wait.
In Release 5.0 and later systems, each calling group can have up to 10 primary
delay announcements and one secondary delay announcement device, a
maximum of 11 per group. In earlier systems, a calling group can have only one
delay announcement device (no secondary device). The devices can be
connected to the control unit on 012, 016, or 008 OPT modules. A delay
announcement device can also be connected to an analog multiline telephone
through a General Purpose Adapter (GPA) or to an MLX telephone through a
Multi-Function Module (MFM). Each device is identified by the extension number
assigned in the system numbering plan. Any number of groups can share devices.
Delay announcement devices should not be assigned as calling group members.
When no calling group members are available and calls enter the calling group
queue, the announcement device, as it becomes available, answers the call that
has been waiting longest and plays the recorded message.
In Release 5.0 and later systems, the primary delay announcements function like
the single announcement available in prior releases. After the delay
announcement (the primary delay announcement in Release 5.0 and later
systems), an inside caller hears a special ringback, a transferred inside caller
hears regular ringback, and an outside caller (including a transferred outside
caller) hears special ringback or Music On Hold, if programmed, until the call is
answered by a calling group member. The delay announcement or primary delay
announcement is played only once while the call is in queue.
NOTE:
When you change a delay announcement, for example, re-recording it, be
sure to recalculate the announcement interval so that special ringback or
Music on Hold does not interrupt the new announcement.
In Release 5.0 and later systems, the system manager can specify the extension
for an optional secondary delay announcement and use system programming to
set the interval (0–900 seconds) between announcements. This setting
determines the time before a waiting caller hears the secondary announcement
and, if it is set to repeat, the interval between replays of the secondary
announcement. The secondary announcement can either repeat or play only
once, after which the caller hears ringback or Music On Hold, according to the
rules outlined above.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 288
The primary and secondary announcement options, when used together, allow
the system manager to issue an initial message to callers, followed by a repeating
announcement that, for example, urges the caller to stay on the line and wait for a
calling group member. Generally the delay interval should be no shorter than the
length (in seconds) of the secondary announcement. Ideally, the delay interval
should be a multiple of the secondary announcement’s length and the anticipated
number of calls in queue during a busy time.
NOTE:
See ‘‘Using Alarm Thresholds to Monitor the Effectiveness of Delay
Announcements’’ on page 293 for information about how tiered alarm
thresholds can help determine the effectiveness of delay announcements
in Release 5.0 and later systems.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, all calls delivered to a jack programmed as a
calling group delay announcement device produce a one-burst inside ring (heard
by the caller). In addition, outside calls transferred to a calling group and then
answered by either a delay announcement device or a calling group member
show the most recent answering extension, not the transferring extension, on the
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record.
If a calling group member becomes available while the caller is listening to a delay
announcement, the system immediately routes the caller to the calling group
member. The announcement device is then free to handle another queued call.
Each announcement device has an extension number. Therefore, a calling group
member or calling group supervisor can dial this number to check or change the
announcement as long as the delay announcement device allows a user to read
or change messages remotely. If the device is malfunctioning and does not
answer the call within 30 seconds (5 rings), the system automatically logs out the
device and makes it unavailable for subsequent calls until the calling group
supervisor logs in the device or until the next system restart. The only effect on
incoming calls is that callers do not hear the announcement.
If a caller hangs up while listening to a delay announcement device, the extension
of the delay announcement device, not that of the calling group, is recorded on
the SMDR.
Message-Waiting Receiver
22
The message-waiting receiver is the extension designated to receive
message-waiting indications for the calling group. This includes message-waiting
indications sent from an operator, from a display telephone using Leave Message,
or from a fax machine. Any type of telephone with a message LED can be
assigned as a message-waiting receiver.
The extension designated as the message-waiting receiver does not have to be a
member of the calling group. Each calling group can have only one extension
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 289
assigned as its message-waiting receiver, but the same extension can be
assigned as the message-waiting receiver for more than one calling group.
Message-waiting indications cannot be sent to the extension number assigned to
the group unless this option is programmed. The message-waiting receiver
cannot distinguish between messages left for the calling group and personal
messages.
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold
22
The Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold is the number of calls (1–99) allowed in the
queue before calling group supervisors and members are notified that too many
calls are waiting for attention. In Release 5.0 and later systems, the system
manager can assign three threshold levels to indicate increasing levels of
severity, as explained later in this section. When the number of waiting calls is
equal to or greater than the programmed Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold setting
(factory default is one call), the calling group members can be notified in one of
two ways:
■
Through an external alert connected to an MLX telephone by using a
Multi-Function Module (MFM); the MFM is set for SAA operation and
programmed as the alert. Because the tone sent to the alert is continuous,
use only a device such as a strobe light, which stays lit until the number of
calls drops below the limit. Only one external alert can be assigned to each
calling group, and each external alert can be assigned to only one calling
group. You should not use a Supplemental Alert Adapter with an analog
multiline telephone because a steady tone is emitted from the telephone
when the visual alert is on.
The system does not block the programming of any extension jack
(including extension jacks used for telephones or operator consoles) as an
external alert to provide the calls-in-queue alarm. However, programming a
telephone or console extension as a calls-in-queue alarm is not
recommended because the telephone alerts continuously with a tone while
the number of calls in the calling group queue is equal to or greater than
the programmed threshold or in Release 5.0 and later systems, Threshold
3 (see the discussion later in this topic). Single-line telephones do not ring
or generate any kind of tone, nor does any device connected to an MFM
that is set for tip/ring operation.
■
Through the LED associated with a Calls-in-Queue Alarm button (inside
Auto Dial button) programmed with the calling group’s extension or a DSS
button that corresponds to the extension. In Release 5.0 and later systems,
the DSS button flashes if the number of calls waiting in the queue is greater
than or equal to Threshold 1 but fewer than Threshold 3. The LED lights
steadily if the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to Threshold
3. If three thresholds are needed, an inside Auto Dial button should be
used to monitor queue status. There is no limit to the number of buttons
that can be programmed to provide the calls-in-queue alarm indication.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 290
Any multiline telephone in the system can be used to monitor the status of
a calling group’s queue by programming a Calls-in-Queue Alarm button. An
MLX display telephone can be used to view the number of calls in a queue
(1–99) on the display when the user presses the Inspct button and then
presses the Auto Dial button (Calls-in-Queue Alarm button) programmed
with the calling group’s extension number. The Inspect feature cannot be
used on a DSS button.
In Release 5.0 and later systems, three Calls-in-Queue Alarm thresholds can be
set to more clearly indicate the real-time status of the queue according to the
behavior of programmed Calls-in-Queue Alarm buttons. If all three thresholds are
set to the same value, the result is one threshold only with LED states of off and
on. If two values are the same, then the result is two alarm levels with LED states
of off, flash, and on. The factory is setting is one call for all three thresholds. Using
all three levels, the system manager sets Threshold 3 to the highest value,
Threshold 2 to a middle value, and Threshold 1 to the lowest value. A
Calls-in-Queue Alarm button indicates the severity of the alarm conditions in the
following ways:
■
If the number of waiting calls is fewer than the value programmed for
Threshold 1 or drops below that level, the LED is unlit.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 1
value but less than the Threshold 2 value, the LED flashes.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 2
value but fewer than the value for Threshold 3, the LED winks.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value,
Threshold 3, the LED lights steadily.
An external alert only signals when the number of calls in the queue is greater
than or equal to the programmed Threshold 3 value.
These thresholds can be used to assess the effectiveness of delay
announcements. See ‘‘Using Alarm Thresholds to Monitor the Effectiveness of
Delay Announcements’’ on page 293 for details.
Overflow Threshold
22
The overflow threshold is the maximum number of calls waiting in the calling
group queue before calls are sent to the overflow receiver. The factory setting is
one call.
The Overflow Threshold option should be set to a number larger than the
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold so that the Calls-in-Queue Alarm alerts before
calls are sent to the overflow receiver. In Release 5.0 and later systems, the
overflow threshold should be greater than the highest Calls-in-Queue alarm
threshold (Threshold 3).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 291
Overflow Threshold Time
22
In Release 4.0 and later systems, there is also an Overflow Threshold Time
setting. The overflow threshold time is the maximum time that any call can remain
in the calling group queue before it is sent to the overflow receiver. If the overflow
threshold time is set to 0 seconds (factory setting), then the Overflow by Time
option is off. If the overflow threshold time is set to any other valid interval (1–900
seconds), then calls that remain in the calling group queue for a time equal to or
greater than the overflow threshold time are sent to the overflow receiver.
If you want the Overflow Threshold Time setting to be the primary source for
overflow, you should specify an Overflow Threshold setting of a large number of
calls (for example, 99 calls). If you want to have overflow by number of calls in the
queue, set the overflow threshold time to 0 seconds; this turns off overflow by
time.
Overflow Receiver
22
When the number of calls waiting in the calling group queue reaches the overflow
threshold, calls can be sent to an overflow receiver, which can be another calling
group or the Queued Call Console (QCC) queue. Only one calling group or the
QCC queue can be programmed to provide overflow coverage for the same
calling group, and each calling group or the QCC queue can provide overflow
coverage for more than one calling group. If no overflow receiver is programmed,
the call continues to ring in the queue until it is answered or the caller hangs up.
Calling Group Overflow Receiver
22
Calls to do not go to an overflow receiver that is a calling group until each of the
following conditions is met:
■
The number of calls in the queue is equal to or greater than the
programmed overflow threshold or the time a call has been in the queue is
over the overflow threshold time.
■
The overflow calling group has an available calling group member.
■
No other calls are already queued for the overflow calling group.
If all conditions are met, the calls are directed to the overflow receiver on a
first-in/first-out basis until the number of queued calls in the covered calling group
is less than the overflow threshold. The system searches for an available calling
group member according to the hunt type assigned to the sending calling group.
Calls that overflow to a secondary group cannot overflow again or hear a second
announcement.
When the overflow group type is set to Auto Logout and an overflow call is not
answered within 30 seconds (5 rings), the overflow calling group member is
logged out. The call is returned to the sender calling group’s queue and is placed
at the front of the queue. The caller does not hear the sender’s delay
announcement even if the call was sent to the overflow calling group before the
caller heard the delay announcement.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 292
22
QCC Queue Overflow Receiver
When the QCC queue is assigned to provide overflow coverage for a calling
group, the following conditions must be met before calls are directed to the QCC
queue:
■
The number of calls in the calling group queue must be equal to or greater
than the programmed overflow threshold.
■
No QCC operators can have Position Busy on.
An overflow call that is sent to the QCC queue does not normally return to the
calling group even if the call is not answered. If all QCCs have Position Busy
active, the calls from the calling group do not overflow but continue to wait in the
calling group queue. If all QCC operators activate Position Busy while an overflow
call is in the QCC queue, the call is rerouted to the original calling group.
Calling Group Type
22
The Group Type setting determines whether or not the system automatically logs
in members of a calling group following a power failure. The setting also
determines the type of voice messaging interface (VMI) when the calling group is
used to connect voice messaging systems or automated attendant applications.
The following settings are available:
■
Auto Logout. This setting is used to specify that the system does not
automatically log in calling group members after a power failure. When the
Group Type is set to Auto Logout (the factory setting) and a call sent to a
calling group member is not answered within 30 seconds (5 rings), the call
is sent either to another member or to the front of the queue if no calling
group member is available.
■
Auto Login. This setting is for calling groups used for fax machines or data
(also called data hunt groups) to specify that the system automatically log
in calling group members following a power failure. Auto Login can be set
for calling groups where member answer telephones.
■
Integrated VMI. This setting is used when a voice messaging system
(such as AUDIX Voice Power, MERLIN LEGEND MAIL, or MERLIN MAIL)
that requires special signaling for integrated operation is connected to one
or more extension jacks assigned to a calling group. The system
automatically logs in the calling group members after a power failure.
■
Generic VMI. This setting is used when a voice messaging system (such
as Lucent Technologies Attendant or Integrated Voice Power Automated
Attendant) that does not require special signaling is connected to one or
more extension jacks assigned to a calling group. The system
automatically logs in the calling group members after a power failure.
In Release 4.2 and later systems, SMDR can be programmed to provide more
detailed information about calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout calling groups. For
details, see ‘‘Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)’’ on page 557.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 293
Using Alarm Thresholds to Monitor the
Effectiveness of Delay Announcements
22
In Release 5.0 and later systems, a system manager or calling group supervisor
can use a simple formula to set alarm thresholds in such a way that
Calls-in-Queue Alarm buttons can indicate whether or not delay announcements
are functioning optimally.
Generally the delay interval should be no shorter than the length (in seconds) of
the secondary announcement. Ideally, the delay interval should be a multiple of
the secondary announcement’s length and the anticipated number of calls in
queue during a busy time. For example, if the secondary announcement is 10
seconds long and 5 calls are expected in the queue, the delay interval should be
set to at least 50 seconds.
To accomplish set up alarm thresholds, follow these preliminary steps:
1.
Set up primary and secondary announcements of durations that seem
appropriate for your needs.
2.
Specify a reasonable announcement interval (for example, 30 seconds
based on the rule noted above).
3.
Refer to Table 23 and divide the announcement interval (Y) by the length of
the secondary announcement (Z). Round off this result. This determines
the maximum number of calls that can be in the queue before callers have
to wait to hear the secondary announcement again.
4.
Use the value from Step 3 for any one of the three thresholds. When the
number of calls in the queue exceeds this value, the Calls-in-Queue Alarm
button signals the overflow.
Table 23.
Checking the Effectiveness of Delay Announcements
Calls Waiting for
Length of
Secondary
Secondary
Announcement Announcement
(N)
in Seconds (Z)
3
10
3
20
5
15
10
15
Queue Length
Announcement That Will Cause
Interval in
Delay if
Seconds (Y)
Exceeded (Y/Z)
30
3
30
2
90
6
90
6
N*Z
30
60
75
150
N*Z
> Y?
No
Yes
No
Yes
When the number of calls waiting for a secondary announcement multiplied by the
length of that announcement is greater than the announcement interval, an alarm
is triggered. The table above illustrates situations where a programmed
Calls-in-Queue Alarm button would or would not indicate a problem.
If problems arise, use the display at the calling group supervisor DLC console to
monitor the situation while the problem is most severe. Try to adjust the
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 294
secondary announcement’s duration and the interval setting so that the
announcement interval is greater than or equal to the length of the secondary
announcement multiplied by the number of calls waiting for the secondary
announcement (Y >= N * Z).
If your calculations indicate a problem, take one or more of the following
measures:
■
Increase the announcement interval (Y).
■
Record a shorter secondary announcement (decrease Z).
■
Eliminate the queue for the second announcement in one of the following
ways:
— Increase the number of available agents.
— Increase the length of the primary announcement.
— Decrease the number of primary announcements.
— Set the repeat option for the secondary announcement to Off.
— If the secondary announcement is also serving as the primary
announcement, set up a separate primary announcement.
— If the secondary announcement is shared by one or more other groups,
make it exclusive to the group experiencing the problem.
Considerations and Constraints
32
An extension can be a member of only one calling group. Calling groups with no
members are allowed.
Extension Status must be set to calling group/Call Management System (CMS),
the factory setting, and not to hotel configuration.
The Integrated or Generic Voice Messaging Interface (VMI) group type should not
be assigned to a calling group used for fax machines.
To allow all calling group members’ extensions to ring when an outside call is not
answered within three rings, the lines/trunks programmed to ring into the queue
can also be assigned to buttons on calling group members’ telephones and
programmed for Delayed Ring. This does not work for inside calls, remote access
calls, and Direct Inward Dial (DID) calls, or when a delay announcement device is
assigned to the group.
Lines that are programmed to ring into a calling group also ring at any telephones
that have the line assigned to a button. If a call is answered at any one of these
telephones, the call is removed from the calling group queue. A line/trunk can be
assigned both to a calling group and as a personal line.
A line/trunk cannot be programmed to ring into more than one calling group.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 295
A line/trunk cannot be programmed to ring into both a calling group and a QCC
queue.
If no lines are assigned to the calling group, only inside calls are eligible for calling
group distribution.
The calling group supervisor can log delay announcement devices in or out.
Any of the multiline and single-line telephones compatible with the system can be
used as calling group member positions.
The Most Idle hunting method (Release 5.0 and later systems only) ignores
non-calling group calls. For example, if an agent transfers a call that was
answered on any personal line, the calling group member’s most-idle status is
unaffected
In a Hybrid/PBX mode system where the Most Idle hunt type (Release 5.0 and
later systems only) is used, a calling group member may receive a calling group
call at an SA button, then put that call on hold at the SA button. If the agent then
picks up the call at a personal line button at his or her telephone, the system no
longer considers the call a calling group call and moves the agent to the end of the
most-idle queue.
Labels can be assigned to calling groups to identify the name of the group, such
as SALES, SERVICE, or CLAIMS, on display telephones.
Do not use a Supplemental Alert Adapter with an analog multiline telephone
because a steady tone is emitted from the telephone when the visual alert is on.
The system does not prevent users who are not members of a calling group from
using the Available (ES2) and Unavailable (ES1) programmed buttons or feature
codes. Call Management System (CMS) agents who may not be calling group
members can use these same codes to log in and out of the CMS.
The published number for a calling group can be a DID number.
If the Overflow Threshold Time setting for a calling group is changed, the time
countdown is reset for any calls waiting in the queue for that calling group.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a 012 port that is programmed as a generic VMI
port can transfer an outside call to an outside number (trunk-to-trunk transfer).
Release 2.0 and earlier systems can perform a trunk-to-trunk transfer only on
ports programmed as integrated VMI.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
Calling restrictions (for example, Disallowed Lists, Toll Restriction, Facility
Restriction Levels) should be programmed, as appropriate, to minimize toll
fraud abuse, especially if a single-line telephone is connected to an
integrated VMI port. See ‘‘Calling Restrictions’’ on page 110 and Appendix
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 296
A, “Customer Service Information,” for additional information about
programming calling restrictions.
In Release 3.1 and later systems, ports assigned as Generic VMI or Integrated
VMI are assigned a number of security restrictions. Generic VMI and Integrated
VMI ports are outward restricted. The factory-set Facility Restriction Level is 0. A
default disallowed list is assigned to the VMI ports which includes the following
entries: 0, 10, 11, 1809, 1700, 1900, 976, 1ppp976, *, (p=any digit).
In Release 4.1 and later systems, changes to Group Calling coverage delays
affect the Integrated Administration feature of Integrated Solution III (IS III). For
details, see ‘‘Integrated Administration’’ on page 328.
In Release 5.0 and later systems, the three threshold levels, when set, are
signaled only at programmed Calls-in-Queue alarm buttons. An external alert
lights or sounds only when the number of calls in the queue is greater than or
equal to Threshold 3.
Mode Differences
32
Behind Switch Mode
32
Calls to calling groups in a system set up in Behind Switch mode follow the
communications system ring pattern, not the central office ring pattern.
Telephone Differences
32
Direct-Line Consoles
A DLC can be a member of a calling group and is normally used as the calling
group supervisor position. Supervisor positions must be assigned to a DLC.
Any of the following telephones assigned as a DLC can be used as a calling group
supervisor’s console:
■
MLX-20L telephones with or without a DSS
■
MLX-28D telephones with or without a DSS
■
BIS-22D
■
BIS-34D
■
MERLIN II System Display Console with built-in DSS
The supervisor must activate Extension Status to see the status of calling group
members and to change their availability; this cannot be done from normal
call-handling operation.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Page 297
To activate Extension Status, press the Feature button, dial 32, and press the
Hold button. To return to normal call handling, press the Feature button, dial 32,
and press the Drop button.
To change the availability of a calling group member, the supervisor activates
Extension Status (if not already active) and presses a programmed button for
Available (ES2) or Unavailable (ES0) and the Auto Dial or DSS button for the
group member’s extension number. The supervisor can also change the status of
extensions by pressing the Feature button, dialing the feature code [762 for
Available (ES2) and 760 for Unavailable (ES0)], and pressing the Auto Dial or
DSS button for the group member’s extension number. A supervisor with an MLX
display telephone can change the status of extensions by pressing the Feature
button, selecting the feature from the display (ES2 On for Available and ES Off for
Unavailable), and pressing the Auto Dial or DSS button for the group member’s
extension number.
32
Direct Station Selector (DSS)
In Release 5.0 and later systems, the state of a DSS button used as a
Calls-in-Queue alarm button only indicates two alarm threshold levels, with either
a flash or steady lighting. For this reason, if DSS buttons are used to monitor
calling group queue status, only two alarm thresholds should be set.
Queued Call Consoles
32
A QCC cannot be a member of a calling group and cannot be assigned as a
calling group or CMS supervisor position.
The QCC queue can be designated to provide overflow coverage for calls from
one or more calling groups. When an overflow call is sent to the QCC queue, it
cannot be identified as a calling group call.
Other Multiline Telephones
32
Calling group members log into the group by pressing the programmed Available
button or by pressing the Feature button or # and dialing 44. To log out, press the
programmed Available button or press the Feature button or # and dial *44. A
confirmation tone is heard.
To see the number of calls waiting in queue, using an MLX display telephone,
press the Inspct button followed by the programmed Calls-in-Queue Alarm
button. An analog multiline user cannot use the Inspect feature.
Single-Line Telephones
32
Log into and out of the calling group by lifting the handset (which must be
connected to an SA or ICOM button) and dialing #44 to log in or #*44 to log out.
A confirmation tone is heard.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Feature Interactions
Page 298
32
Auto Answer All
A calling group member with an analog multiline telephone can use Auto
Answer All when an answering machine is connected to the extension.
When the feature is activated, all incoming calls ringing on the group
member’s telephone (both calls for the calling group and calls to the
group member’s own extension) are answered automatically by the
answering machine.
Auto Dial
The Calls-in-Queue Alarm button is assigned on a multiline telephone by
programming an inside Auto Dial button with the calling group’s extension
number.
When a DSS adjunct is not available, Auto Dial buttons programmed with
each calling group member’s extension are used by the calling group
supervisor to monitor group member availability.
Barge-In
Barge-In can be used for calling group members, but the member’s
extension must be used instead of the calling group extension. If a user
tries to use Barge-In after dialing the calling group extension number and
waiting in the queue, the feature has no effect. All VMI ports always have
Privacy on.
If a person uses Barge-In to reach another user who is waiting in a calling
group queue, the queued call is removed from the queue and both people
are connected. If a person uses Barge-In for the delay announcement
extension and the device is playing a message to a caller, the call is
removed from the queue and both people are connected.
In Release 5.0 and later systems when the Most Idle agent hunt type is
used, if a supervisor or operator barges in on a calling group call and
hangs up before the agent does, then Most Idle status is not affected. If
the agent hangs up first, he or she moves to the end of the Most Idle
queue.
Barge-In cannot be used to join calls to VMI ports.
Callback
Calls made to a calling group are not eligible for Callback because the
calls ring into the calling group’s queue. However, Callback can be used
for calls to individual calling group member extensions or to the delay
announcement device. Calling group calls are not sent to the group
member extension either when the calling group member uses Callback
for a busy extension or pool or when another person is using Callback to
reach a calling group member and the callback call is ringing on that
person’s telephone.
Caller ID
Caller ID information appears on the display. Outgoing call information is
not displayed.
Call Waiting
Calls made to a calling group are not eligible for Call Waiting because the
call rings into the calling group’s queue. However, Call Waiting can be
used for calls to individual members of the calling group. If the calling
group member is a fax machine, the call-waiting tone is not given to the
fax jack.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 299
Camp-On
Users can transfer calls to a calling group by using Camp-On, but calls do
not return to the originating extension, even if not answered within the
programmed camp-on interval. If the calling group is made up of fax
machines, a call-waiting tone is not given to the fax jack when the call is
camped-on.
Conference
Calls waiting in the calling group queue or ringing at a calling group
member’s extension cannot be added to a conference call. A user must
be connected to a calling group member before the call can be added to
the conference.
Coverage
A calling group cannot be programmed as a receiver for Individual
Coverage. A coverage group can have only one calling group as a
receiver. If a calling group is programmed as a receiver for a coverage
group, it must be the only Group Coverage receiver. However, Individual
Coverage (primary and/or secondary) receivers can be programmed. A
calling group can be a receiver for as many as 30 coverage groups.
As soon as the call is sent from the calling group queue to a calling group
member or the delay announcement, the ringing and lit LED are removed
from the sender’s extension (except for an outside call received on a
personal line).
Coverage VMS Off can be activated if the user does not want outside
calls to be sent to the voice messaging system.
A calling group cannot be a sender. A calling group member can be a
sender for Individual Coverage (Primary or Secondary) or Group
Coverage. Calls to the calling group extension number are sent only to
the calling group member’s Individual Coverage receivers and not to the
Group Coverage receivers. Calls to the calling group member’s individual
extension are sent to both Individual and Group Coverage receivers.
CTI Link
When an MLX extension is programmed as a CTI link (Release 5.0 and
later systems only), it is removed from membership in calling groups.
If another calling group is programmed as the overflow receiver for a
calling group, and overflow call can arrive at a personal line button at the
extension of an overflow calling group member before it is delivered to
any SA button in the overflow calling group.
Digital Data Calls
Lines intended for data calls should not be mixed in the same calling
group with lines intended for voice calls.
Video systems can connect using only 1B data connections (providing the
video application supports 1B data) when receiving a call through a
calling group. A calling group dispenses only one call to each calling
group member.
Direct Station
Selector
The DSS button’s LED for a calling group extension number indicates the
status of calls in the calling group queue. In releases prior to 5.0, the LED
is on when calls are at or above the programmed threshold and off when
the number is below the threshold.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 300
Direct Station
Selector
continued
In Release 5.0 and later systems, the DSS button flashes if the number of
calls waiting in the queue is greater than or equal to Threshold 1 but fewer
than Threshold 3. The LED lights steadily if the number of waiting calls is
greater than or equal to Threshold 3. Otherwise, it flashes. If three
thresholds are needed, an inside Auto Dial button should be used to
monitor queue status
Display
Calling group agents with MLX display telephones see feedback
messages on the display when they log into the Available state. When a
calling group supervisor with an MLX display telephone logs calling group
members in or out, a message appears on the supervisor’s display and
on the group member’s display. After pressing either the programmed
Available or Unavailable button or dialing the feature code, supervisors
with MLX telephones are prompted to indicate which group member they
want to log in or out.
When a calling group member with an MLX telephone receives an outside
call for the calling group, the label of the calling group or Grappled
appears on the display along with the label for the line on which the call
came in. If automatic number identification (ANI), station identification
(SID, Release 2.0 and later systems), or another PRI-based caller
identification service (Release 4.2 and later systems) is available, the
number of the caller is shown on the display on MLX telephones after the
More button is pressed. Analog multiline telephone users see only the
line information.
Any MLX telephone user can inspect the number of calls in queue by
pressing the Inspct button and then pressing a button programmed with
the calling group’s extension. The display shows the label associated with
the calling group and the number of calls.
Do Not Disturb
If a calling group member uses Do Not Disturb, calls are not sent to the
group member even if he or she is logged in and available.
Extension Status
Extension Status allows calling group supervisors to change and monitor
calling group member status and enables group members to sign in and
out of the calling group.
Fax Extension
The calling group receives fax message-waiting indications directed to
the calling group. The message-waiting receiver cannot distinguish
between messages left for the calling group and fax or personal
messages.
Forward and
Follow Me
An available calling group member is automatically logged out when she
or he forwards calls to an extension or telephone number. If a calling
group member logs in while calls are being forwarded, Forward or
Remote Call Forward is automatically canceled. Calls cannot be
forwarded to calling groups.
Forward and
Follow Me
continued
A line/trunk can be assigned as a personal line and ring into a calling
group. The principal user of the personal line can use Remote Call
Forwarding to forward calls to an outside telephone number. In this case,
incoming calls do not ring into the calling group.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 301
Hold
A calling group member who puts a call on hold by using the Hold button
is considered unavailable for incoming calls. Inside callers waiting in the
calling group queue cannot put themselves on hold.
HotLine
HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later systems) can dial a calling
group extension number.
Integrated
Administration
AUDIX Voice Power services and the FAX Response service are set up
as members of dedicated calling groups. Integrated Administration sets
up the necessary calling groups with the applicable options for correct
operation of these services.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, coverage delay settings affect the
ability of Integrated Administration to program some Group Calling
options for AUDIX Voice Power. See ‘‘Integrated Administration’’ on page
328 for details.
Labeling
An alphanumeric label can be assigned to the calling group. The label is
displayed on incoming calling group calls to MLX calling group members
or when an MLX display telephone user presses the Inspct button and an
Auto Dial button programmed with the calling group’s extension number.
Messaging
Users can leave messages for the calling group only if the system has
been programmed with a calling group message-waiting receiver. The
receiver also receives fax message-waiting indications directed to the
calling group. The message-waiting receiver cannot distinguish between
messages left for the calling group and fax or personal messages.
Multi-Function
Module
A Multi-Function Module can be a member of a calling group, can be
assigned as a delay announcement for a calling group, or can be used to
connect an external alert for a Calls-in-Queue Alarm. An MFM used for
the delay announcement or Calls-in-Queue Alert should not be assigned
as a group member.
Music On Hold
An outside caller waiting in the calling group queue hears Music On Hold,
if programmed.
Night Service
In Release 2.0 and later systems, a calling group can be a Night Service
group member.
Park
A calling group member who parks a call is considered available to
receive another call.
Personal Lines
If a person uses a shared personal line button to join a call in the calling
group queue, the call is removed from the queue. If a delay
announcement is playing, it is disconnected from the call.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Personal Lines
continued
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 302
To allow all calling group members’ telephones to ring when an outside
call is not answered within three rings, the lines/trunks programmed to
ring into the queue can also be assigned as personal lines on group
member telephones and programmed for Delay Ring. This does not work
for inside calls, remote access calls, DID calls, or when a delay
announcement device is assigned to the group.
In a Hybrid/PBX mode system where the Most Idle hunt type (Release 5.0
and later systems only) is used, a calling group member may receive a
calling group call at an SA button, then put that call on hold at the SA
button. If the agent then picks up the call at a personal line button at his or
her telephone, the system no longer considers the call a calling group
call. Therefore, the agent moves to the end of the most-idle queue
(Release 5.0 and later systems) and can receive another calling group
call immediately.
Pickup
A calling group member can be a member of a Pickup group. Calling
group members can use Pickup to answer a call (either a calling group or
individual group member extension) that is ringing at another group
member’s telephone. Line Pickup can be used to pick up a call that is in
the calling group queue. Picking up a call on hold moves a calling group
agent to the end of the most-idle queue (Release 5.0 and later systems
only).
Pools
Lines/trunks assigned to pools can be assigned to ring into a calling
group. An incoming call on a line/trunk assigned to the pool rings on an
SA button even if the calling group member has a Pool button assigned
to his or her telephone.
Primary Rate Interface A PRI line that is a member of a B-channel group programmed for routing
(PRI) and T1
by dial plan should not belong to a calling group. A line that is part of a
B-channel group included in a calling group should not be programmed
for routing by dial plan.
Recall/Timed Flash
A user who has received an inside calling group call can use Recall.
Remote Access
Remote access users cannot log into a calling group but can call into a
calling group regardless of the restrictions applied. When the call rings at
a calling group member’s telephone, it rings as an outside call.
A calling group can be programmed to receive calls from remote access
users to invalid extensions. If a line/trunk is programmed for both Remote
Access and Group Calling, Remote Access overrides Group Calling.
Ringing Options
Abbreviated ringing is not operable for calls to the calling group extension
because a calling group member active on a call is considered
unavailable for incoming calls. In Hybrid/PBX mode, calling group
members should program SA buttons for Immediate Ring.
Signal/Notify
A Signaling button cannot be programmed for a calling group.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
SMDR
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 303
Calls to calling groups are associated with the first extension to handle
the call. If the call is answered by the calling group delay announcement
device, the extension for the delay announcement device is recorded on
the SMDR record, even if the call is later answered by a calling group
member or overflow group member.
In Release 4.1 and prior systems, timing begins as soon as the calling
group member or delay announcement device answers the call.
In Release 4.2 and later systems, timing for incoming calls to Auto Login
or Auto Logout calling groups begins when a call arrives at the system. If
the caller hangs up while listening to a delay announcement, the call is
associated with the extension of the device.
In Release 4.2 and later systems, the programmable SMDR TALK field
(factory setting is off) records the time agents spend talking to incoming
callers; the agents’ calling groups must be assigned the Auto Login or
Auto Logout group type. Calls answered by a delay announcement
device, calling group overflow receiver, or QCC queue overflow receiver
are reported with blank TALK entries.
Release 4.2 and later systems supply the following additional information
about incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout calling groups,
providing the SMDR Talk Time option is enabled:
■
If a call goes to an overflow receiver, SMDR marks the CALL TAG
field with an ampersand (&).
■
If a call is answered at a non-calling group extension, SMDR puts an
exclamation point (!) in the CALL TAG field.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Calls to a calling group ring on SA or ICOM buttons on the telephones of
calling group members. A calling group member who is making or
receiving a call on a Shared SA button is considered unavailable by the
system; the principal owner, however, is considered available and can still
receive calls directed to the calling group.
System
Renumbering
Extensions for calling groups (the factory settings: 770–791, 7920–7929)
are assigned and can be renumbered through system renumbering.
Transfer
A call transferred to a calling group is not returned to the originator but is
handled as any other call received in the calling group. For example, the
system follows the same hunt sequence to locate an available calling
group member, and the call is eligible for a delay announcement if one is
programmed. A calling group member who has a call on hold for transfer
is considered available for a call because transfer hold requires pressing
the Transfer button rather than the Hold button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Group Calling
Transfer
continued
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 304
Voice-announced transfers cannot be made to a calling group. There is
no limit to the number of calls that can be transferred to a calling group.
When an agent transfers a call, the system moves his or extension to the
end of the most-idle queue (Release 5.0 and later systems only).
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when an inside caller is transferred to a
calling group and no members are available, the inside caller hears a
one-burst ringback. When an outside caller is transferred to a calling
group and no members are available, the outside caller hears a 2-burst
ringback or Music On Hold (if programmed).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Headset Options
Page 305
Headset Options
32
At a Glance
32
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Headset Hang Up
Telephone users, operators
Extension Information
All
MLX telephones
Headset Status
Headset Auto Answer
Headset/Handset Mute
MLX Display Labels
Headset Hang Up
Headset Status
Headset Auto Answer
Headset/Handset Mute
*782
*780
*783
*781 (centralized telephone programming only; not applicable
on QCC)
Hdset,Hang Up
Hdset,Status [Hdset,Stat]
Hdset,Auto Answer [Hdset,Auto]
Hdset,mute [Hdset,Mute]
32
Description
Four headset options are provided for MLX telephone users and operators who
have an optional headset adjunct:
■
Headset Hang Up (except for Queued Call Console)
■
Headset Status
■
Headset Auto Answer
■
Headset/Handset Mute
Headset Hang Up
32
When programmed on a button on an MLX telephone or MLX Direct-Line Console
(DLC), Headset Hang Up serves two purposes:
■
A Headset Hang Up button automatically turns on headset operation for
that extension, so that the user or operator can answer and make calls
using the headset instead of the handset. Removing the Headset Hang Up
button automatically turns off headset operation for that extension.
■
The user or operator presses the Headset Hang Up button to disconnect a
headset call. The button replaces switchhook operation, which is disabled
when headset operation is active. Pressing the button has no effect on its
LEDs, which are always off.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Headset Options
Page 306
For a user or operator to be able to use a headset, a Headset Hang Up button
must be programmed (centralized telephone programming) for an MLX telephone
or MLX DLC.
Headset users press the programmed Headset Hangup button after each call. If
the user does not press the Headset Hangup button, new calls still arrive
correctly, but the LED status of the extension (as shown on other extensions and
DSSs) is not updated.
A Headset Hang Up button is not needed and cannot be programmed on a
Queued Call Console (QCC).
To give control of headset/handset operation to an MLX telephone user or MLX
DLC operator who has a Headset Hang Up button, a Headset Status button can
also be programmed, as described in the next section. On a telephone or console
with a Headset Hang Up button but without a Headset Status button, headset
operation is always on.
NOTE:
If an MLX telephone or MLX DLC has a Headset Status button and/or a
Headset Auto Answer button in addition to a Headset Hang Up button, the
Headset Hang Up button can be removed through centralized
programming without removing the Headset Status or Headset Auto
Answer button. If either of these features is on, the green LED next to the
button stays on. However, the telephone or console is no longer in headset
operation and neither the Headset Status nor the Headset Auto Answer
button has any effect, whether on or off, until a Headset Hang Up button is
reprogrammed for the extension.
Headset Status
32
When a Headset Hang Up button is programmed on an MLX telephone or MLX
DLC, Headset Status is automatically turned on. Programming a Headset Status
button also allows the user or operator to turn headset operation off and on
manually. With headset operation on (green LED next to Headset Status button is
on), the user or operator answers and makes calls with the headset. With headset
operation off (green LED next to Headset Status button is off), the user or
operator answers and makes calls with the handset.
Two conditions are necessary for an MLX telephone user or MLX DLC operator to
use the Headset Status feature:
■
A Headset Hang Up button must be programmed as described in the
previous section.
■
A Headset Status button must be programmed on the telephone or
console, through either extension programming or centralized telephone
programming.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Headset Options
Page 307
A Headset Status button is a fixed feature on a QCC and cannot be deleted or
changed.
To use Headset Auto Answer, Headset/Handset Mute, or Headset Hang Up on a
telephone or console with a Headset Status button, Headset Status must be on.
When Headset Status is on, switchhook operation is disabled. The handset or
speakerphone can be used to make or answer a call, but the only way for the user
or operator to disconnect from a call is by pressing the Headset Hang Up button.
The user or operator can turn off the headset and switch back to switchhook
operation by pressing the Headset Status button; the green LED next to the
button turns off.
Headset Auto Answer
32
A Headset Auto Answer button allows an MLX telephone user or operator with a
headset to be connected automatically to a ringing call. Headset Status must be
on, as described in the two previous sections, before Headset Auto Answer can
be used.
When Headset Auto Answer is turned on, the green LED next to Headset Auto
Answer button is on and the user or operator hears a zip tone through the headset
to indicate an incoming call. Following the tone is a brief pause, during which the
microphone is temporarily disabled to prevent the user’s or operator’s private
conversation from being heard by the caller.
If a user with Headset Auto Answer on presses the button with a ringing call (for
example, when Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned off), the call is answered
without the user hearing zip tone.
Headset Auto Answer can be turned on and off during a call without disconnecting
the caller and takes effect immediately.
Headset Auto Answer does not automatically answer voice-announced calls.
When the user or operator is on a call, Headset Auto Answer is turned off; calls
are not answered automatically until the caller hangs up or the user or operator
presses the Headset Hang Up button to disconnect the call.
When the user or operator has a call on hold or is in the process of transferring a
call or setting up a conference, Headset Auto Answer is also turned off. If the user
or operator pressed the Conf, Hold, Direct Voice Mail (to transfer to voice mail),
or Transfer button, he or she must press the Headset Auto Answer button to turn
the feature back on before another call can be answered automatically.
Two buttons are necessary for an MLX telephone user or MLX DLC operator to
use the Headset Auto Answer feature:
■
A Headset Hang Up button must be programmed, as described earlier.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Headset Options
■
Page 308
A Headset Auto Answer button must be programmed on the telephone or
console, through either extension programming or centralized telephone
programming.
Users who have extensions programmed for Headset Auto Answer may also
receive Caller ID information provided by a loop-start line connected to the 800
GS/LS-ID module. They should set the line buttons (SA, ICOM, or other) where
the Caller ID information arrives to Delay Ring so that Caller ID information is not
lost.
A Headset Auto Answer button is a fixed feature on a QCC and cannot be
deleted or changed.
Headset/Handset Mute
32
Headset/Handset Mute allows an MLX telephone user or operator to turn the
microphone in the headset or handset off and on. The user or operator can then
talk privately with another person in the same room without the caller hearing the
conversation. If headset operation is on, Headset/Handset Mute turns off the
headset microphone; if headset operation is off, Headset/Handset Mute turns off
the handset microphone. The red LED next to the Headset/Handset Mute button
is on when the headset or handset microphone is off; it is off when the headset or
handset microphone is on.
When headset operation is off, the handset microphone can be turned off using
Headset/Handset Mute only when the user lifts the handset.
When headset operation is on, the user presses the programmed Headset Hang
Up button to end an outside call even if the caller hangs up. For an MLX
telephone user or MLX DLC operator to use Headset/Handset Mute, a
Headset/Handset Mute button must be programmed on the telephone or console,
through either extension programming or centralized telephone programming.
A Headset/Handset Mute button is a fixed feature on a QCC and cannot be
deleted or changed.
Considerations and Constraints
32
The headset, handset, and speakerphone can be used only one at a time.
Headset Hang Up cannot be programmed on a QCC.
Headset options cannot be used on analog multiline telephones or on single-line
telephones.
A headset user must manually select a line button or Call button (on the QCC)
before making an inside or outside call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Headset Options
Page 309
A user can press the Speaker button to move the call from the headset to the
speakerphone.
Privacy should be programmed when headset users with Headset Auto Answer
turned on either have Shared SA buttons or share one or more personal lines.
Privacy keeps people from competing for the same call. When two or more users
answer the same call on an SSA or personal line button, the red and green LEDs
next to the button go on, but only one person can talk with the caller.
Headset users should press the Headset Hangup button after each call. If the
user does not press the Headset Hangup button, new calls still arrive correctly,
but the LED status of the extension (as shown on other extensions and DSSs) is
not updated.
Telephone Differences
32
Queued Call Consoles
32
A QCC does not have a Headset Hang Up button, nor can the button be
programmed. Headset operation is automatically available, and Headset Auto
Answer, Headset/Handset Mute, and Headset Status are fixed buttons on a
QCC.
The function of disconnecting calls served by the Headset Hang Up feature is
replaced by the Release, Forced Release, Camp-On, and Automatic Release
features.
Other Multiline Telephones
32
Headset options apply to MLX telephones and consoles only.
A telephone user or operator cannot use feature codes or extension programming
to activate Headset Hang Up. This feature must be programmed on a button
through centralized telephone programming.
A telephone user or operator cannot use feature codes to turn Headset Auto
Answer, Headset/Handset Mute, or Headset Status on or off. These features must
be programmed on buttons through either extension programming or centralized
telephone programming. MLX display telephone users can select the feature from
the display only during extension programming.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Headset Options
Feature Interactions
Page 310
32
Authorization Code
If a call is made using an authorization code, pressing the Headset Hang
Up button causes deactivation of the Authorization Code feature.
Auto Dial
If headset operation is turned on at the telephone or console, select a line
button before dialing an extension or an outside number using Auto Dial.
Automatic Line
Selection
Automatic Line Selection does not work when an MLX telephone or
console is in headset operation. A headset user must select a line
manually before making a call.
Barge-In
If Barge-In is used to contact a user with Headset Auto Answer turned on,
the call is answered automatically.
Callback
Callback calls are answered automatically when Headset Auto Answer is
turned on, but the user hears the dequeuing tone instead of zip tone.
When both caller and receiver have headsets with Headset Auto Answer
on, the person being called hears zip tone when the callback call is
completed, but the callback originator does not hear zip tone or
dequeuing tone.
Caller ID
When using Headset Auto Answer on an extension, the intercom and line
buttons should be programmed for Delay Ring so that the Caller ID
information, available after the first ring, is not lost.
Conference
Headset Auto Answer is turned off automatically while the user sets up a
conference and must be turned on manually to resume using the feature.
Direct Voice Mail
When an MLX telephone user (except for a QCC operator) transfers a call
using Direct Voice Mail, Headset Auto Answer is turned off and must be
turned on manually to resume using the feature.
Do Not Disturb
If an MLX telephone user with Headset Auto Answer turned on uses Do
Not Disturb, any calls that override Do Not Disturb (such as Barge-In calls
and callback calls) are answered automatically.
Hold
Headset Auto Answer is turned off automatically when a user or operator
puts a call on hold and must be turned on manually to resume using the
feature.
Paging
A user or operator with a headset operation active hears a group page
over the speakerphone.
Park
If a user or operator has a call parked, another call can be answered
automatically by using Headset Auto Answer.
Privacy
Privacy should be programmed when headset users with Headset Auto
Answer on have Shared SA buttons or share one or more personal lines.
Privacy keeps the users from competing for the same call. When two or
more users answer the same call on a Shared SA or personal line button,
the red and green LEDs next to the button go on, but only one person can
talk with the caller.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Headset Options
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 311
Ringing Options
Headset Auto Answer does not automatically answer calls ringing on
buttons programmed for No Ring. A user must manually select the button
to answer the call. When abbreviated ringing is programmed, the user
hears an abbreviated ring if another call comes in while he or she is
already on a call.
Ringing/Idle Line
Preference
Ringing Line Preference does not operate if Headset Auto Answer is
turned off while headset operation is active. To answer a call, press the
button with the ringing call. Idle Line Preference does not operate when
headset operation is active. Select a line button manually before making
an inside or outside call.
Transfer
When an MLX telephone user (except for a QCC operator) transfers a
call, Headset Auto Answer is turned off and must be turned on manually
to resume using the feature.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Page 312
Hold
32
At a Glance
32
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Feature Codes
Hold
Hold Release
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
Operator Information, System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All
771
**
Change hold disconnect interval:
LinesTrunks→More→HoldDiscnct
Enable or disable DLC operator automatic Hold for all DLC
operators:
●
●
Operator→DLC Hold
Change operator hold timer for all DLC and QCC operators:
●
Operator→Hold Timer
Specify whether calls on hold return to QCC queue after
operator hold timer has expired twice:
●
Operator→Queued Call→Hold Rtrn
Select automatic Hold or automatic release for all QCC
operators:
●
Factory Settings
Hold Disconnect Interval
DLC Operator Automatic
Hold
Operator Hold Timer
Hold Timer for Users
QCC Hold Return
QCC Hold Release
Description
Operator→Queued Call→HoldRelease
Long (450 ms)
Disabled
60 sec (range 10–255 sec)
60 sec (fixed)
Remain on Hold
Automatic Release
32
Hold allows a user to leave a call temporarily in order to perform some other
function, such as take another call, look up information, or activate a feature.
When a user, except for a Queued Call Console (QCC) operator, puts an outside
call on hold, the green LED next to the line button flashes at a faster rate to
distinguish the call from calls put on hold by other users.
An outside caller on hold hears Music On Hold, if programmed, or silence. If a call
on hold is not picked up within a set length of time, the person who put the call on
hold hears a reminder: a beep for a telephone user, an abbreviated ring for a
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 313
system operator. This hold timer is fixed at 60 seconds for telephone users. It is
programmable for DLC and QCC operators, as described below.
At an MLX display telephone, the message Call On Hold appears briefly on the
display when the user first puts a call on hold. This message reappears briefly
each time the hold timer expires.
Five systemwide Hold options can be set through system programming:
■
Hold Disconnect Interval. Determines how long the system waits before
releasing the line when an outside caller on hold on a loop-start line hangs
up. The hold disconnect interval should be programmed to match the local
telephone company’s disconnect timing: Long if disconnect is unreliable,
and Short if disconnect is reliable. The hold disconnect interval applies to
all telephone users and system operators. This interval can be set to the
following values:
— Long (the factory-set value): 450 ms
— Short: 50 ms
■
DLC Operator Automatic Hold. Determines what happens when a DLC
operator is on a call and presses another line button, an Auto Dial button,
or a Direct Station Selector (DSS) button. The DLC Operator Automatic
Hold setting applies only to DLC operators. This option can be set to the
following values:
— Enabled. The active call is automatically put on hold. This prevents
accidental disconnection of callers.
— Disabled (factory-set time). The active call is disconnected. This allows
an operator to disconnect one call and answer or dial another by
pressing a single button.
■
Operator Hold Timer. Determines how long a call stays on hold before the
system reminds the DLC or QCC operator that it has not been picked up.
The operator hold timer applies only to DLC and QCC operators. The
operator hears a reminder (abbreviated ring) when the timer expires. This
timer can be set to a value between 10 and 255 seconds (the factory-set
value is 60 seconds).
If a call is ringing at the console when the timer expires, the reminder is
delayed for 10 seconds so that the operator has a chance to hear it. (If after
10 seconds the call is still ringing or a new call is ringing, the reminder is
delayed for another 10 seconds, and so on.)
■
QCC Hold Return. Determines what happens to a call that a QCC
operator has put on hold and that has not been picked up after the operator
hold timer has expired twice (the timer is not counted as having expired
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Page 314
until the operator actually hears the reminder). The QCC Hold Return
option applies only to QCC operators. This option can be set to the
following values:
— Remain on Hold (factory setting). The call remains on hold until picked
up. A QCC operator continues to hear an abbreviated ring every time
the operator hold timer expires.
— Return to Queue. The call returns to the QCC queue. The caller hears
ringback.
■
QCC Hold Release. Determines what happens when a QCC operator is
on a call and presses another Call button. The Hold Release option applies
only to QCC operators. This option (equivalent to DLC operator automatic
Hold for DLC operators) can be set to the following values:
— Automatic Hold. The active call is put on hold. This prevents accidental
disconnection of callers.
— Automatic Release (factory setting). The active call is released. This
allows an operator to disconnect one call and answer another by
pressing a single button.
Considerations and Constraints
32
The factory setting for the hold disconnect interval is Long (450 ms) because that
is the interval used by most local telephone companies.
If the hold disconnect interval set for the system does not match that of the local
telephone company, the system may have the following problems with calls on
hold:
■
If the interval is shorter than the setting at the local central office, callers on
hold may be disconnected.
■
If the interval is longer than the setting at the central office, the LED next to
the line button continues to flash after a caller on hold hangs up.
Both parties on an inside call cannot put each other on hold. If a user presses the
Hold button while waiting on hold on an inside call, the call is disconnected.
Telephone Differences
32
Direct-Line Consoles
32
When DLC operator automatic Hold is enabled, a DLC operator can put an active
call on hold by pressing another line button or DSS button.
If the system is programmed for one-touch Transfer, an operator can press an
Auto Dial or DSS button to put an active inside or outside call on hold and initiate
a transfer, whether or not DLC operator automatic Hold is enabled.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Page 315
If the system is not programmed for one-touch Transfer, an operator can press an
Auto Dial or DSS button to put an active outside call on hold and initiate a transfer,
whether or not DLC operator automatic Hold is enabled. (This capability is called
one-touch Hold.)
Every time the operator hold timer expires, a DLC operator hears an abbreviated
ring as a reminder that a call is on hold.
Queued Call Consoles
32
Pressing the Hold button to put a caller on hold makes a QCC operator available
for incoming calls from the QCC queue.
The first two times the operator hold timer expires, a QCC operator hears an
abbreviated ring as a reminder that a call is on hold.
If an operator does not pick up a call by the time the timer expires twice, the Hold
Return option determines whether the call remains on hold or returns to the QCC
queue. If this option is programmed for calls to remain on hold, an operator hears
the abbreviated ring every time the operator hold timer expires and no call is
ringing on the console. If the option is programmed for calls to return to the queue,
each call on hold at the QCC is timed individually. (The operator hold timer is
applied separately to each Call button.)
When a held call returns to the queue after the second hold reminder, the call is
identified by call type and by the name and extension number of the operator who
put it on hold. The second line of the QCC display also shows the caller
information.
Other Multiline Telephones
32
Multiline telephones have built-in Hold buttons.
When a call is first put on hold, the display on an MLX telephone briefly shows
Call on Hold. This message reappears briefly each time the hold timer expires.
Single-Line Telephones
32
In Release 4.0 or later systems, single-line telephone users should use Park
instead of Hold to put a call on hold.
If a single-line telephone user with a call on hold hangs up, the call rings back at
the extension.
A single-line telephone user can put a call on hold by sending a switchhook flash:
pressing and releasing the Recall or Flash button or the switchhook, depending
on the telephone model. If a single-line telephone user with a call on hold hangs
up, the call rings back at the extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Page 316
NOTE:
Some single-line telephones, such as Lucent Technologies models
2500YMGL, 2500MMGK, and 8110M, use a timed or positive disconnect.
On these telephones, pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. Use
the Recall or Flash button instead of the switchhook to send a switchhook
flash. (The 8100M telephone must have positive disconnect programmed
on the telephone as described in its manual.)
Feature Interactions
32
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
The Hold button is used to enter a wild card character in an Allowed or
Disallowed List entry.
Authorization Code
Initiating the Hold feature after entering an authorization code deactivates
the Authorization Code feature for subsequent calls.
Auto Dial
The Hold button is used to enter the Pause special character in a
telephone number programmed on an Auto Dial button.
Basic Rate Interface
An active call on a BRI line can be placed on hold by using the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System Hold feature. All call appearances
(such as LEDs) are the same as for other non-BRI lines.
Callback
Pressing the Hold button while waiting for a queued call is similar to
hanging up. The green LED flashes next to the line button, indicating that
the button is being used for the queued call.
Call Waiting
A person with all calls on hold cannot hear the call-waiting tone.
Conference
When adding other participants to a conference, the conference originator
hears the hold reminder when the conference is on hold for longer than
one minute (if the originator is a telephone user) or for longer than the
operator hold timer setting (if the originator is an operator).
If DLC operator automatic Hold is programmed and used by a DLC
operator while setting up a conference, the entire conference goes on
hold.
Both parties on an inside call cannot put each other on hold. If a user
presses the Hold button while waiting on hold for a conference initiated
by another user (an inside call) or if the user presses the Conf button
while waiting on hold on an inside call, the entire conference call is
disconnected.
Conference
continued
The initiator of a conference call can leave the conference by touching
Hold. The conference initiator can rejoin the conference call by touching
the line button of any conference participant.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold on a
Cover button can be added to a conference by a user who has a personal
line for the call.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 317
Coverage calls answered by any type of receiver can be put on hold. The
hold timer or operator hold timer applies to a coverage call on hold.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold on a
Cover button can be picked up by a user who has a personal line for the
call. When the call is picked up, the green LED next to the personal line
lights steadily; however, the call is still on hold at the coverage receiver’s
telephone. Therefore, the user who picked up the held call cannot transfer
the call. In order to transfer a call on hold at a Cover button, use Pickup
instead of picking up on a personal line button.
CTI Link
A CTI link application can put an SA button call on hold.
Digital Data Calls
Data calls cannot be put on hold.
2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. For
this reason, if a call is on hold at a passive-bus MLX telephone when a 2B
call comes in, the passive-bus MLX telephone cannot retrieve the held
call until the 2B video call is over.
Directories
The Hold button is used to enter the Pause special character in a
telephone number programmed as a System Directory, Extension
Directory, or Personal Directory listing.
Direct Station
Selector
When one-touch Hold is programmed, only outside callers are
automatically put on hold when a DSS button for a user, calling group, or
paging group is pressed while another call is active. For an inside caller,
pressing a DSS button for a user sends a manual signal to the user’s
extension; pressing a DSS button for a calling group or paging group has
no effect.
Display
When a call is first put on hold, the display on an MLX telephone briefly
shows Call On Hold. This message reappears each time the hold timer
expires.
On a QCC only, when a held call returns to the queue after the second
hold reminder, the call is identified by call type and by the name and
extension number of the operator who put it on hold. The second line of
the QCC display also shows the caller information.
Fax Extension
If an extension is programmed as a fax extension, the telephone at that
extension is unable to use the Hold feature.
Group Calling
A calling group member who has put a call on hold is considered
unavailable for incoming calls. A user waiting in the calling group queue
cannot put the call on hold.
Headset Options
Headset Auto Answer is automatically turned off when an MLX telephone
user puts a call on hold.
HotLine
Hold is not available at HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later
systems).
Inspect
If a user presses the Hold button while in Inspect mode, Inspect is
canceled. The system puts the active call (if there is one) on hold.
Multi-Function
Module
A single-line telephone connected to an MFM cannot put a call on hold
because the MFM cannot send a switchhook flash.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 318
Paging
A speakerphone paging call can be put on hold only by the originator.
However, when an SA or ICOM Voice button is used to make an inside
voice-announced call, either the originator or the person being called can
put the call on hold.
Park
When a user or operator parks a call received on a personal line button
and the call is picked up at another extension and then put on hold, other
users who share the personal line cannot press the line button and pick
up the call.
Personal Lines and
Pickup
The hold timer or operator hold timer applies to a call on hold for transfer.
The user or operator hears a reminder (a beep or abbreviated ring) after
the timer expires.
If a call is received on a personal line and is transferred to another user
who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on
hold, another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared
personal line button and pick up the call. If for some reason the person
who received the transfer and put the call on hold cannot return to the
call, another user must use Pickup to pick up the call. For example, an
operator can take a message and then disconnect the caller.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a
Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be picked up by a user who
has a personal line button for the call. When the call is picked up, the
green LED next to the personal line lights steadily; however, the call
remains on hold at the Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button. The user
who picks up on the personal line cannot transfer the picked-up call. In
order to transfer a call on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button,
use Pickup instead of picking up on a personal line button.
Privacy
Privacy protects a call only while a user is active on the call. Privacy does
not keep a user at another extension from picking up a call while it is on
hold.
Recall/Timed Flash
Single-line telephones use a switchhook flash to put a call on hold by
pressing and releasing the Recall or Flash button (or if the telephone
does not have positive disconnect, press and release the switchhook)
depending on the telephone model.
Speed Dial
The Hold button is used to enter the Pause special character in a
Personal Speed Dial or System Speed Dial telephone number.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
If a call is put on hold on an SA or Shared SA button, it can be picked up
at the principal extension’s SA button or at any other Shared SA button
corresponding to the button with the held call. The hold reminder is heard
only at the extension that put the call on hold. In Release 2.1 and later
systems, any user with a Shared SA button for the call can transfer the
held call after picking it up on the SSA button.
Transfer
Calls on hold for transfer are timed so that a user or system operator
hears a reminder after the timer expires.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Hold
Page 319
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a
Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be picked up by a user who
has a personal line button for the call. When the call is picked up, the
green LED next to the personal line lights steadily; however, the call
remains on hold at the Cover, SA, SSA, or Pool button. The user who
picks up on the personal line cannot transfer the picked-up call. In order
to transfer a call on hold at a Cover, SA, SSA or Pool button, use Pickup
instead of answering on a personal line button.
Idle Line Preference
32
See ‘‘Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference’’ on page 56.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
HotLine
Page 320
HotLine
32
At a Glance
32
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Factory Setting
Description
Telephone users
Extension Information
All
Single-line telephones
To assign a HotLine extension:
● Extensions→More→More→HotLine→Dial ext. no.
Disabled
32
In Release 5.0 and later systems, the HotLine feature allows system managers to
program single-line telephone extensions connected to 008 OPT, 012, or 016
modules for HotLine operation. When the HotLine feature is programmed, a user
dials an inside or outside telephone number by lifting the handset of the
telephone.
The HotLine feature works in conjunction with Personal Speed Dial programming
(see ‘‘Speed Dial’’ on page 550) to automatically dial the first programmed
Personal Speed Dial number (code 01) as soon as someone goes off-hook at the
single-line telephone.
This feature is intended to allow easy access to a telephone number in sales,
hotel, and other environments. HotLine extensions, for security reasons, are not
intended to perform any function other than immediate and convenient dialing of a
single telephone or extension number. Because a switchhook flash from a
HotLine extension is not recognized by the system, the Hold, Conference, and
Transfer features are not available.
If the single-line telephone includes a dialpad, a user can dial digits after the call is
connected. This allows the use of an integrated voice response or automated
attendant menu.
The HotLine feature uses the existing Personal Speed Dial code 01 for a
single-line telephone extension. Prior to the assignment of an extension as a
HotLine, the required Personal Speed Dial number can be programmed at the
extension or through centralized telephone programming. After an extension has
been programmed as a HotLine, there is only one opportunity to program a
Personal Speed Dial code at the telephone. For security reasons, any subsequent
changes must be made through centralized telephone programming. No further
programming of any kind can be performed at the telephone.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
HotLine
Page 321
The Personal Speed Dial number used at a single-line telephone HotLine can be
an inside extension number, an outside number including Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) or pool access codes (Hybrid/PBX mode only), a long-distance
service access code, or an Idle Line Access code (usually 9). Personal Speed
Dial numbers are limited to 40 characters.
A HotLine extension can access any personal, SA, or ICOM line normally used for
outgoing voice calls, as programmed using Automatic Line Selection (ALS) or Idle
Line Access (Key and Behind Switch modes). For outside calls, a personal line is
recommended. For more information see ‘‘Automatic Line Selection and
Ringing/Idle Line Preference’’ on page 56 (Key and Behind Switch modes),
‘‘Personal Lines’’ on page 421, and ‘‘System Access/Intercom Buttons’’ on page
573.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
If a HotLine extension dials out on a loop-start line, it must supply reliable
disconnect and be programmed with Reliable Disconnect enabled.
Otherwise, a caller may be able to make a toll call on the line after hanging
up on a HotLine call.
If a HotLine extension is not intended to receive calls, its lines should be set to No
Ring.
Considerations and Constraints
32
The first Personal Speed Dial number (code 01) can be programmed at the
single-line telephone prior to its assignment as a HotLine extension. After an
extension is programmed as a HotLine, the Personal Speed Dial code can be
programmed only once. Subsequent changes must be made using centralized
telephone programming.
Because switchhook flashes are not recognized from HotLine extensions, Hold,
Conference, and Transfer features are not available.
HotLine extensions cannot dial Night Service passwords. For this reason, the
Night Service Exclusion Lists may have to include HotLine extensions.
Alternatively, the numbers dialed by HotLine extensions may have to be added to
Night Service Emergency Lists.
The HotLine feature can be used with tip/ring devices such as modems, but is not
intended for this use.
Many features cannot be used at HotLine extensions. Examples include Last
Number Dial, Saved Number Dial, Pickup, and Park. Features not normally
available to single-line telephones (such as Do Not Disturb) are also unavailable
to HotLine extensions. However, other features such as calling restrictions and
ARS can be used at HotLine extensions. See the “Feature Interactions” topic in
this section for more information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
HotLine
Page 322
A HotLine telephone cannot be connected to an MFM (Multi-Function Module) or
GPA (General Purpose Adapter).
Telephone Differences
32
Only single-line telephones or tip/ring devices can be HotLine extensions.
Feature Interactions
32
Account Code Entry
HotLine extensions cannot use Account Code Entry.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
Allowed and Disallowed Lists can be assigned to HotLine extensions.
Automatic Route
Selection
HotLine extensions can use the ARS access code if it is programmed into
their Personal Speed Dial number.
Barge-In
HotLine calls can be barged into.
Callback
Callback is not intended for HotLine extensions. However, Automatic
Callback may be used, if programmed, for inside and ARS (Hybrid/PBX
mode only) calls. Selective Callback is also available.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting can be activated for a HotLine extension, but the telephone
cannot put the current call on hold and pick up a waiting call. Instead, the
user must hang up the current call and wait for the call-waiting call to ring.
Camp-On
HotLine calls can be camped onto but a HotLine extension cannot camp
on to calls.
Conference
Conference is not available at HotLine extensions.
Calling Restrictions
Calling restrictions can be programmed for HotLine extensions.
Coverage
Coverage features are not recommended for HotLine extensions.
Extension Status
Extension Status is not recommended for HotLine extensions because
HotLine extension cannot dial the # codes to change the Extension
Status.
Forward and
Follow Me
Forward and Follow Me are not intended for HotLine extensions but can
be used at these extensions. Forwarding must be programmed at the
extension before it is assigned as a HotLine extension. Follow Me cannot
be activated at a HotLine extension, and both Forward and Follow Me
must be cancelled at non-HotLine extensions.
Forward and
Follow Me
continued
Remote Call Forwarding is not intended for HotLine extensions but can
be programmed before the extension is assigned as a HotLine. HotLine
administration must be removed if the station is to cancel Remote Call
Forwarding.
Group Calling
A HotLine extension can dial a calling group extension number.
Hold
Hold is not available at HotLine extensions.
Last Number Dial
Last Number Dial is not available at HotLine extensions.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
HotLine
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 323
Night Service
HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later systems) can be members of
Night Service groups. If a HotLine extension dials an outside call and
Night Service with Outward Restriction is on, either the HotLine extension
number must be in the Night Service Exclusion List or the number it dials
must be on the Night Service Emergency List.
Paging
A HotLine extension cannot access Loudspeaker Paging, but a HotLine
extension can be programmed to dial a Group Paging or number.
Park
Park cannot be used by HotLine extensions.
Pickup
Pickup cannot be used at a HotLine extension.
Pools
A HotLine extension can use a pool, as long as dial-access-to-pools is
enabled for the extension and the Pool access code is programmed with
the outside number as the first Personal Speed Dial number for the
extension.
Privacy
Privacy is not available for HotLine extensions.
Recall/Timed Flash
A switchhook flash from a HotLine extension is not sent to the system or
the central office.
Ringing Options
Ringing Options can be set for HotLine extension lines. If the HotLine
extension should not receive calls, set its lines for No Ring.
Saved Number Dial
Saved Number Dial is not available at HotLine extensions.
Speed Dial
A HotLine extension can dial only the first Personal Speed Dial number
(code 01) programmed for the extension. The end-of-dialing digit, #,
should be programmed at the end of the speed dial number. See
Appendix H, “Programming Special Characters,” for additional
information.
Transfer
Transfer is not available at HotLine extensions.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Inside Dial Tone
Page 324
Inside Dial Tone
32
At a Glance
32
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Factory Setting
Telephone users, operators
System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All
Options→InsideDial
Inside dial tone
32
Description
The system’s inside dial tone is heard when a user lifts the handset or presses the
Speaker button after an SA or ICOM button is selected. Two choices are
available for inside dial tone:
■
System Inside Dial Tone. Makes it easy to distinguish inside and outside
lines.
■
Outside Dial Tone. Required by some adjuncts and applications
connected to the system, such as voice messaging systems or modems,
that do not recognize inside dial tone. With this setting, inside dial tone
sounds just like outside dial tone.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Inspect
Page 325
Inspect
32
At a Glance
32
Users Affected
Modes
Telephones
Telephone users, operators
All
MLX display telephones
32
Description
Inspect allows an MLX display telephone user who is on a call to see call
information about an incoming call that is ringing, alerting, or on hold.
Call information includes whether it is an inside or outside call, any programmed
labels for the caller (such as the inside caller’s name or the label assigned to the
outside line), and how the call came to the user (transferred, coverage call,
forwarded, and so on). Inspect also can be used to inventory what is programmed
on the telephone’s buttons.
To use Inspect to screen incoming calls while on another call or to identify callers
on hold on the telephone using an MLX display telephone, press the Inspct
button and then press the line button with the incoming or held call. The call
information is displayed on the Inspect screen.
To Inspect a programmed button, press the Inspct button and then press the
programmed button. The name of the feature programmed on the button is
displayed on the Inspect screen. However, beginning with Release 2.0, pressing a
programmed Last Number Dial or Saved Number Dial button shows the telephone
number stored. If no number is stored, the feature name is displayed.
Considerations and Constraints
32
If the company subscribes to special services, such as AT&T’s INFO2 Automatic
Number Identification (ANI) service or Caller ID, the display shows the outside
telephone number of the person calling.
NOTE:
The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by
local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or central office equipment.
If a line button is being inspected, it cannot be used to make or receive a call.
If a user inspects a line that someone else is using, the display shows that the line
is in use.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Inspect
Page 326
If Inspect is activated and someone makes a voice-announced call or a group
page to the user, the Inspect feature is canceled and the Home screen is
displayed.
Pressing the Feature, Menu, or Home button while Inspect is activated cancels
Inspect.
If a user is active on a call while using Inspect and presses a fixed-feature button,
for example, the Hold, Transfer, or Drop button, the system cancels Inspect and
attempts to activate the feature.
Telephone Differences
32
Direct-Line Consoles
32
Inspect cannot be used on analog Direct-Line Consoles (DLCs).
Queued Call Consoles
32
When a conference participant joins a conference by using a shared personal line
or Shared SA button, the QCC display is updated to include this participant.
However, if a QCC operator uses the Inspect feature to verify the number of
participants, the number shown on the display does not include participants
joining the conference on the Shared SA or personal line button.
If a QCC operator presses any of the buttons programmed with fixed QCC
features (for example, a Call, Start, or Source button) while in Inspect mode, the
console remains in Inspect mode. However, if an operator presses the Feature,
Transfer, HFAI, Conf, Mute, Drop, Speaker, or Hold button, the console is
removed from Inspect mode.
Other Multiline Telephones
32
Inspect is available only on MLX display telephones.
Single-Line Telephones
32
Inspect cannot be used on single-line telephones.
Feature Interactions
32
Alarm
Inspect can be used on an MLX DLC or a Queued Call Console (QCC) to
display the number of system alarms.
Conference
If a user presses the Conf button while Inspect is activated, Inspect is
canceled and the system tries to activate the Conference feature.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Inspect
Direct Station
Selector
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 327
Inspect can display limited information, such as extension number, label,
and number of messages, for each DSS button. To use Inspect, an
operator presses the Page button for the range of extensions, then the
Inspct button, then the DSS button for an extension. Inspect must be
activated separately for each page on the DSS; to inspect another page,
an operator presses the Home button and repeats the process.
When an operator inspects a DSS button associated with an extension,
Line 1 of the display shows the extension, the label associated with the
extension, if any, and the number of messages that have been left for that
extension, if any. It the extension has posted a message, Line 2 shows
the posted message.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, an operator can inspect a DSS button
with a red LED on to see whether the extension is busy or using Do Not
Disturb. If the user at the extension has turned on Do Not Disturb, the Do
Not Disturb message is also posted and appears on the operator’s
display. However, the message may also mean that the user has posted
the message without turning on the Do Not Disturb feature.
Drop
If a user presses the Drop button while active on a call with Inspect
activated, Inspect is canceled and the system attempts to activate the
Drop feature.
Group Calling
Any MLX telephone user can inspect the number of calls in the calling
group queue by pressing the Inspct button and then pressing a button
programmed with the calling group’s extension, the Calls-in-Queue Alarm
button. The display shows the label associated with the calling group and
the number of calls in the queue.
Hold
If a user presses the Hold button while active on a call with Inspect
activated, Inspect is canceled and the system tries to put the call on hold.
Last Number Dial
Starting with Release 2.0, if a programmed Last Number Dial button is
inspected, the display shows the last number stored for dialing. If no
number is stored, the feature name is displayed.
Paging
If a user gets a voice-announced inside call or a group speakerphone
page while using the Inspect feature, the Inspect feature is canceled and
the user is returned to the Home screen.
Saved Number Dial
Starting with Release 2.0, if a programmed Saved Number Dial button is
inspected, the display shows the last number stored for dialing. If no
number is stored, the feature name is displayed.
Transfer
If a user with Inspect activated tries to transfer a call by pressing the
Transfer button while active on a call, Inspect is canceled and the user is
returned to the Home screen.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 328
Integrated Administration
32
At a Glance
32
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Factory Settings
Automated Attendant
Calling Group
Call Answer Calling Group
Fax Response Calling
Group
Information Service Calling
Group
Message Drop Calling
Group
Voice Mail Calling Group
Coverage Group
Reliable Disconnect
Delay Ring
Coverage Delay Ring
VMS Transfer Return
Interval
Transfer Return Time
System manager, installer
Direct Group Calling Information, Group Coverage
Information, GS/LS Trunk Information, System Information
(SysSet-up)
Key and Hybrid/PBX
All
770
7926
7924
7927
7928
7925
30 (range 1–30)
Yes
2 rings (range 1–6 rings)
3 rings (range 1–9 rings)
6 rings (range 0–9 rings)
6 rings (range 0–9 rings)
NOTE:
Integrated Solution III and Integrated Administration are no longer
available.
Description
32
The Integrated Administration capability of Integrated Solution III (IS III, described
in Appendix H, “Applications”) simplifies the programming of common information
for the system, AUDIX Voice Power, and, if it is also installed, Lucent
Technologies Fax Attendant System. Because the AUDIX Voice Power and Fax
Attendant applications use some of the same information programmed on the
system, Integrated Administration lets the installer or system manager make
changes or additions to this information just once instead of making changes in
both applications and the system itself. Using Integrated Administration reduces
programming time and effort and ensures that the system and the applications are
in agreement.
The communications system and the applications share the following information:
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 329
■
System numbering of extensions, lines/trunks, and pools
■
System labeling that determines the user or other name associated with
each extension, line/trunk, and pool
■
The coverage group that sends its calls to the applications
■
The calling group set up for each service of the applications
■
The Reliable Disconnect setting for loop-start lines
■
The Delay Ring and Coverage Delay Interval settings
■
The Transfer Return Time and VMS Transfer Return Interval settings
Integrated Administration consists chiefly of three related functions accessed from
the Integrated Solution III menu (for users) or the Integrated Solution Maintenance
menu (for qualified technicians only):
■
Extension Directory Setup (on the Technician Maintenance menu, for
qualified technicians only). Used during installation to read all switch
extensions and extension labels into the database of extensions accessed
by the applications.
■
Extension Directory. Allows the technician or system manager to add,
change, or delete extensions, change extension labels, and add or delete
subscribers to AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant.
■
System Programming/Switch Administration. Accessed through the
AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant menu, allows
the technician or system manager to program common information used by
the communications system and the applications. Through this selection, a
user configures call handling by Automated Attendant and adds or deletes
lines/trunks and pools for Call Answer, Fax Response, Information Service,
Message Drop, and Voice Mail.
NOTE:
Integrated Administration uses the word switch to refer to the
communications system (what we call the system in this book).
Integrated Administration in Release 4.1 and
Later Systems
32
Because of enhancements to coverage timers in Release 4.1 and later systems,
Integrated Administration cannot be used in these systems to program certain
options for AUDIX Voice Power.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 330
Use the system programming console or System Programming and Maintenance
(SPM) software to program the settings listed below. Do not use the Application
Switch Defaults menu in Integrated Administration. ‘‘Group Calling’’ on page 281,
‘‘Coverage’’ on page 139, ‘‘Labeling’’ on page 360, and ‘‘Transfer’’ on page 601
provide details about these settings.
■
A calling group extension number other than the default of 770
■
A Call Answer calling group number other than the default of 7926
■
A FAX Response calling group number other than the default of 7924
■
An Information Service calling group number other than the default of 7927
■
A Message Drop calling group number other than the default of 7928
■
A Voice Mail calling group number other than the default of 7925
■
Group Coverage by a calling group
■
Coverage delay timers, which have been substantially changed in Release
4.1 and later systems
■
VMS Transfer Return setting
■
Transfer Return setting
■
The systemwide Delay Ring Interval, which does not exist in Release 4.1
and later systems
■
An AUDIX Voice Power calling group label other than the default of
AUDIXVP
Using system programming, change the following settings:
■
The default setting of No for Reliable Disconnect on loop-start lines.
Change this option to Yes (see System Programming).
■
The default setting of four rings for VMS Transfer Return time. Change this
option to six rings (see ‘‘Transfer’’ on page 601).
■
The default setting of four rings for Transfer Return time. Change this
option to six rings (see ‘‘Transfer’’ on page 601).
Application Switch Defaults
32
Integrated Administration provides application switch (system) defaults on the
Technician Maintenance menu, for qualified technicians only. This program option
displays current values and allows a user to change the following settings used by
the applications:
■
Coverage group
■
Automated Attendant calling group
■
Call Answer calling group
■
Fax Response calling group
■
Information Service calling group
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 331
■
Message Drop calling group
■
Voice Mail calling group
This screen also displays the following current defaults that are used during
programming of the applications. For comparison purposes, it also shows the
current values set on the system (the switch):
■
Reliable Disconnect
■
Delay Ring
■
Coverage Delay Interval
■
VMS Transfer Return Interval
■
Transfer Return Time
Using this screen, a user can change the values for the applications only. A
difference between the AUDIX Voice Power and switch (system) default columns,
other than at initial installation, indicates that the values have been changed on
the system through system programming, using the programming console or
System Programming and Maintenance (SPM). This information can be helpful in
troubleshooting problems.
■
Backup Files. Allows a user to back up all Integrated Administration
programming to tape.
■
Restore Files (on the Technician Maintenance menu, for qualified
technicians only). Allows a user to restore all Integrated Administration
programming from tape.
NOTE:
These functions back up and restore the application database. They
are not the same as the SPM backup and restore functions for
system programming.
Automatic Reconciliation
32
NOTE:
The automatic reconciliation program has been disabled beginning with
IS III Version 1.2.
In IS III versions prior to 1.2, if a technician or system manager uses the MLX-20L
console or System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) to change extension
numbering on the switch, the system and the application database are no longer
in agreement. To reduce the chance for such changes to disrupt communications
between the system and the applications, Integrated Administration includes an
automatic reconciliation program that runs every day at 3:00 a.m., comparing the
application database to the switch programming and bringing the two into
agreement. The program makes changes, as necessary, only to the application
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 332
database, according to the rules listed in Table 24. It does not change the system
programming.
Table 24.
Database Reconciliation Rules
Extension appears in...
Application
System
Database
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
(regular extension)
No
Yes
(special extension)
Yes
(special extension)
Yes
Action
None
Extension is added to database. Can be added as AUDIX
Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant
subscriber through Extension Directory screen.
Extension is deleted from database and removed as an
AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax
Attendant subscriber.
Extension is retained as special-purpose extension in
database.
Extension is converted from special-purpose extension to
regular extension in database.
Installation Overview
42
The qualified technician uses Integrated Administration during installation. The
steps below describe basic tasks, not detailed procedures (see the AUDIX Voice
Power or Fax Attendant System Manager’s Guide for complete instructions about
programming the applications and System Programming for complete instructions
about programming the system). Note that the sequence of tasks differs,
depending on the installation:
■
If the communications system and IS III are both being installed for the first
time, the technician must do some initial programming on the system, as
described in Step 1.
■
If IS III is being installed on an existing system, the technician skips Step 1.
To install, follow these general procedures:
1.
On installation of both the system and IS III , program the following basic
system operating conditions. SPM in surrogate mode is typically used for
this step, but the programming console also can be used.
■
Mode of operation (Hybrid/PBX or Key only for Integrated
Administration)
■
System renumbering
■
System operator positions
■
Phantom extensions
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
■
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 333
Assignment of lines/trunks to pools
2.
Select Application Switch Defaults from the IS III Technician
Maintenance menu and, if necessary, change any of the values displayed
for the applications.
3.
Select Extension Directory Setup from the Technician Maintenance
menu. This step reads the system extension directory (including any labels
already programmed on the switch) into the application database.
4.
Select Extension Directory and, on the resulting screens, program:
5.
■
Assignment of extensions as AUDIX Voice Power subscribers; if
Fax Attendant is installed, this step also assigns the extensions as
Fax Attendant subscribers
■
Assignment of special-purpose extensions
■
Labeling of extensions
Select System Programming/Switch Admin from the AUDIX Voice Power
or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant menu and program any of the
services below, as applicable.
NOTE:
During initial Integrated Administration programming for an existing
system, do not assign lines or pools to the calling groups set up for
services. If you do, lines begin ringing into the service before
greetings or other service options are programmed. Go on to Step 6
and finish programming the application; then return to Step 5 via the
System Programming/Switch Admin menu and add lines and pools.
On first use of Integrated Administration, the user automatically steps
through each of these services:
■
Automated Attendant (Immediate, Delayed, or Night Service call
handling and lines and pools)
■
Call Answer (lines and pools)
■
Information Service (lines and pools)
■
Message Drop (lines and pools)
■
Voice Mail (lines and pools)
■
Fax Response (lines and pools)
On subsequent uses of Integrated Administration, select System
Programming/Switch Admin from the AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX
Voice Power/Fax Attendant menu, then select System
Programming/Switch Admin Form. Finally, choose the specific service to
be programmed.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 334
6.
Program any application options that are not system-related (such as
Outcalling and voice menus and prompts) through the AUDIX Voice Power
or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant menu.
7.
On installation of both the system and IS III, exit from IS III, then use SPM
or the programming console to perform all remaining system programming
that is not application-related.
NOTE:
The system technician can perform initial installation from a remote
location equipped with a surrogate system and IS III. Using the remote
system and IS III computer, the technician programs the configuration as
specified earlier in this topic. Through SPM, the technician backs up the
configuration and, using the Technician Maintenance menu, backs up the
Extension Directory database files. The technician then dials up the
customer location and accesses the internal modem, through remote SPM
restoring the customer’s system from the translations made at the remote
location. After requesting pass-through to the computer running IS III, the
technician uses the Technician Maintenance menu to restore the
customer’s database files from the database files backed up at the remote
location. Technicians can access the Extension Directory and Integrated
Administration screens remotely, but the information is stored in a file and
executed after the technician hangs up. Also, a change made to system
numbering is not reflected in the Extension Directory (the reconciliation
program is disabled in Release 1.2 and later releases).
42
Operation
Access Integrated Administration in one of the following ways:
■
Log in to IS III as is and enter a password, if needed. The IS III menu for
users appears, with the following selections for Integrated Administration:
— AUDIX Voice Power (AVP) or AUDIX Voice Power/FAX Attendant
(AVP/FA)
— Extension Directory
— Technician Maintenance
■
Log in to IS III as maint and enter the maintenance password. The
Integrated Solution Maintenance menu appears, with the following
selections for Integrated Administration:
— AUDIX Voice Power (AVP) or AUDIX Voice Power/FAX Attendant
(AVP/FA)
— Extension Directory
— Technician Maintenance
Other selections on these menus, including System Programming and
Maintenance (SPM), are used for purposes other than Integrated Administration.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 335
The Integrated Administration selections on these menus are used to access the
screens described in the sections that follow this one.
On data entry screens described below, the screen-labeled options listed in Table
25 are displayed, as appropriate for each screen. Select one by pressing the
corresponding function key.
Table 25.
Screen-Labeled Function Keys for Integrated Administration
Label
Add
Key
Cancel
Chg-Key
Choices
Delete
Display
or Frm-Mgmt
Help
NextPage
Next-Rec
Action
Display a pop-up form for adding information, such as adding
lines and pools to the calling group for a service.
Cancel any changes made on the current screen and return to
the previous screen.
Toggle between two sets of screen-labeled selections. For
example, this table shows two different selections—Choices
and Delete—corresponding to . Chg-Key changes the label
to the alternative selection.
Display a list of valid choices for the current field.
Display a pop-up form for deleting information, such as deleting
lines and pools from the calling group for a service.
Display information about the record on the current screen,
such as the label associated with an extension.
(Frame Management) Display options for managing the screen,
such as Refresh and Resize.
Display help for the current screen. (Help is available for every
Integrated Administration screen.)
On a multiple-page screen, go to the next page.
Display the next record, such as the next extension, on the
current screen.
Continued on next page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Table 25.
Continued
Label
PrevPage
Prev-Rec
Key
Save
Page 336
Action
On a multiple-page screen, return to the previous page.
Display the previous record, such as the previous extension, on
the current screen.
Validate and save the information on the current screen, updating
the application database and/or the switch as appropriate.
Application Switch Defaults Screen
52
A technician reaches the Application Switch Defaults screen from the Technician
Maintenance menu. Figure 22 shows this screen when only AUDIX Voice Power
is installed and when both AUDIX Voice Power and Fax Attendant are installed.
The values shown in the screens in Figure 22 are the defaults for all information
on the Application Switch Defaults screen. When a user accesses the screen, the
current programmed values are shown.
The settings in the Current Switch column for Reliable Disconnect, Delay Ring,
Coverage Delay Ring, VMS Transfer Return Interval, and Transfer Return Time
are displayed for comparison purposes and cannot be changed on this screen.
The values in the AVP Default column can be changed, and are sent to the switch
when the user presses (Save). A difference between the two columns, other
than at initial installation, indicates that the values have been changed through
system programming on the system, using the programming console or SPM.
Knowing this can be helpful in troubleshooting problems.
NOTE:
The calling group numbers and coverage group number displayed on this
screen (including any changes made) are the values used for the
information sent to the system when services are programmed on the
System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen, Figure 25 on page 345,
and when subscribers are added to the AUDIX Voice Power coverage
group on the AUDIX Voice Power User or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax
Attendant User screen, Figure 24 on page 342. Therefore, if any of these
group numbers must be changed, make changes first, before programming
services or subscribers.
If it is necessary to change any calling group numbers after initial programming of
the services, make the changes in the following order:
1.
Remove the affected services by deleting those services from all channels
on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen.
2.
Change the appropriate calling group numbers on the Application Switch
Defaults screen.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
3.
Page 337
Reinstall the affected services by adding them to channels on the System
Programming/Switch Admin Form screen.
APPLICATION SWITCH DEFAULTS
AUDIX VOICE POWER SWITCH DEFAULTS
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT CALLING GROUP:
770
CALL ANSWER CALLING GROUP:
7926
INFORMATION SERVICE CALLING GROUP:
1927
MESSAGE DROP CALLING GROUP:
7928
VOICE MAIL CALLING GROUP:
1925
COVERAGE GROUP:
30
RELIABLE DISCONNECT:
DELAY RING:
COVERAGE DELAY RING:
VMS TRANSFER RETURN INTERVAL:
TRANSFER RETURN TIME:
AVP DEFAULT
CURRENT SWITCH
[YES/NO] NO
2
2
3
3
6
4
6 4
APPLICATION SWITCH DEFAULTS
AUDIX VOICE POWER/FAX ATTENDANT SWITCH DEFAULTS
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT CALLING GROUP:
770
CALL ANSWER CALLING GROUP:
7926
FAX RESPONSE CALLING GROUP:
7924
INFORMATION SERVICE CALLING GROUP:
7927
MESSAGE DROP CALLING GROUP:
7928
VOICE MAIL CALLING GROUP:
7925
COVERAGE GROUP:
30
RELIABLE DISCONNECT:
DELAY RING:
COVERAGE DELAY RING:
VMS TRANSFER RETURN INTERVAL:
TRANSFER RETURN TIME:
Figure 22.
AVP DEFAULT
YES NO
2
3
6
6 4
CURRENT SWITCH
2
3
4
Application Switch Defaults Screens
Calling Groups
The calling group numbers shown in Figure 22 are the defaults assigned to
each service. Change these numbers by positioning the cursor in the
appropriate field and entering a new value. No two services can share a
calling group; each number must be unique.
Coverage Group
Coverage group 30 is the default for the extensions covered by the
applications. Change the group number by positioning the cursor on this
field and entering a new value from 1 to 30.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 338
Reliable Disconnect
Press (Choices) and select YES (Reliable Disconnect) or NO (Unreliable
Disconnect).
When an outside caller on a loop-start line hangs up on Automated
Attendant or Call Answer, a setting of NO may result in lost jack availability
or recording of dial tone or messages from the telephone company (such
as, “Please hang up and dial again”). To prevent this from happening,
reliable disconnect should be set to YES. If Automated Attendant is allowed
to transfer calls to outside numbers and has access to any loop-start lines,
reliable disconnect must be set to YES.
NOTE:
You should find out whether your loop-start lines/trunks provide
reliable disconnect.
Delay Ring and Coverage Delay Ring
Change these values by positioning the cursor in the appropriate field and
entering a new value. The range for Delay Ring is 1 to 6 rings; the range for
Coverage Delay Ring is 1 to 9 rings.
The combined total of these two values should be less than either the VMS
transfer return interval or the transfer return time. This ensures that a
transferred call always rings at a coverage point before the applicable
return timer expires and the call either is transferred to the alternative
destination (in the case of a transfer from AUDIX Voice Power) or returns
to the transfer originator (in the case of a transfer from any other
extension).
VMS Transfer Return Interval and Transfer Return Time
Change these values by positioning the cursor in the appropriate field and
entering a new value. The range for both timers is from 0, which never
returns or redirects transferred calls, to 9 rings.
The VMS transfer return interval governs how long a call transferred from
an AUDIX Voice Power extension rings before it is redirected; the transfer
return time governs how long a call transferred from any other extension
rings before it returns to the transfer originator.
Each of these values should be greater than the combined total of the
Delay Ring and Coverage Delay Ring values. This ensures that a
transferred call always rings at a coverage point before the applicable
return timer expires and the call either is transferred to the alternative
destination (in the case of a transfer from AUDIX Voice Power) or returns
to the transfer originator (in the case of a transfer from any other
extension).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
System Programming Results
Page 339
52
The following information is sent to the system:
■
Reliable Disconnect setting
■
Delay Ring value
■
Coverage Delay Ring value
■
VMS Transfer Return Interval setting
■
Transfer Return Time setting
52
Screen Results
After the Application Switch Defaults screen, press (Save); the Technician
Maintenance menu returns.
Extension Directory Setup
52
When the technician selects Extension Directory Setup from the Technician
Maintenance menu during installation, IS III checks whether the system Extension
Directory already exists in the application database. If the directory does not exist,
IS III reads the switch extensions into the database, together with the label for
each extension, if there is one. If the directory does exist, the technician has the
following choices:
■
Exit without making any changes to the database, using (Cancel).
■
Reinstall the database. This choice completely replaces the existing
Extension Directory in the application database.
■
Reconcile the database with the switch. This choice follows the same rules
as the daily reconciliation program, as described earlier in Table 24 on
page 332.
System Programming Results
52
No information is sent to the switch.
Screen Results
52
The user is returned to the Technician Maintenance menu.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 340
52
Extension Directory
Figure 23 shows the Extension Directory screen. An explanation of its use follows.
Extension Directory
Extension:
---Name (first):
--------------Name (last):
-------------------Extension Label:--------------Location:
-------------------Comments:
----------------------------------------------Comments:
----------------------------------------------Application 1: [ ]
Application 2: [ ]
Application 3: [ ]
Application 4: [ ]
Application 5: [ ]
Figure 23.
■
Extension Directory Screen
Extension. Enter an extension number in this field. To show information
available for that extension in the application database, press (Display); the information fills the remaining fields. When the Extension
Directory screen is first accessed after performing an Extension Directory
Setup, only the Extension Label field is filled in if the extension is a valid
one and a label for it is programmed on the system.
Press (Delete) to delete the information on the extension from the
application database. If the extension still exists on the system, the
information is restored to the application database the next time the
reconciliation program runs.
If the user enters an invalid extension (one that is not in the Extension
Directory), then when he or she finishes with this screen and presses (Save), a request for confirmation appears. If the user confirms the entry,
the extension is identified as a special-purpose extension. Because
Integrated Administration never adds extensions to the system, the
extension appears only in the application database. The Location field is
occupied by the word Special. Special-purpose extensions are used for
such features as guest mailboxes or group fax extensions, as described
later under the AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant User screen, Figure 24.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 341
■
Extension Label. The user can change the information in this field.
■
Name (first), Name (last), Location, Comments. The user can enter
information in these fields, if desired. This information is not sent to the
system.
■
Application 1 through Application 5. The user can add the extension as
an AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant subscriber
by typing AVP or using (Choices) and selecting AVP in one of these
fields. If Fax Attendant is installed, an AUDIX Voice Power subscriber is
automatically a Fax Attendant subscriber as well.
NOTE:
In the “System Programming Results” sections that follow, any information
copied to the system is sent after pressing (Save). This information
replaces existing system programming of the applicable items.
System Programming Results
52
The following information and directions are sent to the system:
■
Extension label(s), if any
■
Remove deleted extension(s) from AUDIX Voice Power coverage group
(30), if they were added previously as subscribers.
Screen Results
52
When finished with the Extension Directory screen, press (Save). If either the
AUDIX Voice Power User screen or Fax Attendant is installed, the AUDIX Voice
Power User/Fax Attendant User screen appears. Figure 24 shows examples of
the AUDIX Voice Power and Fax Attendant User screens. A description of their
use follows.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 342
AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant User
52
AUDIX Voice Power User
Extension:nnnn
Add User to AUDIX Voice Power Cover Group:[yes/no]
AUDIX Voice Power button number: --
AUDIX Voice Power/FAX Attendant User
Extension:nnnn
Add User to AUDIX Voice Power Cover Group:[yes/no]
AUDIX Voice Power button number: -Private Fax Extension:----
Figure 24.
■
■
AUDIX Voice Power and AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant
User Screens
Extension. The extension displayed is the one entered in the Extension
Directory screen.
Add User to AUDIX Voice Power Cover Group. Press (Choices) and
select yes or no.
On initial installation only, this information is passed to the Subscriber
screen for AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant. This
screen is used for programming the applications only. If a user
subsequently changes this field, the change is not passed to the
Subscriber screen. This allows two choices to be set independently: the
item on the AUDIX Voice Power User or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax
Attendant User screen, which controls the addition of the extension to the
coverage group; and the item on the Subscriber screen, which specifies
whether AUDIX Voice Power does supervised or unsupervised transfers to
the extension. See the AUDIX Voice Power or Fax Attendant System
Manager’s Guide for details.
■
AUDIX Voice Power Button Number. Enter a button number (1–34) for
an Auto Dial button on the telephone at the extension for the Automated
Attendant calling group. If the specified button is already programmed as a
personal line or Pool button, or if it is the only SA or ICOM button on the
telephone, the Auto Dial button is not programmed. The Auto Dial button
can replace any other button that is already programmed, including an SA,
Shared SA, or ICOM button.
The Auto Dial button programming does not appear in the application
database. As a result, if a user returns to this screen, Integrated
Administration does not show the button or prevent the programming of a
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 343
different button with the same Auto Dial number. To determine which
buttons are programmed on an extension, use Inspect at the telephone or
through centralized telephone programming.
If the Auto Dial button is to be programmed for the calling group number for
Call Answer or Voice Mail, it must be reprogrammed on the system through
either extension programming or centralized telephone programming.
If the user leaves this field blank or enters 0, no button is programmed.
■
Private Fax Extension. The user can enter either the system extension of
a tip/ring jack connected to a fax machine or a phantom extension. The
extension is added (on the system) to the coverage group that sends its
calls to AUDIX Voice Power. If the user leaves this field blank or blanks it
out, the extension in the Extension field does not receive Fax Attendant
services.
Unless a DID line is assigned to an extension for private fax purposes, a
personal line must be assigned to the extension and the extension must be
the principal user of that line.
No two subscribers can be assigned the same private fax extension.
However, a group of individuals can use the same private fax extension, as
follows:
— An extension number that is not a valid extension on the system is
assigned as a special-purpose extension, as described earlier under the
Extension Directory screen. This extension is the group fax
administrator.
— The special-purpose extension is assigned a private fax extension on
the AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant User screen.
— Group members are assigned as Fax Attendant subscribers on the
Extension Directory screen, but are not assigned private fax extensions.
When callers reach the group fax administrator’s private fax extension,
they are prompted for the voice extension of the group member to receive
the fax. (See the Fax Attendant System Manager’s Guide for instructions
about programming voice prompts.)
System Programming Results
52
The following information is sent to the system:
■
Add extension(s) to or delete from AUDIX Voice Power coverage group
(30), depending on selection in Add User to AUDIX Voice Power Cover
Group field.
■
Add Auto Dial button for Automated Attendant calling group (770).
■
Add private fax extension(s) to or delete from AUDIX Voice Power
coverage group.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Screen Results
Page 344
52
When finished using AUDIX Voice Power User or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax
Attendant User screen, press (Save). The Subscriber screen appears for
AUDIX Voice Power or for AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant. Subscriber
screens are used for programming application parameters and do not send any
information to the switch.
Access the Subscriber screens by selecting Subscriber Administration from
the AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant menu under the
Integrated Solution III or Integrated Solution Maintenance menu. This method
allows information about an existing subscriber to be changed but does not allow
the addition of a new subscriber.
System Programming/Switch Admin
52
On initial installation of IS III, selecting System Programming/Switch Admin from
the AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant menu brings up the
System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen. Figure 25 shows this screen,
and a description of its use follows.
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin selection brings
up the System Programming/Switch Admin Menu screen. Figure 26 on page 349
shows this menu as it appears with only AUDIX Voice Power installed and as it
appears with both AUDIX Voice Power and Fax Attendant installed.
Note that one of the selections on the System Programming/Switch Admin menu
(Figure 26) is System Programming/Switch Admin Form, which brings up the
System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen (Figure 25).
The purpose of this screen is to assign switch (system) extensions to AUDIX
Voice Power and Fax Attendant services. The channel numbers represent
physical channels on the AUDIX Voice Power IVP4 or IVP6 board or the Fax
Attendant IFP2 or IFP4 board in the IS III computer.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 345
System Programming/Switch Admin Form
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Figure 25.
■
■
Extension Service
----[Service]
---[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
----[Service]
System Programming/Switch Admin Form Screen
Extension. Press (Add) and enter a valid switch extension for the
service, or press (Delete) to delete an extension from a service.
Service. Press (Choices) and select a service from the following list:
— AA (Automated Attendant) is the default for all channels. This selection
also provides Call Answer and Voice Mail and, if Fax Attendant is
installed, Fax Call Answer and Fax Mail services.
— CA (Call Answer) also provides Fax Call Answer service if Fax Attendant
is installed.
— FR (Fax Response) is available if Fax Attendant is installed.
— IS (Information Service)
— MD (Message Drop)
— VM (Voice Mail) also provides Fax Mail service if Fax Attendant is
installed.
System Programming Results
52
The following information is sent to the system (see ‘‘Application Switch Defaults’’
on page 330 for details):
■
Reliable Disconnect: yes
■
Delay Ring: 2
■
Coverage Delay Ring: 3
■
VMS Transfer Return Interval: 6
■
Transfer Return Time: 6
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 346
Described below is the service-specific information sent to the system for the
services selected.
If Automated Attendant is selected:
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to or delete it from the Automated Attendant
extension(s).
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to Automated Attendant calling group (770) when
the first Automated Attendant extension is added, or delete the label when
the last Automated Attendant extension is deleted.
■
Set the group type to Integrated VMI for the Automated Attendant calling
group when the first Automated Attendant extension is added; or set it to
Auto Logout when the last Automated Attendant extension is deleted.
■
Set the hunt group type to Circular for the Automated Attendant calling
group when the first Automated Attendant extension is added.
■
Add Automated Attendant extension(s) to or delete them from the
Automated Attendant calling group.
■
Add Automated Attendant extension(s) to or delete them from the Night
Service exclusion list.
■
Add the AUDIX Voice Power coverage group (30) to the Automated
Attendant calling group when the first Automated Attendant extension is
added; or delete it from the calling group when the last Automated
Attendant extension is deleted.
■
Delete all lines from the Automated Attendant calling group when the last
Automated Attendant extension is deleted and Automated Attendant is set
for immediate call-handling operation.
■
Delete the backup operator from the AUDIX Voice Power coverage group
when the last Automated Attendant extension is deleted and Automated
Attendant is set for delayed call-handling operation.
■
Delete the AUDIX Voice Power coverage group from Night Service group
for the affected operator when the last Automated Attendant extension is
deleted and Automated Attendant is set for Night Service operation.
If Call Answer is selected:
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to or delete it from Call Answer extension(s).
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to Call Answer calling group (7926) when the first
Call Answer extension is added, or delete the label when the last Call
Answer extension is deleted.
■
Set the group type to Integrated VMI for the Call Answer calling group
when the first Call Answer extension is added, or set it to Auto Logout
when the last Call Answer extension is deleted.
■
Set the hunt group type to Circular for the Call Answer calling group when
the first Call Answer extension is added.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 347
■
Add the Call Answer extension(s) to or delete them from the Call Answer
calling group.
■
Add the Call Answer extension(s) to or delete them from the Night Service
exclusion list.
Because Call Answer is typically not assigned as the only service in a system, the
AUDIX Voice Power coverage group (30) is not assigned to the Call Answer
calling group. If Call Answer is to be the only service, the AUDIX Voice Power
coverage group must be assigned to the Call Answer calling group through
system programming. Use either the programming console or System
Programming and Maintenance (SPM).
If FAX Response is selected:
■
Add the label AVP-FA to or delete it from Fax Response extension(s).
■
Add the label AVP-FA to the Fax Response calling group (7924) when the
first Fax Response extension is added, or delete the label when the last
Fax Response extension is deleted.
■
Set the group type to Integrated VMI for the Fax Response calling group
when the first Fax Response extension is added, or set it to Auto Logout
when the last Fax Response extension is deleted.
■
Set the hunt group type to Circular for the Fax Response calling group
when the first Fax Response extension is added.
■
Add Fax Response extension(s) to or delete extension(s) from the Fax
Response calling group.
■
Delete all lines from the Fax Response calling group when the last Fax
Response extension is deleted.
If Information Service is selected:
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to or delete it from the Information Service
extension(s).
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to the Information Service calling group (7927)
when the first Information Service extension is added, or delete the label
when the last Information Service extension is deleted.
■
Set the group type to Integrated VMI for the Information Service calling
group when first the Information Service extension is added,; or set it to
Auto Logout when the last Information Service extension is deleted.
■
Set the hunt group type to Circular for the Information Service calling group
when the first Information Service extension is added.
■
Add Information Service extension(s) to or delete them from the
Information Service calling group.
■
Delete all lines from the Information Service calling group when the last
Information Service extension is deleted.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 348
If Message Drop is selected:
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to or delete it from the Message Drop extension(s).
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to the Message Drop calling group (7928) when the
first Message Drop extension is added, or delete the label when the last
Message Drop extension is deleted.
■
Set the group type to Integrated VMI for the Message Drop calling group
when the first Message Drop extension is added, or set it to Auto Logout
when the last Message Drop extension is deleted.
■
Set the hunt group type to Circular for the Message Drop calling group
when the first Message Drop extension is added.
■
Add Message Drop extension(s) to or delete them from the Message Drop
calling group.
■
Delete all lines from the Message Drop calling group when the last
Message Drop extension is deleted.
If Voice Mail is selected:
■
Add the label AUDIXVP to or delete it from Voice Mail extension(s).
■
Add label AUDIXVP to Voice Mail calling group (7925) when first Voice Mail
extension is added; or delete label when last Voice Mail extension is
deleted.
■
Set the group type to Integrated VMI for the Voice Mail calling group when
the first Voice Mail extension is added, or set it to Auto Logout when the
last Voice Mail extension is deleted.
■
Set the hunt group type to Circular for Voice Mail calling group.
■
Add Voice Mail extension(s) to or delete them from the Voice Mail calling
group.
■
Add Voice Mail extension(s) to or delete them from the Night Service
exclusion list.
■
If Automated Attendant is not selected, add the AUDIX Voice Power
coverage group (30) to the Voice Mail calling group when the first Voice
Mail extension is added.
■
Delete all lines from the Voice Mail calling group when the last Voice Mail
extension is deleted.
Screen Results
52
On initial installation of IS III, after the System Programming/Switch Admin Form
screen, the program steps through the applicable screens shown in Figures 24
through 35, depending on the services selected on this form.
On subsequent access, after the System Programming/Switch Admin Form
screen, the AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant menu
returns. The user can then access the screens shown in Figures 25 through 35
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 349
individually through selections on the System Programming/Switch Admin Menu
screen, shown in Figure 26. (This menu includes the selection FAX Response only
if Fax Attendant is installed.)
■
System Programming/Switch Admin Menu
■
Automated Attendant
■
Call Answer
■
Fax Response
■
Information Service
■
Message Drop
■
System Programming/Switch Admin Form
■
Voice Mail
System Programming/Switch Admin Menu
Automated Attendant
Call Answer
FAX Response
Information Service
Message Drop
System Programming/Switch Admin Form
Voice Mail
Figure 26.
System Programming/Switch Admin Menu Screen
52
Automated Attendant
If a user chooses Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch
Admin Form screen during installation or from the System Programming/Switch
Admin menu on subsequent access, the screen shown in Figure 27 appears.
Automated Attendant
Channels:
Extensions:
Automated Attendant Usage:
Figure 27.
nn
nn nnnn
nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn
[
Automated Attendant Screen
]
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
■
■
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 350
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form
screen.
Automated Attendant Usage. Press (Choices) and select
Immediate, Delayed, or Night Service.
System Programming Results
52
The following information is sent to the system:
■
Delete all lines from the Automated Attendant calling group (770) if
Automated Attendant usage has been changed from Immediate to Delayed
or Night Service.
■
Delete the backup operator from the AUDIX Voice Power coverage group
(30) if Automated Attendant usage has been changed from Delayed to
Immediate or Night Service.
■
Delete the AUDIX Voice Power coverage group from the Night Service
group for affected operators (see Figure 30) if Automated Attendant usage
has been changed from Night Service to Immediate or Delayed.
Screen Results
52
After the Automated Attendant screen, press (Save). If Automated Attendant
Usage has been changed, one of the following screens appears, depending on
the selection in the Automated Attendant Usage field:
■
Automated Attendant: Immediate Call-Handling (Figure 28)
■
Automated Attendant: Delayed Call-Handling (Figure 29)
■
Automated Attendant: Night Service (Figure 30)
If Automated Attendant usage has not been changed, on initial installation the
screen for the next service selected on the System Programming/Switch Admin
Form screen appears (see Figures 31 through 35). On subsequent access, the
System Programming/Switch Admin menu returns.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 351
52
Automated Attendant: Immediate Call-Handling
Automated Attendant - Immediate Call Handling
Channels:
Extensions:
Lines/Pools:
Figure 28.
■
■
nn
nn
nn
nn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
-------------------------------
Automated Attendant: Immediate Call-Handling Screen
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form
screen.
Lines/Pools. Press (Add) or (Delete) to add or delete a line or
pool for this service. A pop-up window appears for entry of a line or pool
number.
System Programming Results. Add lines to and/or delete lines from Automated
Attendant calling group (770).
Screen Results. On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on
the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures 31
through 35).
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin menu returns.
Automated Attendant: Delayed Call-Handling
52
■
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form
screen.
■
Backup Operator Extension. For delayed call handling, enter a phantom
extension that has already been programmed on the system and assigned
as an operator position through system programming at the programming
console or System Programming and Maintenance (SPM). The phantom
operator has the default configuration of lines assigned to it: the first 32
lines for a phantom analog extension or the first 18 lines for a phantom
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 352
MLX extension. If these are not the lines for which backup operation is
desired, the assignments must be reprogrammed through system
programming.
The phantom operator must also be added as an AUDIX Voice Power
subscriber on the Extension Directory screen, Figure 23 on page 340.
If a user either blanks out this field to delete the phantom operator or
changes Automated Attendant operation to Immediate or Night Service on
the Automated Attendant screen, the extension should also be deleted as a
subscriber on the Extension Directory screen to maintain consistency
between the application database and the switch.
Automated Attendant-Delayed Call Handling
nn nn nn nn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
Channels:
Extensions:
Backup Operator Extension:
Figure 29.
----
Automated Attendant: Delayed Call-Handling Screen
System Programming Results. Add backup operator to or delete from AUDIX
Voice Power coverage group (30).
Screen Results. On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on
the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures 31
through 35).
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin menu returns.
Automated Attendant: Night Service
Automated Attendant: Night Service
Channels:
Extensions:
Night Service operators:
Figure 30.
■
nn
nnnn
nn
nnnn
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Automated Attendant: Night Service Screen
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form
screen.
52
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
■
Page 353
Night Service Operators. Press (Add) or (Delete) to add or
delete an operator. A pop-up window appears for entry of an operator
extension. At least one operator must be added or deleted.
System Programming Results. Add Automated Attendant calling group (770) to
or delete from the Night Service group for operator(s) entered.
Screen Results. On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on
the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures 31
through 35).
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin Menu screen
returns.
52
Call Answer
If a either user chooses Call Answer or Automated Attendant as a service on
the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen during initial installation or
selects Call Answer from the System Programming/Switch Admin menu on
subsequent access, the screen shown in Figure 31 appears.
Call Answer
Channels:
Extensions:
Lines/Pools:
Figure 31.
■
■
nn
nn
nn
nn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
Call Answer Screen
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Call Answer or Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch
Admin Form screen.
Lines/Pools. Press (Add) Or (Delete) to add or delete a line or
pool for this service. A pop-up window appears for entry of a line or pool
number.
System Programming Results
Add lines to and/or delete lines from Call Answer calling group (7926).
52
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 354
52
Screen Results
On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System
Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures 32 through 35).
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin menu returns.
52
Fax Response
If FAX Response either is chosen as a service on the System Programming/Switch
Admin Form screen during initial installation or is selected from the System
Programming/Switch Admin menu on subsequent access, the screen shown in
Figure 32 appears.
■
■
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Fax Response on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen.
Lines/Pools. Press (Add) or (Delete) to add or delete a line or
pool for this service. A pop-up window appears for entry of a line or pool
number.
Fax Response
Channels:
Extensions:
Lines/Pools:
Figure 32.
nn
nn
nn
nn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
Fax Response Screen
System Programming Results
52
Add lines to and/or delete lines from Fax Response calling group (7924).
Screen Results
On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System
Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures 26 through 28).
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin menu returns.
52
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 355
52
Information Service
If a user either selects Information Service as a service on the System
Programming/Switch Admin Form screen during initial installation or selects it
from the System Programming/Switch Admin menu on subsequent access, the
screen shown in Figure 33 appears.
■
■
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Information Service on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form
screen.
Lines/Pools. Press (Add) or (Delete) to add or delete a line or
pool for this service. A pop-up window appears for entry of a line or pool
number.
Information Service
Channels:
Extensions:
Lines/Pools:
Figure 33.
nn
nn
nn
nn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
Information Service Screen
52
System Programming Results
Add lines to and/or delete lines from Information Service calling group (7927).
52
Screen Results
On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System
Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures 34 and 35).
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin menu returns.
Message Drop
52
If a user either chooses Message Drop as a service on the System
Programming/Switch Admin Form screen during initial installation or selects it
from the System Programming/Switch Admin menu on subsequent access, the
screen shown in Figure 34 appears.
■
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Message Drop on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
■
Page 356
Lines/Pools. Press (Add) or (Delete) to add or delete a line or
pool for this service. A pop-up window appears for entry of a line or pool
number.
Message Drop
Channels:
Extensions:
Lines/Pools:
Figure 34.
nn
nn
nn
nn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
Message Drop Screen
52
System Programming Results
Add lines to and/or delete lines from Message Drop calling group (7928).
52
Screen Results
On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System
Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figure 35).
On subsequent access, the System Programming/Switch Admin menu returns.
Voice Mail
52
If a user either chooses Voice Mail or Automated Attendant as a service on the
System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen during initial installation or
selects Voice Mail from the System Programming/Switch Admin menu on
subsequent access, the screen shown in Figure 35 appears.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 357
Voice Mail
Channels:
Extensions:
Lines/Pools:
Figure 35.
■
■
nn
nn
nn
nn
nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
-------------------------
Voice Mail Screen
Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for
Voice Mail or Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch
Admin Form screen.
Lines/Pools. Press (Add) or (Delete) to add or delete a line or
pool for this service. A pop-up window appears for entry of a line or pool
number.
52
System Programming Results
Add lines to and/or delete lines from Voice Mail calling group (7925).
52
Screen Results
After the Voice Mail screen, the System Programming/Switch Admin menu
returns.
Considerations and Constraints
52
In Release 4.1 and later systems, Integrated Administration cannot be used to
program some AUDIX Voice Power options. See ‘‘Integrated Administration in
Release 4.1 and Later Systems’’ on page 329 for details.
Integrated Administration never adds or changes extensions on the switch. When
the application database is reconciled with the system extension database, the
system information is always assumed to be correct.
In a Release 2.0 or later system with Integrated Solution III Version 1.0 or 1.1, use
the System Renumbering feature cautiously. When this feature is used, all users’
messages and greetings that have been renumbered may be erased from AUDIX
Voice Power when the automatic reconciliation program runs at 3:00 a.m. (The
reconciliation program is disabled in Integrated Solution III Version 1.2.)
When Integrated Administration is sending information to the system, users are
blocked from entering system programming at the console or SPM until Integrated
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Page 358
Administration is finished. Similarly, if the console or SPM is being used for
system programming, Integrated Administration is blocked from sending
information to the system until system programming is finished.
While Integrated Administration is sending information to the system about an
extension or line/trunk, that extension or line/trunk is forced idle.
For coverage by AUDIX Voice Power to work properly, the values programmed for
the transfer return time and the VMS transfer return interval each must be greater
than the combined total of the values programmed for the Coverage Delay
Interval plus Delay Ring.
Fax Attendant cannot be installed as a standalone application, but only in
conjunction with AUDIX Voice Power.
If an AUDIX Voice Power mailbox is needed for a person with no telephone, a
phantom extension (on the system) or special-purpose extension (through
Integrated Administration) must be assigned to that person.
The date and time should be set the same for AUDIX Voice Power as for the
system.
Mode Differences
52
AUDIX Voice Power (including Fax Attendant) is not supported in Behind Switch
mode.
Feature Interactions
Coverage
52
AUDIX Voice Power and private fax extensions are automatically
assigned to coverage group 30, which is covered by the AUDIX Voice
Power calling group. This assignment can be changed by a qualified
technician using the Application Switch Defaults screen.
If the Automated Attendant service is configured for delayed call handling,
a backup (phantom) extension should be assigned and Integrated
Administration sets up coverage for it.
The total of the values programmed for the systemwide Coverage Delay
Interval (Release 4.0 and prior systems) or extension-by-extension
coverage delay settings (Release 4.1 and later systems) plus Delay Ring
should be less than either the transfer return time or the VMS transfer
return interval.
Coverage
continued
See ‘‘Integrated Administration in Release 4.1 and Later Systems’’ on
page 329 for information about using Integrated Administration with
coverage timer changes implemented in Release 4.1 and later systems.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Integrated Administration
Group Calling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 359
AUDIX Voice Power services and the Fax Response service are set up as
members of dedicated calling groups. Integrated Administration sets up
the necessary calling groups with the applicable options for correct
operation of these services.
See ‘‘Integrated Administration in Release 4.1 and Later Systems’’ on
page 329 for information about using Integrated Administration with
Group Calling settings in Release 4.1 and later systems.
Labeling
Names entered on the Extension Directory screen are sent to the switch
and appear on system programming labeling screens on the
programming console or System Programming and Maintenance (SPM).
Names entered on the console or SPM appear on the Extension Directory
screen after Extension Directory setup is completed. Labels are added to
lines and calling groups, as appropriate, when services are selected
through Integrated Administration.
Night Service
The Automated Attendant service can be used for Night Service
operation. The necessary system programming options can be set
through Integrated Administration.
Ringing Options
The total of the values programmed for Delay Ring plus Coverage Delay
Interval should be less than either the transfer return time or the VMS
transfer return interval. These values are shown on the Application Switch
Defaults screen.
System
Renumbering
System renumbering can be done only through system programming on
the programming console or SPM. Integrated Administration never sends
system numbering information to the system.
Transfer
Both the transfer return time and the VMS transfer return interval should
be greater than the total of the values programmed for Delay Ring plus
the Coverage Delay Interval. These values are shown on the Application
Switch Defaults screen.
See ‘‘Integrated Administration in Release 4.1 and Later Systems’’ on
page 329 for information setting the transfer return time and the VMS
transfer return interval in Release 4.1 and later systems.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Labeling
Page 360
Labeling
52
At a Glance
52
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Maximums
System Directory Labels
Extension Labels
Line/Trunk Labels
Calling Group Labels
Posted Messages
Factory Settings
Posted Messages
Telephone users, operators
Dial Plan, Direct Group Calling Information, Extension
Directory, Group Coverage Information, Label Information,
Operator Information, System Directory
All
Display telephones
Create, change, or delete System Directory listings:
● More→Labeling→Directory→System
Assign extension labels:
● More→Labeling→Directory→Extension
Create, change, or delete Personal Directory listings:
● More→Labeling→Directory→Personal
Assign outside line/trunk labels:
● More→Labeling→LinesTrunks
Assign calling group labels:
● More→Labeling→Grp Calling
Create, change, or delete posted messages:
● More→Labeling→PostMessage
11 characters for each label
7 characters for each label
7 characters for each label
7 characters for each label
16 characters for each message
20 messages
1 fixed message
9 preset but modifiable messages
10 blank custom messages available for customer use
52
Description
Through the use of the Labeling feature, the system manager can program the
system to provide identification information (called labels) and posted messages
on display telephones. Alphanumeric labels can be assigned to the following:
■
System Directory Listings. To identify the company or person associated
with a specific System Speed Dial number. This information appears when
a user activates the System Directory.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Labeling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 361
■
Extension Directory Listings. To identify the name of a person or room
(for example, a conference room) associated with an extension. This
information displays when a user receives an inside call, when a co-worker
leaves a message, or when a user accesses the Extension Directory.
■
Personal Directory Listings. To identify the name of the person or
business associated with a frequently called personal number. This
information is displayed when an MLX-20L user accesses a Personal
Directory.
■
Outside Lines/Trunks. To identify the type of line/trunk (for example,
WATS or tie), the telephone number, or the department to which the
line/trunk belongs. This information displays when a user makes or
receives a call.
■
Calling Groups. To identify the group. This information is displayed when
a group member answers a group call.
Integrated Administration (see page 328) downloads extension, outside line/trunk,
and calling group labels to applications such as AUDIX Voice Power and Fax
Attendant System. They can be assigned once in Integrated Administration for
both the application and the system.
Labeling is also used to create messages that can be posted to a caller with a
display telephone to explain why a person is not answering his or her telephone.
Each posted message has a number. To post a message, enter the posted
message number. When another user with a display telephone calls, the message
is displayed on the caller’s telephone (see ‘‘Messaging’’ on page 374 for
additional information about how to post a message). Table 26 lists the factory-set
posted messages and their numbers.
Table 26.
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11–20
Factory-Set Posted Messages and Their Codes
Message
DO NOT DISTURB (not modifiable in Release 2.0 and
later systems, modifiable in earlier releases)
OUT TO LUNCH (modifiable)
AT HOME (modifiable)
OUT SICK (modifiable)
IN A MEETING (modifiable)
IN A CONFERENCE (modifiable)
WITH A CLIENT (modifiable)
WITH A CUSTOMER (modifiable)
AWAY FROM DESK (modifiable)
OUT ALL DAY (modifiable)
CUSTOM MSG 11, 12, ... (for customer-created
messages)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Labeling
Page 362
Considerations and Constraints
62
If a label is assigned to the extension, the MLX telephone user sees the label, the
extension number, and the posted message, for example, STEVE B Ext 7101
OUT TO LUNCH. If a label is not assigned to an extension and a caller dials that
extension, the telephone’s extension number is displayed (instead of the user’s
name), along with any posted messages. For example, an MLX display telephone
user sees Ext 7103 OUT TO LUNCH.
If labels are not assigned to operator extensions, display telephone users see
Operator and the operator’s extension number when receiving a call from the
operator.
If labels have not been assigned to outside lines/trunks, display users see the
factory-set label, OUTSIDE and the line/trunk number (such as Trk 810), when an
outside call is made or received. With AT&T’s INFO2 ANI service, another PRI
calling party number service, or a calling number identification service and 800
GS/LS-ID module (loop-start lines only), the information displayed also identifies
the number of the caller (MLX display telephones only).
NOTE:
The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by
local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or central office equipment.
Programmed labels cannot be shown on nondisplay telephones or on
single-line telephones.
Labels that are programmable by a user are displayed in all capital letters.
Labels can contain capital letters, numbers, and eight types of characters:
ampersands (&), dashes (-), spaces, periods (.), commas (,), apostrophes(’), stars
(*), and pound signs (#).
Telephone Differences
62
Multiline Telephones
62
Only MLX-20L telephone users can have Personal Directories. Labels for the
entries in this directory can be programmed by the system manager, using system
programming, or by the MLX-20L telephone user at the extension.
Feature Interactions
Directories
62
An MLX extension programmed as a CTI link (Release 5.0 and later
systems only) is automatically assigned the Extension Directory label
CTILINK. This label can be changed using the Labeling feature.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Labeling
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 363
Do Not Disturb
Labeling is used to enter the names of the persons or businesses
associated with the System Speed Dial numbers stored as listings in the
System Directory. It is also used to enter the names of people, groups,
and locations associated with the extensions in the system stored as
listings in the Extension Directory. Labeling is used to enter the telephone
numbers and label information associated with Personal Directories on
MLX-20L telephones, and this information also can be programmed by
the user at the extension.
Group Calling
Posted message 01, DO NOT DISTURB, is modifiable prior to Release 2.0.
Starting with Release 2.0, when an MLX user activates the Do Not Disturb
feature, the Do Not Disturb message is automatically posted. Therefore,
in Release 2.0 and later systems, this posted message is not allowed to
be changed. (The message may be posted even if the user does not
activate Do Not Disturb.)
Integrated
Administration
An alphanumeric label can be assigned to the calling group. The label is
displayed when a group member answers a group call or when an MLX
display telephone user presses the Inspct button and an Auto Dial button
programmed with the calling group’s extension number.
Messaging
Extension, line/trunk, and calling group labels are shared with certain
applications. The extension labels may be entered or updated in
Integrated Administration, affecting both the system and the applications.
Speed Dial
The labels stored in the Extension Directory appear on MLX display
telephones when users send each other messages. Messages include
the name (the 7-character label) of the user who sent the message and
the time and day the user called. Posted messages are created and
changed by using Labeling.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Language Choice
Page 364
Language Choice
62
At a Glance
62
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Feature Codes
English
French
Spanish
System Programming
Telephone users, operators, system manager
Extension Information, SMDR, System Information
(SysSet-up)
All
MLX telephones only
790
791
792
Select a language for the entire system:
More→Language→SystemLang
Select a language for an extension:
● More→Language→Extensions
Select a language for SMDR headers:
● More→Language→SMDR
Select a language for printing programming reports:
● More→Language→Printer
●
Factory Settings
System Language
Extension Language
SMDR Report Language
Programming Report
Language
SPM Language
English
English
English
English
English
NOTE:
Language choice is available with Release 1.1 and later systems.
62
Description
Since Release 1.1, the system has supported system operation and programming
in three languages: English, French, and Spanish. This enables system managers
and MLX telephone users to customize aspects of the system for their linguistic
convenience.
■
The system manager can program the entire system to operate in English,
French, or Spanish, including MLX prompts and displays, SMDR headings,
and system programming reports.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Language Choice
Page 365
■
The system manager can program specific extensions or consecutive
blocks of extensions in English, French, or Spanish as necessary. In
addition, an individual MLX telephone user in a Release 1.1 or later system
can choose the language most appropriate for his or her own extension.
■
The system manager can program SMDR report headers, the headings,
and text of system programming reports to be printed in English, French, or
Spanish.
■
A user of System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software can
select English, French, or Spanish as the language for its displays and
messages.
■
MLX-5D, MLX-10D, MLX-16DP, MLX-20L, and MLX-28D display
telephones and MLX-10 and MLX-5 nondisplay telephones can be
obtained with factory-imprinted buttons in English, French, Hungarian, or
Spanish.
System Language
62
Through system programming, the system manager selects a language for the
entire system, determining the language used for all MLX telephone displays,
SMDR headings, system programming reports, and maintenance displays.
Extension Language
62
In Release 1.1 and later systems, MLX telephones can operate in English,
French, or Spanish, independently of the system language. The language for an
extension is chosen either by the system manager through system programming
or by a user at the extension. This setting also controls the Reminder and Alarm
Clock features on MLX telephones, using a 12-hour clock on telephones
operating in English and a 24-hour clock on telephones operating in French or
Spanish.
After the user selects a language, the choice is confirmed on Line 2 of MLX
display telephones. If the choice is English, the display shows the words In
English. If the choice is French, the display shows the words En français. If the
choice is Spanish, the display shows the words En español.
After 5 seconds, Line 2 changes, displaying the date and time. In English, the
date is shown as month day; the time is shown in 12-hour format (a.m. or p.m.). In
French and Spanish, the date is shown as day month; the time is shown in
24-hour format. At MLX nondisplay telephones, the only effect of this selection is
a different time format (12-hour clock versus 24-hour clock) required when dialing
times for the Reminder feature.
SMDR Report Language
62
Through system programming, SMDR reports can be printed with headers in
English, French, or Spanish, regardless of the language selected for the system
and for SPM.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Language Choice
Programming Report Language
Page 366
62
Through system programming, programming reports can be printed in English,
French or Spanish, regardless of the language selected for the system or for
System Programming and Maintenance (SPM).
SPM Language
62
Unlike the SMDR and programming report languages, which are selected through
system programming, the SPM language is selected by the SPM user. When the
software is first installed, the user is prompted (in English) for line speed, color or
black-and-white monitor, and other configuration options. These selections are
stored in a system-created configuration file c:\spm\ams.cfg (DOS version) or
/usr/ams/ams.cfg (UNIX System version). The language selection made at this
time determines whether SPM menus, pop-up windows, and other messages are
presented in English, French, or Spanish. A second language selection option on
the SPM screen affects messages from the control unit to SPM and controls the
7-line by 24-character console-simulation window for the duration of the session.
These two language options operate independently of each other. An SPM user,
for example, can select English for one and French for the other.
The following discussion refers to the language specified in the SPM configuration
files as the PC language and the language used by the control unit as the console
window language.
62
PC Language
Once a PC language is chose at initial installation, that selection is written into the
configuration file and becomes the default language. Invoking SPM calls that
particular language selection. If a user wishes to specify a different language, he
or she can do so using the -l option as follows:
spm -l english
spm -l french
spm -l spanish
Note that the option is a lowercase letter L, not the number 1. Use of the -l option
changes the language attribute in the SPM configuration file. The language
specified becomes the new PC language, used whenever SPM is started without
the -l option.
Console Window Language
62
Because the console window language selection is made only after the selection
of the PC language, the language used in the 7-line by 24-character console
simulation window always defaults to the PC language. However, by pressing and making a selection, the SPM user can select a different language for this
window for the duration of the current session.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Language Choice
Page 367
Considerations and Constraints
62
After a System Reset (cold start), the system language reverts to the default
setting, English.
In a system release prior to Release 1.1, if a user attempts to set the language on
a telephone, he or she hears a reorder tone or an error beep.
When the system and extension language selections are different, the extension
language takes precedence.
Telephone Differences
62
Multiline Telephones
62
Language choice is supported only on MLX telephones.
Because the extension language takes precedence over the system language,
Alarm Clock (display telephones only) and Reminder differ, depending on the
language used at an extension. When the extension language is set for English or
the system language has been set for English and no extension language
selection has been programmed, MLX telephone users set the Alarm Clock and
Reminder features using 12-hour time (a.m. or p.m.). When the extension
language is French or Spanish, or the system language is set for French or
Spanish and no extension language has been chosen, the MLX telephone user
sets the Alarm Clock and Reminder features using 24-hour time. Language
choice affects only the Reminder feature on MLX-10 and MLX-5 nondisplay
telephones.
Feature Interactions
Alarm Clock and
Reminder Service
62
Enter the time settings for Alarm Clock and Reminder in accordance with
the language selection governing the extension. If the language selection
is English, the time setting for Alarm Clock and Reminder must be
entered in 12-hour format (0100–1259) followed by either a 2 (A) for a.m.
or a 7 (P) for p.m. If the governing language selection is French or
Spanish, the time setting must be entered in 24-hour format (0000–2359).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Last Number Dial
Page 368
Last Number Dial
62
At a Glance
62
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
Feature Code
MLX Display Label
Maximums
Telephone users, operators, data users
Extension Information
All
All except QCC
*84
84
LastNumDial [Last#]
1 Last Number Dial button for each multiline telephone
16 digits saved by Last Number Dial
62
Description
Last Number Dial automatically saves the last number dialed from an extension
and allows the user to call the number again without manually redialing. The
number is saved even if the called party answers.
The number saved is any extension or telephone number dialed in any of the
following ways:
■
Manually dialing the complete number on the dialpad
■
Dialing the number using a Personal Speed Dial code
■
Dialing a number using a programmed outside Auto Dial button
■
Dialing a number using a programmed Saved Number Dial button
Each time a user dials a new number using any of these methods, the old number
saved for Last Number Dial is erased and replaced with the new number.
Considerations and Constraints
62
Only one Last Number Dial button can be programmed on each multiline
telephone.
A maximum of 16 digits is saved by Last Number Dial.
Because the type of line button used to make the call (personal line, SA, or ICOM)
is not stored, the user must select the appropriate line button before using Last
Number Dial to redial a number.
Last Number Dial saves whatever you dial, whether or not the number is valid.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Last Number Dial
Page 369
If you dial a telephone number and, after the call is connected, dial additional
digits, such as an account number or password, Last Number Dial saves all digits,
including those dialed after the call is connected. In addition, if someone other
than the owner of a display telephone presses the Last Number Dial button, all
dialed digits are shown on the display, including confidential information such as
passwords or account codes.
Last Number Dial does not store numbers dialed through an Extension, Personal,
or System Directory, an inside Auto Dial button, a System Speed Dial code, or a
DSS button.
If the number is dialed using an outside Auto Dial button or Personal Speed Dial
code and includes a special character such as Pause or Stop, the special
character does not work when the number is redialed using Last Number Dial.
Mode Differences
62
Behind Switch
62
In Behind Switch mode, when a user manually dials an outside number that
includes a dial-out code (for example, an Automatic Route Selection or pool
dial-out code) required by the host system, the pauses required to wait for dial
tone from some host systems are not automatically stored for Last Number Dial.
As a result, a user may either hear a fast busy signal or reach a wrong number
when using Last Number Dial.
Key Mode
62
In Key mode, Last Number Dial cannot be used unless a Feature button is
programmed on an analog multiline telephone in Key mode. This Feature button
is used instead of the # button to activate the feature code.
Telephone Differences
62
Queued Call Consoles
62
Last Number Dial cannot be used on QCCs.
Other Multiline Telephones
62
To redial a number using Last Number Dial on a multiline telephone, select the
appropriate personal line (outside line) or SA button for the call. Then either press
the programmed Last Number Dial button or press the Feature button and dial 84.
The number saved by the feature is dialed automatically. On MLX display
telephones, press the Feature button and select LastNumDial [Last#] from the
display.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Last Number Dial
Page 370
Single-Line Telephones
62
To redial a number using Last Number Dial, lift the handset (the telephone must
connect to an SA or ICOM line) and then dial #84. The number that was last
dialed is dialed automatically.
Feature Interactions
62
Authorization Code
After activating the Authorization Code feature, Last Number Dial cannot
be used. Once the Authorization Code feature is deactivated, Last
Number Dial can be used and contains the last number dialed before the
Authorization Code feature was activated.
Auto Dial
Last Number Dial does not store numbers dialed using an inside Auto Dial
button. If a number containing special characters is dialed using an
outside Auto Dial button, the special characters do not work when the
number is redialed using Last Number Dial.
Digital Data Calls
Terminal adapters can use Last Number Dial by dialing the Last Number
Dial feature code. Last Number Dial can be activated by video systems
that can dial strings and feature codes beginning with #.
Direct Station
Selector
An extension number dialed by pressing a DSS button is not stored for
Last Number Dial.
Directories
Last Number Dial does not store a number dialed using a Personal,
Extension, or System Directory.
Display
When a user presses a programmed Last Number Dial button, the digits
appear on the display as if the user were dialing them from the dialpad.
HotLine
Last Number Dial is not available at HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and
later systems).
Inspect
In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, when a user presses Inspct and then a
programmed Last Number Dial button, Last Number Dial appears on
the display.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a user presses Inspct and then a
programmed Last Number Dial button, the saved number appears on the
display.
Microphone Disable
When an MLX telephone user’s microphone is disabled, pressing the
programmed Last Number Dial button before lifting the handset turns on
the speakerphone so the user can hear the number being dialed.
However, once the call is answered, the user must lift the handset to talk.
Recall/Timed Flash
Recall can be used on a call made with Last Number Dial on a personal
line or Pool button (loop-start only), an inside call, or, in Release 2.0 and
later systems, an outside call made on a loop-start line using an SA or
ICOM button.
SMDR
All outside numbers dialed using Last Number Dial are recorded on the
SMDR report.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Last Number Dial
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 371
Speed Dial
Telephone numbers dialed using Personal Speed Dial are stored by Last
Number Dial. However, if the number includes special characters such as
Pause or Stop, the special characters do not work when the number is
redialed using Last Number Dial. Telephone numbers dialed using
System Speed Dial are not stored by Last Number Dial.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When Last Number Dial is used on a call made with a Shared SA button,
the number is stored on the extension where Last Number Dial was used,
not on the principal extension.
Transfer
Last Number Dial can be used to dial the outside number of the telephone
to which the call is being transferred.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Line Request
Page 372
Line Request
62
At a Glance
62
Users Affected
Modes
Telephones
Telephone users, operators
All
All except MLC-5 cordless, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, QCC, and
single-line telephones
Description
62
If a user wants to make a call on a busy outside line assigned to a button, Line
Request notifies the user when the line is available. When an outside line is busy,
the green LED next to the button is on or flashing.
Line Request is automatically available and does not require programming. To
request the busy line, the multiline telephone user presses the line button for the
busy line without lifting the handset. The red LED next to the line button turns on,
and, when the line becomes available, the telephone automatically alerts the user
with a beep. To make a call using the requested line, the user lifts the handset or
presses the Speaker button.
Line Request is canceled if the user presses another line button or makes or
receives a call.
Line Request applies to personal lines only, not to pools or to lines on SA or ICOM
buttons. To complete calls to busy extensions or to complete calls to outside
numbers using a pool in which all lines/trunks are busy, use Callback.
Considerations and Constraints
62
Line Request does not reserve the line; it alerts you only that the line is available.
Line Request cannot be used for an SA or ICOM button.
Line Request cannot be used on single-line telephones or on a Queued Call
Console (QCC).
In Hybrid/PBX mode, Line Request cannot be used on a Pool button or for a busy
pool.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Line Request
Page 373
Mode Differences
62
Hybrid/PBX Mode
62
In Hybrid/PBX mode, Line Request can be used for personal lines or
special-purpose lines (such as WATS) assigned to line buttons on a multiline
telephone. Callback should be used instead of Line Request to complete calls to
busy extensions or outside numbers when the call is made by using a pool in
which the lines/trunks are busy.
NOTE:
Do not use Callback when your system includes a voice messaging
system.
Key and Behind Switch Modes
62
Line Request works only for outside lines that are assigned to line buttons.
Telephone Differences
62
Queued Call Consoles
62
Line Request cannot be used on QCCs.
Other Multiline Telephones
62
Line Request cannot be used on MLC-5, MDW 9000 cordless, or MDC 9000
cordless/wireless telephones.
Single-Line Telephones
62
Line Request cannot be used on single-line telephones.
Feature Interactions
62
Callback
Returning Callback calls cancel Line Request.
Camp-On
Returning camped-on calls cancel Line Request.
Park
Returning parked calls cancel Line Request.
Pools
Line Request cannot be used on a Pool button.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Line Request cannot be used for an SA or ICOM button.
Transfer
Returning transferred calls cancel Line Request.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 374
Messaging
62
At a Glance
62
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Send/Remove Message
Leave Message
Posted Message
Delete Message
Return Call
Next Message
Scroll
Feature Codes
Send/Remove Message
Leave Message
After calling
Without calling
Cancel Message Sent
Message LED off
Delete Message
Return Call
Next Message
Scroll
MLX Display Labels
Delete Message
Next Message
Return Call
Leave Message
Posted Message
Send/Remove Message
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory,
Extension Information, Label Information
All
All
*38 (Operator only)
*25
*751
*26 (Analog display
*27 (Analog display
*28 (Analog display
*29 (Analog display
telephones only)
telephones only)
telephones only)
telephones only)
38 + extension number (Operator only)
25
53 + extension number
*53 + extension number
54
26 (Analog display telephones only)
27 (Analog display telephones only)
28 (Analog display telephones only)
29 (Analog display telephones only)
Messages,Delete Msg [Msgs,Dlete]
Messages,Next Msg [Msgs,Next]
Messages,Return Call [Msgs,Call]
Leave Msg [LvMsg]
Messages,Posted Msg [Msgs,Post]
Messages,Send/RmvMsg [Msgs,SdMsg]
Change or add posted messages:
Labeling→More→PostMessage
Identify fax extension jacks, assign fax message-waiting
receivers, specify length of time before system sends fax
message-waiting indication:
●
●
AuxEquip
→Fax→Msg
Waiting
Assign a message-waiting receiver for a calling group:
● Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Message
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 375
At a Glance - Continued
Maximums
Messages for each
display telephone
Message-Waiting
Receivers for fax
Message-Waiting
Receivers per
calling group
Fax Message
Threshold
10
4
1
10 seconds (range 0–30 seconds)
62
Description
Messaging features allow users to do the following:
■
Send messages
■
Receive messages
■
Post messages
Sending Messages
62
The following features are used to send messages:
■
Send/Remove Message. For operators only.
■
Leave Message. For any user to leave a message for a co-worker with a
display telephone.
Send/Remove Message
62
The Send/Remove Message feature, available only to operators, turns the
Message LED on and off for any telephone connected to the system. For
telephones without a display, Send/Remove Message is the only way the
Message LED can be turned on, unless either the extension is programmed as
the message-waiting receiver for a fax machine or calling group or the system has
a voice messaging system connected (see ‘‘Direct Voice Mail’’ on page 215).
A Send/Remove Message button is a fixed button on Queued Call Consoles
(QCCs) and cannot be reassigned. On a system with 29 or fewer lines,
Send/Remove Message is assigned by default to analog DLCs on button 34. On a
system with more than 29 lines, Send/Remove Message is replaced with line 32.
On QCCs and MLX DLCs with a DSS, as well as on MERLIN II System Display
Consoles, operators can use the LEDs next to the DSS buttons to determine
whether an operator turned the Message LED on. Before sending a message, the
operator presses the Message Status button and checks the red LED next to the
DSS button of the person to whom the message is to be sent; the red LED is on
when a message from an operator is waiting and off if no message from an
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 376
operator is waiting. The LEDs on the DSS do not go on when Message LEDs
have been turned on by using the Leave Message feature, voice messaging
system, fax arrival, or when a message is left for a calling group. To leave a
message-waiting indication when the LED is off, the operator presses the
programmed Send/Remove Message button, followed by the DSS button or Auto
Dial button for the person for whom the message is intended. The operator
presses the Message Status button to return to normal call handling. MLX DLC
operators also can press the Feature button and select the feature from the
display.
If an operator sends a message while on a call, only an inside caller hears the
touch tones; an outside caller does not.
When Message Status is on, if the LED next to a DSS button is on and an
operator uses the Send/Remove Message feature, the user’s message LED is
turned off (unless the LED is also on for a reason other than an operator’s using of
Send/Remove Message). When the LED next to a DSS button is off and an
operator uses the Send/Remove Message feature, the user’s Message LED is
turned on.
A DLC operator without a DSS can check message status by using Auto Dial
buttons programmed with extension numbers. The red LED next to an Auto Dial
button indicates whether the Message LED is on. A QCC operator without a DSS
cannot check message status. If an operator who cannot check status sends a
message, that message can cancel a message-waiting indication sent by another
system operator who used Send/Remove Message.
Leave Message
62
The Leave Message feature allows any user, including operators, to send
messages to co-workers with display telephones.
When you call a co-worker with a display telephone and get no answer or a busy
signal, press a programmed Leave Message button or press the Feature button
and dial 25. On MLX display telephones, select the feature from the display while
listening to ringback or a busy tone. A message is sent to the display telephone
user. The message includes the caller’s name, if labels are programmed, or
extension and the time and date of the call.
If the caller leaves another message for the same person before that person
responds to a previous message, the previous message is overwritten. A person
with a display telephone who has received a message sees only the caller’s name
(if labels are programmed) or extension and date and time for the new message.
To use the Leave Message feature without calling a user, the multiline telephone
user presses the Feature button (without lifting the handset) and then dials 53
and the person’s extension number. QCC operators cannot use Leave Message
without calling the user.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 377
NOTE:
If the Message LED of the person getting the message is already on, using
the Leave Message feature does not turn the LED off even if an operator
uses Leave Message to send a message to a display telephone user.
When a person with any telephone tries to use the Leave Message feature to
send a message to a person with a single-line telephone or a multiline telephone
without a display, the caller hears a single beep indicating that a message must
be left with an operator. If the caller has a display telephone, the message Cannot
Send Message is displayed.
When a user tries to use the Leave Message feature and the co-worker’s
message box is full, the co-worker’s telephone continues to ring and the caller’s
telephone beeps once. If the caller has a display, Message Box Full is displayed,
and the caller must leave a message with an operator or voice mail (if available).
Cancel a sent message by pressing the Feature button and dialing *53 plus the
extension to which the message was sent. QCC operators cannot cancel
messages they have sent.
Receiving Messages
62
When the Message LED on a telephone is on or when a single-line telephone
user hears a stutter dial tone upon lifting the handset, there is a message waiting
for that person or for the calling group (if the extension is programmed as a
message-waiting receiver for a calling group). The message can be from the
following sources:
■
An operator
■
A voice messaging system
■
A fax machine, if the extension is programmed as a fax message-waiting
receiver for fax transmissions
■
Another user
An MLX display telephone user (including a QCC operator) reads messages by
pressing the Menu button and selecting Messages from the display. The first line
of the most recent message received is shown on the display. To see the rest of
the message, press the More button. To see the next message, select Next
Message from the display. To return the call using an MLX display telephone
(including QCCs), select Return Call. The extension of the person who left the
message is dialed automatically. To delete the message, select Delete Message.
The Message LED turns off when all messages have been deleted.
An analog multiline telephone user with a display reads messages by pressing the
Message button. The first message received is shown on the display. If the
message is longer than one line, press a programmed Scroll button or press the
Feature button and dial 29. To see the next message, press a programmed Next
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 378
Message button or press the Feature button and dial 28. To return the call, press
a programmed Return Call button or press the Feature button and dial 27. To
delete the message, press a programmed Delete Message button or press the
Feature button and dial 26. The Message LED turns off when all messages have
been deleted.
NOTE:
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when someone uses the Return Call
feature for a voice messaging system, a call is returned to the voice
messaging system, not to the specific VMI extension that sent the
message-waiting code.
Display telephones show messages in reverse order of when they were received;
the most recent message is displayed first. Each message is identified on the
display as described in Table 27.
Table 27.
Message-Waiting Display Identifiers
Type of Display
Telephone
Analog multiline
MLX
Identifier
*
Call ext. or name
*
ATT
FAX
VMS
EXT
Meaning
New or unread message
Message from caller’s extension number or name
New or unread message
Message from system operator (attendant)
You have a fax.
You have a voice mail message.
Message from an extension (co-worker)
The type of message indicated does not allow a calling group message-waiting
receiver to distinguish between a message left for the calling group and a fax or
personal message.
Multiline telephone users with no display cannot use programmed message
buttons or feature codes to answer messages. The Message LED is usually
turned off by an operator. However, an analog multiline telephone user (excluding
those with BIS-34 telephones) can turn off the Message LED by pressing the
associated Message button. Users of BIS-34 telephones, MLX-5, or MLX-10
nondisplay telephones can turn off the LED by pressing the Feature button and
dialing 54. Check with message sources (operator, fax, voice messaging) before
turning off the LED.
Fax Message-Waiting Receivers
72
The Fax Message-Waiting feature notifies designated extensions of the arrival of
fax transmissions. Up to four extensions can be programmed to receive
message-waiting indications when a fax transmission is received on a specific fax
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 379
machine. The Message LED goes on when the fax message threshold is
exceeded. The fax message threshold is the length of time (0–30 seconds) before
the system assumes that a fax has arrived.
Return Call is not operable for messages received from a fax machine and cannot
be used to make a call to the fax.
NOTE:
Fax machines only can send message-waiting indications. They cannot
receive message-waiting indications.
Calling Group Message-Waiting Receivers
72
An extension can be programmed as the message-waiting receiver for a calling
group. The user can receive personal messages or messages intended for the
calling group from any of the sources listed under “Receiving Messages.”
72
Posted Messages
Users can post a message to provide special information to co-workers with
display telephones—for example, to tell callers where the person is when not
answering the telephone or why the person does not want to be disturbed. When
a user with a display telephone calls a co-worker who has a message posted, the
posted message is shown on the caller’s display (even if the call is answered).
Users do not need a display telephone to post a message.
Twenty different posted messages can be programmed in the telephone system.
Ten messages are factory-set but can be changed. Ten additional messages can
be programmed and are factory-set as CUSTOM MSG ##. Beginning with Release
2.0, posted message 01, DO NOT DISTURB, cannot be changed.
Table 28.
Posted Messages
01 DO NOT DISTURB
06 IN CONFERENCE
11 CUSTOM MSG 11
16 CUSTOM MSG 16
02 OUT TO LUNCH
07 WITH A CLIENT
12 CUSTOM MSG 12
17 CUSTOM MSG 17
03 AT HOME
08 WITH A CUSTOMER
13 CUSTOM MSG 13
18 CUSTOM MSG 18
04 OUT SICK
09 AWAY FROM DESK
14 CUSTOM MSG 14
19 CUSTOM MSG 19
05 IN A MEETING
10 OUT ALL DAY
15 CUSTOM MSG 15
20 CUSTOM MSG 20
See ‘‘Labeling’’ on page 360 for more information about creating posted
messages.
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when Do Not Disturb is turned on, the system
automatically posts the Do Not Disturb message. This message appears on the
Home screen of an MLX display telephone user with Do Not Disturb turned on and
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 380
on the screen of any inside caller with a display telephone who calls that user. The
system automatically removes the Do Not Disturb message when the user turns
off the feature. On analog multiline, MLX-5, or MLX-10 nondisplay telephones, the
Do Not Disturb message is not posted automatically unless the telephone has a
programmed Posted Messages button.
A user can post or remove a Do Not Disturb message by pressing a programmed
Posted Messages button. However, this does not turn the Do Not Disturb feature
on or off.
Users with MLX display telephones can post a message by pressing the Menu
button, selecting Posted Msg [Post] from the display, selecting the desired
message, and selecting Post.
Users with analog multiline, MLX-5, or MLX-10 nondisplay telephones must use
programming code *751 to program a Posted Messages button for the system to
automatically post or remove the message when the feature is turned on or off. To
post a message, press the programmed Posted Messages button; the green LED
next to the button flashes. Then dial the code for the desired message; the LED
next to the button becomes steady. To cancel a posted message, press the
programmed Posted Messages button and dial 00; the green LED next to the
button turns off.
Considerations and Constraints
82
In Release 2.0 and later systems, if a user at an analog multiline, MLX-5, or
MLX-10 telephone has a programmed Posted Message button and the Do Not
Disturb feature is turned on, the system automatically posts the Do Not Disturb
message for callers with display telephones. The programmed button is not
required at MLX display telephones. When the feature is turned off, the message
is canceled. However, posting or canceling the Do Not Disturb message does not
turn the feature on or off.
A user does not need a display telephone to use the Leave Message feature, but
the person to whom the message is sent must have a display telephone. Unlike
Send/Remove Message, when the Leave Message feature is used to send a
message to a person whose Message LED is on, the LED is not turned off even if
the caller is an operator.
If an operator uses the Send/Remove Message feature while on a call, only an
inside caller hears the touch tones; an outside caller does not. If 10 messages
have been stored and a user tries to send an eleventh message, the caller hears
a beep and display telephones show Message Box Full.
Responding to messages by using Return Call does not delete the message. The
user must delete all messages before the Message LED turns off. A fax machine
can send the message-waiting indication but cannot be assigned as a
message-waiting receiver for either another fax or for a calling group.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 381
If a fax message-waiting indication is deleted by one of the four message-waiting
receivers, the message is deleted from all analog multiline display telephones
programmed as a message-waiting receivers for the fax, but the message is not
deleted from MLX display telephones programmed as message-waiting receivers
for the fax.
Each calling group can have only one extension assigned as its message-waiting
receiver, but the same extension can be assigned as the message-waiting
receiver for more than one calling group.
Messages can be posted only by using a programmed button or, for MLX display
telephone users, by selecting the feature from the display.
A single-line telephone user cannot post a message.
When a user posts a nonexistent message, CUSTOM MSGnn is displayed,
indicating that the system manager has programmed a message for this message
number.
Only multiline display telephone users see posted messages. Users with
single-line telephones or multiline telephones without displays cannot receive
messages posted by other users.
Posting a message does not prevent the telephone from ringing.
Message Waiting does not work for off-premises telephones.
Telephone Differences
82
Direct-Line Consoles
82
The Send/Remove Message feature is an operator-only feature used by a DLC
operator to turn on the Message LED to indicate a message waiting. For
telephones without a display, Send/Remove Message is the only way the
Message LED can be turned on and off by operators.
A Send/Remove Message button is factory-assigned to an MLX-28D used as a
DLC. On a system with 29 or fewer lines, Alarm, Night Service, and Send/Remove
Message are assigned by default to analog DLCs on buttons 32 through 34. On a
system with more than 29 lines, Alarm is replaced with line 30, Night Service is
replaced with line 31, and Send/Remove Message is replaced with line 32. The
first 18 lines on an MLX DLC are always factory-set as personal lines.
Queued Call Consoles
82
A Queued Call Console (QCC) operator can use Leave Message only by
selecting the feature from the display. A Send/Remove Message button is
programmed as a fixed feature on a QCC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Page 382
Other Multiline Telephones
82
The 5-button analog multiline telephone (no longer available) has neither a
Message LED nor a Message button.
MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 telephones cannot receive Leave Message or Posted
Message messages. They can receive operator (Send/Remove Message) and
voice mail message notification. When the telephone is turned on, MSG appears on
the display.
Single-Line Telephones
82
Single-line telephone users cannot post a message.
To use the Leave Message feature while listening to ringback or the busy tone on
a single-line telephone, dial #25. To use Leave Message without calling the
extension, lift the handset (the telephone must connect to an SA or ICOM button),
then dial #53 and the person’s extension number.
If a single-line telephone sends message to a nondisplay telephone user and
there is no voice messaging system, the caller receives no error indication, and no
message is sent.
In either case, if the person’s message box is full or the receiver is a single-line
telephone or a multiline telephone without a display, the caller hears a beep
indicating that the message has not been left.
To cancel a message sent, lift the handset and dial #*53 and the extension
number where the message was left.
Single-line telephone users without a Message LED hear a stutter dial tone when
a message is waiting. A single-line telephone user cannot respond to messages
by using feature codes. Normally, if a single-line telephone has a Message LED, it
is turned off by an operator. However, a single-line user can turn off the Message
LED by lifting the handset and (while listening to inside dial tone) dialing #54.
Check with all message sources (system operator, fax, voice messaging) before
turning off the LED.
Other Nondisplay Telephones
82
If a caller at a display telephone leaves a message for an extension that does not
have a display and there is no voice messaging system on the system, the caller
sees an error display. If there is a voice messaging system, the Message LED of
the receiving telephone turns on.
If a message is sent from a nondisplay multiline telephone to another nondisplay
telephone and there is no voice mail system connected to the communications
system, the caller hears an error beep and no message is sent.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Feature Interactions
Page 383
82
Barge-In
If Barge-In is used to contact a user with a posted message, the caller’s
telephone does not display that message.
Digital Data Calls
Messaging features are not available for data or video extensions, but
can be used by telephones at these workstations.
Directories
When an Extension Directory is used to call a co-worker with a posted
message, the posted message is not displayed on the caller’s telephone.
Direct Station
Selector
When an operator presses the Message Status button on a DSS adjunct,
the LEDs on the DSS reflect only messages left by an operator’s using
the Send/Remove Message feature and not messages left by any user
(including an operator) using the Leave Message feature.
Display
When users try to send messages to an extension with a full message
box, they see Message Box Full on the display. When a user tries to
retrieve messages and the message box is empty, No Messages appears.
When a user has a message from a co-worker, the display shows the
name or extension number (if no label is programmed) of the caller and,
on MLX telephones, the time and date the message was left. An unread
message is marked with an asterisk ( *).
Display
continued
Messages also can be received from outside callers (if the telephone has
a voice messaging system) and from an operator. On MLX display
telephones, messages left by a voice messaging system are identified as
VMS, messages from an operator are identified as ATT, and
message-waiting indications received by a fax message-waiting receiver
are identified as FAX. Analog multiline telephone users see Call
extension or caller’s name.
Do Not Disturb
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when Do Not Disturb is turned on, the
system automatically posts DO NOT DISTURB, which appears both on the
Home screen of an MLX display telephone user with Do Not Disturb
turned on and on the screen of any inside display telephone user who
calls that person. The system automatically removes the Do Not Disturb
message when the user turns off the feature. Users at analog multiline,
MLX-5, or MLX-10 nondisplay telephones must program a Posted
Messages button for the system to automatically post or remove the
message when the feature is turned on or off. A user can post or remove
a Do Not Disturb message by pressing a programmed Posted Messages
button. However, this does not turn the Do Not Disturb feature on or off.
Fax Extension
Return Call does not work for messages received from a fax machine and
cannot be used to make a call to the fax.
Group Calling
The type of message indicated does not allow a calling group
message-waiting receiver to distinguish between a message left for the
calling group and a fax or personal message.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 384
HotLine
If the HotLine extension is programmed to dial an outside call, that
telephone number must be in the Night Service Exclusion List or a Night
Service Emergency number. If the HotLine is programmed to dial an
inside extension, the user can dial #25 to leave a message. The HotLine
extension cannot dial any other number except the one assigned to it.
Labeling
Users can leave messages for the calling group only if the system has
been programmed with a designated calling group message receiver. The
calling group also receives fax message-waiting indications directed to
the calling group. The message-waiting receiver cannot distinguish
messages left for the calling group from fax or personal messages.
The labels stored in the Extension Directory appear on MLX display
telephones when users send each other messages. Messages include
the name (the 7-character label) of the user who sent the message and
the time and day the user called. Posted messages (except for posted
message 01, DO NOT DISTURB) are created and changed using Labeling.
Multi-Function
Module
A single-line telephone with a Message LED connected to an MFM can
receive message-waiting indications.
Signal/Notify
If a display telephone user presses only a Signaling button to send an
audible signal to an extension, a posted message at the destination is not
shown on the signaler’s display. However, if a display telephone user
selects an SA or ICOM button, lifts the handset, and uses the Signaling
button to dial the extension, the message appears.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When a Shared SA button is used to leave a message for a display user,
the extension shown is that of the telephone with the SSA button and not
that of the principal owner. When a principal extension owner with an
MLX display telephone posts a message and a call is answered at the
Shared SA button, the Home screen on which the posted message was
previously shown is not restored. If the principal owner either presses the
Home button or makes or receives a call, the Home screen is restored.
Transfer
If an inside call is transferred to an extension with a posted message, only
the display telephone user who transfers the call, and not the original
caller, sees the posted message, even after the transfer is completed.
If a call is transferred to an extension programmed as a fax extension, the
message indication is not sent to the fax message-waiting receiver
regardless of the amount of time programmed for the fax message
threshold.
A nondisplay telephone user who sends a message via Leave Message
during a transfer cannot determine who received the message. For
example, suppose Extension A calls Extension B and Extension B
transfers the call to Extension C. If Extension A sends a message before
the transfer is complete, Extension B receives the message. If Extension
A sends a message after Extension B completes the transfer, Extension
C receives the message, even if Extension C does not answer and the
call is ringing at Extension B as a transfer return.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Messaging
Voice Messaging
Interface (VMI)
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 385
In Release 2.0 and later systems, when using the Return Call feature for
a voice messaging system, a call is returned to the voice messaging
system, not to the specific VMI jack that sent the message-waiting code.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Microphone Disable
Page 386
Microphone Disable
82
At a Glance
82
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Factory Setting
Telephone users, DLC operators
Extension Directory
All
All MLX (except QCC)
Enable or disable individual MLX telephone microphones:
● Extensions→More→Mic Disable
Enabled
Description
82
Microphone Disable can be assigned through system programming to any MLX
telephone except a Queued Call Console (QCC) to limit the use of the
speakerphone. When the feature is assigned, the microphone does not function,
but the speaker functions normally. A user can listen to calls or announcements
over the speakerphone but must use the handset to respond.
For some features, such as Auto Dial, Last Number Dial, or Saved Number Dial,
the system automatically selects a line and activates the speakerphone. When
one of these features is used on a telephone with Microphone Disable assigned,
the system selects the line and activates the speaker, but the microphone is
muted automatically; the red LED next to the Mute button turns on. To be heard,
lift the handset. The Mute and Speaker LEDs go off.
Also, when group pages or voice-announced transfers are received on a
telephone with Microphone Disable assigned, the user can hear the
announcement over the speakerphone, but the microphone is muted
automatically. Lift the handset to speak to an inside caller who either is
transferring a call or calling the user through an SA Voice or ICOM Voice button.
Microphone Disable is appropriate when speakerphones pick up too much
background noise or are needed by only some employees.
Considerations and Constraints
82
The LED next to the Mute button goes on whenever the speakerphone is
activated. Pressing the Mute button does not turn off the LED or deactivate
Microphone Disable.
If a user presses the Speaker button before lifting the handset, the system selects
a line and the user can dial a number. The microphone is muted, and the user
must lift the handset to speak to the person being called.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Multi-Function Module
Page 387
Telephone Differences
82
Queued Call Consoles
82
The microphone on a QCC cannot be disabled.
82
Other Telephones
Microphone Disable cannot be assigned to analog multiline telephones.
Microphone Disable cannot be assigned to single-line telephones.
82
Feature Interactions
Auto Dial, Last
Number Dial, and
Saved Number Dial
Pressing a programmed Auto Dial, Last Number Dial, or Saved Number
Dial button turns on the speakerphone so the user can hear the number
being dialed. However, when an MLX telephone user’s microphone is
disabled, the user must lift the handset to talk once the call is answered.
HFAl
Users whose microphones are disabled cannot use HFAI to respond to
voice-announced calls. Pressing the HFAI button does not turn on the
LED or activate the feature.
Paging
Calls made to speakerphone paging groups can still be heard over
telephones whose microphones are disabled.
Transfer
Calls can be transferred with a voice announcement to users whose
microphones are disabled, but the users must lift the handset to talk.
Voice Announce to
Busy
Users who are on their telephones and whose microphones are disabled
can still hear a voice-announced call over the speakerphone. They must
press the button with the incoming call and use the handset to talk to the
caller.
Multi-Function Module
82
At a Glance
82
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Hardware
!
Telephone users, data users
SMDR
All
MLX telephones except QCC
Tip/ring interface
WARNING:
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK: Follow all warnings and cautions.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Multi-Function Module
Page 388
ONLY a qualified technician should install, repair, or set options for an
MFM.
Do not touch the circuitry on the MFM. Touching the circuitry may result in
component damage from electrostatic discharge.
Before installing the MFM, disconnect all line/trunk and/or power cords
attached to the MLX telephone. This is to ensure that no hazardous
voltages are present during assembly. Ringing voltage from the MFM
attached to the MLX telephone can cause electrical shock if adjustments
are made while the cords are connected.
82
Description
The Multi-Function Module (MFM) is an optional adapter installed inside an MLX
telephone and used for connecting tip/ring or external alert devices. The MFM
operates on one of the two communications channels assigned to the telephone;
therefore, calls can be made to and from the device independently of the
telephone. The communications channel is also used for the Voice Announce to
Busy feature. Because of this, when a call is active at both the MLX telephone and
the MFM device, the Voice Announce to Busy feature cannot be used to reach the
MLX telephone user. Conversely, if the Voice Announce to Busy feature is being
used to reach the MLX telephone user, calls cannot be made from the device
connected to the MFM. In addition, if the Voice Announce to Busy feature is being
used at the same time that a call is received at the MFM extension number, the
caller hears ringing and the device rings if it can. But the call to the MFM
extension number cannot be answered until one of the communications channels
is free (the MLX telephone user hangs up or the person calling the MLX telephone
user hangs up).
Although each MLX extension jack used to connect an MLX telephone is assigned
only one logical ID, the system automatically assigns two extension numbers—
one for the MLX telephone and one for the device connected to the MFM. Both
extension numbers are assigned to the jack whether or not an MFM is connected.
Because a separate extension number is assigned, features and line/trunk access
can be assigned to the MFM independently of the MLX telephone. See ‘‘System
Renumbering’’ on page 583 for details on specific extension numbers assigned.
The ringing patterns for devices connected to an MFM are similar to those of an
MLX telephone for inside calls: two rings for outside calls; a ring and two beeps for
priority ring or transfer return.
A switch on the MFM can be set for one of the following operations:
■
Tip/ring interface
■
Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Multi-Function Module
Tip/Ring Interface
Page 389
82
When an MFM is set for tip/ring interface operation, only dual-tone multifrequency
(DTMF) tip/ring devices can be used to make and/or receive inside and outside
calls. The following types of DTMF devices can be used:
■
Single-line telephones
■
Modems
■
Fax machines
■
Credit card verification terminals
■
Cordless single-line telephones
■
Speakerphones that emulate a tip/ring device
■
Answering machines
Supplemental Alert Adapter
82
When an MFM is set for SAA operation, an external alert that requires a 48-VDC
contact closure can be connected.
If the external alert is used to supplement the ringing for both inside and outside
calls, the MFM should be assigned (through centralized telephone programming)
as a Primary Individual Coverage receiver with the Ring Timing option of
Immediate Ring. The MLX telephone can use Coverage On/Off to activate the
alert. In addition, by specifying that both inside and outside calls or only outside
calls are covered with the coverage arrangement, the sender (in this case the
MLX telephone user) can specify that the device (the receiver) should ring for both
inside and outside calls or only for outside calls.
If the external alert is used to supplement ringing only for calls received on
personal lines (outside lines assigned to buttons), the same outside lines/trunks
and ringing options assigned to the MLX telephone should also be assigned to the
MFM. In this arrangement, the MFM device does not ring when inside calls are
received on an SA or ICOM button.
An external alert connected to an MFM set for SAA operation can be manually
signaled, can serve as a calling group calls-in-queue alert, or can provide
supplemental alerting for after-hours calls received in a Night Service group. Only
a strobe or other light should be used as a calls-in-queue alert; if a bell is used, it
rings continuously while the number of calls in the calling group queue exceeds
the programmed threshold.
Programming Requirements
82
Although a device connected through an MFM may not have buttons, the system
treats it as a multiline telephone with 34 buttons. In Hybrid/PBX mode, the system
automatically assigns one SA Ring, one SA Voice, and one SA Originate Only
button to the MFM. In Key mode, the system automatically assigns one ICOM
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Multi-Function Module
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 390
Ring and one ICOM Voice button to the MFM. In Behind Switch mode, the
system automatically assigns one ICOM Ring, one ICOM Voice, and one prime
line button.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to enter extension programming from a device connected to
an MFM. Program an MFM through centralized telephone programming.
To ensure proper operation of a device connected through an MFM, the following
should be performed through centralized telephone programming:
■
Voice Announce to Busy should be disabled.
■
SA or ICOM button assignments should be changed to one SA Ring or
ICOM Ring and either one SA Originate Only or one ICOM Originate
Only button.
■
Ringing/Idle Line Preference should be enabled.
■
The Automatic Line Selection sequence should be set to the following:
— SA Ring or ICOM Ring
— SA Originate Only or ICOM Originate Only
— In Key and Behind Switch modes, outside lines that make calls from the
MFM device
— In Behind Switch mode only, the prime line
When the ALS sequence is set to select an SA or ICOM button, an outside
line can be selected by dialing the Idle Line Access code (usually 9) in Key
and Behind Switch modes or by dialing the pool dial-out or Automatic
Route Selection code in Hybrid/PBX mode. If ALS is set to select an
outside line button before an SA or ICOM button, the device cannot be
used to make inside calls (inside calls can be received only).
■
Ring Timing options should be set to No Ring for each outside line on
which calls are not to be received.
■
When the device is used only on personal lines for supplementary
answering (such as an answering machine) or ringing (such as an external
alert) and lines/trunks are assigned to or removed from the associated
MLX telephone, the lines/trunks should also be assigned to or removed
from the MFM.
■
When the device is used for both inside and outside calls to supplement
ringing (external alert) or to answer or screen calls (answering machine),
calls can be redirected to the device by assigning a Primary Cover,
Secondary Cover, Group Cover, or Shared SA button. In addition, an MLX
telephone user can activate Forward and Follow Me to redirect incoming
calls to the device. However, Coverage and Forward and Follow Me should
not be used simultaneously.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Multi-Function Module
Page 391
NOTE:
Forward and Follow Me (including Remote Call Forward) and
Privacy are not recommended because there are no LEDs to
indicate when the features are active.
Considerations and Constraints
82
When both the MLX telephone and the device connected to an MFM are in use,
Voice Announce to Busy feature cannot be used to reach the MLX telephone.
Voice Announce to Busy interferes with data calls made to a data workstation
including an MFM.
The tip/ring or SAA interface is selected by setting pin straps in the MFM. Only
authorized technicians can install or set options in the MFM.
When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on for an MFM and Automatic Line
Selection is set to an outside line/trunk, inside calls cannot be made and features
cannot be used. Both inside and outside calls can be received.
Calls are independently sent to the MLX telephone and its associated MFM. The
following features can be employed when a user wants calls to be received at
both the MLX telephone and the device connected to an MFM:
■
Cover buttons
■
Shared SA buttons
■
Buttons assigned the same outside lines
■
Forward and Follow Me
■
Transfer
An MFM can be assigned as a calling group delay announcement or as a
calls-in-queue alert for a calling group queue.
Tip/ring devices connected on an MFM should not be used with Call Management
System (CMS).
Features and tip/ring applications that require a switchhook flash for operation
(such as Lucent Technologies Attendant, MERLIN LEGEND MAIL Voice
Messaging System, or MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System) cannot be
connected through an MFM because the system ignores the switchhook flash
sent by the device.
Some answering machines have the built-in ability to disconnect when someone
picks up a line they have already answered. However, when a Shared SA button
or a shared personal line is assigned to the MFM, the device cannot detect when
a line is picked up by the sharing user. Therefore, if such an answering machine is
connected to the MFM, the machine does not automatically disconnect when
someone picks up the shared lines that the machine has already answered.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Multi-Function Module
Page 392
Similarly, if the MFM extension is a Primary Coverage receiver for the MLX
telephone or has the MLX extensions calls forwarded to it, the machine does not
automatically disconnect when the telephone user picks up a call.
When programming, you cannot select an MFM by slot and port (*[sspp]) or by
logical ID (#[nnn]).
A digital data or video workstation with an MLX telephone must not include an
MFM.
Mode Differences
82
Hybrid/PBX Mode
82
When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on and Automatic Line Selection is
set to select an SA button, an outside line can be selected by dialing the pool
dial-out or Automatic Route Selection code.
Key and Behind Switch Modes
82
When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on and Automatic Line Selection is
set to select an ICOM button, an outside line can be selected by dialing the Idle
Line Access code (usually 9).
Telephone Differences
82
Direct-Line Consoles
82
An MFM in a Direct-Line Console (DLC) serves only as another extension, without
the characteristics of an operator extension.
Queued Call Consoles
82
An MFM cannot be connected to a Queued Call Console (QCC).
Other Telephones
82
An MFM can be installed only in MLX telephones and cannot be used with analog
multiline telephones.
An MFM cannot be used with a digital communications device or
videoconferencing system.
Single-Line Telephones
82
A single-line telephone or other type of tip/ring device up to 1,000 feet away can
be connected to an MFM and used to make and receive inside and outside calls.
A single-line telephone connected to an MFM cannot use the Pickup, Conference,
Hold, HotLine, or Transfer features.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Multi-Function Module
Feature Interactions
Page 393
82
Automatic Line
Selection
When an MFM is installed in an MLX telephone, the ALS sequence for
the MFM should be set to select SA Ring or ICOM Ring, then SA
Originate Only or ICOM Originate Only, then outside lines (or the prime
line in Behind Switch mode) assigned to the MFM. Ringing/Idle Line
Preference should be on for an MFM.
Callback
Both Automatic and Selective Callback can be used from an MFM; but a
callback call cannot be manually canceled because the MFM does not
recognize the switchhook flash produced by pressing the Drop button.
Conference
The Conference feature cannot be used on the MFM because the system
ignores the switchhook flash sent by the MFM.
Coverage
When an MFM device is used for both inside and outside calls to
supplement ringing (external alert) or to answer or screen calls
(answering machine), calls can be redirected to the device by assigning a
Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover button. Coverage and
Forward and Follow Me should not be used simultaneously.
Digital Data Calls
An MLX telephone at a digital data workstation must not include an MFM.
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb is not recommended because the device connected to the
MFM does not have an LED to indicate when the feature is active.
Fax Extension
A single-line telephone with a Message LED connected to an MFM can
receive message waiting indications but not stutter dial tone.
Forward and
Follow Me
An MLX telephone user can activate Forward and Follow Me to redirect
incoming calls to an MFM device. However, Coverage and Forward and
Follow Me should not be used simultaneously.
Group Calling
An MFM can be assigned as a calling group delay announcement or as a
calls-in-queue alert for a calling group queue.
Hold
A single-line telephone connected to an MFM cannot put a call on hold
because the MFM cannot send a switchhook flash.
Messaging
A single-line telephone with a Message LED connected to an MFM can
receive message-waiting indications.
HotLine
A single-line telephone connected to an MFM cannot be used as a
HotLine.
Night Service
An MFM can be a member of a Night Service group. An external alert
connected to the MFM in SAA operation, when assigned to a Night
Service group, can provide supplemental ringing for after-hours calls.
Paging
An MFM should not be a member of a speakerphone paging group.
Park
A user at an MFM cannot park a call but can pick up a call parked by
another user.
Personal Lines
If an MFM device is used to answer calls or provide supplementary
ringing for its associated MLX telephone, any personal lines removed
from the telephone should also be removed from the MFM. When the
device connected to an MFM (a modem, for example) requires a personal
line to make and/or receive calls, a personal line should be assigned.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Multi-Function Module
Page 394
Privacy
Privacy should not be used on an MFM (unless Privacy is to stay on at all
times, as at a data workstation) because the user does not have an LED
to indicate whether Privacy is on or off.
Recall/Timed Flash
An MFM cannot send a timed flash. As a result, a single-line telephone or
other device connected to an MFM cannot use Recall.
Ringing Options
At an MFM, lines that do not receive calls should be set to No Ring.
Signal/Notify
When set for supplemental alert adapter operation, a Multi-Function
Module (MFM) can receive a signal but cannot send one. An MFM cannot
receive a signal when set for tip/ring operation.
SMDR
An MFM is treated as an MLX telephone on SMDR reports.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When the device is used for both inside and outside calls to supplement
ringing (external alert) or to answer or screen calls (answering machine),
calls can be redirected to the device by assigning a Shared SA button.
Transfer
Calls cannot be transferred from an MFM because an MFM cannot send
a switchhook flash.
Voice Announce to
Busy
Voice Announce to Busy interferes with data calls made through a device
attached to an MFM.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Music On Hold
Page 395
Music On Hold
82
At a Glance
82
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All
Designate the Music On Hold extension jack:
●
AuxEquip→MusicOnHold
Maximums
1 Music On Hold extension for each system
Description
82
Music On Hold can provide music or recorded information to an outside caller
when the following features are used:
■
Conference (while on hold)
■
Group Calling (while waiting in the calling group queue for a busy extension
after listening to the delay announcement)
■
Hold
NOTE:
The music source or recorded announcement device must be connected to
a ground-start or loop-start line/trunk jack programmed for Music On Hold.
If Music On Hold is used without connecting a music source properly, an
outside caller hears nothing.
In addition, Music On Hold can be programmed for the Transfer Audible feature
as an alternative to ringback in the following feature interactions:
■
Camp-On
■
Hold, Transfer, and Conference for single-line telephones
■
Park
■
Transfer
If transfer audible is programmed, what callers hear is described in Table 29.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Music On Hold
Table 29.
Page 396
Call Types and Transfer Audible
Type of Call
Outside call directly
dialed into calling group
that has delay
announcement
device(s)
Outside call directly
dialed into calling group
that has no delay
announcement device
Outside call transferred
to a calling group that
has delay announcement
device(s)
Outside call transferred
to calling group that has
no delay announcement
device
Outside call parked by
user or operator2
Outside call that is
camped-on to an
extension*
Outside call transferred
with consultation to a
non-group extension
Outside call transferred
without consultation to
an extension other than a
calling group’s
Inside caller
1.
2.
Issue 1
June 1997
Music On Hold Programmed
as Transfer Audible
Ringing before
announcements1 play, then
Music on Hold between
announcements until call leaves
the queue and is delivered to an
agent; ringing until agent
answers
Ringing until agent answers
Ringback Programmed as
Transfer Audible: No MOH
Ringing before announcements
play, then special ringing until
call leaves the queue and is
delivered to an agent; ringing
until agent answers
MOH (both before and after
announcements* play) until call
leaves the queue and is
delivered to an agent; ringing
until agent answers
MOH until call leaves the
queue and is delivered to an
agent; ringing until agent
answers
MOH until call is picked up
Special ringing (both before and
after announcements play) until
call leaves the queue and is
delivered to an agent; ringing
until agent answers
Special ringing until call leaves
the queue and is delivered to an
agent; ringing until agent
answers
Ringing until call is picked up
MOH until call is answered
Ringing until call is answered
MOH (during consultation)
until transfer is completed;
ringing until call is answered
Manual Completion. MOH
during dialing of destination,
then ringing.
Ringing until call is answered
Automatic Completion.
Ringing.
Ringing or special ringing
Ringing until agent answers
Manual Completion. Ringing
until call is answered.
Automatic Completion.
Ringing until call is answered.
Ringing or special ringing
Up to ten primary and one secondary delay announcement devices are available in
Release 5.0 and later systems only. See ‘‘Group Calling’’ on page 281.
If either the Park Return Timer or the Camp-On Return Interval expires before the parked
or camped-on call is answered, the call returns to the extension that parked or camped on
the call and the outside caller continues to hear Music On Hold until the call is picked up.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Music On Hold
Page 397
Considerations and Constraints
92
Music On Hold is not provided to inside callers.
Music On Hold is never heard by callers in the Queued Call Console queue.
Direct Inward Dial (DID) and tie line/trunk jacks cannot be used for Music On Hold.
A line/trunk jack designated for Music On Hold cannot be grouped in a pool.
During programming of a line/trunk jack for Music On Hold, the entire system is
forced idle.
If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you
may be required to obtain a copyright license from or pay fees to a third party such
as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or
Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). You can purchase a Magic on Hold®
system, which does not require such a license, from Lucent Technologies.
Feature Interactions
92
Callback
An outside caller waiting in the callback queue hears Music On Hold.
Camp-On
When Camp-On is used to complete the transfer of an outside call, the
caller hears Music On Hold until the call is answered if the transfer
audible is set to Music On Hold. See Table 29 for more information.
Conference
If the first participant put on hold for a conference call is an outside caller,
the caller hears Music On Hold until the second participant is added.
Group Calling
Outside callers waiting in calling group queues hear Music On Hold (if
programmed).
Night Service
A line/trunk jack programmed for Music on Hold cannot be assigned to a
Night Service group.
Park
A parked caller hears Music On Hold.
Pools
Line/trunk jacks used for Music On Hold cannot be assigned to pools.
Personal Lines
Line/trunk jacks used for Music On Hold cannot be assigned as personal
lines.
Remote Access
A remote access user who is waiting for a busy line/trunk pool or
extension hears Music On Hold.
Transfer
If the system is programmed for Music On Hold, music is played only
during the period before a transfer is completed by the extension
originating it. The caller hears music when the Transfer button is pressed
and when the extension number is dialed. When the transfer originator
presses the Transfer button a second time or hangs up, the caller hears
ringing. If the transfer uses automatic completion to a non-calling group
extension, the outside caller hears ringing.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Page 398
Night Service
92
At a Glance
92
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
Feature Code
MLX Display Label
System Programming
Telephone users, operators, data users
Extension Information, Night Service Information
All
All
*39
39
Night Srvc [Night]
Assign or remove extensions to or from Night Service group:
●
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Extensions
In Release 4.1 and later systems, assign or remove outside
lines to or from Night Service group:
●
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Lines
Select Night Service with Outward Restriction by assigning a
password:
●
NightSrvce→OutRestrict
In Release 4.1 and later systems, enable or disable Coverage
Control option:
●
NightSrvce→CoverContrl
Add or remove telephone numbers from Night Service
Emergency Allowed List:
●
NightSrvce→Emergency
Assign telephones to Exclusion List (password not required):
●
NightSrvce→ExcludeList
Select start time and stop time for each day of the week for
Night Service with Time Set:
●
Factory Settings
Outside lines assigned to
Night Service Group
Coverage Control
Time Set
Outward Restriction
Maximums
Night Service groups
Number of extensions in
Night Service group
Number of outside lines in
Night Service group
Calling group extension for
each Night Service group
NightSrvce→Start/Stop→Day, Hr, Min
None (4.1 and later systems only)
Disabled (4.1 and later systems only)
Disabled
Disabled
8 (one for each operator)
Unlimited except by system capacity
Unlimited except by system capacity (4.1 and later systems)
1 (Release 2.0 and later systems)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Page 399
At a Glance - Continued
Maximums
continued
Night Service groups for
each extension
Emergency telephone
numbers
Digits for each telephone
number
Extensions on Exclusion
List
Password
Unlimited
10
12
Unlimited
4 digits (0–9)
92
Description
Night Service provides optional after-hours operation that can be programmed in
combination with the following features:
■
Night Service with Group Assignment
■
Night Service with Outward Restriction
■
Night Service with Time Set
■
Night Service with Coverage Control (Release 4.1 and later systems only)
NOTE:
The term after-hours is only used for convenience. Night Service can
operate at any time it is activated and is intended for use outside of normal
business hours.
Operators can activate or deactivate Night Service by using a Direct-Line Console
(DLC) or a Queued Call Console (QCC). To activate or deactivate Night Service,
an operator presses the programmed Night Service button (this function is
performed automatically when the Time Set function, described later in this topic,
is used). If the Night Service with Outward Restriction option is programmed, the
green LED flashes when a DLC operator presses the programmed Night Service
button. The operator must enter the assigned password (within 60 seconds) to
activate or deactivate Night Service. When Night Service is activated, the green
LED next to the programmed Night Service button turns on. When the feature is
deactivated, the green LED turns off.
Night Service Group Assignment
92
Each Night Service group is associated with either an individual QCC (in
Hybrid/PBX mode) or an individual DLC during system programming.
Night Service groups can include the following types of members:
■
Any type of extension
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 400
■
One calling group (Release 2.0 and later) for each Night Service group.
■
In Release 4.1 and later systems, outside lines must be assigned to Night
Service groups in order for calls received on these lines to receive Night
Service treatment. The system manager can assign the following types of
outside lines to Night Service groups:
— Loop-start lines
— Ground-start lines
— NI-BRI B-channels
— PRI B-channels that are routed by line appearance
— Automatic incoming tie trunks
The following types of outside lines cannot be assigned to Night Service
groups:
— DID (Direct Inward Dial) trunks
— Dial-in tie trunks
— PRI B-channels that are routed by dial plan
— Line/trunk jacks programmed for Alarm, Music on Hold, or Paging
— Unequipped line/trunk jacks
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, when an operator associated with a Night
Service group activates Night Service or when the Time Set option turns on Night
Service operation automatically, any calls received on lines/trunks programmed to
ring at individual operator consoles ring immediately at all available extensions
assigned to the group.
During Night Service operation in Release 4.1 and later systems, calls received
on lines assigned to a Night Service group ring at the Night Service destination for
the group (an extension or calling group). A line need not be assigned to an
operator position in order to receive Night Service coverage to a calling group.
Lines that are not assigned to a Night Service group, whether or not they appear
at operator consoles, do not receive Night Service treatment.
!
SECURITYlALERT:
Avoid programming a remote access line as a destination for Night Service
on any published telephone number. Professional toll-fraud criminals scan
telephone directories for published local and 800 telephone numbers. Using
these numbers, they attempt to gain access to the system, then may use
such features as Remote Access to reach outside facilities from within the
system. For additional information about toll fraud, see Appendix A,
“Customer Service Information.”
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Page 401
An extension in a Night Service group is considered unavailable and a Night
Service call does not ring at that extension when any of the following situations
occur:
■
A telephone is in extension or system programming mode.
■
A user with an MLX display telephone is using Alarm Clock or Directory
features.
■
A telephone is busied-out for maintenance or system programming.
■
All SA or ICOM buttons are in use.
■
A single-line telephone user is on a call.
NOTE:
Up to eight Night Service groups can be created, one for each operator.
There is no limit to the number of extensions assigned to each group. Each
extension can be assigned to more than one group.
Night Service with Outward Restriction
92
Night Service with Outward Restriction prevents unauthorized after-hours use of
extensions. When this option is programmed, only authorized operators can
activate and deactivate Night Service and only authorized users can place calls.
A system operator must enter a password to activate or deactivate Night Service.
When one operator activates or deactivates Night Service this way, all consoles
are put into Night Service. If Night Service groups are assigned, Night Service is
activated or deactivated for all groups and cannot be activated or deactivated
independently for each group. When the Night Service feature is activated, enter a
password before making a nonemergency outside call. When you have entered
the correct password, the system checks for calling restrictions assigned to your
extension before allowing the call.
A Night Service Emergency Allowed List of emergency numbers can include up to
10 numbers, each with no more than 12 digits. Users who do not know the Night
Service password can dial only the numbers on the list; calls to numbers not on
the list do not go through unless the caller enters a password.
One Exclusion List for Night Service can be created to exempt specific extensions
from the password requirement. An unlimited number of extensions can be
assigned to the list. However, normal calling restrictions (if any) assigned to the
extension are still in effect. Unrestricted extensions on the list are not protected
against unauthorized after-hours use.
HotLine extension users cannot dial the Night Service Emergency numbers or the
Night Service password.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Night Service with Time Set
Page 402
92
When Night Service with Time Set is programmed, the system automatically
activates Night Service on all operator consoles at a specified time of day on
specified days of the week. A different time of day to activate or deactivate Night
Service can be programmed for each day of the week. Operators can still override
the timer and turn Night Service on and off manually. If one system operator
overrides the timer, Night Service is activated or deactivated on all consoles.
Night Service also can be activated through system programming for special
conditions, such as a midweek holiday.
Night Service with Coverage Control
92
In Release 4.1 and later systems, system managers can set Night Service, in
combination with any other Night Service options, to control the status of
programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons at Night Service member extensions.
This allows the system manager to turn on voice messaging system (VMS)
coverage of outside calls automatically.
A coverage sender with a VMS calling group assigned as a receiver can program
a Coverage VMS Off button (Release 2.0 and later systems only) to prevent
outside calls from being sent to voice mail. When Coverage VMS Off is inactive
(button is unlit), inside and outside calls go to voice mail. When the programmed
feature is active (button is lit), only inside calls go to voice mail.
The system manager can enable Night Service with Coverage Control through
system programming. The option then automatically activates Coverage VMS Off
buttons at member extensions when Night Service operation begins. When Night
Service goes off, the Coverage Control option automatically deactivates member
extensions’ Coverage VMS Off buttons so that outside calls are no longer covered
by voice mail.
A user at a member extension can press the Coverage VMS Off button to change
its status, regardless of Night Service operation. When the next Night Service
transition takes place, all programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons reflect Night
Service status (the feature does not merely toggle buttons to the opposite state).
The most recent event, whether it is a Night Service transition or user
button-press, governs the status of the Coverage VMS Off buttons.
Considerations and Constraints
92
A Direct Inward Dial (DID) call to any member of a Night Service group rings at all
group members’ telephones.
If an extension assigned to a Night Service group has the same outside line
(personal line) as an operator console, calls to this line ring immediately at each
extension, even if the personal line on the telephone is programmed for Delay
Ring or No Ring. If the extension does not have the outside line assigned, the call
rings on an SA or ICOM button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 403
When Night Service is deactivated by an operator or automatically by the system,
extensions are reset to their programmed Ring Timing options. When a feature
code is used to activate or deactivate Night Service and Outward Restriction is
programmed, a DLC operator does not hear an error tone if an invalid password is
entered. Unless a Night Service button is programmed, an operator cannot
determine whether Night Service is active.
When both the Night Service with Outward Restriction and Night Service with
Time Set options are programmed, the system imposes restrictions automatically.
When Night Service with Outward Restriction and/or Night Service with Time Set
are programmed, Night Service is activated or deactivated for all operator
consoles. If Night Service groups are also programmed, Night Service cannot be
activated or deactivated independently for each group.
When Night Service with Outward Restriction is activated and a user with a
restricted extension presses a dialpad button while on a call, the call is
disconnected, the user hears a fast busy signal, and the line/trunk is released.
When the dialpad is used, the system assumes that the user is trying to make an
outside call, which is not allowed because of the Night Service restriction
assigned to the extension.
Operators can override Night Service with Time Set and turn Night Service on or
off manually.
Night Service with Time Set can be deactivated through system programming for
special conditions such as a midweek holiday.
An answering machine connected to a 012 module or 016 module can be set up
as a member of a Night Service group to automatically answer after-hours calls.
External alerts, such as strobes, bells, or chimes, can be connected either to an
analog multiline telephone by using a Supplemental Alert Adapter or to an MLX
telephone by using a Multi-Function Module (MFM) that is a member of a Night
Service group. The external alert sounds or lights when a Night Service call
comes in to that telephone.
When Night Service with Outward Restriction is used, an operator must enter a
password to manually activate or deactivate Night Service.
Changing the system time while in Night Service mode deactivates Night Service;
Night Service then must be reactivated manually.
Night Service with Coverage Control controls voice messaging system coverage
only and has no effect on other forms of coverage, such as Individual Coverage or
other types of Group Coverage. When the option is disabled, Night Service does
not affect programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons.
If a user with a programmed Coverage VMS Off button activates or deactivates
the feature by pressing the button on his or her telephone, the next transition to
Night Service does not necessarily toggle the button to the opposite status.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Page 404
Instead, when Night Service goes on or off, the button assumes the same active
or inactive state that it would have if no manual button-press had taken place. The
most recent event, whether it is a manual button-press or an automatic change
set by the Coverage Control option, determines the active/inactive state of the
programmed Coverage VMS Off button.
Telephone Differences
92
Direct-Line Consoles
92
A DLC operator also can activate Night Service by pressing the Feature button
and dialing 39. When a feature code is used to activate or deactivate Night
Service and Outward Restriction is programmed, the DLC operator does not hear
an error tone if an invalid password is entered and, unless a Night Service button
is programmed, cannot determine whether Night Service is active.
On a system with 29 or fewer lines, a Night Service button is factory-assigned to
analog DLCs with 34 buttons or more. On a system with more than 29 lines, the
Night Service button is replaced with line 31. The Night Service button is not a
fixed feature and can be assigned to any available button on either an analog or
MLX DLC.
Queued Call Consoles
92
The Night Service button is factory-assigned as a fixed feature on a QCC.
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, if more than one QCC operator is assigned to
receive calls on an individual outside line, Night Service must be activated at all
assigned positions before calls on the line/trunk ring on extensions programmed
as members of the Night Service group. If Night Service is not activated by one of
the QCCs programmed to receive the calls, after-hours calls ring at that position
and do not receive Night Service coverage.
When Night Service is on, unassigned DID extension and Listed Directory
Number (operator) call types ring into the QCC queue. If these call types are
programmed not to go to the QCC queue, the caller hears an error tone when
Night Service is off. However, when Night Service is on, these call types still ring
into the QCC queue, regardless of programming.
When multiple Night Service calls are received in the QCC queue at the same
time and none of the calls are answered by a Night Service group member—all
group member SA or ICOM buttons are busy—new calls are sent to the QCC
queue and can be answered by only a QCC operator. To avoid this situation, all
outside lines assigned to ring on the QCCs should be assigned as personal lines
on at least one group member’s extension.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, if an outside line is assigned to more than one
QCC Night Service group and only one QCC operator activates Night Service,
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Page 405
incoming calls on the outside line ring on extensions programmed as members of
the Night Service group associated with the operator.
Other Multiline Telephones
92
To make a call when Night Service with Outward Restriction is assigned on a
multiline telephone, before lifting the handset, press the Hold button and dial the
password. When you have entered the correct password, lift the handset and
make the outside call. Night Service password entry is not supported on MDC
9000 or MDW 9000 telephones.
Single-Line Telephones
92
Single-line telephones cannot make outside calls when Night Service with
Outward Restriction is activated.
Feature Interactions
92
Alarm
A line/trunk jack programmed as a maintenance alarm port cannot be
assigned to a Night Service group.
Authorization Code
An authorization code can be used when Night Service is activated. For
Night Service with Outward Restriction, a user must enter a valid
password before entering an authorization code.
Automatic Route
Selection
When Night Service with Outward Restriction is programmed, a user
must enter the password before dialing the Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) dial-out code unless either the extension is assigned to an
exclusion list or the number is on an emergency numbers list.
Caller ID
Caller ID information appears on the display whether or not Night Service
has been activated.
Calling Restrictions
For Night Service with Outward Restriction, a Night Service Emergency
Numbers List must be created to include emergency numbers that can be
dialed from any extension without dialing the password. Any restrictions
assigned to an extension assigned to the Exclusion List are in effect when
Night Service is activated.
Coverage
When the system manager enables the Coverage Control option, a
transition into Night Service operation (either by pressing the Night
Service button at an operator’s console or through the Time Set feature)
automatically deactivates all programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons
(LED is off) at extensions in the Night Service group. This allows calls to
go to voice messaging system coverage at night. When the system is
taken out of Night Service—either by a press of the Night Service button
at an operator’s console or through the Time Set option—the Coverage
Control option automatically activates all programmed Coverage VMS Off
buttons, turning the LED on at extensions in the Night Service group.
Outside calls no longer go to the voice messaging system.
A user at the extension can override the Night Service with Coverage
Control option by pressing the programmed Coverage VMS Off button at
any time.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 406
Digital Data Calls
If a digital communications device or videoconferencing system is a
member of the Night Service group, voice calls to Night Service group do
not ring at these extensions. Data or video calls do ring, and 2B data calls
can be established. However, if there are two or more 2B data extensions
receiving Night Service calls, the two 1B data calls that form a 2B data
call may be directed to different extensions instead of the same one
during Night Service operation.
Display
If a system operator must enter a password to turn Night Service on and
off, the display prompts the operator for the password. No message is
displayed either when an operator activates Night Service by using a
feature code or when Night Service is off. If an MLX display telephone is
in test mode and a Night Service call arrives, the call rings at the
telephone. However, the calling information is not displayed until the user
presses the Home button to see it.
Forward and
Follow Me
When an extension is a member of a Night Service group and Night
Service is activated, calls received at the extension are forwarded to
extensions by using Forward and Follow Me but are not forwarded to
outside telephone numbers when Remote Call Forwarding is used.
Group Calling
In Release 2.0 and later systems, a calling group can be a Night Service
group member. If a calling group is used as a Night Service member, no
other calling groups or extensions are allowed to be Night Service
members.
HotLine
HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later systems) can be members of
Night Service groups. If a HotLine extension dials an outside call and
Night Service with Outward Restriction is on, either the HotLine extension
number must be in the Night Service Exclusion List or the number it dials
must be on the Night Service Emergency List.
Integrated
Administration
The Automated Attendant service can be used for Night Service
operation. The necessary system programming options can be set
through Integrated Administration.
Multi-Function
Module
An MFM can be a member of a Night Service group. An external alert
connected to the MFM in supplemental alert adapter operation, when
assigned to a Night Service group, can be used for supplemental ringing
for after-hours calls.
Music On Hold
A line/trunk jack programmed for Music on Hold cannot be assigned to a
Night Service group.
Paging
A line/trunk jack programmed as a Loudspeaker Paging port cannot be
assigned to a Night Service group.
Personal Lines
If the voice mail calling group is assigned as a member of a Night Service
group, incoming lines receive Automated Attendant treatment. When a
call is answered by the Night Service group, ringing does not occur at an
extension with that personal line and the Night Service coverage is used
instead of the principal user’s coverage.
Pickup
By using Pickup, a user at another extension can answer a call ringing at
a Night Service group extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Night Service
Page 407
Primary Rate Interface A PRI B-channel can be assigned to a Night Service group if the Routing
by Line Appearance option is assigned to the B-channel group. If routing
(PRI) and T1
by dial plan is assigned to the B-channel group, the B-channels in that
group cannot be assigned to Night Service groups.
Remote Access
In Release 4.0 and prior systems, when shared remote access is
assigned to a line/trunk, incoming calls on that line/trunk receive remote
access treatment only when Night Service is activated on all operator
positions that receive calls on the line/trunk. When a call is received on a
line/trunk assigned for shared remote access and Night Service is not
activated, the call rings at the assigned telephone, operator console, or
calling group.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, when shared remote access is
assigned to an outside line that belongs to one or more Night Service
groups, calls received on that outside line receive remote access
treatment when Night Service is activated on any operator position.
Ringing Options
When Night Service is turned on, calls received at a Night Service group
member’s telephone ring immediately, even if the line buttons are
programmed for Delay Ring or No Ring. When Night Service is turned off,
extensions return to their programmed Ring Timing options.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Night Service calls override any Ring Timing options (Delay Ring or No
Ring) programmed for SA buttons and ring immediately. Shared SA
buttons flash and do not ring.
92
Notify
See ‘‘Signal/Notify’’ on page 547.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Page 408
Paging
92
At a Glance
92
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Code
MLX Display Labels
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
Dial Plan Information, Extension Information, Group Paging,
System Information (SysSet-up)
All
All
*22 + group or Page All ext. no.
Group Page [GrpPg]
Loudspkr Pg [LdsPg]
Assign telephones to paging groups:
Extensions→More→Group Page
Designate a loop-start or ground-start/loop-start line/trunk jack
as a paging jack:
●
●
Maximums
Groups
Telephones
Line/trunk Jacks
Factory Settings
Extensions
AuxEquip→Ldspkr Pg
6 speakerphone paging groups
1 Page All group
10 in each paging group (see Note below)
3, programmed as loudspeaker paging ports
793–798 (speakerphone paging groups)
799 (Page All group)
NOTE:
Each extension can belong to up to seven paging groups (for example,
each of the six speakerphone paging groups and the Page All group).
Description
92
Paging allows users to broadcast announcements using their telephones. There
are two types of paging: Speakerphone Paging and Loudspeaker Paging.
Speakerphone Paging allows broadcasting either to specific individuals or to
designated groups. Loudspeaker Paging allows broadcasting to specific groups or
all extensions, depending on whether or not the loudspeaker system is a
multizone paging system.
Speakerphone Paging
92
An announcement made using Speakerphone Paging is heard on telephones with
built-in speakerphones (except single-line telephones with built-in
speakerphones) or speakerphone adjuncts. Speakerphone Paging can be
directed to an individual telephone, to groups, or to all speakerphones.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 409
Individual Paging
92
An SA Voice or ICOM Voice button on a multiline telephone is used for
Speakerphone Paging directed to an individual extension (also called
voice-announced inside calling). Select the voice button, and then dial the
extension number of the telephone to receive the voice-announced call. If the
voice announcement can be made, the caller hears a tone and then speaks into
the handset.
The person called hears the announcement over the speakerphone unless one of
the following conditions exists:
■
The telephone does not have a speaker.
■
The person called is using the speakerphone.
■
The person called is on an analog multiline telephone, the system manager
has removed Voice Announce to Busy from the extension.
■
The person called has disabled voice announcements.
■
The person called is using Do Not Disturb.
■
The person called is a QCC operator.
When any of these conditions exists, the caller hears ringback if the person called
has an available SA or ICOM button. The caller hears a busy, call-waiting, or
callback tone when the person called is busy on all SA or ICOM buttons. If the
person called is using Do Not Disturb, the caller hears a busy signal.
Speakerphone Paging to an individual extension is considered an inside call. The
green LED next to an available SA or ICOM button flashes to indicate an incoming
call. The person called can use the Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI)
feature to talk to the caller or can pick up the handset and speak.
Group Paging
92
Group Paging directs Speakerphone Paging either to a selected group of
extensions, such as a department or work area, or to all extensions in the system
except QCC operator positions.
NOTE:
The system manager can program a QCC Call button to allow
voice-announced calling, but a QCC cannot receive speakerphone pages.
The system automatically reserves extension numbers 793 through 798 for the
first six speakerphone paging groups. Up to 10 extensions can be assigned to
each speakerphone paging group. The seventh speakerphone paging group is
called the Page All group and is factory-set to page all extension numbers. The
system automatically reserves extension number 799 for the Page All group. An
extension can belong to up to seven speakerphone paging groups (including the
Page All group).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Page 410
When the extension number for a speakerphone paging group is dialed by using
an SA or ICOM button, the announcement over speakerphones on all telephones
assigned to the group. If the extension dialed is for the Page All group, the
announcement is heard on speakerphones throughout the system. A
speakerphone paging group member does not hear a group page if one of the
following conditions exists:
■
The telephone has no speakerphone.
■
The paging group member is using the speakerphone.
■
The paging group member is on an analog multiline telephone, and the
system manager has removed Voice Announce to Busy from the
extension.
■
The paging group member has disabled voice announcements.
■
The paging group member has an MLX telephone and either is
programming (extension, centralized, or system) or testing the phone.
■
The paging group member has an analog multiline telephone and is in
extension programming. (Speakerphone pages are received on analog
multiline telephones in test mode.)
■
The paging group member is using Do Not Disturb.
When a group member does not hear the announcement for any of these
reasons, the caller is not notified unless all extensions in the group cannot hear
the page, in which case the caller hears a busy signal.
The people being paged can listen only to the page over the speakerphone and
cannot respond to the person making the page.
Loudspeaker Paging
92
Loudspeaker Paging is used when a loudspeaker paging system is connected to
the system on a line/trunk jack programmed for Loudspeaker Paging. Pages over
a loudspeaker paging system are heard everywhere in the building or only in a
particular area, depending on whether or not the loudspeaker system is a
multizone paging system.
Considerations and Constraints
92
A telephone without a speakerphone, loudspeaker, or speakerphone adjunct
cannot be a member of a speakerphone paging group.
After using Loudspeaker Paging, users must remember to disconnect the paging
call. Otherwise, the loudspeaker paging system may not be available for someone
else.
When a user tries to page a speakerphone paging group that is receiving a voice
announcement, the user hears a busy signal.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 411
Some group members may not hear the announcement (because they are
making pages, for example), but the user is not notified unless none of the group
telephones can broadcast the page, in which case the caller hears a busy signal.
If an analog multiline telephone has had Voice Announce to Busy disabled
through programming and the user lifts the handset while listening to a
speakerphone page, he or she is disconnected from the page.
If a multiline telephone user has Voice Announce to Busy active and lifts the
handset while listening to a page, the page continues and he or she can still make
a call.
A maximum of three line/trunk jacks can be programmed for Loudspeaker Paging
and used to connect a single-zone or multizone paging system. Each zone
requires its own loudspeaker paging jack, and a user cannot dial a single access
code to reach more than one paging system at a time.
Using the speakerphone for making a Speakerphone or Loudspeaker Paging call
can cause a feedback tone.
Loudspeaker paging jacks are LS or GS line ports programmed as paging ports.
Up to three can be programmed. An extension jack cannot be programmed for
loudspeaker paging.
Any loop-start or ground-start/loop-start line/trunk jack can be assigned as a
loudspeaker paging jack. A line/trunk jack on an 800 DID, 100D, or 400EM
(tie trunk) module cannot be programmed as a loudspeaker paging jack.
A loudspeaker paging jack cannot be assigned to a pool that contains lines/trunks
used to make or receive outgoing calls.
When a line/trunk jack is assigned for Loudspeaker Paging, only the loudspeaker
paging system can be connected.
If the loudspeaker paging system is multizone, users must dial the appropriate
zone number specified by the paging system before making an announcement.
The system supports loudspeaker systems with talkback (bidirectional paging),
which allows users to respond to pages.
Prior to Release 2.1, users at extensions programmed with Forced Account Code
Entry need to enter an account code to use Loudspeaker Paging. In Release 2.1
and later systems, users at extensions programmed with Forced Account Code
Entry do not need to enter an account code to use Loudspeaker Paging.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Page 412
Telephone Differences
92
Direct-Line Consoles
92
The line/trunk jack programmed for Loudspeaker Paging can be assigned to a
button on an analog or digital Direct-Line Console (DLC) for one-touch access. An
operator with an MLX DLC also can access a loudspeaker paging system by
dialing the line/trunk number (801–880) for the line/trunk jack on which the
loudspeaker paging system is connected.
Queued Call Consoles
92
A Queued Call Console (QCC) cannot make or receive voice-announced inside
calls, which are speakerphone calls to an individual extension. A QCC cannot be
a member of a speakerphone paging group and cannot receive group pages;
however, it can make announcements to a paging group.
A QCC operator can use the Group Paging feature either by selecting a Call
button and pressing the DSS (Direct Station Selector) button or by dialing the
extension for the group.
A QCC operator can use a loudspeaker paging system only by selecting a Call
button, selecting Loudspeaker Paging from the display, and then dialing the
Loudspeaker Paging line number (801–880).
Cordless and Cordless/Wireless Telephones
92
MLC-5, MDC 9000, and MDW 9000 telephones cannot be members of paging
groups or receive speakerphone pages.
Loudspeaker pages can be made from MLC-5 cordless telephones.
All Other Multiline Telephones
92
To receive pages, a multiline telephone must have Voice Announce to Busy on,
which is the factory setting. An analog multiline telephone requires two
consecutive jacks to the telephone: one for ringing calls and another for pages.
To direct Speakerphone Paging to an individual extension, select an SA Voice or
ICOM Voice button, dial the extension number, and speak into the handset or
speakerphone. To direct Speakerphone Paging to a group of extensions or to all
extensions by using Page All, select any SA or ICOM button, press the
programmed Group Page button or dial the extension for the speakerphone
paging group or Page All group, and speak into the handset. Using a
speakerphone for a group page can cause feedback.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Page 413
A multiline telephone user can access the loudspeaker paging equipment. Make a
Loudspeaker Paging announcement in the following ways:
■
Select a line button programmed for the line/trunk jack on which the
loudspeaker paging system is connected.
■
Select an SA button and dial the pool dial-out code for the loudspeaker
paging jack.
■
Select an SA or ICOM button—either by pressing a Pickup button
programmed specifically for the paging line or by pressing the Feature
button and then dialing 9—followed by the paging line number (801–880).
■
Select Loudspeaker Page from the display (MLX display telephones only)
and dial the line number (801–880).
Once the loudspeaker paging system is accessed, dial the assigned code number
for the paging zone (if required by the loudspeaker paging system) and speak into
the handset.
Single-Line Telephones
92
Single-line telephones cannot receive pages, even if they have speakerphones.
They cannot be included as members of a speakerphone paging group.
Single-line telephones cannot be used to make or receive voice-announced inside
calls (Speakerphone Paging directed to individual extensions). To direct
Speakerphone Paging to a group of extensions or to all extensions by using Page
All, lift the handset. Then, while listening to inside dial tone, dial the extension
number of the paging or Page All group, and speak into the handset.
To use Loudspeaker Paging while listening to inside dial tone, lift the handset and
dial #9 (Pickup), then dial the paging jack’s line number and speak into the
handset. The paging jack is normally not assigned to a single-line telephone.
Feature Interactions
92
Account Code Entry
Prior to Release 2.1, users at extensions programmed with Forced
Account Code Entry need to enter an account code to use Loudspeaker
Paging. In Release 2.1 and later systems, this restriction is removed.
Auto Dial
A speakerphone paging group extension number can be programmed
onto an inside Auto Dial button.
Barge-In
Operators cannot use Barge-In to join speakerphone or loudspeaker
paging calls.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 414
Callback
A speakerphone paging (voice-announced inside) call that is queued by
using Callback automatically becomes a ringing call. Callback cannot be
used for calls to a speakerphone paging group. Systems with
loudspeaker paging can be set up to allow calls to be queued for the
loudspeaker paging system by placing the loudspeaker paging line in its
own pool and having users access the paging system through the pool.
When the pool is busy, calls to the loudspeaker paging system can be
queued.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting cannot be used for calls to busy speakerphone paging
groups.
Camp-On
Camp-On cannot be used for calls to busy speakerphone paging groups.
Conference
Group and loudspeaker paging calls cannot be added to a conference.
Digital Data Calls
Digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems can be
assigned to paging groups. However, they should not be: they are not
alerted if there is a call to a paging group, and they cannot make group
pages.
Direct Station
Selector
A DSS button for a line/trunk programmed as a loudspeaker paging line is
used only to indicate whether the paging system is in use and cannot be
used to gain access to the loudspeaker paging system. A DSS button can
be used only to dial an extension for a paging group. When a DSS button
for a paging group is pressed, transfer is not automatically initiated.
Display
When users with MLX display telephones use Group Paging, they see a
message on the display, indicating the number of the paging group. If a
loudspeaker paging jack is not programmed, Loudspeaker Page is not
shown as a feature choice on MLX display telephones.
Do Not Disturb
Speakerphone paging calls cannot be made to an extension with the Do
Not Disturb feature activated.
Forward and
Follow Me
Calls cannot be forwarded to a paging group. The line/trunk number used
to connect loudspeaker paging equipment cannot be used to forward calls
to outside telephone numbers.
Headset Options
A user with a headset hears group pages over the speakerphone.
Hold
A paging call can be put on hold by the caller. An inside voice-announced
call can be put on hold by the person being called.
HotLine
A HotLine extension cannot access Loudspeaker Paging, but a HotLine
extension can be programmed to dial a Group Paging number.
Inspect
If a user gets a voice-announced inside call or a group page while using
the Inspect feature, the Inspect feature is canceled and the user is
returned to the Home screen.
Microphone Disable
Calls made to speakerphone paging groups can still be heard over
telephones where microphones are disabled.
Multi-Function
Module
A Multi-Function Module (MFM) should not be a member of a
speakerphone paging group.
Night Service
A line/trunk jack programmed as a Loudspeaker Paging port cannot be
assigned to a Night Service group.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Paging
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 415
Personal Lines
A line/trunk used for loudspeaker paging equipment cannot be assigned
as a personal line.
Pickup
When the line number used for loudspeaker paging is not assigned to a
button on a multiline telephone, you can access the loudspeaker paging
system with Individual Pickup: dial the paging jack’s line number
(801-880) or program a Pickup button specifically for the paging line
number.
Pools
In Hybrid/PBX mode, line/trunk jacks used for loudspeaker paging cannot
be assigned to pools.
Primary Rate Interface If the extension for an incoming PRI call matches a group paging
extension, the call is treated as an unassigned Direct Inward Dial (DID)
(PRI) and T1
call.
Data lines cannot be used for paging.
Remote Access
Loudspeaker Paging cannot be accessed from outside the system
through either DID lines or remote access.
SMDR
Paging calls are not printed on the SMDR report.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
Announcements using Speakerphone Paging can be made from a
Shared SA button. However, users cannot join a page on a Shared SA
button.
System
Renumbering
Extensions for paging groups can be renumbered. The factory-set
extensions are 793 through 799; Page All is 799.
Transfer
Calls cannot be transferred either to paging groups or the loudspeaker
paging extension.
Voice Announce
to Busy
Users who program their extensions to turn off Voice Announce to Busy
(Voice Announce on MLX telephones) do not receive individual or group
speakerphone pages.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Park
Page 416
Park
92
At a Glance
92
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Park at own extension
Park Zone
MLX Display Label
Park at own extension
Park Zone
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
Extension Information, Operator Information, System
Information (SysSet-up)
All
All except single-line
*86
*22 + park zone (DLC operators only)
Park
Park Zone [PrkZn]
Assign return interval before unanswered parked call returns:
●
Maximums
No. of parked calls in park
zones
Factory Settings
Park Zones
Call Park Return Interval
QCC Priority Level for
returning parked calls
Description
Options→CallParkRtn
8 (one parked call for each zone)
881–888
180 sec (range 30–300 sec, in increments of 10 sec)
4 (range 1–7)
92
Park puts a call on hold so that it can be picked up from any extension in the
system. A user can park a call and then pick it up at another telephone or can use
paging to announce the call so that another person can pick it up. A parked call is
picked up using the Pickup feature.
A user (but not a QCC operator) can park calls at his or her own extension by
activating Park during the call or by pressing the Transfer button, dialing his or
her own extension number, and pressing the Transfer button again to complete
the transfer. The green LED winks at the button where the call is parked and at all
other associated SA and Shared SA buttons. At least two SA or ICOM buttons are
required to use Park this way, and, if a you must park more than one call at a time,
additional SA or ICOM buttons should be assigned to your telephone.
If a parked call is not picked up within the call park return interval (30–300
seconds; the factory setting is 180 seconds), the call returns to and rings at the
extension that parked the call. Returning parked calls for a QCC operator can be
programmed to return to a different operator.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Park
Page 417
The system also automatically reserves eight extensions (881–888) on which
operators can park calls. Only operators can use these park-zone extensions.
Considerations and Constraints
92
Only system operators can use park zones. Operators must share the eight
extensions (881–888) reserved for operator park zones.
To park a call at a park zone, an operator with a DSS presses the DSS button for
the park zone while the caller is on the line. If an operator tries to park a call by
pressing the Transfer button followed by the DSS button for the park zone, the
call is put on hold for transfer and is not parked. This may result in unintentionally
transferring a call to an outside number.
Telephone Differences
92
Direct-Line Consoles
92
DLC operators can park calls either by activating Park during the call or by
pressing a DSS button programmed for an operator park zone. DLC operators
also can park calls at their own extensions. For the park zones to be assigned to a
DSS connected to an MLX DLC, the extension numbers must be in the range
programmed for the Page buttons.
The eight park zone codes cannot be assigned to the DSS buttons on a MERLIN
II System Display Console.
Queued Call Consoles
92
A QCC operator must have a DSS to park a call, which he or she does either by
pressing a DSS button for a park zone or by pressing the Start button and then a
DSS button for an operator park zone. The call is automatically parked; the
operator does not need to press the Release button.
QCC operators cannot park calls at their own extensions.
For park zones to be assigned to a DSS connected to a QCC position, the
extension numbers must be in the range programmed for the Page buttons.
Calls parked by QCC operators can be programmed to return to the QCC queue
or can be assigned to the QCC operator who parked the calls and/or to another
QCC operator. Returning parked calls are assigned a QCC priority level (the
factory setting is 4) by using the Returning Call Type setting. A QCC operator can
return a parked call to the message center position.
To pick up a parked call, a QCC operator selects Pickup from the display and
dials the number for the extension or park zone where the call is parked.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Park
Page 418
Other Multiline Telephones
92
Multiline telephone users park calls at their own extension numbers by pressing
programmed Park buttons. On an MLX display telephone, a user can press the
Feature button and select Park from the display.
If a user pages another person to announce a parked call, he or she mentions the
extension number where the call is parked.
A multiline telephone user also can park calls by pressing the Transfer button,
dialing his or her own extension number (the user hears a busy tone), and then
pressing the Transfer button again to complete the transfer. The call is
automatically parked when the transfer is completed.
To pick up a parked call, press a programmed Pickup button or press the Feature
button, dial 9, and then dial the extension number for the telephone or park zone
where the call is parked. MLX telephone users also can press the Feature button
and select the feature from the display.
Single-Line Telephones
92
To park a call, a single-line telephone user presses and releases either the Recall
or Flash button or the switchhook and dials his or her own extension number. The
user hears a busy tone and the call is parked.
NOTE:
If a single-line telephone with a positive or timed disconnect is used, for
example, the Lucent Technologies model 2500YMGL or 2500MMGK,
pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. With this type of telephone,
the Recall or Flash button, instead of the switchhook, must be used to
park a call.
To pick up a parked call, the single-line user lifts the handset and (while listening
to inside dial tone) dials #9 and the extension number for the telephone or park
zone where the call is parked.
Feature Interactions
92
Authorization Code
Initiating Park after entering an authorization code deactivates the
Authorization Code feature. An authorization code is not needed to pick
up a parked call.
Auto Dial
An operator can program park zones on inside Auto Dial buttons. An
inside Auto Dial button also can be programmed with a user’s (including
an operator’s) own extension number and can be used to park calls.
When the system is programmed for one-touch Hold with manual
completion, the user hears a busy signal and must complete the transfer
either by hanging up or by pressing the Transfer button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Park
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 419
Callback
Calls waiting in a callback queue cannot be parked.
Conference
Conference calls cannot be parked. If a QCC operator tries to park a
conference call by pressing the Start button and then pressing the DSS
button for the park zone, the park is denied and the operator is
reconnected to the conference call.
Coverage
A returning parked call is not eligible for coverage. A call answered on a
Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, or Group Cover button cannot be
parked on that button. To park calls received on a Cover button at your
extension, press the Transfer button, dial your own extension, and press
the Transfer button again to complete parking the call.
Digital Data Calls
Data calls cannot be parked.
Direct Station
Selector
Park zone numbers cannot be assigned to the DSS buttons on a
MERLIN II System Display Console. For the park zones to be assigned to
a DSS connected to an MLX operator console, the extension numbers
must be in the range programmed for the Page buttons.
When an operator parks a call by using an associated DSS button and
the call returns, the red LED associated with the park zone where the call
is parked turns off and does not flash as it does for a transfer return.
To park a call at a park zone, an operator with a DSS presses the DSS
button for the park zone while the caller is on the line. If an operator tries
to park a call by pressing the Transfer button followed by the DSS button
for the park zone, the call is put on hold for transfer and is not parked.
This may result in an unintentional transfer to an outside number.
Display
On a QCC, returning parked calls are identified by call type and the name
or extension number of the operator who parked the call. The second line
of the QCC display also shows the caller information. On 2-line displays,
press the More button to see complete caller information.
Forward and
Follow Me
Returning parked calls are not forwarded.
Group Calling
A calling group member who parks a call is considered available to
receive another call.
Headset Options
If a call is parked, another call can be automatically answered by using
Headset Auto Answer.
Hold
If a single-line telephone user with a call on hold hangs up, the call is
disconnected. Park should be used instead of Hold.
When a user or operator parks a call received on a personal line button
and the call is picked up using Pickup at another extension and then put
on hold, other users who share the personal line cannot press the line
button and pick up the call.
HotLine
Park cannot be used by HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later
systems).
Line Request
A returning parked call cancels Line Request.
Multi-Function
Module
A user at a Multi-Function Module (MFM) cannot park a call but can pick
up a call parked by another user.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Park
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 420
Music On Hold
If Music On Hold is programmed, a parked caller hears Music On Hold.
Pickup
A parked call can be picked up by using Individual Pickup.
Recall/Timed Flash
A single-line telephone user presses a Recall or Flash button to use
Park.
SMDR
If an incoming call was parked but not picked up by the other extension,
the extension of the user who activated Park is shown in the STN field of
the SMDR record for the call. If an incoming call was parked and picked
up by the destination extension, the destination extension is shown in the
STN field of the SMDR report.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When a user parks a call made or received on an SA button, Shared SA
buttons do not ring when the parked call returns.
System
Renumbering
System operator park zones (factory-set zones are 881–888) can be
renumbered.
Transfer
A user also can park calls by pressing the Transfer button, dialing his or
her own extension, and pressing the Transfer button again. DLC
operators can press Transfer and dial an operator park zone. When this
method is used, complete the transfer by pressing the Transfer button or
by hanging up. This method cannot be used by QCC operators.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Page 421
Personal Lines
92
At a Glance
92
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Telephone users, operators, data users
Extension Information
All
All except QCC
Assign or remove personal lines:
●
Extensions→LinesTrunks
Assign or remove principal user of a personal line:
● LinesTrunks→More→PrncipalUsr
64 extensions for each personal line
1 extension as principal user
3 simultaneous users for each personal line
Maximums
Factory Settings
Assigned Personal Lines
Analog DLCs: Lines 1–32
MLX DLCs: Lines 1–18
Multiline telephones: Lines 1–8 (Key mode)
92
Description
A personal line, also called a direct facility termination (DFT), is an outside
line/trunk assigned to a button on one or more telephones or to another type of
extension, such as a data communications device. A personal line can provide
either the shared or exclusive use of a specific line/trunk. In Hybrid/PBX mode, a
personal line allows users to receive outside calls without operator involvement.
When a personal line is assigned to more than one extension, a principal user of
the personal line can be assigned through system programming. Assigning an
extension as the principal user has the following effects:
■
If Remote Call Forwarding is enabled for the extension, only the principal
user can forward personal line calls to an outside telephone number.
■
Unless the personal line is set to No Ring, calls received on the personal
line follow the principal user’s Individual or Group Coverage patterns.
Select a personal line to make or receive outside calls by pressing the associated
personal line button on a multiline telephone; a dial-out code is not needed. When
the line is in use, the green LED is on at all multiline telephones that share the
personal line. Inside calls cannot be made or received on a personal line.
When two or more users answer the same call on a Shared SA or personal line
button, the red and green LEDs next to the button go on, but only one person has
a talk path with the caller. Privacy should be used to eliminate competition for the
same call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Page 422
When an individual personal line is assigned to a line button on more than one
telephone, up to three users of that personal line can participate in an in-progress
call (including conference calls) on which Privacy has not been activated. Users
select the personal line button with the call.
Personal lines can be assigned through system programming to single-line
telephones or any other type of tip/ring device to allow a user to receive outside
calls. Normally the Ringing/Idle Line Preference for single-line telephones or other
tip/ring devices is activated and Automatic Line Selection (ALS) is set to select an
SA or ICOM button. With this arrangement in Key and Behind Switch modes, the
single-line telephone user can select the personal line to make an outside call by
dialing the Idle Line Access code (usually 9) while listening to inside dial tone.
In Hybrid/PBX mode, when either Ringing/Idle Line Preference is deactivated or
ALS is set to select an SA button, a single-line telephone or tip/ring device user
cannot select the personal line to make calls but can receive calls on the personal
line.
For single-line telephones or other tip/ring devices in any mode of operation, ALS
can be set to select the personal line. However, the user cannot make inside calls
or activate system features.
A multiline telephone user can program personal line buttons for Immediate Ring,
Delay Ring, or No Ring. When a personal line button is programmed for No Ring,
the user can still answer calls received on a personal line by pressing the personal
line button with the flashing green LED. However, when a personal line is set to
No Ring and Individual and/or Group Coverage is programmed for the user, calls
received on the personal line are not sent to coverage.
Considerations and Constraints
92
DID (Direct Inward Dial) trunks should not be used as personal lines. If a DID
trunk is assigned as a personal line, and a call received on the DID trunk is ringing
at the extension programmed to receive the calls (the routing extension), the call
can be answered by using the personal line button. However, this is not
recommended because the purpose of DID trunks is to route calls to specific
extensions without the need for personal line assignment or operator assistance.
If a line/trunk is not assigned as a personal line, grouped in a pool (Hybrid/PBX
only), or assigned to ring into the Queued Call Console (QCC) queue, and a call is
received on the line/trunk, the caller hears ringback even if that line/trunk does not
terminate anywhere in the system.
When an extension is programmed as the principal user (owner) of a personal
line, only the principal user can forward calls to an outside number by using
Remote Call Forwarding. When the owner has Individual or Group Coverage,
calls received on the personal line follow the owner’s coverage and not the
coverage patterns of other extensions that share the personal line.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Page 423
When no principal user is assigned for a personal line, calls received on the
personal line cannot be forwarded to outside telephone numbers. Calls follow the
Individual Coverage patterns of all senders who share the line and the Group
Coverage pattern of the extension with the lowest logical identification number
(lowest numbered jack on the module).
Two users can join a call in progress (including a conference call), for up to three
users on the same personal line.
Outside lines/trunks used as personal lines cannot be assigned to pools and
cannot be assigned as loudspeaker paging, Music On Hold, or maintenance
alarm jacks.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) cannot be used on personal lines.
In all modes, personal lines are not factory-assigned to single-line telephones or
tip/ring devices connected to 016, 012, or 008 OPT modules.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, calls received on personal lines with Do Not
Disturb on go immediately to coverage instead of waiting for the Coverage Delay
Interval.
Mode Differences
92
Hybrid/PBX Mode
92
When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on and ALS is set to select an SA
button, a single-line telephone user cannot select the personal line to make calls.
However, outside calls can be received on the personal line.
In Hybrid/PBX mode, the factory setting assigns personal lines to DLC positions
rather than to other multiline telephones.
Key and Behind Switch Modes
92
When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on and ALS is set for an ICOM
button, a single-line user can select the personal line to make an outside call by
dialing the Idle Line Access code (usually 9) while listening to inside dial tone.
In Key mode, the factory setting for personal lines assigns the first eight lines
connected to the system as personal lines on all multiline telephones, including
Multi-Function Modules (MFMs) connected to MLX telephones.
In Behind Switch mode, the factory setting assigns personal lines to DLC
positions rather than to multiline telephones.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Page 424
Telephone Differences
92
Direct-Line Consoles
92
The factory setting for analog DLCs assigns the first 32 lines connected to the
system as personal lines in all modes of operation. For MLX DLCs, the first 18
lines connected to the system are automatically assigned as personal lines.
Queued Call Consoles
92
Personal lines cannot be assigned to a QCC or to a pool.
Other Multiline Telephones
92
A personal line is selected by pressing the associated personal line button.
Dial-out codes are not required for making outside calls.
Single-Line Telephones
92
A single-line telephone user can receive calls on a personal line. To allow a
single-line telephone user to select a personal line to make a call, Ringing/Idle
Line Preference must be turned on and ALS must be set to select an SA or ICOM
button. With this arrangement, in Key and Behind Switch modes, the single-line
telephone user can select the personal line to make an outside call by dialing the
Idle Line Access code (usually 9) while listening to inside dial tone.
Feature Interactions
92
Account Code Entry
When Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to an extension and the
user tries to dial an outside call on a personal line button without entering
the account code, the call does not go through.
Alarm
A line/trunk jack used for a maintenance alarm cannot be assigned as a
personal line.
Allowed/
Disallowed Lists
A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot dial a toll or
outside number on a personal line button unless the number is on an
Allowed List assigned to the extension, nor can the user dial a number on
a Disallowed List.
Auto Dial
An outside Auto Dial button can be used on a personal line.
Callback
The Callback feature cannot be used to request a busy personal line.
Caller ID
Caller ID information appears on the display of shared personal lines.
Outgoing call information is not displayed.
Calling Restrictions
A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot dial a toll or
outside number on a personal line button unless the number is on an
Allowed List assigned to the extension, nor can the user dial a number on
a Disallowed List.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 425
Call Waiting
A user does not hear a call-waiting tone for calls received on a personal
line unless the business subscribes to call-waiting service from the local
telephone company.
Coverage
Assigning a sender as the principal user of a personal line specifies that
the calls received on the personal line are sent to the principal user’s
individual and group receivers. A principal user with Remote Call
Forwarding on can forward calls received on the personal line to an
outside number.
Calls received on personal line buttons programmed for No Ring or on
senders’ extensions other than the principal user’s are not eligible for
coverage.
If no principal user is assigned and the personal line is shared by other
senders, calls received on the personal line are sent to all available
Individual Coverage receivers for all senders sharing the line and to the
Group Coverage receivers programmed for the sender with the lowest
logical ID.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call answered on a personal line
using a Cover button can be picked up by anyone with a button for that
personal line. However, the picked-up call cannot be transferred because
it is still considered to be on hold at the other extension.
Prior to Release 2.1, once a person answers a call received on a personal
line on a Cover button and puts the call on hold, the sender and any other
user who shares the personal line cannot pick up the call by pressing the
personal line button. For proper handling, the receiver should transfer the
call to the sender.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, calls received on personal lines with Do
Not Disturb on go immediately to coverage instead of waiting for the
Coverage Delay Interval.
CTI Link
When a call is received on a personal line at an unmonitored DLC, caller
information is passed on to screen-pop-capable destination extension(s)
when the DLC operator conferences or transfers the call.
If a calling group call is delivered to an overflow calling group extension
where no SA buttons are available, it can instead arrive at a personal line
button for that call. In this case, screen pop will not occur at the
destination extension. For this reason, personal line button at overflow
calling group extensions should be set to No Ring so that overflow calls
arrive at SA buttons only.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Digital Data Calls
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 426
Personal lines can be assigned to digital communications devices and
videoconferencing systems, which, ideally, should not share personal
lines except with extensions at the same workstations. If they do share
personal lines, the system manager should ensure that enough idle lines
are available, particularly when a video system is receiving 2B data calls.
Otherwise, the video system may receive only 1B data while another
extension is using a second personal line.
When a personal line is shared between a digital data device and a
telephone, voice calls are directed only to the telephone and data calls
are received by only the digital communications device.
Personal lines can be shared between an MLX telephone and a desktop
video system in passive-bus configuration. 2B data calls can be
completed in this situation.
Personal lines also can be shared between an MLX telephone and a
digital communications device connected to the MLX adjunct extension,
provided that the communications device supports this capability.
Directories
A Personal Directory (MLX-20L only) or System Directory can be used to
dial numbers on a personal line. An Extension Directory is used only for
inside calls and cannot be used to dial calls on a personal line.
Forward and
Follow Me
When an extension is programmed as the principal user of a personal
line, calls received on the personal line are forwarded to an outside
number (if the extension can use Remote Call Forwarding), unless the
outside line is a loop-start line with unreliable disconnect.
Forward on Busy (Release 4.1 and later systems) does not apply to calls
received on personal line buttons.
Group Calling
If a person uses a shared personal line button to join a call in the calling
group queue, the call is removed from the queue. If a delay
announcement is playing, it is disconnected from the call.
To allow all calling group members’ telephones to ring when an outside
call is not answered within three rings, the lines/trunks programmed to
ring into the queue also can be assigned as personal lines on group
member telephones and programmed for Delay Ring. This does not work
for inside calls, remote access calls, DID calls, or when a delay
announcement device is assigned to the group.
Group Calling
continued
In a Hybrid/PBX mode system where the Most Idle agent hunt type
(Release 5.0 and later systems) is used, a calling group member may
receive a calling group call at an SA button, then put that call on hold at
the SA button. If the agent then picks up the call at a personal line button
at his or her telephone, the system does not move the agent to the end of
the most-idle queue (Release 5.0 and later systems).
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Hold
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 427
If a call is received on a personal line and is transferred to another user
who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and puts the call on hold,
users who share the line cannot select the personal line button and pick
up the call. If the person who received the transfer and put the call on hold
cannot return to the call, another user must use the Pickup feature to
enter the line number and pick up the call.
In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a
Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be picked up by a user who
has a personal line button for the call. When the call is picked up, the
green LED next to the personal line lights steadily; however, the call
remains on hold at the Cover, SA, SSA or Pool button. The user who
picks up on the personal line cannot transfer the call that has been picked
up. In order to transfer a call on hold at a Cover, SA, SSA, or Pool button,
use Pickup instead of picking up on a personal line button.
Multi-Function
Module
If an MFM device is used to answer calls or provide supplementary
ringing for its associated MLX telephone, any personal lines removed
from the telephone should also be removed from the MFM. When the
device connected to an MFM requires a personal line to make and/or
receive calls (a modem or fax, for example), a personal line should be
assigned.
Music On Hold
A line/trunk used for Music On Hold cannot be assigned as a personal
line.
Night Service
If the voice mail calling group is assigned as a member of a Night Service
group, incoming lines receive Automated Attendant treatment. When a
call is answered by the Night Service group, ringing does not occur at a
telephone with that personal line and the Night Service coverage is used
instead of the principal user’s coverage.
In Release 4.1 and later systems, a personal line can be assigned to a
Night Service group. The personal line need not be assigned to the
extension of the Night Service group operator in order to receive Night
Service treatment.
Paging
A line/trunk used for loudspeaker paging equipment cannot be assigned
as a personal line.
Pickup
If a call received on a personal line is transferred to another user who
receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on hold,
another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared
personal line button to pick up the call. If the user who received the
transfer and put the call on hold cannot return to the call, another user
must use Line Pickup to pick up the call (for example, an operator can
take a message and then disconnect the caller).
Pools
A personal line cannot be assigned to a pool.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Personal Lines
Page 428
Primary Rate Interface A personal line can be assigned to an extension to represent a PRI line
with routing by dial plan. The green LED associated with the personal line
(PRI) and T1
lights steadily, and ringing on an SA button occurs; the LED does not
flash to indicate that a line/trunk is ringing.
A personal line can be assigned on a telephone for monitoring the status
of a data line; however, users must not use the personal line to attempt to
complete a call.
Privacy
When an individual personal line is assigned to more than one extension,
a user with the personal line cannot join an in-progress call on which
Privacy has been activated.
Recall/Timed Flash
When two users have joined an outside call on a shared personal line
(loop-start only), Recall can be used by either inside party.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
When a call on a personal line button is transferred to another user, the
call rings on an SA or ICOM button. The LED next to the personal line
flashes rapidly to indicate that the call is on hold for transfer. If the call is
answered at an SA or ICOM button, the LED next to the personal line
turns on steadily. If a user shares the personal line appearance and
answers the call by using the personal line button, the call is removed
from the SA or ICOM button.
Transfer
If a call is received on a personal line and is transferred to another user
who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on
hold, another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared
personal line button and pick up the call. If for some reason the person
who received the transfer and put the call on hold cannot return to the
call, another user must use Pickup to pick up the call. For example, an
operator can take a message and then disconnect the caller.
Personalized Ringing
See ‘‘Ringing Options’’ on page 533.
92
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pickup
Page 429
Pickup
92
At a Glance
92
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
Programming Codes
Individual Pickup
General use
Specific extension
Specific line
Group Pickup
Feature Codes
Individual Pickup
Specific extension.
Specific line
Group Pickup
MLX Display Labels
Individual Pickup
General use
Specific extension.
Specific line
Group Pickup
System Programming
Telephone users, operators
Extension Information
Group Call Pickup
All
All (except MLC-5, which cannot be assigned to Pickup
groups)
*9
*9 + ext. no.
*9 + line no.
*88
9 + ext. no.
9 + line no.
88
Pickup,General [Pkup,Genrl]
Pickup,Extension [Pkup,Ext]
Pickup,Line [Pkup,Line]
Pickup,Group [Pkup,Group]
Assign or remove telephones from Pickup groups:
●
Maximums
Description
Extensions→Call PickUp
30 Pickup groups
15 members for each group
1 Pickup group for each telephone
92
Pickup allows users to answer calls that are ringing, parked, or on hold anywhere
in the system. There are two types of Pickup: Individual and Group. Individual
Pickup can be used in three ways: Extension, Line, and General. Table 30 shows
the calls that can be answered with each type of Pickup. Note that if more than
one call is ringing or on hold, the first call received is the one picked up.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pickup
Page 430
Table 30.
Types of Pickup
Individual Extension Individual Line
Inside ringing
Outside ringing
Inside held
Outside held
Parked
Outside ringing
Outside held
Individual Pickup
Individual General Group
Inside ringing
Inside ringing
Inside held
Outside ringing
Outside ringing
Outside held
03
Individual Pickup can be used in the following ways:
■
Extension Pickup. From the display, select Pickup and then dial the
extension number of the call to be picked up. Alternatively, a programmed
Individual Extension Pickup button can be set to pick up calls on one
specific extension. If that extension has more than one call, the first call
sent to the extension is picked up. To pick up a call parked by an operator,
select Pickup from the display or press the programmed Individual
Extension Pickup button; then dial the park zone.
■
Line Pickup. From the display, select Pickup, then dial the line number
(801–880) to select a specific outside line from which to pick up a ringing or
held call. Alternatively, a programmed Individual Line Pickup button can be
set to pick up calls on one specific line. Line Pickup also can be used to
make announcements through the loudspeaker paging system.
■
General Pickup. Multiline telephone users can program a general-purpose
Pickup button to pick up calls on either extensions or lines. When a general
Pickup button is used, enter the line or extension number for the call to be
picked up every time the button is used.
Group Pickup
03
Group Pickup is used to answer a ringing call for any member of the group either
by dialing the Group Pickup code or pressing a programmed Group Pickup button.
It is not necessary to know the extension number or line number of the ringing
call. The system automatically connects to an inside or outside call that is ringing
at a telephone assigned to the group.
A telephone cannot be assigned to more than one Pickup group.
Considerations and Constraints
03
When Group Pickup is used to answer a call, the user cannot determine whose
call is being answered. An MLX display telephone user receives call information
and can determine whose call is answered only after the call is picked up.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pickup
Page 431
Individual Pickup, not Group Pickup, is used to pick up calls parked in a park zone
by an operator.
Telephone Differences
03
Direct-Line Consoles
03
A Direct-Line Console (DLC) can be part of a Pickup group. This allows other
group members to provide backup coverage for the DLC. A DLC operator can use
Pickup to answer calls on lines/trunks that are not assigned to buttons on the
console.
Queued Call Consoles
03
03
Individual Pickup
To pick up a call using a Queued Call Console (QCC), select the feature from the
Home screen or press the Feature button and select the feature from the display.
Then press the DSS (Direct Station Selector) button or dial the extension for the
telephone or park zone.
To answer calls on specific lines, select the feature from the Home screen or
press the Feature button and select the feature from the display; then dial the line
number (801–880) with the call.
03
Group Pickup
To pick up a call ringing on any other group member’s telephone, select Pickup
Grp from the Home screen or press the Feature button and select the feature
from the display.
Other Multiline Telephones
03
Individual Pickup
03
To pick up a call, all other multiline telephone users press a programmed
general-purpose Pickup button or press the Feature button and dial 9. MLX
telephone users also can press the Feature button and select the feature from the
display, then dial the number for the extension or park zone.
To answer calls on specific lines, press a programmed general-purpose Pickup
button or press the Feature button and dial 9; then dial the number of the line with
the call.
If a Pickup button is programmed for a specific telephone or outside line, press
that Pickup button to pick up a call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pickup
Page 432
03
Group Pickup
To pick up a call ringing on any other group member’s telephone, press a
programmed Group Pickup button or press the Feature button and dial 88. MLX
telephone users also can press the Feature button and select the feature from the
display.
MLC-5 cordless telephones cannot be assigned to Pickup groups.
Single-Line Telephones
03
03
Individual Pickup
To pick up a parked call, lift the handset and (while listening to inside dial tone)
dial #9 and the extension number for the telephone or park zone.
03
Group Pickup
To pick up a call ringing at any other group member’s telephone, lift the handset
and (while listening to inside dial tone) dial #88.
NOTE:
When a single-line telephone user is on a call and puts the call on hold to
pick up another call by using Individual or Group Pickup, the user cannot
put the picked-up call on hold to return to the first call. If the user presses
the Recall or Flash button (or, if the telephone does not have timed or
positive disconnect, presses and releases the switchhook), the picked-up
call is dropped and the user is reconnected to the original held call. If the
user hangs up, the picked-up call is disconnected and the first call is
considered on hold for transfer and is not returned to the user until after the
transfer return interval.
Feature Interactions
03
Callback
A callback request cannot be picked up at another telephone.
Call Waiting
Pickup cannot be used to answer a waiting call at another extension.
Conference
A conference call cannot be picked up at another extension. A conference
originator can, however, pick up a call and add it to the conference call.
Coverage
An Individual or Group Coverage sender or receiver can be a member of
a Pickup group. This allows Pickup to be used to answer a ringing
Individual or Group Coverage call. If a sender who is a member of a
Pickup group uses Coverage On/Off to prevent calls from being sent to
Individual or Group Coverage receivers, his or her calls can be picked up
by using Individual Pickup; however, calls cannot be picked up by using
Group Pickup. When a coverage call is answered by using Pickup, the
call appearance is removed from all other telephones in the coverage
arrangement.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pickup
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 433
Digital Data Calls
A digital communications device can pick up a data call. Pickup is not
recommended at video system extensions, although it can be used at a
passive-bus MLX telephone.
Direct Station
Selector
The DSS buttons associated with a line/trunk number (801–880) cannot
be used to answer calls on specific lines by using Individual Pickup.
These DSS buttons are used strictly to show the busy or not-busy status
of each line/trunk.
Display
When a user with an MLX display telephone selects Pickup,
PickupLine/Ext: prompt appears on the display (the prompt is not
displayed if a button programmed for a specific line or extension is used).
After the user enters the line or extension number to pick up the call, a
confirmation message appears (for example, Pickup: OUTSIDE or
Pickup: JOE).
Forward and
Follow Me
Pickup cannot be used to answer calls being forwarded to an outside
telephone number.
Group Calling
A calling group member can be a member of a Pickup group. Calling
group members can use Pickup to answer a call (either a calling group or
individual group member extension) that is ringing at another group
member’s telephone. Line Pickup can be used to pick up a call that is in
the calling group queue. If an agent has a call on hold and the agent or
someone else picks up the call, the system moves the agent to the end of
the most-idle agent queue (Release 5.0 and later systems).
HotLine
Pickup cannot be used at a HotLine extension (Release 5.0 and later
systems).
Night Service
A call ringing at a Night Service group extension can be answered from
another extension by using Pickup.
Paging
When the line number used for loudspeaker paging is not assigned to a
button on a multiline telephone, a user can access the loudspeaker
paging system either by using Individual Pickup and dialing the
loudspeaker paging line number (801–880) or by using a Pickup button
specifically programmed for the paging line number.
Park
A parked call can be picked up by using Individual Pickup.
Personal Lines
If a call received on a personal line is transferred to another user who
receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on hold,
another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared
personal line button to pick up the call. If the user who received the
transfer and put the call on hold cannot return to the call, another user
must use Line Pickup to pick up the call (for example, an operator can
take a message and then disconnect the caller).
SMDR
The extension of a user who picks up a call by using Pickup is shown on
the SMDR report.
System Access/
Intercom Buttons
If Pickup is used to answer a call ringing at an SA or Shared SA button,
the call is removed from the ringing telephone and moves to the SA or
SSA button used to pick up the call. The green LED turns on next to the
SA button used to answer the call and next to all SSA buttons
programmed for that specific button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pickup
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 434
An inside call ringing at an SA or SSA button can be picked up at another
telephone. All associated SA and SSA buttons go idle.
Transfer
A transferred call can be answered by using Pickup.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pools
Page 435
Pools
03
At a Glance
03
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Telephone users, operators, data users
Dial Plan Information
Hybrid/PBX only
All
Assign individual lines/trunks to pools:
●
LinesTrunks→Pools
Assign Pool buttons to telephones:
●
Extensions→LinesTrunks
Restrict telephone from using pool dial-out code:
●
Maximums
Pools for each system
Lines/trunks for each pool
Buttons assigned for each
pool
Factory Settings
Main Pool
Ground-Start Trunk Pool
Dial-In Tie Trunk
Automatic-In Tie Trunk
Pool Dial-Out Code
Restriction
Extensions→Dial OutCd
11
Unlimited
64
70
890
891
892
No access to any pool
03
Description
Hybrid/PBX mode allows outside lines/trunks to be grouped together in pools.
Users select lines/trunks by using SA buttons instead of having separate buttons
for each line/trunk in the system. To access pools using SA buttons, people dial
pool dial-out codes. Pools also can be assigned to buttons on one or more
telephones to allow a user to select the pool without dialing the pool dial-out code
or Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code. In Release 3.1 and later
systems, the factory setting does not allow any extensions to use pool dial-out
codes. To allow a user to access a pool by entering a dial-out code, the system
manager must remove the restriction for the dial-out code and the extension.
When the system is set up and the Hybrid/PBX mode of operation is selected, the
system automatically groups lines/trunks into the following pools:
■
All loop-start lines (basic and special-purpose) are assigned to the main
pool. The factory-set extension number for the main pool is 70.
■
All ground-start trunks are assigned to the pool with the factory-set
extension number 890.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pools
Page 436
NOTE:
On initialization of a Release 1.0 system, all loop-start and
ground-start line/trunk programming reverts to loop-start. The
ground-start pool never has trunks assigned to it automatically but
must be programmed after the ground-start jacks are designated. In
Release 1.1, 2.0, and later systems, ground-start trunks are
assigned to the ground-start pool on initialization, except in a system
modified for permanent Key mode operation.
■
All dial-in tie trunks are assigned to the pool with the factory-set extension
number 891.
■
All automatic-in tie trunks are assigned to the pool with the factory-set
extension number 892.
NOTE:
The factory setting for the type of line/trunk connected to a 400 LS, 800
GS/LS, 408 GS/LS, 408 GS/LS-MLX, or 800 GS/LS-ID module is
loop-start. The system does not automatically make pool assignments for
loop-start, ground-start, or tie trunks that are emulated by using a T1
facility. Each of these types must be grouped into a pool through system
programming.
The system can have a maximum of 11 pools. Each pool can be assigned to a
button on a maximum of 64 extensions. The number of lines/trunks in each pool is
limited only by the number of lines/trunks connected to the system. However, a
line/trunk can be assigned to only one pool.
Considerations and Constraints
03
The maximum number of Pool buttons that can be assigned to multiline
telephones, excluding Queued Call Consoles (QCCs), is limited only by the
maximum number of pools allowed (11) and the number of buttons on the
telephone.
The number of lines/trunks in each pool is limited only by the number of
lines/trunks connected to the system. A line/trunk can be assigned to only one
pool.
Each pool should contain the same type of lines/trunks (for example, basic,
WATS, data-only, or foreign exchange) because users cannot control the specific
trunks selected by the system. Ground-start and loop-start lines/trunks of the
same type (for example, WATS) can be mixed in the same pool. Direct Inward
Dial (DID) trunks should not be put into pools; lines/trunks used for Music On Hold
or maintenance alarms cannot be grouped into pools. Also, dial-in tie trunks
should not be placed in a pool that is assigned to a button on the telephone.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pools
Page 437
Lines/trunks assigned to pools cannot be assigned as personal lines (on buttons)
on any extension except a Direct-Line Console (DLC). However, calls that come
in on lines/trunks assigned to pools can be programmed to be received by one or
more QCC operators.
When all lines/trunks in a pool are in use, the green LEDs turn on next to the Pool
buttons assigned to multiline telephones and next to any DSS (Direct Station
Selector) buttons associated with the pool dial-out code.
Individual extensions can be restricted to deny dial access to particular pools. See
“Calling Restrictions” under ‘‘Feature Interactions’’ on page 438.
Users with Pool buttons on their telephones can use the pool even if the pool
dial-out restriction is assigned to the extension.
One pool can be assigned to buttons on a maximum of 64 extensions.
In Release 3.1 and later systems, if an extension is changed from a Direct-Line
Console to a Queued Call Console, pool dial-out codes are disallowed on the
QCC. You must use system programming if you want to allow access to dial-out
codes on the QCC.
Mode Differences
03
Although pools are available only in Hybrid/PBX mode, users in Behind Switch
mode can access the pools in the host switch through their prime lines.
Telephone Differences
03
Direct-Line Consoles
03
A Pool button cannot be assigned to a DLC. A DLC operator accesses pools by
dialing the pool dial-out code from an SA button or, on an MLX DLC with a DSS,
by pressing the DSS button associated with the pool dial-out code. Trunks in
pools cannot be assigned as personal lines (assigned to line buttons) on any
telephone except a DLC. In Release 3.1 and later systems, the system manager,
through system programming, must allow the DLC extension to access those pool
dial-out codes that it needs.
Queued Call Consoles
03
A Pool Status button is assigned as a fixed-feature button on a QCC and
provides an operator with the status of all the pools (maximum of 11). The
operator presses the Inspct button followed by the Pool Status button, and the
busy or available status of pools is shown on the display. Pool buttons cannot be
assigned to a QCC, but a QCC operator can use pools to make outgoing calls by
selecting a Call button and dialing the ARS or pool dial-out code. In Release 3.1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pools
Page 438
and later systems, the system manager, through system programming, must allow
the QCC extension to access those pool dial-out codes that it needs. A QCC
operator can be assigned to receive calls on lines/trunks assigned to pools.
Feature Interactions
03
Account Code Entry
When Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to an extension and the
user tries to dial an outside call on a Pool button without entering the
account code, the call does not go through.
Alarm
A line/trunk jack used for a maintenance alarm cannot be assigned to a
pool.
Auto Dial
Pool dial-out codes cannot be programmed on inside Auto Dial buttons. A
pool dial-out code can be programmed on an outside Auto Dial button
when a telephone number is also included. However, depending on the
local telephone company, Pause characters may be required before the
telephone number. Enter Pause characters by pressing the Hold button.
Automatic
Maintenance Busy
To provide optimal performance, Automatic Maintenance Busy should be
enabled when a Hybrid/PBX system includes pools.
Automatic Route
Selection
ARS ensures appropriate and cost-effective use of pools. ARS and the
dial-access-to-pools restriction function independently of each other. If
ARS restrictions are programmed to allow access to a pool, the user may
seize a pool that the extension is not allowed to use under existing pool
dial-access restrictions.
Callback
In Hybrid/PBX mode, Callback can be used to complete calls to outside
numbers only when all lines/trunks in the pool are busy.
Caller ID
If the LS-ID Delay option is programmed on a 2-way line, the system does
not seize a line from a pool for an outgoing call when that line is receiving
an incoming call.
Calling Restrictions
Specific pools can be restricted from use for outgoing calls by assigning a
pool dial-out code restriction to extensions. In Release 3.1 and later
systems, the factory setting is for all pool dial-out codes to be restricted
for all users.
Coverage
Calls received on a sender’s Pool button programmed for Immediate
Ring or Delay Ring are eligible for Individual or Group Coverage.
CTI Link
When an MLX extension is programmed as a CTI link, dial access to
pools is removed from the extension.
Digital Data Calls
If a videoconferencing system is programmed to have a single Pool
button, two calls to that pool result in a 1B data call. However, if two
separate pools are assigned to a videoconferencing system extension,
then a 2B data call can be established. If the communications system
includes two or more 2B data devices that share the same two pools,
incoming 2B data calls can be answered by the wrong device.
Directories
When a pool dial-out code is included in the telephone number for a
Personal or System Directory listing, Pause characters may be required
following the pool dial-out code, depending on the local telephone
company. Pause characters are entered by pressing the Hold button.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Pools
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 439
Display
When a display telephone user selects a Pool button and lifts the
handset, the display shows the label (if programmed) for the lines in the
selected pool.
Forward and
Follow Me
A pool can be used to select the facility for forwarding calls to an outside
telephone number. The user enters the pool dial-out code before the
telephone number.
Group Calling
Lines/trunks assigned to pools can be assigned to ring into a calling
group. An incoming call on a line/trunk assigned to the pool rings on an
SA button even if the calling group member has a Pool button assigned
to his or her telephone.
HotLine
A HotLine extension (Release 5.0 and later systems) can use a pool, as
long as dial-access-to-pools is enabled for the extension and the Pool
access code is programmed with the outside number as the first Personal
Speed Dial number for the extension.
Line Request
Line Request cannot be used on a Pool button.
Music On Hold
Line/trunk jacks used for Music On Hold cannot be assigned to pools.
Paging
Line/trunk jacks for loudspeaker paging cannot be assigned to pools.
Personal Lines
A personal line cannot be assigned to a pool.
Primary Rate Interface Data lines (especially T1 data) should not be put in the same pool as
voice lines. System alarms eventually result if voice extensions try to
(PRI) and T1
access data lines.
Recall/Timed Flash
If a user presses the Recall button during or after dialing, a timed flash is
sent to the host switch, the accessed line is kept, the user hears dial tone,
and calling restrictions are reapplied.
Speed Dial
A pool dial-out code can be included with the telephone number
associated with a Personal Speed Dial or System Speed Dial code.
However, depending on the local telephone company, Pause characters
may be required immediately following the pool dial-out code. Enter
Pause characters by pressing the Hold button.
SMDR
When outgoing calls are made by using a pool, the line/trunk selected by
the system is reported on the SMDR report.
System
Renumbering
Pool dial-out codes (the factory-set codes are 70 and 890–899) can be
renumbered.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Power-Failure Transfer
Page 440
Power-Failure Transfer
03
At a Glance
03
Modes
Telephones
Hardware
All
Single-line telephones
If ground-start trunks are used in Hybrid/PBX mode,
KS23566, L1 ground-start buttons are required on
power-failure telephones
03
Description
During a commercial power failure, Power-Failure Transfer (PFT) provides
incoming and outgoing service through power-failure telephones. When a power
failure occurs, all calls are dropped and the power-failure telephone automatically
goes on. It can make and receive calls on the line/trunk connected to the first
(lowest) line/trunk jack on the module where the PFT telephone is connected.
A power-failure telephone is a single-line telephone connected to a PFT jack on a
400, 400 LS/TTR, 800, 800 GS/LS, 800 GS/LS-ID, 408, 408 GS/LS, or 408
GS/LS-MLX module. Each module has one PFT jack for each series of four
line/trunk jacks; for example, the 800 and 800 GS/LS modules each have two PFT
jacks.
Considerations and Constraints
03
A power-failure telephone cannot be used to make or receive calls and does not
function when the system is operating normally.
System features and restrictions do not work when PFT occurs. Power-failure
telephones are not working extensions but only dedicated power-failure devices.
Telephone Differences
03
Multiline Telephones
03
Multiline telephones cannot be used as power-failure telephones.
Single-Line Telephones
03
Touch-tone single-line telephones must be connected to PFT line/trunk jacks for
touch-tone lines; rotary single-line telephones must be connected to PFT
line/trunk jacks for rotary-dial lines.
Feature Interactions
SMDR
03
No SMDR records are generated during a power failure.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 441
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 03
03
At a Glance
Users Affected
Reports Affected
Modes
Telephones
System Programming
Systemwide
Telephone users, operators, data users
DS1 Information, PRI Information, SMDR
Key, Hybrid/PBX
All (display support on MLX telephones only)
Specify modules that provide primary, secondary, and tertiary
clock synchronization and source of clock synchronization;
also activate/deactivate clock:
● LinesTrunks→More→ClockSync
Specify type of facility connected to 100D module:
●
100D Module
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Type
Specify framing format for 100D module:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→FrameFormat
Specify line coding for 100D module:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Suppression
Specify line compensation between 100D module and
channel service unit (CSU) or far end:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Line Comp
Specify type of CSU equipment provided by CO:
●
PRI
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Channel Unit
Specify the type of switch (Release 4.2 and later systems):
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→SwitchType
Assign telephone numbers to PRI lines:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→Telephone Number
Assign B-channels to group:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→B-channels
Assign PRI lines to B-channel groups:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→Lines
Specify type of network service for each B-channel group:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→NetworkServ
Specify whether telephone number to send to network for
outgoing calls should be copied from line telephone number:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→Copy Number
Specify telephone number to send to network for outgoing
calls on PRI lines:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→NumbrToSend
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 442
At a Glance - Continued
Programming
PRI
continued
T1
Assign test line telephone number for each 100D module:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→Test TelNum
Set timer and counter thresholds for each 100D module:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→Protocol→Timers
Assign link layer address or Terminal Equipment Identifier
(TEI) of equipment connected to each D-channel:
●
LinesTrunks→PRI→Protocol→TEI
To select T1 emulation:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→ Select
Type of emulation.
To select T1 Switched 56 Data and program Channel
Signaling:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Enter→Type→T1→
Enter→More→S56 Data→Enter→
AssignChan-Signling→Enter→Select Direction,
Intype, Outtype, AnsSupv, Disconnect, Inmode,
or Outmode
To select T1 All Switched 56 Data and program Channel
Signaling:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→
More→All S56 Data→Signling→Enter→Select
Direction, Intype, Outtype, AnsSupv, Disconnect,
Inmode, or Outmode
To select T1 Switched 56 Data and program Incoming
Routing Table:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→
More→S56 Data→Enter→Incom Routing Table→
Select Expected Digits, Add Digits, or Delete
Digits→Enter
To select T1 All Switched 56 Data and program Incoming
Routing Table:
●
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→
More→ALL S56 Data→Incom Routing Table→Select
Expected Digits, Add Digits, or Delete Digits→Enter
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Maximums
General
100D modules
PRI-specific
B-channels
Lines (total)
Digits for each number
assigned to a PRI line
ISDN lines for each
B-channel group
B-channels for each
B-channel group
At a Glance - Continued
Maximums
PRI-specific
continued
Digits for each telephone
number sent to network
for outgoing calls
Digits for test trunk
telephone number
PRI Dial-Plan Routing
Table (Hybrid/PBX)
Number of entries
Digits for each pattern
Digits to delete
Digits to add
Network Selection Table
Number of entries
Digits for each pattern
Special Services
Selection Table
Number of entries
Digits for each pattern
Digits to delete
Call-by-Call Services
Table
Number of entries
Number of patterns for
each entry
Number of digits for each
pattern
T1-specific
T1 Dial-Plan Routing
Table
Number of entries
Expected Digits
Digits to delete
Digits to add
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 443
3
69
72
12
24
23
12
12
16 (0–15)
8
14 (range 0–14, 0=wildcard)
4
4 (0–3)
8 (*=wild card, at least one * required, all *s must be at end
and contiguous)
8 (0–7)
4
4
10 (0–9)
10
8
24 (1–24)
3 (1–3)
4 (range 0–4)
4 (range 0–4)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Factory Settings
Systemwide
Primary Clock
Clock Synchronization
Source
Clock
100D Module
Type of Facility
Framing Format
Line Coding
Signaling
At a Glance - Continued
Factory Settings
100D Module
continued
Line Compensation
Type of CSU equipment
PRI
Telephone number
assigned to PRI line
B-channels assigned to
group
PRI lines assigned to
B-channel groups
Type of network service
for each B-channel group
Copy telephone number to
send from telephone
number assigned
Telephone number to
send to network for
outgoing PRI calls
Test trunk telephone
number for each 100D
module
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 444
First port that is in service on an 800 NI-BRI module or first
100D module in service in control unit
Loop (not definable by system manager)
Active
T1
D4 compatible
AMI-ZCS
Robbed-Bit Signaling (RBS)
1 (range 1–5)
1 = 0.6 dB loss
2 = 1.2 dB loss
3 = 1.8 dB loss
4 = 2.4 dB loss
5 = 3 dB loss
Foreign Exchange
0 digits
None
None
None
Do Not Copy
0 digits
None
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Call-by-Call Services
Table
Patterns
Call type
Service
Digits to delete
Timer and counter
thresholds for each 100D
module
T200 Timer
T203 Timer
N200 Counter
N201 Counter
K Counter
T303 Timer
T305 Timer
T308 Timer
T309 Timer
At a Glance - Continued
Factory Settings
PRI
Timer and counter
thresholds for each 100D
module
continued
T310 Timer
T313 Timer
T316 Timer
Link layer address or TEI
assigned
PRI Dial-Plan Routing
Table
Service value
Digits for each pattern
Digits in Called Party
Number
Digits to add
T1 Dial-Plan Routing
Table
Expected Digits
Digits to delete
Digits to add
Description
Page 445
Blank
Both (Voice and Data)
Blank
0
1 second (range 1,000–3,000 ms)
30 seconds (range 1–60)
3 transmissions (range 1–5)
260 octets (range 16–260)
7 frames (range 1–15)
4 seconds (range 4–12)
4 seconds (range 4–30)
4 seconds (range 4–12)
90 seconds (range 30–120)
60 seconds (range 2–120)
4 seconds (range 4–60)
120 seconds (range 30–120)
0 (range 0–63)
Empty
Blank
0
Blank
Blank
0
Blank
03
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System supports two types of service for
DS1 (Digital Signal Level 1) facilities: T1 and PRI.
T1 service transmits and receives voice and analog data as well as digital data
services in Release 4.0 and later releases.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 446
The ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) is a
standard access arrangement that can be used to connect the system to a
network providing voice and digital data services.
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System supports connection to the
following central office (CO) switches for PRI services:
■
Releases 1.0 and 1.1 support Lucent Technologies 4ESS™ Generic 16.
■
Release 2.0 supports these additional switches:
— Lucent Technologies 5ESS Generic 6
— Lucent Technologies 5ESS serving the FTS2000 (government only)
network.
■
Release 4.2 and later systems also support these switches:
— NORTEL DMS-100 Generic BCS 36 for local exchange carrier services
— NORTEL DMS-250 Generic MCI 07 serving the MCI network
— Digital Switch Corporation DEX600E Generic 500-39.30 serving the MCI
network
To provide T1 Switched 56 services in Release 4.0 and later systems, the system
supports the following central office switches:
■
Lucent Technologies 4ESS Generic 18/19/20
■
Lucent Technologies 5ESS Generic 9.1
■
Northern Telecom DMS-100 Generic BCS 34
You also can link a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 4.0 or
later with a Lucent Technologies DEFINITY G1.1 PBX or DEFINITY Enterprise
Communications Server for data tie-trunk connections using T1 Switched 56
services.
Release 2.0 and later systems also support call-by-call service selection for
outgoing PRI calls, support for Station Identification/Automatic Number
Identification (SID-ANI) as a Calling Party Number, and dial-plan routing.
Terminology
Called Party Number (CdPN)
03
03
In general, the term Called Party Number (CdPN) is a telephone number that has
been dialed to reach a destination. However, while routing the call, the network
can change the Called Party Number to make routing easier. In either case, the
network sends the Called Party Number to the system when a call arrives at the
system.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 447
Calling Party Number (CPN)
03
If you subscribe to the AT&T INFO2 Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
service or another PRI caller identification network service (Release 4.2 and
later), an incoming call on an ISDN line includes accompanying information about
the party placing the call. This can be either a station (extension) identification
number that is defined by the internal dial plan of the system where the call
originated (Extension Only), billing number information (Line Telephone
Number), or both (Base Number with Ext.). With this information, a call recipient
may identify the caller before answering.
Lines/Trunks
03
In this section on PRI and T1, lines are the representations that appear on
extension telephones or are put into pools. They represent the type of service
requested on a call. Trunks are the facilities that link switches. For all except DS1,
lines have a one-to-one correspondence to trunks because there are 24
transmission channels for each DS1 connection. With PRI, lines are further
removed from trunks because the type of service is not linked to the B-channel
(trunk). The system has an intermediary called a B-channel group (BCG). Lines
are used to place and receive calls, and a BCG links B-channels to lines.
B-channel groups may be either a single B-channel or multiple B-channels
grouped together.
Figure 36 shows how lines, B-channels, and B-channel groups, function together.
For outgoing calls, a user selects a PRI line that routes the call to a B-channel
group. The BCG selects an open B-channel and connects over the PRI
connection. For incoming calls, the network selects an open B-channel and the
BCG directs the call to the PRI line for which it has been intended: it matches the
Called Party Number with the line’s programmed telephone number. In addition,
the Dial-Plan Routing feature may be used to further direct the call to a specific
extension (SA button) or calling group by matching some portion of the Called
Party Number against the system dial plan. Dial-plan routing is similar to Direct
Inward Dial.
Each DS1 module is given 24 lines, whether or not it is used for emulation of
lines/trunks or for PRI.
PRI
03
PRI is a common configuration for a DS1 facility. A DS1 facility consists of
24 channels, sometimes referred to as DS0 channels, each with a capacity of
64 kbps. DS1 refers to the twenty-four 64-kbps channels, plus framing and
signaling bits, multiplexed together to form a 1.544-Mbps Digital Signal Level 1
signal. When used for PRI, a channel can be designated as either a B-channel
(bearer channel) or a D-channel (data or delta channel).
A B-channel is used to carry user information, such as the voice or data content of
a call, between the system and the far-end switch. Each B-channel provides
access to one or more network services. Releases 1.0 and 1.1 support access to
only one network service for each B-channel. Release 2.0 and later supports
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 448
call-by-call service selection, which allows multiple network services over the
same B-channels. The D-channel conveys signaling required to set up, control,
and clear calls made over all of the B-channels.
The most common configuration of a DS1 facility for PRI consists of 23
B-channels and 1 D-channel, although other combinations are possible. Each PRI
must include a D-channel, but may include fewer than 23 B-channels. The
remaining channels cannot be used for any other purpose.
Trunks:
OUTGOING LINE
IS SELECTABLE
BY USER
Line 801
Loop-start
Line 802
Ground-start
Line 803
Tie
Line 804
DID
PRI
Line 849
PRI
Line 850
PRI
Line 851
B-CHANNEL
GROUP
B-channels
PRI
PRI
Line 852
Figure 36.
PRI Lines and B-Channel Groups
NOTE:
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System does not support multiple
PRI facilities sharing one D-channel (as allowed with Non-Facility
Associated Signaling).
Up to three DS1 carrier facilities (maximum of two in one carrier), and therefore
three PRIs, can be connected to the system through separate 100D modules,
each of which occupies a slot in the system carrier. In terms of system capacity,
each DS1 channel counts as a line/trunk, so the maximum number of B-channels
supported by the system is 69. Signaling for 69 B-channels is provided over 3
separate D-channels, using up 72 of the system’s 80-line capacity.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 449
PRI service offers the following benefits:
■
Network Subscriber Service Options. Release 4.2 and later systems
support network services from AT&T, MCI, and the DMS-100 5ESS
network of local exchange carriers (LECs). These services are described in
‘‘Type of Service’’ on page 452. (Prior releases support AT&T subscriber
5ESS LEC subscriber services only.)
■
Speed. Data calls to outside destinations can be established on the same
B-channels used for voice calls if the service allows. Dedicated,
conditioned lines/trunks are not needed. By supporting high-speed digital
data transmission, PRI provides the capability for videoconferencing and
Group IV (G4) fax.
■
Dynamic B-Channel Assignment. An individual B-channel can be
removed from service without blocking ISDN calls to or from any extension.
■
Improved Toll Restriction. The ways that toll restriction can be bypassed
are limited on PRI lines/trunks. Specifically, three types of toll abuse are
eliminated with PRI service:
— Because dialing is in the form of out-of-band messages that must be
generated by the system, a user cannot use a touch-tone generating
device, such as a pocket dialer, to send dialed digits directly through the
system to the line/trunk.
— Without PRI service, toll restriction can be deceived by dialing digits on a
loop-start line before the far-end switch applies dial tone. These initial
digits may indicate a local call to the system’s toll-restriction checking
while the subsequent digits, those actually recognized by the far-end
switch, may produce a toll call. This is not possible with PRI service
because every digit screened and passed on by the system’s toll
restriction is guaranteed to be received by the far-end switch.
— A PRI line’s far-end disconnect signal provides a reliable indication
when a call ends, and a new call cannot be initiated until the line has
been released from the prior call on both ends. This prevents a user on
a loop-start line, waiting off hook for the restoration of dial tone after a
previous call, from placing a second call before toll restriction is
reapplied.
■
Reliable Indication of Far-End Disconnect. This prevents an incoming
call from being blocked because a line is not released when a call is ended.
The system’s implementation of PRI provides the following features:
■
Support for Caller Identification. The system supports AT&T’s INFO2
Station Identification/Automatic Number Identification (SID-ANI) Service
and, in Release 4.2 and later systems, similar services from MCI and local
exchange carriers. Customers who subscribe to one of these services can
identify the incoming caller on a PRI line/trunk by either telephone number
or billing number. The Calling Party Number (CPN) in Release 1.0 is
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 450
facility-based, whereas it can be extension-based in Release 2.0 and later,
if so programmed. Extension-based CPN results in a more PBX-like
performance from the system.
NOTE:
The availability of the caller identification information may be limited
by local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or service provider.
■
Routing by Dial Plan (Release 2.0 and later). Routing by dial plan
supports call handling similar to Direct Inward Dial (DID). For example, you
can specify that calls received from a particular area code should be routed
to a specific person or group responsible for accounts in the area.
Routing by dial plan performs digit analysis on incoming calls, matches to
Called Party Numbers (CdPNs), and delivers the calls to the destinations
based on the respective Called Party Numbers. It also allows multiple calls
to the same directory number. That is, multiple concurrent incoming calls
with the same Called Party Number can be delivered to a destination
simultaneously.
■
Call-by-Call Service Selection (Release 2.0 and later). This feature
maximizes use of communications lines, providing more services with
fewer lines. Call-by-call service selection provides more than one PRI
service (such as VPN service and OUTWATS) for each B-channel. Based
on the number dialed and the bearer capability (voice, data, or both), the
system chooses which service is used. If a caller requests operator
service, the system bypasses call-by-call service selection.
■
Restriction Code Handling for FTS2000 Network (Release 2.0 and
later). FTS2000 network users can have restriction codes applied to their
extensions. A person who attempts to place a call that exceeds the set
restriction level must first enter a restriction code. If no code is entered, the
FTS2000 network prompts the user to enter the code from the telephone
dialpad. The system allows a restriction code to be entered with the
Account Code Entry feature. This is especially useful for data calls.
03
T1
A DS1 facility programmed as a T1 line/trunk uses 24 channels, sometimes
referred to as DS0 channels, each with a capacity of 64 kbps. Signaling must be
in-band signaling, however, which limits the data rate for each channel to 56 kbps
when the channels are programmed for Switched 56.
T1 channels can be programmed to emulate the following types of connections:
■
Loop-start
■
Ground-start
■
Switched 56 (56-kbps data)
■
E&M tie trunk
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
■
Page 451
Direct Inward Dial
T1 service provides the following benefits:
■
Speed. Data calls to outside destinations can be made by programming a
channel for T1 Switched 56 Data. This service must be supported on the
far end. By allowing high-speed digital data transmission, T1 provides the
capability for videoconferencing and Group IV (G4) fax.
■
Improved Toll Restriction. The ways in which toll restriction can be
bypassed are limited on T1 lines/trunks. Specifically, three types of toll
abuse are eliminated with T1 service:
— Because dialing is in the form of out-of-band messages that must be
generated by the system, a user cannot use a touch-tone generating
device, such as a pocket dialer, to send dialed digits directly through the
system to the line/trunk.
— Without T1 service, toll restriction can be deceived by dialing digits on a
loop-start line before the far-end switch applies dial tone. These initial
digits may indicate a local call to the system’s toll-restriction checking
while the subsequent digits, those actually recognized by the far-end
switch, may produce a toll call. This is not possible with T1 service
because every digit screened and passed on by the system’s toll
restriction is guaranteed to be received by the far-end switch.
— A T1 line’s far-end disconnect signal provides a reliable indication when
a call ends, and a new call cannot be initiated until the line has been
released from the prior call on both ends. This prevents a user on a
loop-start line, waiting off hook for the restoration of dial tone after a
previous call, from placing a second call before toll restriction is
reapplied.
■
Reliable Indication of Far-End Disconnect. This prevents an incoming
call from being blocked because a line is not released when a call is ended.
T1 supports routing by dial plan on Switched 56 data channels. Routing by dial
plan supports call handling similar to Direct Inward Dial (DID). It performs digit
analysis on incoming calls, matches to Called Party Numbers (CdPNs), and
delivers the calls to the destinations based on the respective Called Party
Numbers. It also allows multiple calls to the same directory number. That is,
multiple concurrent incoming calls with the same Called Party Number can be
delivered to a destination simultaneously.
DS1 Facility Options
03
A Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) facility is a transmission system that transports
digital signals in the DS1 format. The interface that allows the connection of DS1
facilities to the system is the 100D module. Through this module, voice and data
calls can be made or received using a DS1 facility.
Twenty-four Digital Signal Level 0 (DS0) channels, each operating at 64 kbps,
plus framing bits, are multiplexed, forming a DS1 signal of 1.544 Mbps. Each DS0
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 452
channel within the DS1 signal corresponds to a logical port. Although there is only
one physical jack, the 100D module supports up to 24 logical ports (one for each
channel).
In DS1 format, calls to other digital PBXs or telephone company foreign
exchanges (FXs) remain digital. Signals do not need to be converted to analog for
acceptance by the connecting trunk, excluding networked applications such as
off-premises extensions or situations where your communications equipment
does not allow a DS1 digital interface. In addition, the 100D module can be
configured to work with T1 or PRI service.
To connect the 100D module to an outside DS1 facility, a channel service unit
(CSU) is used. The CSU regulates the transmission into and out of the 100D
module so that the module matches the transmission of the outside facility.
Both ends of the DS1 facility must be able to communicate. To ensure this, the
following options are set during system programming to match the transmission of
the outside DS1 facility:
■
Type of service (T1 or PRI)
■
Framing format
■
Line coding
■
Channel service unit
■
Line compensation
■
Clock synchronization
■
Signaling mode (for T1 service only)
NOTE:
Most of these settings are dependent upon the central office and the type
of service (T1 or PRI) to which you subscribe.
Type of Service
03
The system supports two types of service for DS1 facilities: T1 and PRI. The 100D
module can be programmed to operate in either type of service. T1 service
transmits and receives voice and analog data, as well as digital data in Release
4.0 communications systems; PRI transmits and receives voice, analog, and
digital data. Any combination of the following AT&T Switched Network (ASN)
Services can be provided through a T1 or a PRI line/trunk:
■
Megacom WATS service for domestic outgoing long-distance voice calls
■
Megacom 800 service for domestic toll-free incoming voice calls
■
Software-Defined Network (SDN) for voice and circuit-switched data calls
■
MultiQuest® for 900 service numbers
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Issue 1
June 1997
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 453
PRI interacts with the ACCUNET Switched Digital Service for 56-kbps, 64-kbps
restricted, and 64-kbps clear circuit-switched data calls. T1 supports ACCUNET
Switched Digital Service or other circuit-switched data service at 56 kbps in
Release 4.0 and later.
T1 and PRI support Shared Access for Switched Services (SASS), which allows
both Megacom and Megacom 800 services to be offered over the same line. This
eliminates the need to have separate incoming and outgoing lines/trunks when
these services are chosen.
In Release 4.2 and later systems, when PRI is selected as the type of service, any
combination of the following MCI and local exchange carrier services are
supported, in addition to the AT&T services supported in prior releases:
■
MCI services include:
— MCI PRISM. For domestic outgoing long-distance and international
voice calls; domestic outgoing 56-kbps restricted as well as 64-kbps
restricted or unrestricted circuit-switched data calls.
— MCI 800. For domestic toll-free incoming voice calls.
— MCI Vnet. For domestic incoming and outgoing voice calls; or for
outgoing 56-kbps restricted as well as 64-kbps restricted or unrestricted
circuit-switched data calls.
— MCI 900. Providing 900 service numbers.
■
The system supports the following local DMS-100 local exchange carrier
services:
— Virtual Private Network (VPN). For calls between the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System and another communications
system (for example, another MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System).
— Maximal OUTWATS and INWATS. For domestic outgoing
long-distance voice calls (not including support for bands or zone); for
domestic toll-free incoming calls.
— Foreign Exchange. For local call rating of calls from the local exchange
in the area served by the foreign exchange.
— Tie Trunk. For private exchange call rating of calls placed on a
dedicated central office facility between the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System and another MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System.
— Integrated Services Access (also called call-by-call service selection).
Allows a B-channel group to carry a variety of local services.
T1 is the factory setting and, when selected for the DS1 facility, allows each of the
24 channels to be programmed to emulate tie, loop-start, ground-start, or DID
lines or Switched 56 in any combination. Therefore, a single 100D module can
take the place of 24 regular outside lines/trunks.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 454
If common-channel signaling (CCS) is selected, 23 channels are available for
emulation, and the twenty-fourth channel carries trunk supervision signals. (See
‘‘Signaling Mode’’ on page 456.)
Framing Format
03
To identify the DS0 channels, the DS1 signal is segmented into blocks of 193 bits
called frames. A frame consists of 24 eight-bit words (one for each channel) plus a
framing bit at the beginning of each frame (24 words x 8 bits = 192 bits). Thus, a
framing bit appears in every one hundred ninety-third bit position of the
1.544-Mbps DS1 signal.
Frames repeat at a rate of 8,000 per second. Each frame repeats DS0 channels 1
through 24 sequentially.
The following two methods of framing can be used by a 100D module, but the
framing method chosen must match the framing at the far end:
■
D4 Framing Format. The system is factory-set for D4 framing. A D4 frame
consists of 24 eight-bit time slots and one framing bit. To perform
synchronization, the receiving equipment uses the framing information to
identify the start of each frame and to identify which frames contain
signaling information. The framing information repeats once every 12
frames; these 12 frames form the D4 superframe.
■
ESF Framing Format. The extended superframe (ESF) format extends
the 12-frame D4 superframe to a 24-frame superframe. The 24 framing bits
include a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for the entire ESF and a facility
data link for maintenance. The ESF can detect more errors than D4
framing can.
Line Coding
03
The DS1 signal consists of a continuous stream of ones and zeros, encoded into
bipolar pulses for transmission. Only the ones create a pulse; the zeros represent
the absence of a pulse. Pulses alternate between positive and negative. This type
of line coding is called bipolar or alternate mark inversion (AMI). The line-coding
formats guarantee that the ones-density requirement is met to achieve clock
recovery.
To meet the ones-density requirement, either zero code suppression (ZCS) or
bipolar 8 zero substitution (B8ZS) line coding can be chosen, but the selected line
coding must match the line coding at the far end.
ZCS line coding monitors each DS0 channel and prevents strings of eight or more
zeros. Upon detecting eight consecutive zeros in a channel octet, ZCS line coding
forcibly changes the seventh zero (the second least significant bit) to a one. The
factory-set line coding is ZCS.
B8ZS line coding matches the ones-density requirement by using a special
sequence with a bipolar violation in bit positions 4 and 7. Normally, for bipolar
transmission, ones are encoded alternately as a positive then negative, or
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 455
negative then positive, pulse. If two positive or two negative pulses are received in
succession, a bipolar violation occurs. Bipolar violations are normally caused by
noise hits to the signal; however B,8ZS uses a specific binary sequence with
bipolar violations as a code for an all-zero channel octet.
B8ZS line coding is preferred over ZCS because it provides no possibility of
corrupting data transmissions.
B8ZS violations are passed by the ACCULINK™ 3150 and 3160/3164, and
ESF T1 channel service units (CSUs) but not by other CSUs.
Channel Service Unit
03
The channel service unit (CSU) is the interface between the 100D module and the
DS1 facility provided by the telephone company. This facility contains 24 channels
on one 4-pair wire.
The CSU is a hardware component needed when two endpoints are located in
different buildings or when the distance between the two endpoints makes office
or line repeaters necessary. The CSU is located on the customer’s premises and
is used to connect the system to DS1 network facilities. The CSU has the
following functions:
■
It terminates an outside DS1 facility on the 100D module.
■
It ensures that the signals entering the public network comply with the
requirements of the DS1 facility as specified by the FCC.
■
It includes maintenance, diagnostic, and testing capabilities.
There are several channel service units: ACCULINK 3150 and 3160/3164 ESF T1
CSUs, ESF T1 CSU (no longer available but still supported), and 551 T1 L1 CSU
(no longer available but still supported). The ACCULINK 3150 or 3160/3164
CSUs are recommended for this system because they allow maintenance without
interrupting service and provide diagnostic and testing capabilities as well as
B8ZS line coding. They can be programmed remotely or on-site, using menus.
The lower-cost 551 T1 L1 CSU does not provide the B8ZS line coding required for
64-kbps data (clear channel signaling support) and for maintenance features, nor
does it provide diagnostic and testing capabilities for the DS1 facility.
Line Compensation
03
Line compensation adjusts for the amount of cable loss, in decibels (dBs), based
on the length of cable between the 100D module and the CSU or other far-end
connection point. The factory setting is a value of 1, which allows a maximum loss
of 0.6 dB. The possible settings are shown in Table 31.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Table 31.
Setting
1
2
3
4
5
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 456
Line Compensation Settings
dB Loss
0.6
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.0
Cable Length (22-Gauge Wire)
0–133 feet (0–40.5 meters)
133–266 feet (40.5–81 meters)
266–399 feet (80–121.5 meters)
399–533 feet (121.5–162 meters)
533–655 feet (162–199.5 meters)
Signaling Mode
13
Signaling is the process of communicating channel-state information, such as
dialing, from endpoint to endpoint. Two types of signaling can be used in T1
transmission: robbed-bit signaling (RBS) and common-channel signaling (CCS).
Choosing a signaling mode is important only for T1 service; PRI always uses CCS
(23 B-channels and 1 D-channel). The signaling types are as follows:
■
Robbed-Bit Signaling. Robbed-bit signaling (RBS) replaces the least
significant bit in every sixth frame of each DS0 channel with signaling
information. RBS is also called in-band signaling because signaling
information is embedded in the same channel that carries the user’s voice
or data in a call. Robbed Bit Signaling must be used if T1 Switched 56
service is to be used on the T1 connection.
Robbed-bit signaling is appropriate for voice and voice-grade data, and
digital data on channels programmed for T1 Switched 56 service.
■
Common-Channel Signaling. Common-channel signaling (CCS) is an
out-of-band signaling format that places the signaling bits for channels 1
through 23 into the 8-bit word of the twenty-fourth channel. This restricts
DS1 from using the twenty-fourth channel for voice or data transmissions.
D4 framing does not preclude the use of CCS, but CCS is not compatible
with D4 channel banks because the D4 channel banks recognize only
RBS. CCS is used when PRI service is desired on the DS1 facility.
ESF framing should be used because of its improved maintenance, diagnostic,
and testing capabilities. If the transmission between two systems is voice-only,
RBS should be used for all 24 communications paths. For voice transmissions,
both ZCS and B8ZS line coding can be used to satisfy the ones-density
requirement: the preferred line-coding format is B8ZS, which is needed for
64-kbps digital data.
The framing and signaling formats depend on the network and interconnection
devices (CSUs) used. For example, the 551 T1 L1 CSU only supports ZCS.
NOTE:
Through PRI, digital data using up to 64 kbps is possible only when using a
DS1 facility; connections of up to 64 kbps for each channel are also
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 457
possible on BRI connections in Release 4.0 and later systems. Also, ESF
framing mode, CCS signaling, and B8ZS line coding are required. An
ACCULINK 3150/3160/3164 or ESF-T1 CSU must be used for DS1
connections within a building.
PRI Programming Options
13
The following options should be programmed for PRI facilities connected to a
100D (DS1) module.
PRI Telephone Number
13
The PRI telephone number is a string of up to 12 digits (any combination of digits
0–9) assigned to each PRI line. This string is matched to the Called Party Number
sent by the network to indicate the number dialed by the outside caller. The
system uses this number to send the call to the correct personal line button.
Network Services Supported
13
This option specifies the type of network service provided by each B-channel
group. The choices are as follows:
■
AT&T toll services:
— Megacom WATS
— Megacom 800
— MultiQuest
— ACCUNET Switched Digital Service (SDS)
— Software-Defined Network (SDN)
■
Local services:
— OUTWATS
— INWATS
— 56/64 Digital Data
— Virtual Private Network
■
In Release 4.2 and later systems, these MCI services are also available:
— MCI PRISM
— MCI Vnet
— MCI 800
— MCI 900
■
In Release 4.2 and later systems, these local exchange carrier services are
also available:
— DMS Private
— DMS INWATS
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 458
— DMS OUTWATS
— DMS FX
— DMS Tie Trunk
Copy Telephone Number to Send
13
This option specifies whether or not the telephone number to send to the network
for outgoing calls made on PRI lines assigned to a B-channel group is copied from
the PRI telephone number assigned to that PRI line. Select the Copy Telephone
Number to Send option when the telephone number sent to the network should
match the number received from the network, indicating the number dialed by the
outside caller. Select the Do Not Copy Telephone Number option either when a
telephone number to send is assigned to each PRI line in the B-channel group or
when no telephone number is to be sent to the network.
Telephone Number to Send
13
This option assigns the telephone number to send to the network when outgoing
calls are made on PRI lines. If the person being called subscribes to a PRI caller
identification service, the number indicates who is calling.
Test Telephone Number
13
This option assigns a test line telephone number for each 100D (DS1) module
installed in the control unit that provides ISDN PRI service.
Timers and Counters
13
This option sets the timer and counter thresholds. The factory settings for
thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed (see “At a Glance” on
page 441 for factory settings and valid ranges). When no response is received
from the network before the duration of the timer setting, the communications
system takes appropriate corrective action.
The timers and counters are as follows:
■
T200 Timer. Times the delay in link layer acknowledgment of a message
sent from the communications system to the network over a D-channel.
■
T203 Timer. Times the period of time between each exchange of
messages between the system and the network on the D-channel.
■
N200 Counter. Counts the number of times the communications system
has transmitted a message on a D-channel because no link layer
acknowledgment is received from the network.
■
N201 Counter. Counts the maximum number of layer 3 octets the system
can send or receive in a single D-channel message.
■
K Counter. Counts the number of layer 3 unacknowledged messages sent
from the communications system to the network on a D-channel.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 459
■
T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a setup message to initiate an outgoing
call.
■
T305 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a disconnect message to clear a call.
■
T308 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a release message to clear a call.
■
T309 Timer. Times the duration of a D-channel data link failure (a loss of
signaling for the entire PRI connection).
■
T310 Timer. Times the network delay following the receipt of a
call-proceeding message on an outgoing call.
■
T313 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a connect message that indicates the
completion of an incoming call.
■
T316 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a restart message to clear a B-channel.
!
CAUTION:
After initial installation, these timers rarely if ever should be changed.
13
Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI)
This option assigns the link layer address of devices connected to each
D-channel. Usually, only one is connected; the network assumes that its TEI is 0.
PRI Call Processing
13
Figure 37 shows the order of call processing for both incoming and outgoing calls;
the section of the figure within the box applies specifically to call processing on a
system with PRI. An explanation of incoming and outgoing call processing follows.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 460
Incoming
call
Outgoing
call
(SA)
(SA)
(DPT)
ARS
(SA)
(PL)
(PL)
POOL
DPR
NS
SSS
CBC
B-Channel Group
Foreign Exchange
ARS=Automatic Route Selection
CBC=Call-by-Call Services Table
PL=Personal Line
Figure 37.
DPR=Dial Plan Routing Table
DPT=Direct Pool Termination
PRI Call Processing
NS=Network Selection Table
SA=System Access
SSS=Special Services Selection Table
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 461
Incoming Calls
13
In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, incoming calls are routed by line appearance.
Beginning with Release 2.0, incoming calls also can apply routing by dial plan, a
routing system for incoming calls programmed by the Dial-Plan Routing Table
(see Table 32).
Routing by Dial Plan (Hybrid/PBX Only). Routing by dial plan is similar in
concept to Direct Inward Dial (DID). It provides the ability to direct a call
automatically to the proper destination for improved call distribution and call
handling. Unlike a DID line, a PRI line (or T1 line in Release 4.0 or later)
programmed for routing by dial plan can accommodate outgoing calls as well as
incoming calls. As with DID operation, this feature is available only in Hybrid/PBX
mode.
PRI Routing by Dial Plan. Routing by dial plan also allows multiple calls to a
directory number. Concurrent incoming calls with the same Called Party Number
can be delivered to a destination simultaneously.
The Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) is a service attribute of the
Megacom 800 service. Based upon customer-selected parameters, such as area
code, state, or time of call, it provides distinct Called Party Numbers for incoming
800 and 900 calls. In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, DNIS has the restriction of
one active call per Called Party Number for each B-channel group. The PRI
telephone number, which is matched against the Called Party Number(CdPN), is
used for routing a call to a specific line that normally terminates on a personal line
button. In Release 2.0 and later systems, the restriction of one active call for each
CdPN does not apply.
For each B-channel group, the system can be programmed for either routing by
line appearance or routing by dial plan. With routing by dial plan, the Dial-Plan
Routing Table must be programmed to contain a series of patterns—the number
of digits in the Called Party Number (CdPN), network services on which to match,
and a number of digits to add or delete for each match—in order to route the call
to the proper destination.
If a B-channel group is programmed for routing by dial plan, all calls into that
B-channel group are routed in a DID-like manner and terminate on an SA button,
on a single-line telephone, into a calling group queue, or at a Queued Call
Console (QCC). When an incoming call arrives, its network service type and
Called Party Number are compared to entries in the Dial-Plan Routing Table. If no
match is found, the call is routed to the programmed backup position for
unassigned DID calls (normally the primary system operator). If a match is found,
the Called Party Number is manipulated according to the Dial-Plan Routing Table
before matching it against the inside dial plan to identify a destination to which the
call is delivered. If the manipulated Called Party Number does not match an inside
extension, it is treated as an unassigned DID call.
If a fast busy tone is programmed as the routing destination for unassigned Direct
Inward Dial calls, the call is rejected. This typically causes the network to return an
intercept tone instead of a fast busy tone. If the number matches a destination
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 462
that DID calls are not permitted to reach (for example, pool access codes, group
page codes, line access codes, or the ARS access code), the call is routed to the
programmed destination for unassigned DID calls (unless the backup is a fast
busy tone).
Table 32 is a sample Dial-Plan Routing Table. Note that in the sample table all
incoming calls through the Megacom 800 service are delivered to an extension
whose dial-plan number is 1234. Entry 15 would be skipped because No Service
is specified.
Table 32.
Sample PRI Dial-Plan Routing Table
Entry
Service
# of digits in CdPN
Example #
Pattern
Digit deletion
Digit addition
0
SDN
7
555-1234
555
3
[none]
1
SDN
10
908-555-1234
[none]
6
[none]
2
3
MEG800
10
[none]
10
1234
...
15
No Service
[not specified]
[none]
14
0
When routing by dial plan is used for an incoming call, if the programmed service,
number of digits in the Called Party Number (CdPN) and patterns match those
associated with the incoming call, the appropriate digit deletion and addition are
performed. The process is as follows:
1.
The programmed service is compared with the B-channel service, if
supplied. A match is found if the two services are equivalent or if the
programmed service in the Dial-Plan Routing Table is All Services. If a
match is found, the system continues to search the entry. If no match is
found or if No Service is specified, the system skips the entry and proceeds
to the next one. If no service is supplied, the call is matched to No Service
table entries.
2.
The programmed number of digits is compared with the number of digits in
the actual Called Party Number. A match is found if the two numbers are
equivalent or if the programmed number of digits is 0. If a match is found,
the system continues to search the entry. If no match is found, the system
skips the entry and proceeds to the next one. If the programmed number of
digits is 0, any number of digits in the Called Party Number is acceptable.
3.
The programmed pattern is compared with the digits associated with the
incoming call. If the pattern matches, the entry is tagged as a possible best
match for the incoming call. It is possible that more than one entry can
match the incoming call; the entry chosen is the one that matches on the
greatest number of digits in the pattern. For example, if 555-2000 is the
Called Party Number and the two patterns that match are 555 and 5552,
the entry associated with 5552 is chosen as the best match. If the pattern is
not programmed, it is considered a match with the number of digits in the
pattern equal to 0.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
4.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 463
After the table is scanned and the best match is found, the programmed
digit manipulation (addition and/or deletion) associated with the entry is
performed. If the digit manipulation results in an invalid dial-plan extension,
the call is routed to the destination for unassigned DID calls.
Characteristics and valid entries for the Dial-Plan Routing Table are as follows:
■
The factory-set table value for service is Empty (not specified). Entries that
remain empty are skipped when the system searches for a match.
■
There can be up to 16 entries (0 through 15).
■
The service can be specified as any one of the supported services, Other,
No Service, or All Services.
■
If the service is programmed as All Services, it matches any input and thus
acts as a wild card. If the B-channel receiving the incoming call is also
programmed for call-by-call service selection, the system retrieves the
service type as supplied by the FX because an incoming call could be
arriving on any of the services.
■
An entry programmed for No Service matches calls in which no service is
supplied by the foreign exchange or B-channel group.
■
Each pattern can have 0 through 8 digits. The default is blank.
■
The number of digits can be 0 through 14. A value of 0 in the table
represents “any number” and thus acts as a wild card. The default number
of digits is 0.
■
The maximum number of digits to delete is 14.
■
The digits to add include the digits 0 through 9. The length of this item is 0
through 4 digits. The default is blank.
■
The digit count and pattern are optional. When not programmed, they are
considered wild cards that match any input.
Display Operation. The telephone display provides call-related information about
incoming PRI calls delivered over the B-channel, if available. Otherwise, it
displays the line label and the digits dialed.
Beginning with Release 3.0, hyphens are inserted between the digits on incoming
calls (for example, 555-1234 for a 7-digit display and 123-555-1234 for a 10-digit
display). Any other number of digits appears without hyphens.
A brief description of the display support provided in Release 2.0 and later follows
(refer to ‘‘Display’’ on page 225 for additional details).
NOTE:
PRI display support for Release 2.0 and later applies to MLX display
telephones only. There is no PRI display support for analog multiline
telephones.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 464
■
All Incoming PRI Calls. When the calling party information is available
from the network, the Calling Party Number (CPN) appears on the user’s
display. Pressing the More button shows the Called Party Number on the
second screen of the display. If the Called Party Number is more than 15
characters in length, the digits at the end are dropped.
■
Group Calling. The MLX display of a calling group member shows the
original Called Party Number (before digit analysis). The same display
applies to PRI calls routed by dial plan to a group calling member
extension. Pressing the More button shows the Calling Party Number on
the second screen of the display.
■
Transfer without Consultation. In Release 2.0 and later systems,
pressing the More button on an MLX display telephone that is a transfer
destination shows the original Called Party Number (before digit analysis).
The same display applies to transferred PRI calls routed by dial plan.
Outgoing Calls
23
Call-by-call service selection is a feature for outgoing calls in Release 2.0 and
later. It allows a group of B-channels to carry a variety of supported PRI services
programmed in the Call-by-Call Services Table (see Table 35 on page 466). The
service selected is based on the digits dialed and the bearer capability (voice,
data, or both) of the originating party. In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, an
outgoing call is carried on a static B-channel, that is, a B-channel dedicated to one
specific service.
Outgoing calls can be made by accessing a personal line, a Pool, or Automatic
Route Selection (ARS). When a call is placed, the system determines whether the
line accessed is a PRI facility. If so, the system performs digit analysis with the
entries in the Network Selection Table (see Table 33) and the Special Services
Selection Table. The Network Selection table lists the prefixes for dial access to
alternative long-distance carriers (for example, 10 xxx). The Special Services
Selection Table (see Table 34) lists prefixes that represent special services, such
as operator service or international dialing (0 or 00).
In addition, if the B-channel group for an outgoing call is programmed for
call-by-call service selection, the system performs digit analysis, with the entries
in the Call-by-Call Services Table (see Table 35). The entries in this table indicate
the service and tell the system how to delete digits and successfully route an
outgoing call.
A sample of each of these tables follows. Refer to System Programming for
information about programming these tables.
Network Selection Table. The Network Selection table lists the prefixes for dial
access to alternative long-distance carriers (for example, 10xxx). If multiple
entries in the Network Selection Table match the dialed number, the one with the
most non-wild card digits prevails. If the first digits of a dialed number (on PRI)
match any entry in this table, the entry pattern is deleted from the dialed number
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 465
and the number represented by the asterisks is used as the network selected.
Characteristics and valid entries for the Network Selection table are as follows:
■
There can be up to 4 entries (0 through 3).
■
The pattern can be up to eight digits.
■
An asterisk (*) is a wild card.
■
The pattern cannot begin with an asterisk but must contain at least one.
■
All asterisks must be at the end of the pattern and contiguous.
Table 33.
Sample Network Selection Table
Entry Number
0
1
Pattern
101****
10***
2
3
The Special Services Selection Table (see Table 34), lists prefixes that represent
special services, such as operator service or international dialing (0 or 00). If
multiple entries in the Special Services Selection Table match the dialed number,
the one with the most digits prevails. Characteristics and valid entries are as
follows:
Table 34.
■
There can be up to eight entries (0 through 7).
■
The pattern can be up to four digits (no wild cards).
■
The choices for Operator are Operator (OP), Presubscribed Common
Carrier Operator (OP/P), and None.
■
The choices for Type of Number are National (N) and International (I).
■
The number of digits to delete can be from 0 to 4.
Sample Special Services Selection Table
Entry Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
Pattern
011
010
01
00
0
1
Operator
None
OP
OP
OP/P
OP
Type of Number I
I
I
N
Digit Deletion
3
2
2
3
6
7
None
None
None
N
N
N
N
1
1
0
0
OP = Operator
OP/P = Presubscribed Common Carrier Operator
Call-by-Call Services Table. When a call is placed on a call-by-call B-channel
group, the dialed number and type of call must match one of the entries, the
specified number of digits is deleted, and the specified service is selected. Similar
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Page 466
patterns for the same type of call are permissible in this table; in such a situation,
the feature selects the entry with the longest matching pattern. For example,
based on the entries in Table 35 and a voice call with a Called Party Number
(CdPN) of 908957, Entry 1 is selected, not Entry 2. The last entry is used if the
patterns are of equal matching digits.
For each entry, the following can be specified: a set of patterns, the type of call,
the service to use, and the number of digits to delete.
Characteristics and valid entries for the Call-by-Call Services Table are as follows:
Table 35.
■
By default, the patterns are blank, Call Type is Both, Service is blank, and
Delete Digits is 0.
■
There can be up to 10 entries (0 through 9).
■
Each entry can contain up to 10 patterns of up to 8 digits each.
■
The number of digits to delete can be from 0 through 8 (default is 0).
■
The user can use an entry as a default by selecting a Call Type and
Service and not specifying any patterns.
■
If Service is null (not selected), the entry is ignored. Null and No Service
are not equivalent.
Sample Call-by-Call Services Table
Entry Number
0
700
1
2
908957
908
3
4
...
9
908949
Patterns
908615
303843
Call Type
DATA
Service
Delete Digits
BOTH
VOICE
VOICE
DATA
ACCUNET SDN
MEG WATS
MEG WATS
SDN
0
0
0
0
0
BOTH
BOTH
0
0
Call-by-call service selection closely resembles ARS in reducing costs and
maximizing the benefits derived from limited resources. While ARS selects the
most cost-effective route, call-by-call service selection selects the optimal service
for that particular call. Call-by-call service selection is integrated with ARS by
including the bearer capability of the calling party in its routing decisions. ARS
serves as the main gateway for accessing the call-by-call B-channel group. The
basic calling process for call-by-call service selection with ARS is as follows:
1.
A user dials ARS.
2.
ARS selects the route and, in this case, the route points to a call-by-call
B-channel group.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
Feature Reference 555-650-110
Features
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 467
3.
ARS performs digit deletion/addition operations for the route and, in so
doing, may indirectly specify the best service for the call.
4.
With these ARS outgoing digits, the call-by-call B-channel group selects
the service, possibly based on digits added by ARS, and performs digit
deletion as required.
5.
A call setup message is sent to the network/central-office switch.
Restriction Code Handling for FTS2000 Network. FTS2000 network users can
have restriction codes applied to their extensions. A person who attempts to place
a call that exceeds the set restriction level must first enter a restriction code. If no
code is entered, the FTS2000 network prompts the user to enter the code from
the telephone dialpad.
Prior to Release 2.0, the restriction codes are input in-band (using touch-tones). In
Release 2.0 and later systems, the system allows a restriction code to be entered
with the Account Code Entry feature. This is especially useful for data calls
because there is no in-band signaling to interfere with the data, since the
restriction code is sent out of band in the setup message.
Station Identification-Automatic Number Identification (SID-ANI) as Calling
Party Number. I